At buh pe
faay lite
A JACOBITE EXILE
tar coat tact mt CE COT Namen eet
‘LL YOUR FATILER?� CICELY ASKED EAGI RLY.
A JACOBIVE EXIT:
BEING
THE ADVENTURES OF A YOUNG ENGLISHMAN
IN THE SERVICE OF CHARLES XII.
OF SWEDEN
BY
GA. HENIY
Author of “ Beric the Briton,†‘The Dash for Khartoum,†‘‘ The Lion of
St. Mark,†‘‘ With Clive in India,†&c.
WITH EIGHT ILLUSTRATIONS BY PAUL HARDY
AND MAP OF CENTRAL EUROPE
NEW YORK
CHARLES SCRIBNER’S SONS
1893
COPYRIGHT, 1893, BY
CHARLES SCRIBNER’S SONS.
PRE AGE
My pear Laps,
Had I attempted to write you an account of the
whole of the adventurous career of Charles XII. of Sweden,
it would, in itself, have filled a bulky volume to the exclu-
sion of all other matter, and a youth who fought at Narva
would have been a middle-aged man at the death of that
warlike monarch before the walls of Frederickshall. I
have therefore been obliged to confine myself to the first
three years of his reign, in which he crushed the army of
Russia at Narva, and laid the then powerful republic of
Poland prostrate at his feet. In this way. only could I
obtain space for the private adventures and doings of
Charlie Carstairs, the hero of the story. The details of
the wars of Charles XII. were taken from the military
history written at his command by his chamberlain, Adler-
feld, from a similar narrative by a Scotch gentleman in
his service, and from Voltaire’s history. The latter is
responsible for the statement that the trade of Poland was
almost entirely in the hands of Scotch, French, and Jewish
merchants, the Poles themselves being sharply divided into
the two categories of nobles and peasants.
Yours sincerely,
G. A. HENTY.
CHAP.
II.
Ii.
IV.
VI.
VI.
VIII.
IX.
XxX.
XI.
XII.
XIII.
XIV.
XV.
XVI.
XVII.
XVIII.
CONTENTS
A Spy IN THE HousEHOLpD.
DENOUNCED .
A Rescue
In SWEDEN .
NARVA .
A PRISONER .
EXCHANGED .
THE PASSAGE OF THE DWINA
In Warsaw.
In Evin PLicur .
WitH BRIGANDS .
TREED BY WOLVES
A REscureD PARTY
THE BATTLE AT CLIssow
AN OLD ACQUAINTANCE
In ENGLAND AGAIN
Tue NortH Coacu
A. CONFESSION
PAGE
ILLUSTRATIONS
PAGE
“You WON’T TELL YouR FaTurr?†CICELY ASKED EAGERLY
frontispiece 23
CHARLIE AND HIS FRIENDS RESCUE SIR MARMADUKE ; = O2
STORMING THE INTRENCHMENTS AT NARVA 5 . ; OG
“Tr 1s AS MUCH AS I CAN DO TO KEEP MY SADDLE†: Seas
CHARLIE ENCOUNTERS BEN SOLOMAN IN THE Woop : » 195
CHARLIE AND THE TRAVELLERS ARE SURROUNDED BY WOLVES 239
“THE KING OF SWEDEN SPEAKS VERY ILIGHLY OF you BOTH†319
CHARLIE COMES HOME AGAIN. . ¢ : - : : . 347
‘MAP OF CENTRAL EUROPE . : t 5 z . to face p. 10
CENTRAL
EUROPE.
IN ILLUSTRATION OF
“Mh JACOBITE EXILEâ€
GEOGRAPHICAL MILES.
50 100
ENGLISH MILES.
50 100
30
A JACOBITE EXILE
CHAPTER I
A SPY IN THE HOUSEHOLD
SY2N the borders of Lancashire and Westmoreland,
two centuries since, stood Lynnwood, a pictu-
resque mansion still retaining something of the
character of a fortified house. It was ever a
matter of regret to its owner, Sir Marmaduke Carstairs, that
his grandfather had so modified its construction by levelling
one side of the quadrangle, and inserting large mullion win-
dows in that portion inhabited by the family, that it was in
no condition to stand a siege in the time of the Civil War.
Sir Marmaduke was at that time only a child, but he still
remembered how the Roundhead soldiers had lorded it
there when his father was away fighting with the army of
the king; how they had seated themselves at the board, and
had ordered his mother about as if she had been a scullion,
jeering her with cruel words as to what would have been the
fate of her husband if they had caught him there, until,
though but eight years old, he had smitten one of the
troopers as he sat, with all his force. What had happened
after that he did not recollect, for it was not until a week
after the Roundheads had ridden away that he found him-
1
12 A JACOBITE EXILE
self in his bed, with his mother sitting beside him and his
head bandaged with cloths dipped in water. He always
maintained that had the house been fortified it could have
held out until help arrived, although in later years his father
assured him that it was well it was not in a position to offer
a defence.
“We were away down south, Marmaduke, and the Round-
heads were masters of this district at the time; they would
have battered the place around your mother’s ears, and,
likely as not, have burnt it to the ground. As it was, I
came back here to find it whole and safe, except that the
crop-eared scoundrels had, from pure wantonness, destroyed
the pictures and hacked most of the furniture to pieces.
I took no part in the later risings, seeing that they were
hopeless, and therefore preserved my property when many
others were ruined. No, Marmaduke, it is just as well that
the house was not fortified. I believe in fighting when there
is some chance, even a slight one, of success, but I regard
it as an act of folly to throw away a life when no good can
come of it.â€
Still, Sir Marmaduke never ceased to regret that Lynn-
wood was not one of the houses that had been defended to
the last against the enemies of the king. At the Restora-
tion he went for the first time in his life to London to pay
his respects to Charles I]. He was well received, and
although he tired in a very short time of the gaieties of the
court, he returned to Lynnwood with his feelings of loyalty
to the Stuarts as strong as ever. He rejoiced heartily when
the news came of the defeat of Monmouth at Sedgemoor,
and was filled with rage and indignation when James weakly
fled and left his throne to be occupied by Dutch William.
From that time he became a strong Jacobite, and emptied
his glass nightly “to the king over the water.†In the
north the Jacobites were numerous, and at their gatherings
treason was freely talked, while arms were prepared and
A SPY IN THE HOUSEHOLD 13
hidden away for the time when the lawful king should return
to claim his own. Sir Marmaduke was deeply concerned
in the plot of 1696, when preparations had been made fora
great Jacobite rising throughout the country. Nothing came
of it, for the Duke of Berwick, who was to have led it, failed
in getting the two parties who were concerned to come to
an agreement. ‘The Jacobites were ready to rise directly a
French army landed. ‘The French king, on the other hand,
would not send an army until the Jacobites had risen, and
the matter therefore fell through, to Sir Marmaduke’s indig-
nation and grief. But he had no words strong enough to
express his anger and disgust when he found, that side by
side with the general scheme for a rising, a plot had been
formed by Sir George Barclay, a Scottish refugee, to assas-
sinate the king on his return from hunting in Richmond
Forest.
“Tt is enough to drive one to become a Whig,†he ex-
claimed. “I am ready to fight Dutch William, for he
occupies the place of my rightful sovereign, but I have no
private feud with him, and if I had I would run any man
through who ventured to propose to me a plot to assassinate
him. Such scoundrels as Barclay would bring disgrace on
the best cause in the world. Had I heard as much as a
whisper of it I would have buckled on my sword and rid-
den to London to warn the Dutchman of his danger. How-
ever, as it seems that Barclay had but some forty men with
him, most of them foreign desperadoes, the Dutchman
must see that English gentlemen, however ready to fight
against him fairly, would have no hand in so dastardly a
plot as this.
“Look you, Charlie, keep always in mind that you bear
the name of our martyred king, and be ready ever to draw
your sword in the cause of the Stuarts, whether it be ten
years hence or forty that their banner is hoisted again; but
keep yourself free from all plots except those that deal with
14 A JACOBITE EXILE
fair and open warfare. Have no faith whatever in politi-
cians, who are ever ready to use the country gentry as an
instrument for gaining their own ends. Deal with your
neighbours, but mistrust strangers from whomsoever they
may say they come.â€
Which advice Charlie, at that time thirteen years old,
gravely promised to follow. He had naturally inherited
his father’s sentiments, and believed the Jacobite cause .
to beasacred one. He had fought and vanquished Alured
Dormay, his second cousin, and two years his senior, for
speaking of King James’ son as the Pretender, and was
ready at any time to do battle with any boy of his own
age in the same cause. Alured’s father, John Dormay, had
ridden over to Lynnwood to complain of the violence of
which his son had been the victim, but he obtained no
redress from Sir Marmaduke.
“The boy is a chip of the old block, cousin, and he did
right. I myself struck a blow at the king’s enemies when
{ was but eight years old, and got my skull well-nigh
cracked for my pains. It is well that the lads were not
four years older, for then instead of taking to fisticuffs
their swords would have been out, and, as my boy has for
the last four years been exercised daily in the use of his
weapon, it might happen that instead of Alured coming
home with a black eye, and, as you say, a missing tooth, he
might have been carried home with a sword-thrust through
his body. It was, to my mind, entirely the fault of your
son. I should have blamed Charlie had he called the king
at Westminster Dutch William, for although each man has
a right to his own opinions, he has no right to offend those
of others—besides, at present it is as well to keep a quiet
tongue as to a matter that words cannot set right. In the
same way your son had no right to offend others by calling
James Stuart the Pretender.
“Certainly, of the twelve boys who go over to learn what
A SPY IN THE HOUSEHOLD 15
the Rector of Apsley can teach them, more than half are
sons of gentlemen whose opinions are similar to my own.
It would be much better, John Dormay, if, instead of com-
plaining of my boy, you were to look somewhat to your
own. I marked, the last time he came over here, that he
was growing loutish in his manners, and that he bore him-
self with less respect to his elders than is seemly in a lad
of that age. He needs curbing, and would carry himself
all the better if, like Charlie, he had an hour a day at
sword exercise. I speak for the boy’s good. It is true
that you yourself, being a bitter Whig, mix but little with
your neighbours, who are for the most part the other way
of thinking; but this may not go on for ever, and you
would, I suppose, like Alured when he grows up to mix
with others of his rank in the county, and it would be well,
therefore, that he should have the accomplishments and
manners of young men of his own age.â€
John Dormay did not reply hastily—it was his policy to
keep on good terms with his wife’s cousin, for the knight
was a man of far higher consideration in the county than
himself. His smile, however, was not a pleasant one as he
rose and said, “My mission has hardly terminated as I
expected, Sir Marmaduke. I came to complain, and I go
away advised somewhat sharply.â€
“Tut, tut, man!†the knight said. “I speak only for
the lad’s good, and I am sure that you cannot but feel the
truth of what I have said. What does Alured want. to
make enemies for? It may be that it was only my son who
openly resented his ill-timed remarks, but you may be sure
that others were equally displeased, and maybe their resent-
ment will last much longer than that which was quenched
in a fair stand-up fight. Certainly, there need be no mal-
ice between the boys. Alured’s defeat may even do him
good, for he cannot but feel that it is somewhat disgraceful
to be beaten by one nearly a head shorter than he,â€
16 A JACOBITE EXILE
“There is no doubt something in what you say, Sir Mar-
maduke,†John Dormay said blandly, “and I will make it
my business that, should the boys meet again as antago-
nists, Alured shall be able to give a better account of him-
self.â€â€
“Fre is a disagreeable fellow,†Sir Marmaduke said to
himself, as he watched John Dormay ride slowly away
through the park, “and if it were not that he is husband to
my cousin Celia, I would have nought to do with him.
She is my only kinswoman, and were aught to happen to
Charlie, that lout, her son, would be the heir of Lynnwood.
I should never rest quiet in my grave were a Whig master
here. I would much rather that he had spoken wrathfully
when I straightly gave him my opinion of the boy, who is
growing up an ill-conditioned cub; it would have been
more honest. I hate to see a man smile when I know that
he would fain swear. I like my cousin Celia, and I like
her little daughter Ciceley, who takes after her, and not
after John Dormay; but I would that the fellow lived on
the other side of England. He is out of his place here,
and though men do not speak against him in my presence,
knowing that he is a sort of kinsman, I have never heard
one say a good word for him.
“It is not only because he is a Whig; there are other
Whig gentry in the neighbourhood against whom I bear no
ill-will, and can meet at a social board in friendship. It
would be hard if politics were to stand between neighbours.
It is Dormay’s manner that is against him. If he were any
one but Celia’s husband, I would say that he is a smooth-
faced knave, though I altogether lack proof of my words,
beyond that he has added half a dozen farms to his estate,
and in each case there were complaints that, although there
was nothing contrary to the law, it was by sharp practice
that he obtained possession, lending money freely in order
to build houses and fences and drains, and then directly a
pinch came demanding the return of his advance,
A SPY IN THE HOUSEHOLD 17
“Such ways may pass in a London usurer, but they don’t
do for us country-folk; and each farm that he has taken
has closed the doors of a dozen good houses to John Dor-
may. I fear that Celia has a bad time with him, though
she is not one to complain. I let Charlie go over to Rock-
ley much oftener than I otherwise should do for her sake
and Ciceley’s, though I would rather a hundred times that
they should come here. Not that the visits are pleasant
when they do come, for I can see that Celia is always in fear
lest I should ask her questions about her life at home;
which is the last thing that I should think of doing, for no
good ever comes of interference between man and wife,
and whatever I learned I could not quarrel with John Dor-
may without being altogether separated from Celia and the
girl.
“Tam heartily glad that Charlie has given Alured a sound
thrashing. ‘The boy is too modest; he only said a few
words last evening about the affair, and I thought that only
a blow or two had been exchanged. It was as much as I
could do not to rub my hands and chuckle when his father
told me all about it. However, I must speak gravely to
Charlie. If he takes it up every time a Whig speaks scorn-
fully of the king he will be always in hot water, and were
he a few years older would become a marked man. We
have got to bide our time, and except among friends it is
best to keep a quiet tongue until that time comes.â€
To Sir Marmaduke’s disappointment three more years
went on without the position changing in any way. Mes-
sengers went and came between France and the [nglish
Jacobites, but no movement was made. ‘The failure of the
assassination plot had strengthened William’s hold on the
country, for Englishmen love fair play and hate assassina-
tion, so that many who had hitherto been opponenis of
William of Orange now ranged themselves on his side,
declaring they could no longer support a cause that used
18 A JACOBITE EXILE
assassination as one of its weapons. More zealous Jaco-
bites, although they regretted the assassination plot, and
were as vehement of their denunciations of its authors as
were the Whigs, remained staunch in their fidelity to “the
king over the water,†maintaining stoutly that his majesty
knew nothing whatever of this foul plot, and that his cause
was in no way affected by the misconduct of a few men who
happened to be among its adherents.
At Lynnwood things went on as usual. Charlie con-
tinued his studies in a somewhat desultory way, having but
small affection for books, kept up his fencing lesson dili-
gently and learned to dance, quarrelled occasionally with
his cousin Alured, spent a good deal of his time on horse-
back, and rode over not unfrequently to Rockley, choosing,
as far as possible, the days and hours when he knew that
Alured and his father were likely to be away. He went
over partly for his own pleasure, but more in compliance
with his father’s wishes.
“My cousin seldom comes over herself,â€â€™ the latter said.
“T know right well that it is from no slackness of her own,
but that her husband likes not her intimacy here; it is well
then that you should go over and see them, for it is only
when you bring her that I see Ciceley. I would she were
your sister, lad, for she is a bright little maid, and would
make the old house lively.â€
‘Vherefore, once a week or so, Charlie rode over early
too Rockley, which was some five miles distant, and brought
back Ciceley, cantering on her pony by his side, escorting
her home again before nightfall. Ciceley’s mother won-
dered sometimes that her husband, who in most matters
set his will in opposition to hers, never offered any objec-
tion to the girl’s visits to Lynnwood. She thought that
perhaps he was pleased that there should be an intimacy
between some member at least of his family and Sir Marma-
duke’s. ‘There were so few houses at which he or his
A SPY IN THE HOUSEHOLD 19
were welcome, it was pleasant to him to be able to refer
to the close friendship of his daughter with their cousins
at Lynnwood. Beyond this, Celia, who, often as she sat
alone, turned the matter over in her mind, could see no
reason he could have for permitting the intimacy. That
he would permit it without some reason was, as her experi-
ence had taught her, out of the question.
Ciceley never troubled her head about the matter; her
visits to Lynnwood were very pleasant to her. She was two
years younger than Charlie Carstairs; and although when
he had once brought her to the house he considered that
his duties were over until the hour arrived for her return,
he was sometimes ready to play with her, escort her round
the garden, or climb the trees for fruit or birds’ eggs for
her. Such little courtesies she never received from Alured,
who was four years her senior, and who never interested
himself in the slightest degree in her. He was now past
eighteen, and was beginning to regard himself as a man,
and had, to Ciceley’s satisfaction, gone a few weeks before
to London to stay with an uncle who had a place at court,
and was said to be much in the confidence of some of the
Whig lords.
Sir Marmaduke was about this time more convinced than
ever that ere long the heir of the Stuarts would come over
from France with men, arms, and money, and would rally
round him the Jacobites of England and Scotland. Charlie
saw but little of him, for he was frequently absent from
early morning until late at night, riding to visit friends in
Westmoreland and Yorkshire, sometimes being away two or
three days at a time. Of an evening there were meetings
at Lynnwood, and at these strangers who arrived after night-
fall were often present. Charlie was not admitted to any
of these gatherings.
“You will know all about it in time, lad,†his father
said. ‘You are too young to bother your head with poli-
20 A JACOBITE EXILE
tics, and you would lose patience in a very short time. I
do myself occasionally. Many who are the foremost in
talk when there is no prospect of doing anything, draw back
when the time approaches for action, and it is sickening to
listen to the timorous objections and paltry arguments that
are brought forward. Here am I, a man of sixty, ready to
risk life and fortune in the good cause, and there are many
not half my age, who speak with as much caution as if they
were gray-beards. Still, lad, I have no doubt that the mat-
ter will straighten itself out and come right in the end. It
is always the most trying time for timorous hearts before
the first shot of a battle is fred. Once the engagement
commences, there Is no time for fear; the battle has to be
fought out, and the best way to safety is to win a victory.
I have not the least doubt that as soon as it is known that
the king has landed, there will be no more shilly-shallying
or hesitation. Every loyal man will mount his horse and
call out his tenants, and in a few days England will be ina
blaze from end to end.â€
Charlie troubled himself but little with what was going
on. His father had promised him that when the time did
come he should ride by his side, and with that promise he
was content to wait, knowing that at present his strength
would be of but little avail, and that every week added
somewhat to his weight and sinew.
One day he was in the garden with Ciceley; the weather
was hot, and the girl was sitting in a swing under a shady
tree, occasionally starting herself by a push with her foot
on the ground, and then swaying gently backward and for-
ward, until the swing was again at rest. Charlie was seated
on the ground near her, pulling the ears of his favourite
dog, and occasionally talking to her, when a servant came
out with a message that his father wanted to speak to him.
“T expect I shall be back in a few minutes, Ciceley, so
don’t you wander away till I come. It is too hot to-day
A SPY IN THE HOUSEHOLD 21
to be hunting for you all over the garden, as I did when
you hid yourself last week.â€
It was indeed but a short time until he returned.
“My father only wanted to tell me that he is just starting
for Bristowe’s, and as it is over twenty miles away he may
not return until to-morrow.â€
“T don’t like that man’s face who brought the message
to you, Charlie.â€
“Don’t you?†the boy said carelessly. “TI have not
noticed him much; he has not been many months with us.
What are you thinking of?†he asked a minute later, see-
ing that his cousin looked troubled.
“I don’t know that I ought to tell you, Charlie. You
know my father does not think the same way as yours about
things.â€
“I should rather think he doesn’t,†Charlie laughed.
“There is no secret about that, Ciceley; but they don’t
quarrel over it. Last time your father and mother came
over here I dined with them for the first time, and I noticed
there was not a single word said about politics. They
chatted over the crops, and the chances of a war in Kurope,
and of the quarrel between Holstein and Denmark, and
whether the young king of Sweden would aid the duke, who
seems to be threatened by Saxony as well as by Denmark.
I did not know anything about it, and thought it was rather
stupid; but my father and yours both seemed of one mind,
and were as good friends as if they were in equal agree-
ment on all other points. But what has that to do with
Nicholson, for that is the man’s name who came out just
now?â€
“Tt does not seem to have much to do with it,†she said
doubtfully, “and yet perhaps it does. You know my mother
is not quite of the same opinion as my father, although she
never says so to him; but when we are alone together some-
times she shakes her head and says she fears that trouble
22 A JACOBITE EXILE
is coming, and it makes her very unhappy. One day I was
in the garden, and they were talking loudly in the dining-
room—at least he was talking loudly. Well, he said—But
I don’t know whether I ought to tell you, Charlie.â€
“Certainly you ought not, Ciceley. If you heard what
you were not meant to hear you ought never to say a word
about it to anyone.â€
“But it concerns you and Sir Marmaduke.â€
“T cannot help that,†he said stoutly. “People often
say things of each other in private, especially if they are
out of temper, that they don’t quite mean, and it would
make terrible mischief if such things were repeated. What-
ever your father said I do not want to hear it, and it would |
be very wrong of you to repeat it.â€
“T am not going to repeat it, Charlie. I only want to
say that I do not think my father and yours are very
friendly together, which is natural, when my father is all
for King William and your father for King James. He
makes no secret of that, you know.â€
Charlie nodded. ‘That is right enough, Ciceley, but
still I don’t understand in the least what it has to do with
the servant.â€
“Tt has to do with it,†she said pettishly, starting the
swing afresh, and then relapsing into silence until it again
came to a stand-still. “1 think you ought to know,†she
said suddenly. “You see, Charlie, Sir Marmaduke is very
kind to me, and I love him dearly, and so I do you, and I
think you ought to know, although it may be nothing at
all.â€
“Well, fire away then, Ciceley. There is one thing you
may be quite sure of, whatever you tell me it is like telling
a brother, and I shall never repeat it to anyone.â€
“Well, it is this. ‘That man comes over sometimes to see
my father. I have seen him pass my window three or four
times and go in by the garden door into father’s study. I
A SPY IN THE HOUSEHOLD 23
did not know who he was, but it did seem funny his entering
by that door, as if he did not want to be seen by anyone in
the house. I did not think anything more about it till I
saw him just now, then I knew him directly. If I had seen
him before I should have told you at once, but I don’t think
I have.â€
“T daresay not, Ciceley. He does not wait at table, but
is under the steward, and helps clean the silver. He waits
when ‘we have several friends to dinner. At other times he
does not often come into the room. What you tell me is
certainly curious. What can he have to say to your father?â€
“T don’t know, Charlie. I don’t know anything about
it. Ido think you ought to know.â€
“Ves, I think it is a good thing that I should know,â€
Charlie agreed thoughtfully. “TI daresay it is all right, but
at any rate I am glad you told me.â€
“Vou won't tell your father?†she asked eagerly. “ Be-
cause if you were to speak of it—â€
“T shall not tell him. You need not be afraid that what
you have told me will come out. It is curious, and that Is
all, and I will look after the fellow a bit. Don’t think
anything more about it. It is just the sort of thing it is
well to know, but I expect there is no harm in it one way
or the other. Of course he must have known your father
before he came to us, and may have business of some sort
with him. He may have a brother or some other relation
who wants to take one of your father’s farms. Indeed, there
are a hundred things he might want to see him about. But
still, I am glad you have told me.â€
In his own mind Charlie thought much more seriously of
it than he pretended. He knew that at present his father
was engaged heart and soul in a projected Jacobite rising.
He knew that John Dormay was a bitter Whig. He
believed that he had a grudge against his father, and the
general opinion of him was that he was wholly unscrupulous.
24 A JACOBITE EXILE
That he should, then, be in secret communication with a
servant at Lynnwood, struck him as a very serious matter
indeed. Charlie was not yet sixteen, but his close com-
panionship with his father had rendered him older than
most lads of his age. He was as warm a Jacobite as his
father, but the manner in which William with his: Dutch
troops had crushed the great Jacobite rebellion in Ireland,
seemed to him a lesson that the prospects of success in
England were much less certain than his father believed
them to be. John Dormay, as an adherent of William,
would be interested in thwarting the proposed movement,
with the satisfaction of, at the same time, bringing Sir
Marmaduke into disgrace. Charlie could hardly believe
that his cousin would be guilty of setting a spy to watch his
father, but it was certainly possible, and as he thought the
matter over as he rode back after escorting Ciceley to her
home, he resolved to keep a sharp watch over the doings of
this man Nicholson.
“Tt would never do to tell my father what Ciceley said.
He would bundle the fellow out neck and crop, and perhaps
break some of his bones, and then it would be traced to
her. She has not a happy home as it is, and it would be
far worse if her father knew that it was she who had put us~
on our guard. I must find out something myself, and then
we can turn him out without there being the least suspicion
that Ciceley is mixed up in it.â€
Vhe next evening several Jacobite gentlemen rode in,
and, as usual, had a long talk with Sir Marmaduke after
supper.
“Tf this fellow is a spy,†Charlie said to himself, “he
will be wanting to hear what is said, and to do so he must
either hide himself in the room or listen at the door or at
one of the windows. It is not likely that he will get into
the room, for to do that he must have hidden himself before
supper began. I don’t think he would dare to listen at the
A SPY IN THE HOUSEHOLD 25
door, for anyone passing through the hall would catch him
at it. It must be at one of the windows.â€
‘The room was at an angle of the house. ‘Three win-
dows looked out on to the lawn in front, that at the side
into a large shrubbery, where the bushes grew up close to
it; and Charlie decided that here, if anywhere, the man
would take up his post. As soon, then, as he knew that the
servants were clearing away the supper he took a heavy
cudgel and went out. He walked straight away from the
house, and then, when he knew that his figure could no
longer be seen in the twilight, he made a circuit, and enter-
ing the shrubbery crept along close to the wall of the house
until within two or three yards of the window. Having
made sure that at present, at any rate, no one was near, he
moved out a step or two to look at the window. His
suspicions were at once confirmed. ‘The inside curtains
were drawn, but the casement was open two or three inches.
Charlie again took up his post behind a bush and waited.
In five minutes he heard a twig snap, and then a figure
came along noiselessly and placed itself at the window.
Charlie gave him but a moment to listen, then he sprang
forward, and with his whole strength brought his cudgel
down upon the man’s head. He fell like astone. Charlie
threw open the window, and as he did so the curtain was
torn back by his father, the sound of the blow and the fall
haying reached the ears of those within. Sir Marmaduke
had drawn his sword, and was about to leap through the
window when Charlie exclaimed:
“Ttis I, father. I have caught a fellow listening at the
window, and have just knocked him down.â€
“Well done, my boy! Bring lights, please, gentlemen;
let us see what villain we have got here.†But as he spoke
Charlie’s head suddenly disappeared, and a sharp exclama-
tion broke from him as he felt his ankles grasped and his
feet pulled from under him. He came down with such a
26 A JACORITE EXILE
crash that for a moment he was unable to rise. He heard
a rustling in the bushes, and then his father leapt down be-
side him.
“Where are you, my boy? Has the scoundrel hurt you?â€
“He has given me a shake,†Charlie said as he sat up;
“and what is worse, J am afraid he has got away.â€
“Follow me, gentlemen, and scatter through the gar-
dens,†Sir Marmaduke roared; “the villain has escaped!â€
For a few minutes there was a hot pursuit through the
shrubbery and gardens, but nothing was discovered.
Charlie had been so shaken that he was unable to join the
pursuit, but having got on to his feet remained leaning
against the wall until his father came back.
“He has got away, Charlie. Have you any idea who he
was?â€
“Tt was Nicholson, father; at least I am almost certain
that it was him. It was too dark to see his face. I could
see the outline of his head against the window, and he had
on a cap with a cock’s feather which I had noticed the man
wore.â€
“But how came you here, Charlie?â€
“T will tell you that afterwards, father,—don’t ask me
now;†for at this moment some of the others were coming
up. Several of them had torches, and as they approached
Sir Marmaduke saw something lying on the ground under
the window. He picked it up.
“Here is the fellow’s cap,†he said. “You must have
hit him a shrewd blow, Charlie, for here is a clean cut
through the cloth and a patch of fresh blood on the white
lining. How did he get you down, lad?â€
“He fell so suddenly when I hit him that I thought I had
either killed or stunned him; but of course I had not, for
it was but a moment after, when I was speaking to you,
that I felt my ankles seized and I went down with a crash.
T heard him make off through the bushes; but I was for
A SPY IN THE HOUSEHOLD 27
the moment almost dazed, and could do nothing to stop
him.â€
“Was the window open when he came?â€
“Ves, sir, two or three inches.â€
“Then it was evidently a planned thing. Well, gentle-
men, we may as well go indoors. ‘The fellow is well out of
our reach now, and we may be pretty sure he will never
again show his face here. Fortunately he heard nothing,
for the serving-men had but just left the room, and we had
not yet begun to talk.â€
“That is true enough, Sir Marmaduke,†one of the others
said. “The question is,—How long has this been going
on?â€
Sir Marmaduke looked at Charlie.
“J know nothing about it, sir. Till now I have not had
the slightest suspicion of this man. It occurred to me
this afternoon that it might be possible for anyone to hear
what was said inside the room by listening at the windows,
and that this shrubbery would form a very good shelter for
an eaves-dropper. So I thought this evening I would take
up my place here to assure myself that there was no traitor
in the household. I had been here but five minutes when
the fellow stole quietly up and placed his ear at the open-
ing of the casement, and you may be sure that I gave him
no time to listen to what was being said.â€
“Well, we had better go in,†Sir Marmaduke said.
“There is no fear of our being overheard this evening.
Charlie, do you take old Banks aside and tell him what has
happened, and then go with him to the room where that
fellow slept, and make a thorough search of any clothes he
may have left behind, and of the room itself. Should you
find any papers or documents, you will, of course, bring
them down to me.â€
But the closest search by Charlie and the old butler pro-
duced no results. Not a scrap of paper of any kind was
28 A JACOBITE EXILE
found, and Banks said that he knew the man could neither
read nor write. ‘lhe party below soon broke up, considera-
ble uneasiness being felt by all at the incident of the even-
ing. When the last of them had left Charlie was sent for.
“Now, then, Charlie, let me hear how all this came
about. I know that all you said about what took place at
the window is perfectly true; but even had you not said
so, I should have felt there was something else. What was
it brought you to that window? Your story was straight-
forward enough, but it was certainly singular your happen-
ing to be there, and I fancy some of our friends thought
that you had gone round to listen yourself. One hinted as
much; but I said that was absurd, for you were completely
in my confidence, and that whatever peril and danger there
might be in the enterprise, you would share them with
me.†:
“Tt is not pleasant that they should have thought so,
father, but that is better than that the truth should be
known. ‘This is how it happened;†and he repeated what
Ciceley had told him in the garden.
“So the worthy Master John Dormay has set a spy upon
me,†Sir Marmaduke said bitterly. “I knew the man was
a knave—that is public property—but I did not think that
he was capable of this. Well, Iam glad that at any rate
no suspicion can fall upon Ciceley in the matter; but it is
serious, lad, very serious. We do not know how long this
fellow has been prying and listening, or how much he may
have learnt. I don’t think it can be much. We talked it
over, and my friends all agreed with me that they do not
remember those curtains having been drawn before. To
begin with, the evenings are shortening fast, and at our
meeting last week we finished our supper by daylight;
and had the curtains been drawn it would have been
noticed, for we had need of light before we finished.
Two of the gentlemen who were sitting facing the window
A SPY IN THE HOUSEHOLD 29
declared that they remembered distinctly that it was open.
Mr. Jervoise says that he thought to himself that if it was
his place he would have the trees cut away there, for they
shut out the light. ‘Therefore, although it is uncomforta-
ble to think that there has been a spy in the house for
some months, we have every reason to hope that our coun-
cils have not been overheard. Were it otherwise I should
lose no time in making for the coast and taking ship to
France, to wait quietly there until the king comes over.â€
“Vou have no documents, father, that the man could
have found?â€
“None, Charlie. We have doubtless made lists of those
who could be relied upon and of the number of men they
could bring with them, but these have always been burned
before we separated. Such letters as I have had from
France I have always destroyed as soon as I have read them.
Perilous stuff of that sort should never be left about. No;
they may ransack the place from top to bottom, and noth-
ing will be found that could not be read aloud without harm
in the market-place of Lancaster. So now to bed, Char-
lie; it is long past your usual hour.â€
: Mi
SY fi
al ee ey} {
Wien
CHAPTER IT
DENOUNCED
HARLIE,†Sir Marmaduke said on the following morn-
ing at breakfast, “it is quite possible that that villain
who acted as spy, and that other villain who employed
him—I need not mention names—may swear an informa-
tion against me, and I may be arrested on the charge of
being concerned ina plot. Jam not much afraid of it if
they do. The most they could say is that I was prepared to
take up arms if his majesty crossed from France; but as
there are thousands and thousands of men ready to do the
same, they may fine me, perhaps, but I should say that is
all. However, what I want to say to you is, keep out of
the way if they come. I shall make light of the affair,
while you, being pretty hot-tempered, might say things that
would irritate them, while they could be of no assistance
tome. ‘Therefore, I would rather that you were kept out
of it altogether. I shall want you here; in my absence
there must be somebody to look after things. Mind that
rascal John Dormay does not put his foot inside the house
while Iam away. ‘That fellow is playing some deep game,
though I don’t quite know what it is. I suppose he wants
to win the good-will of the authorities by showing his
activity and zeal; and of course he will imagine that no
one has any idea that he has been in communication with
this spy. We have got a hold over him, and when I come
30
DENOUNCED 31
back I will have it out with him. He is not popular now,
and if it were known that he had been working against me,
his wife’s kinsman, behind my back, my friends about
here would make the country too hot to hold him.â€
“Ves, father; but please do not let him guess that we
have learnt it from Ciceley. You see that is the only way
we know about it.â€
“Ves, you are right there. I will be careful that he
shall not know the little maid has anything to do with it.
But we will think of that afterwards; maybe nothing will
come of it after all. But if anything does, mind, my
orders are that you keep away from the house while they
are init. When you come back Banks will tell you what
has happened. You had better take your horse and go for
a ride now. Not over there, Charlie. I know if you
happened to meet that fellow he would read in your face
that you knew the part he had been playing, and should
nothing come of the business I don’t want him to know
that at present. The fellow can henceforth do us no
harm, for we shall be on our guard against eaves-droppers;
and for the sake of cousin Celia and the child I do not
want an open breach. I do not see the man often myself,
and I will take good care I don’t put myself in the way of
meeting him, for the present at any rate. Don’t ride over
there to-day.â€
“Very well, father, I will ride over and see Harry Jer-
voise. I promised him that I would come over one day
this week.â€
It was a ten-mile ride, and as he entered the court-yard
of Mr. Jervoise’s fine old mansion he leapt off his horse
and threw the reins over a post. A servant came out.
“The master wishes to speak to you, Master Carstairs.â€
“No ill news, I hope, Charlie?†Mr. Jervoise asked
anxiously as the lad was shown into the room where his
host was standing beside the carved chimney-piece.
32 A JACOBITE EXILE
“No, sir, there is nothing new. My father thought that
I had better be away to-day in case any trouble should
arise out of what took place yesterday, so I rode over to
see Harry. I promised to do so one day this week.â€
“That is right. Does Sir Marmaduke think then that
he will be arrested?â€
“T don’t know that he expects it, sir, but he says that it
is possible.â€
“T do not see that they have anything to go upon, Char-
lie. As we agreed last night, that spy never had any
opportunity of overhearing us before, and certainly he can
have heard nothing yesterday. he fellow can only say
what many people know, or could know if they liked, that
half a dozen of Sir Marmaduke’s friends rode over to take
supper with him. ‘They can make nothing out of that.â€
“No, sir; and my father said that, at the worst, it could
be but the matter of a fine.†,
“Quite so, lad; but I don’t even see how it could
amount to that. You will find Harry somewhere about
the house; he has said nothing to me about going out.â€
Harry Jervoise was just the same age as Charlie, and
was his greatest friend. ‘They were both enthusiastic in
the cause of the Stuarts, equally vehement in their ex-
pressions of contempt for the Dutch king, equally anxious
for the coming of him whom they regarded as their lawful
monarch. They spent the morning together as usual; went
first to the stables and patted and talked to their horses;
then they played at bowls on the lawn; after which they
had a bout of sword-play; and having thus let off some of
their animal spirits, sat down and talked of the glorious
times to come when the king was to have his own again.
Late in the afternoon Charlie mounted his horse and rode
for home. When within half a mile of the house a man
stepped out into the road in front of him.
“Hullo, Banks, what is it—no bad news, I hope?†And
DENOUNCED 33
he leapt from his horse, alarmed at the pallor of the old
butler’s face.
“Ves, Master Charles, I have some very bad news, and
have been waiting for the last two hours here, so as to stop
you going to the house.â€
“Why shouldn’t I go to the house?â€
“Because there are a dozen soldiers and three or four
constables there.â€
“And my father?â€
“"Fhey have taken him away.â€
“This is bad news, Banks; but I know that he thought
that it might be so. But it will not be very serious; it is
only a question of a fine,†he said.
‘The butler shook his head sadly. “It is worse than that,
Master Charles; it is worse than you think.â€
“Well, tell me all about it, Banks,†Charlie said, feeling
much alarmed at the old man’s manner.
“Well, sir, at three this afternoon two magistrates, John
Cockshaw and William Peters†(“Both bitter Whigs,â€
Charlie put in) “rode up to the door. They had with them
six constables and twenty troopers.â€
“There were enough of them then,†Charlie said.“ Did
they think my father was going to arm you all and defend
the place?â€
“T don’t know, sir, but that is the number that came.
The magistrates and the constables and four of the soldiers
came into the house. Sir Marmaduke met them in the hall.
“To what do I owe the honour of this visit?’ he said,
quite cold and haughty.
“We have come, Sir Marmaduke Carstairs, to arrest you
on the charge of being concerned in a treasonable plot
against the king’s life.’
“Sir Marmaduke laughed out loud. ‘I have no design
on the life of William of Orange or of any other man,’ he
said. ‘I do not pretend to love him; in that matter there
34 A JACOBITE EXILE
are thousands in this realm with me; but as for a design
against his life, I should say, gentlemen, there are few who
know me, even among men like yourselves, whose politics
are opposed to mine, who would for a moment credit such
a foul insinuation.’
“«We have nothing to do with that matter, Sir Marma-
duke,’ John Cockshaw said; ‘we are acting upon a sworn
information to that effect.’
“Sir Marmaduke was angry now. ‘I can guess the name
of the dog who signed it,’ he said, ‘and kinsman though he
is by marriage I will force the lie down his throat.’ Then
he cooled down again. ‘Well, gentlemen, you have to do
your duty. What do you desire next?’
“Our duty is next to search the house for any treason-
able documents that may be concealed here.’
“Search away, gentlemen,’ Sir Marmaduke said, seating
himself in one of the settles. ‘The house is open to you.
My butler, James Banks, will go round with you, and will
open for you any cupboard or chest that may be locked.’
“The magistrates nodded to the four soldiers. ‘Two of
them took their post near the chair, one at the outside door,
and one at the other end of the room. Sir Marmaduke
said nothing, but shrugged his shoulders, and then began to
play with the ears of the little spaniel Fido, that had jumped
up on his knees.
“We will first go into the study,’ John Cockshaw said;
and I led them there. ‘They went straight to the cabinet
with the pull-down desk, where Sir Marmaduke writes when
he does write, which is not often. It was locked, and I
went to Sir Marmaduke for the key.
“¢Vou will find it in that French vase on the mantel,’ he
said; ‘I don’t open the desk once in three months, and
should lose the key if I carried it with me.’
“T went to the mantel, turned the vase over, and the key
dropped out. ‘Sir Marmaduke has nothing to hide, gentle-
DENOUNCED 30
men,’ I said, ‘so you see he keeps the key here.’ I went
to the cabinet and put the key in. As I did so I said,
‘Took, gentlemen, someone has opened or tried to open
this desk. Here is a mark as if a knife had been thrust in
to shoot the bolt.’ They looked where I pointed, and Wil-
liam Peters said to Cockshaw, ‘It is as the man says.
Someone has been trying to force the lock—one of the
varlets probably who thought the knight might keep his
money here.’
“Tt can be of no importance one way or the other,’
Cockshaw said roughly.
“*Probably not, Mr. Cockshaw, but at the same time I
will make a note of it.’ I turned the key and pulled down
the door that makes a desk. They seemed to know all
about it, for without looking at the papers in the pigeon-
holes they pulled open the lower drawer, and took two
foreign-looking letters out from it. I will do them the
justice to say that they both looked sorry as they opened
them and looked at the writing.
“¢Tt ig too true,’ Peters said. ‘Here is enough to hang
a dozen men.’ They tumbled all the other papers into a
sack that one of the constables had brought with him.
Then they searched all the other furniture, but they evi-
dently did not expect to find anything. ‘Then they went
back into the hall. ‘Well, gentlemen,’ Sir Marmaduke
said, ‘have you found anything of a terrible kind?’
“We have found, I regret to say,’ John Cockshaw said,
‘the letters of which we were in search in your private
cabinet—letters that prove beyond all doubt that you are
concerned in a plot similar to that discovered three years
ago to assassinate his majesty the king.†Sir Marmaduke
sprang to his feet.
“Vou have found letters of that kind in my cabinet?’
he said, in a dazed sort of way. The magistrate bowed but
did not speak.
36 A JACOBITE EXILE
“¢Then, sir,’ Sir Marmaduke exclaimed, ‘you have found
letters that I have never seen. You have found letters that
must have been placed there by some scoundrel who plotted
my tuin. J assert to you, on the honour of a gentleman,
that no such letters have ever met my eye, and that if such
a proposition had been made to me, I care not by whom,
I would have struck to the ground the man who offered me
such an insult.’
“We are sorry, Sir Marmaduke Carstairs,’ Mr. Peters
said, ‘most sorry, both of us, that it should have fallen to
our duty to take so painful a proceeding against a neigh-
bour, but you see the matter is beyond us. We have
received a sworn information that you are engaged in such
a plot. Weare told that you are in the habit of locking up
papers of importance in a certain cabinet, and there we
find papers of a most damnatory kind. We most sincerely
trust that you may be able to prove your innocence in the
matter, but we have nothing to do but to take you with us
as a prisoner to Lancaster.’
“Sir Marmaduke unbuckled his sword and laid it by.
He was quieter than I thought he could be in such a
strait, for he has always been by nature, as you know,
choleric. ‘I am ready, gentlemen,’ he said. Peters whis-
pered in Cockshaw’s ear. ‘Ah yes,’ the other said, ‘I had
well-nigh forgotten,’ and he turned to me. ‘Where is
Master Charles Carstairs?’ ‘He is not in the house,’ I
said. ‘He rode away this morning and did not tell me
where he was going.’ ‘When do you expect him back?’
‘I do notexpect him at all,’ Isaid. ‘When Master Charles
rides out to visit his friends he sometimes stays away for a
day or two.’
“*Ts it supposed,’ Sir Marmaduke asked coldly, ‘that my
son Is also mixed up in this precious scheme?’
“
said, ‘and is therefore included in the orders for arrest.’
DENOUNCED 37
“Sir Marmaduke did not speak, but he shut his lips tight,
and his hand went to where the hilt of his sword would
have been. ‘Two of the constables went out and questioned
the grooms, and found that you had, as I said, ridden off.
When they came back there was some talk between the
magistrates, and then, as I said, four constables and some
soldiers were left in the house. Sir Marmaduke’s horse
was brought round, and he rode away with the magistrates
and the other soldiers.â€â€™
“Y am quite sure, Banks, that my father could have
known nothing of those letters, or of any plot against Wil-
liam’s life. I have heard him speak so often of the
assassination plot, and how disgraceful it was, and how,
apart from its wickedness, it had damaged the cause, that I
am certain he would not have listened to a word about
another such business.â€
“Tam sure of that too,†the old butler said; “but that is
not the question, Master Charles. ‘There are the papers.
We know that Sir Marmaduke did not put them there, and
that he did not know that they were there. But how is it
to be proved, sir? Everyone knows that Sir Marmaduke is
a Jacobite, and is regarded as the head of the party in this
part of the country. He has enemies, and one of them no
doubt has played this evil trick upon him, and the putting
of your name in shows what the motive is.â€
“But it is ridiculous, Banks. Who could believe that
such a matter as this would be confided to a lad of my
age?â€
“They might not believe it in their hearts, but people
often believe what suits their interest. This accusation
touches Sir Marmaduke’s life, and his estate, even if his
life were spared, would be confiscated. In such a case it
might be granted to anyone, and possibly even to the son
of him they would call the traitor. But the accusation that
the son was concerned, or was at any rate privy to the crime
38 A JACOBITE EXILE
intended by the father, would set all against him, and public
opinion would approve of the estates passing away from
him altogether. But now, sir, what do you think you had
best do?â€
“Of course I shall go on, Banks, and let them take me
to join my father in Lancaster jail. Do you think I would
run away?â€
“No, sir, I don’t think you would run away. I am sure
you would not run away from fear, but I would not let them
lay hands on me until I had thought the matter well over.
You might be able to do more good to Sir Marmaduke were
you free, than you could do if you were caged up with him.
He has enemies, we know, who are doing their best to ruin
him, and, as you see, they are anxious that you too should
be shut up within four walls.â€
“Vou are right, Banks; at any rate I will ride back and
consult Mr. Jervoise. Besides, he ought to be warned, for
he too may be arrested on the same charge. How did you
get away without being noticed?â€
“T said that I felt ill—and I was not speaking falsely—
at Sir Marmaduke’s arrest, and would lie down. They are
keeping a sharp look-out at the stables, and have a soldier
at each door to see that no one leaves the house, but I went
out by that old passage that comes out among the ruins of
the monastery.â€
“T know, Banks; my father showed it to me three years
ago.â€
“T shall go back that way again, sir, and no one will
know that I have left the house. You know the trick of
the sliding panel, Master Charles?â€
“Ves, I know it, and if I should want to come into the
house again I will come that way, Banks.â€
“Here is a purse,†the butler said; “you may want
money, sir. Should you want more there is a store hidden
away in the hiding-place under the floor of the Priest’s
DENOUNCED 39
Chamber at the other end of the passage. Do you know
that?â€
“T know the Priest’s Chamber of course, because you go
through that to get to the long passage, but I don’t know of
any special hiding-place there.â€
“Toubtless Sir Marmaduke did not think it necessary
to show it you then, sir, but he would have done it later on,
so I do not consider that I am breaking my oath of secrecy
in telling you. You know the little narrow loophole in the
corner?â€
“Ves, of course; there is no other that gives light to the
room. It is hidden from view outside by the ivy.â€
“Well, sir, you count four bricks below that, and you
press hard on the next, that is the fifth, then you will hear
a click, then you press hard with your heel at the corner,
in the angle, of the flag below, and you will find the other
corner rise. ‘Then you get hold of it and lift it up, and
below there is a stone chamber two feet long and about eigh-
teen inches wide and deep. It was made to conceal papers
in the old days, and I believe food was always kept there in
case the chamber had to be used in haste. Sir Marmaduke
uses it as a store-place for his money. He has laid by a
good deal every year, knowing that money would be wanted
when troops had to be raised. I was with him about three
weeks ago when he put in there half the rents that had been
paid in. So if you want money for any purpose you will
know where to find it.â€
“Thank you, Banks, it may be very useful to have such
a store now.â€
“Where shall I send to you, sir, if I have any news that
it is urgent you should know of? is
“Send to Mr. Jervoise, Banks. Ii I am not there he will
know where I am to be found.â€
“T will send Will ‘Vicehurst, Master Charles. He is a
stout lad, and a shrewd one, and I know there is nothing
40 A JACOBITE EXILE
that he would not do for you. But you had best stop no
longer. Should they find out that I am not in the house
they will guess that I have come to warn you, and may send
out a party to search.â€
Charlie at once mounted and rode back to Mr. Jervoise’s.
“T expected you back,†that gentleman said as he
entered. “Bad news travels apace, and an hour since a
man brought in the news that Sir Marmaduke had been seen
riding, evidently a prisoner, surrounded by soldiers, on the
road towards Lancaster. So that villain we chased last
night must have learnt something. I suppose they will be
here to-morrow, but I do not see what serious charge they
can have against us. We have neither collected arms nor
taken any steps towards a rising. We have talked over
what we might do if there were a landing made from France,
but as there may be no landing that is a very vague charge.â€
“Unfortunately that is not the charge against my father.
It is a much more serious business.†And Charlie repeated
the substance of what Banks had told him, interrupted
occasionally by indignant ejaculations from Mr. Jervoise.
“Tt is an infamous plot,†he said, when the lad had con-
cluded his story. “Infamous! There was never a word
said of such a scheme, and no one who knows your father
would believe it for an instant.â€
“Yes, sir, but the judges who do not know him may
believe it. No doubt those who put those papers there will
bring forward evidence to back it up.â€
“Tam afraid that will be the case. It is serious for us
all,†Mr. Jervoise said thoughtfully. “That man will be
prepared to swear that he heard the plot discussed by us all.
They seized your father to-day as being the principal and
most important of those concerned in it, but we may all
find ourselves in the same case to-morrow. I must think it
over. It is well that your tian warned you. You had best
not stay here to-night, for the house may be surrounded at
DENOUNCED 41
daybreak. Harry shall go over with you to one of my
tenants, and you can both sleep there. It will not be nec-
essary for you to leave for another two or three hours. You
had better go to him now; supper will be served in half an
hour. I will talk with you again afterwards.â€
Harry was waiting outside the door, having also heard
the news of Sir Marmaduke’s arrest.
“Tt is villanous!†he exclaimed, when he heard the
whole story. “No doubt you are right, and that John
Dormay is at the bottom of it all. The villain ought to
be slain.â€
“He deserves it, Harry; and if I thought it would do
good I would gladly fight him, but I fear that it would do
harm. Such a scoundrel must needs be a coward, and
he might call for aid, and I might be dragged off to
Lancaster. Moreover, he is Ciceley’s father, and my cousin
Celia’s husband, and were I to kill him it would separate
me altogether from them. However, I shall in all things
be guided by your father, he will know what best ought to
be done. It is likely that he, too, may be arrested. This
is evidently a deep plot, and your father thinks that,
although the papers alone may not be sufficient to convict
my father, the spy we had in our house will be ready to
swear that he heard your father and mine and the others
making arrangements for the murder of William of Orange,
and their own word to the contrary would count but little
against such evidence backed by those papers.â€
They talked together for half-an-hour, and were then
summoned to supper. Nothing was said upon the subject
until the servitors had retired and the meal was cleared
away. Mr. Jervoise was, like Sir Marmaduke, a widower.
“J have been thinking it all over,†he said when they
were alone. “I have determined to ride at once to consult
some of my friends, and to warn them of what has taken
place. That is clearly my duty. I shall not return until
492 A JACOBITE EXILE
I learn whether warrants are out for my apprehension. Of
course, the evidence is not so strong against me as it is
against Sir Marmaduke, still the spy’s evidence would tell
as much against me as against him. You will go up,
Harry, with your friend to Pincot’s farm. It lies so far in
the hills that it would probably be one of the last to be
searched, and if a very sharp look-out is kept there, a body
of men riding up the valley would be seen over a mile
away, and there would be plenty of time to take to the
hills. There Charlie had better remain until he hears
from me.
“You can return here, Harry, in the morning, for there
is no probability whatever of your being included in any
warrant of arrest; it could only relate to us who were in
the habit of meeting at Sir Marmaduke’s. You will ride
over to the farm each day, and tell Charlie any news you
may have learnt, or take any message I may send you for
him. We must do nothing hastily. The first thing to
learn, if possible, is whether any of us are included in the
charge of being concerned in a plot against William’s life.
In the next place, who are the witnesses, and what evidence
they intend to give. No doubt the most important is the
man who was placed as a spy at Sir Marmaduke’s.â€
“As I know his face, sir,†Charlie said eagerly, “could
I not find him, and either force him to acknowledge that it
is all false or else kill him? I should be in my right in
doing that surely, since he is trying to swear away my
father’s life by false evidence.â€
“T should say nothing against that, lad. If ever a fellow
deserved killing he does; that is, next to his rascally em-
ployer. But his death would harm rather than benefit us;
it would be assumed, of course, that we had removed him
to prevent his giving evidence against us. No doubt his
depositions have been taken down, and they would then be
assumed to be true, and we should be worse off than if he
DENOUNCED 43
could be confronted with us face to face in the court. We
must let the matter rest at present.â€
“Would it be possible to get my father out of prison,
sir? Iam sure I can get a dozen men from among the
tenants and grooms who would gladly risk their lives for
him.â€
“Lancaster jail is a very strong place,†Mr. Jervoise
said, “and I fear there is no possibility of rescuing him
from it. Of course, at present we cannot say where the
trial will take place. A commission may be sent down to
hold a special assizes at Lancaster, or the trial may take
place in London. At any rate nothing whatever can be
done until we know more. I have means of learning what
takes place at Lancaster, for we have friends there as well
as at most other places. When I hear from them the exact
nature of the charge, the evidence that will be given, and
the names of those accused of being mixed up in this pre-
tended plot, I shall be better able to say what is to be done.
Now I must mount and ride without further delay. I have
to visit all our friends who met at Lynnwood, and it will
take me until to-morrow morning to see and confer with
them.â€
A few minutes after Mr. Jervoise had ridden off, his son
and Charlie also mounted. A man went with them with a
supply of torches, for although Harry knew the road—
which was little better than a sheep-track—well enough
during the day, his father thought he might find it difficult
if not impossible to follow it on a dark night. They con-
gratulated themselves upon the precaution taken before
they had gone very far, for there was no moon, the sky was
overcast, and a drizzling rain had begun to come down.
They could hardly see their horses’ heads, and had pro-
ceeded but a short distance when it became necessary for
their guide to light a torch. It took them, therefore, over
two hours to reach the mountain farm.
44 A JACOBITE EXILE
They were expected, otherwise the household would have
been asleep. Mr. Jervoise had, as soon as he determined
upon their going there, sent off a man on horseback, who,
riding fast, had arrived before night set in. ‘There was,
therefore, a great turf fire glowing on the hearth when they
arrived, and a hearty welcome awaiting them from the
farmer, his wife, and daughters. Harry had, by his
father’s advice, brought two changes of clothes in a valise,
but they were so completely soaked to the skin that they
decided they would, after drinking a horn of hot-spiced
ale that had been prepared for them, go at once to bed,
where, in spite of the stirring events of the day, both went
off to sleep as soon as their heads touched the pillows.
The sun was shining brightly when they woke; the mists
had cleared off, although they still hung round the head of
Ingleborough, six miles away, and on some of the other
hill-tops. The change of weather had an inspiriting effect,
and they went down to breakfast in a brighter and more
hopeful frame of mind. As soon as the meal was over
Harry started for home.
“T hope it won’t be long before I can see you again,
Harry,†Charlie said as he stood by the horse.
“T hope not, indeed; but there is no saying. My father’s
orders are that Iam to stay at home if people come and
take possession, and send a man off to you with the news
privately, but that if no one comes I may myself bring you
over any news there is; so I may be back here this after-
noon.â€
“J shall be looking out for you, Harry. Remember,
it will be horribly dull for me up here, wondering and
fretting as to what is going on.â€
“T know, Charlie; and you shall hear as soon as I get the
smallest scrap of news. If I were you I would go for a
good walk among the hills, it will be much better for you
than moping here. At any rate you are not likely to get
any news for some hours to come.â€
DENOUNCED 45
Charlie took the advice and started among the hills, not
returning until the mid-day meal was ready. Before he had
finished his dinner there was a tap at the door, and then a
young fellow whom he knew to be employed in Mr. Jer-
voise’s stables looked in.
Charlie sprang to his feet.
“What's the news?†he asked.
“Master Harry bade me tell you, sir, that a magistrate
and four constables and ten soldier men came to-day at nine
o’clock. He had returned but a half-hour when they rode
up. They had an order for the arrest of Mr. Jervoise, and
have been searching the house high and low for papers.
No one is allowed to leave the place, but Master Harry
came out to the stables and gave me his orders, and I did
not find much difficulty in slipping out without their notic-
ing me. Mr. Harry said that he had no news of Mr.
Jervoise, nor any other news save what I have told you.
He bade me return at once, as later on he may want to send
me again. I was to be most careful that no one should see
me when I got back, and if I was caught I was on no
account to say where I had been to.â€
The farmer insisted upon the young fellow sitting down
at the table and taking some food before he started to
go back. He required no pressing, but as soon as his
hunger was satisfied he started again at a brisk run,
which he kept up as long as Charlie’s eye could follow him
down the valley.
Although the boy by no means wished Mr. Jervoise to be
involved in his father’s trouble, Charlie could not help
feeling a certain amount of pleasure at the news. He
thought it certain that if his father escaped he would have
to leave the country, and that he would in that case take
him as companion in his flight. If Mr. Jervoise and Harry
also left the country, it would be vastly more pleasant for
both his father and himself. Where they would go to or
46 A JACOBITE EXILE
what they would do he -had no idea, but it seemed to him
that exile among strangers would be bearable if he had his
friend with him. It would not last many years, for surely
the often talked-of landing could not be very much longer
delayed; then they would return, share in the triumph of
the Stuart cause, and resume their life at Lynnwood, and
reckon with those who had brought this foul charge against
them.
That the Jacobite cause could fail to triumph was a con-
tingency to which Charlie did not give evena thought. He
had been taught that it was a just and holy cause. All his
school friends as well as the gentlemen who visited his
father were firm adherents of it, and he believed that the
same sentiments must everywhere prevail. ‘There was then
nothing but the troops of William to reckon with, and these
could hardly oppose a rising of the English people backed
by aid from France.
It was not until after dark that the messenger returned.
“Master Harry bade me tell you, sir, that a gipsy boy he
had never seen before, has brought him a little note from
his father. He will not return at present, but if Mr. Harry
can manage to slip away unnoticed in the afternoon to-mor-
row he is to come here. He is not to come direct, but to
make a circuit lest he should be watched and followed, and
it may be that the master will meet him here.â€
Charlie was very glad to hear this. Harry could, of
course, give him little news of what was going on outside
the house, but Mr. Jervoise might be able to tell him some-
thing about his father, especially as he had said he had
means of learning what went on in Lancaster jail.
He was longing to be doing something. It seemed intol-
erable to him that he should be wandering aimlessly among
the hills, while his father was lying in Lancaster with a
charge affecting his life hanging over him. What he could
do he knew not, but anything would be better than doing
DENOUNCED F 47
nothing. Mr. Jervoise had seemed to think that it was out
of the question to attempt a rescue from Lancaster; but
surely if he could get together forty or fifty determined fel-
lows, a sudden assault upon the place might be successful.
Then he set to work reckoning up the grooms, the younger
tenants, and the sons of the older ones, and jotted down
the names of twenty-seven who he thought might join in
the attempt.
“If Harry could get twenty-three from his people, that
would make it up to the number,†he said. “Of course I
don’t know what the difficulties to be encountered may be.
I have ridden there with my father, and I know that the cas-
tle is a strong one, but I did not notice it very particularly.
The first thing to do will be to go and examine it closely.
No doubt ladders will be required, but we could make rope-
ladders and take them into the town in a cart hidden under
faggots, or something of that sort. I do hope Mr. Jervoise
will come to-morrow. It is horrible waiting here in sus-
pense.â€
The next morning the hours seemed endless. Half a
dozen times he went restlessly in and out, walking a little
distance up the hill rising from the valley, and returning
again with the vain idea that Mr. Jervoise might have
arrived. Still more slowly did the time appear to go after
dinner. He was getting into a fever of impatience and
anxiety, when about five o’clock he saw a figure coming
down the hillside from the right. It was too far away to
recognize with certainty, but by the rapid pace at which
he descended the hill he had little doubt that it was Harry,
and he at once started at the top of his speed to meet him,
The doubt was soon changed into a certainty. When, a
few hundred yards up the hill, he met his friend both were
almost breathless. Harry was the first to gasp out:
“Has my father arrived?â€
“Not yet.â€
48 A JACOBITE EXILE
Harry threw himself down on the short grass with an
exclamation of thankfulness. ‘I have run nearly every foot
of the way,†he said, as soon as he got his breath a little.
“Thad awful difficulty in getting out. One of the constables
kept in the same room with me, and followed me wherever
I went. ‘They evidently thought I might hear from my
father or try to send him a message. At last I got desper-
ate, and ran upstairs to that room next mine and closed and
locked the door after me. You know the ivy grows high up
the wall there, and directly I got in I threw open the case-
ment and climbed down by it. It gave way two or three
times and I thought I was gone, but I stuck to it and
managed each time to get a fresh hold. The moment I
was down I ran along by the foot of the wall until I got
round behind, made a dash into that clump of fir-trees,
crawled along in a ditch till I thought I was safe, and then
made a run for it. I was so afraid of being followed that
I have been at least three miles round, but I don’t mind
now that my father hasn’t arrived. I was in such a fright
that he might come and go before I got here.â€
CHAPTER III
A RESCUE
‘Pee two lads walked slowly down the hill together.
Harry had heard no more than Charlie had done of
what was going on. The messenger from his father was a
young fellow of seventeen or eighteen, with a gipsy face
and appearance; how he had managed to elude the vigi-
lance of the men on watch Harry did not know. He him-
self had only learnt his presence when, as he passed some
bushes in the garden, a sharp whisper made him stop, and
a moment later a hand was thrust through the foliage. He
took the little note held out, and caught sight of the lad’s
face through the leaves as he leant forward and said—‘ Go
on, sir, without stopping; they may be watching you.â€
Harry had thrust the note into his pocket anu sauntered on
for some time, he then returned to the house and there read
the letter, with whose contents Charlie was already ac-
quainted. Jagerly they talked over what each had been
thinking of since they had parted early on the previous
day, and discussed Charlie’s idea of an attack on Lancas-
ter jail.
“JT don’t know whether I could get as many men as you
gay, Charlie. I don’t think I could. If my father were
in prison as well as yours I am sure that most of the young
fellows on the estate would gladly help to rescue him, but
49
50 A JACOBITE EXILE
it would be a different thing when it came to risking their
lives for anyone else. Of course [ don’t know, but it does
not seem to me that fifty men would be of any use at all
towards taking Lancaster Castle. It always seemed to me
a tremendously strong place.â€
“Yes, it does look so, Harry; but perhaps on examining
it closely, one would find that it is not so strong as it looks
by a long way. It seems to me there must be some way or
other of getting father out, and if there seems even the
least bit of a chance I shall try it.â€
“And you may be sure I will stand by you, Charlie,
whatever it is,†Harry said heartily. “We have been
just like brothers, and of course brothers ought to stick to
each other like anything; if they don’t, what is the use of
being brothers? I daresay we shall know more when we
hear what my father has to say, and then we may see our
way better.†<
“Thank you, Harry, I knew you would stick byme. Of
course I don’t want to do any mad sort of thing. There
is no hurry anyhow, and, as you say, when we know more
about it we may be able to hit upon some sort of plan.â€
It was not until eight o’clock that Mr. Jervoise arrived.
He looked grievously tired and worn out, but he spoke
cheerfully as he came in. “I have had a busy two days
of it, boys, as you may guess. I have no particularly good
news to tell you, but on the other hand I have no bad
news. I was in time to warn all our friends, and when the
soldiers came for them in the morning it was only to find
that their nests were empty. They have been searching
the houses of all Sir Marmaduke’s tenants, Charlie, and
questioning man, woman, and child as to whether they have
seen you. Ah! here is supper, and I am nearly famished.
However, I can go on talking while I eat. I should have
been here sooner, but I have been waiting for the return
of the messenger I sent to Lancaster.
A RESCUE 51
“Yesterday morning there was an examination of your
father, Charlie, or rather an examination of the testimony
against him. First the two letters that were discovered
were putin. Without having got them word for word, my
informer was able to give me the substance of them. Both
were unsigned, and professed to. have been written in
France. ‘The first is dated three months back. It alludes
to a conversation that somebody is supposed to have had
with Sir Marmaduke, and states that the agent who had
visited him, and who is spoken of as Mr. H. » had as-
sured them that your father was perfectly ready to join in
any well-conceived design for putting a stop to the suffer-
ings that afflicted the country through the wars into which
the foreign intruder had plunged it, even though the plan
entailed the removal of the usurper. The writer assured
Sir Marmaduke of the satisfaction that such an agreement
on his part had caused at Saint Germains, and had height-
ened the high esteem in which Sir Marmaduke was held
for his long fidelity to the cause of his majesty. It then
went on to state that a plan had been already formed, and
that several gentlemen in the south were deeply pledged to
carry it out, but that it was thought specially advisable that
some from the north should also take part in it, as from
their persons being unknown near the court they could act
with more surety and safety. They would, therefore, be
glad if he would take counsel with the friends he had men-
tioned as to what might seem to them the best course of
proceeding. ‘There was no occasion for any great haste,
and indeed some weeks must elapse before the blow was
struck, in order that preparations should be made in
France for taking instant advantage of it.
“The rest of the letter was to the same purpose, but was
really a repetition of it. The second letter was dated
some time later, and was as before an answer to one the
knight was supposed to have written. It highly approved
52 A JACOBITE EXILE
of the suggestions therein made, that Sir Marmaduke and
his friends should travel separately and at a few days’
interval to London, and should take lodgings there in
different parts of the town, and await the signal to assem-
ble near Richmond when it was known that the king would
go hunting there. It said that special note had been made
of the offer of Sir Marmaduke’s son to mingle among
the king’s attendants and to fire the first shot, as in the
confusion he would be able to escape, and being but a
boy, as he said, none would be able to recognize him
afterwards.
“In the event, of course, of the first shot failing, the
rest of the party gathered in a body would rush forward,
despatch the usurper, cut their way sword in hand through
any who barred their path to the point where their horses
were concealed, and then at once scatter in various direc-
tions. For this great service his majesty would not fail to
evince the deepest gratitude upon his restoration to his
rightful throne, and pledged his royal word that each of
the party should receive rank and dignity, together with
ample estates, from the lands of which the chief supporters
of the usurper would be deprived.
“So you see, Charlie, you were to have the honour of
playing the chief part in this tragedy.â€
“Honour indeed!†Charlie exclaimed passionately.
“Dishonour, sir, Was there ever so infamous a plot!â€
“Tt is a well-laid plot, Charlie, and does credit to the
scoundrel who planned it. You see, he made certain that
Sir Marmaduke would be attainted and his estates for-
feited, but there existed just a possibility that as you are
but a boy, though a good big one, it might be thought that,
as you were innocent of the business, a portion at least of
the estate might be handed to you. ‘To prevent this it
was necessary that you also should be mixed up in the
affair.â€
A RESCUE 53
“Has John Dormay appeared in the matter so far, Mr,
Jervoise?â€
“Not openly, Charlie. My informant knows that there
have been two or three meetings of Whig magistrates with
closed doors, and that at these he has been present, and he
has no doubt whatever that it is he who has set the ball
rolling. Still there is no proof of this, and he did not
appear yesterday. ‘The man who did appear was the rascal
who tried to overhear us the other night. He stated that
he had been instigated by a gentleman of great loyalty—
here one of the magistrates broke in, and said no name
must be mentioned—to enter the household of Sir Marma-
duke, a gentleman who, as he believed, was trafficking with
the king’s enemies. He had agreed to do this in spite of
the danger of such employment, moved thereto not so much
by the hope of a reward as from his great loyalty to his
majesty, and a desire to avert from him his great danger
from popish plots. Having succeeded in entering Sir
Marmaduke’s service, he soon discovered that six gentle-
men, to wit, myself and five friends, were in the habit of
meeting at Lynnwood, where they had long and secret talks.
Knowing the deep enmity and hostility these men bore
towards his gracious majesty, he determined to run any
hazard even to the loss of his life to learn the purport of
such gatherings, and did therefore conceal himself, on one
occasion behind the hangings of a window, and on another
listened at an open casement, and did hear much conversa-
tion regarding the best manner in which the taking of the
king’s life could be accomplished. ‘This it was agreed
should be done in the forest at Richmond, where all should
lie in wait, the said Sir Marmaduke Carstairs undertaking
that he and his son would, in the first place, fire with pistol
or musquetoon, and that only if they should fail the rest
should charge forward on horse, overthrow the king’s com-
panions, and despatch him, Mr. William Jervoise under-
54 A JACOBITE EXILE
taking the management of this part of the enterprise. No
date was settled for this wicked business, it being, however,
agreed that all should journey separately to London, and
take up their lodging there under feigned names, lying hid
until they heard from a friend at court, whose name was
not mentioned, a day on which the king would hunt at
Richmond. He further testified that, making another
attempt to overhear the conspirators in order that he might
gather fuller details as to the manner of the plot, he was
seen by Master Charles Carstairs, who, taking him by sur-
prise, grievously assaulted him, and that he and the others
would have slain him, had he not overthrown Master Car-
stairs and effected his escape before the others, rushing out
sword in hand, had time to assail him.
“During his stay at Lynnwood he had several times
watched at the window of the room where Sir Marmaduke
Carstairs sits when alone, and where he writes his letters
and transacts business, and that he observed him more than
once peruse attentively papers that seemed to be of impor-
tance, for after reading them he would lay them down and
walk, as if disturbed or doubtful in mind, up and down the
room, and these papers he placed when he had done with
them in the bottom drawer of a desk in his cabinet, the said
desk being always carefully locked by him.
“That is all that I learnt from Lancaster, save that in-
structions have been given that no pains should be spared
to secure the persons of those engaged in the plot, and that
a special watch was to be set at the northern ports, lest they
should, finding their guilt discovered, try to escape from
the kingdom. So you see that your good father, Sir
Marmaduke, is in a state of sore peril, and that the rest of
us, including yourself, will be in a like strait if they can
lay hands on us.â€
“But it is all false!†Charlie exclaimed. “It is a lie
from beginning to end.â€
A RESCUE 55
“That is so, but we cannot prove it. The matter is so
cunningly laid, I see no way to pick a hole in it. We are
Jacobites, and as such long regarded as objects of suspicion
by the Whig magistrates and others. There have been
other plots against William’s life, in which men of seeming
reputation have been concerned. ‘This man’s story will be
confirmed by the man who set him on, and by other hidden
papers if necessary. As to the discovery of the documents,
we may know well enough that the fellow himself put them
there, but we have no manner of proof of it. It is evident
that there is nothing for us but to leave the country, and to
await the time when the king shall have his own again. My
other friends, who were with me this afternoon when the
news came from Lancaster, all agreed that it would be
throwing away our lives to stay here. We all have money
by us, for each has for years laid by something for the
time when money will be required to aid the king on his
arrival.
“Having agreed to take this course, we drew up a docu-
ment, which we all signed, and which will be sent in when
we have got clear away. In it we declare that being
informed that accusations of being concerned in a plot
against the life of William of Orange have been brought
against us, we declare solemnly before God that we, and
also Sir Marmaduke Carstairs and his son, are wholly inno-
cent of the charge, and that although we do not hesitate to
declare that we consider the title of the said William to be
king of this realm to be wholly unfounded and without
reason, and should therefore take up arms openly against it
on behalf of our sovereign did occasion offer, yet that we
hold assassination in abhorrence, and that the crime with
which we are charged is as hateful in our sight as in that
of any Whig gentleman. As, however, we are charged, as
we learn, by evilly disposed and wicked persons, of this
design, and have no means of proving our innocence, we
56 A JACOBITE EXILE
are forced to leave the realm until such time shall arrive
when we can rely on a fair trial, when our reputation and
honour will weigh against the word of suborned perjurers
and knaves.
“We were not forgetful of your father’s case, and we
debated long as to whether our remaining here could do
him service. We even discussed the possibility of raising
a force and attacking Lancaster Castle. We agreed, how-
ever, that this would be nothing short of madness. ‘The
country is wholly unprepared at present. ‘The Whigs are
on the alert, and such an attempt would cost the lives of
most of those concerned in it; besides we are all sure that
Sir Marmaduke would be the first to object to numbers of
persons risking their lives in an attempt which, even if for
the moment successful, must bring ruin upon all concerned
in it. Nor do we see that were we to remain and to stand
in the dock beside him, it would aid him. Our word
- would count for no more than would this protest and
‘denial that we have signed together. A prisoner’s plea
of not guilty has but a feather’s weight against sworn
evidence.
“At the same time, Charlie, I do not intend to leave the
country until Iam sure that nothing can be done. As force
is out of the question, I have advised the others to lose not
an hour in trying to escape, and by this time they are all
on the road. ‘I'wo are making for Bristol, one for South-
ampton, and two for London. It would be too dangerous
to attempt to escape by one of the northern ports; but
though force cannot succeed, we may be able to effect your
father’s escape by other means, and it is for this purpose
that I am determined to stay, and I shall do so until all
hope is gone. Alone you could effect nothing; but I,
knowing who are our secret friends, may be able to use
them to advantage. We will stay here to-night, but to-
morrow we must change our quarters, for the search will
A RESCUE 57
be a close one. During the day we will go far up
over the hills, but to-morrow night we will make for
Lancaster. I have warned friends there to expect us, and
it is the last place where they would think of searching
for us.â€
“You will take me with you too, father?†Harry ex-
claimed eagerly; while Charlie expressed his gratitude to
Mr. Jervoise for thus determining to risk his own life in
the endeavour to effect the escape of Sir Marmaduke.
“Yes, I intend to take you with me, Harry. ‘They will
pretend, of course, that in spite of our assertions of inno-
cence, our flight is a confession of guilt, and you may be
sure that we shall be condemned in our absence, and our
estates declared confiscated, and bestowed upon some of
William’s minions. ‘There will be no place for you here.
My own plans are laid. As you know, your mother came
from the other side of the border, and a cousin of hers,
with whom I am well acquainted, has gone over to
sweden, and holds a commission in the army that the
young king is raising to withstand Russia and Saxony; for
both are thinking of taking goodly slices of his domains.
I could not sit down quietly in exile, and being but forty
Iam not too old for service, and shall take a commission
if I can obtain it. There are many Scottish Jacobites,
who, having fled rather than acknowledge Dutch William
as their king, have taken service in Sweden, where their
fathers fought under the great Gustavus Adolphus; and
even if I cannot myself take service, it may be that I shall
be able to obtain a commission for you. You are nearly
sixteen, and there are many officers no older. Should evil
befall your father, Charlie, which I earnestly hope will not
be the case, I shall regard you as my son, and shall do the
same for you as for Harry. And now I will to rest, for I
have scarce slept the last two nights, and we must be in the
saddle long before daybreak.â€
58 A JACOBITE EXILE
The little bed-room that Charlie had used the two previ-
ous nights was given up to Mr. Jervoise, while Harry and
Charlie slept on some sheep-skins in front of the kitchen
fire. Two hours before daybreak they mounted, and,
guided by the farmer, rode to a shepherd’s hut far up
among the hills. Late in the afternoon a boy came up
from the farm with the news that the place had been
searched by a party of troopers. They had ridden away
without discovering that the fugitives had been at the farm,
but four of the party had been left in case Mr. Jervoise
should come there. The farmer, therefore, warned them
against coming back that way, as had been intended,
naming another place where he would meet them. As
soon as the sun was setting they mounted, and, accompa-
nied by the shepherd on a rough pony, started for Lan-
caster.
After riding for three hours they stopped at a lonely
farmhouse, at which Mr. Jervoise and his friends had held
their meeting on the previous day. Here they changed
their clothes for others that had been sent for their use
from Lancaster. Mr. Jervoise was attired as a small trader,
and the lads in garb suitable to boys in the same rank of
life. They still, however, retained their swords and the
pistols in their holsters. Three miles farther they met
their host as arranged at some cross-roads, and rode on
until within three miles of Lancaster. They then dis-
mounted, placed their pistols in their belts, and handed
their horses to the two men, who would take them back to
the hut in the hills, where they would remain until re-
quired. It was two o’clock in the morning when they
entered Lancaster, and going up to a small house standing
in a garden in the outskirts of the town, Mr. Jervoise gave
three low knocks in quick succession. ‘The door was
opened almost immediately. No light was shown, and
they entered in the dark, but as soon as the door was closed
A RESCUE : 59
behind them a woman came out with a candle from an
inner room.
“Tam glad to see you safe, Mr. Jervoise,†a man said.
“My wife and I were beginning to be anxious, fearing that
you might have fallen into the hands of your enemies.â€
“No, all has gone well, Herries; but it is a long ride
from the hills here, and we walked the last three miles, as
we wanted to get the horses back again before daylight.
We are deeply grateful to you for giving us shelter.â€
““T would be ready to do more than that,†the man said,
“for the sake of the good cause. My wife’s father and
mine both fell at Naseby, and we are as loyal to the Stuarts
as they were. You are heartily welcome, sir, and as we
keep no servant there will be none to gossip. You can
either remain in the house, in which case none will know
of your presence here; or if you wish to go abroad in the
town I will accompany you, and will introduce you to any
acquaintance I may meet as a cousin of my wife, who with
his two sons has come over from Preston to pay us a visit.
I don’t think that anyone would know you in that attire.â€
“T will run no more risks than are necessary, Herries.
Those I wish to see will visit me here, and if I go out at
all it will not be until after dark.â€
For a fortnight they remained at the house. After dark
each day a man paid Mr, Jervoise a visit. He was the
magistrates’ clerk, and had an apartment in the castle.
From him they learned that a messenger had been de-
spatched to London with an account of the evidence taken
in Sir Marmaduke’s case, and that at the end of twelve
days he had returned with orders that all prisoners and wit-
nesses were to be sent to town, where they would be exam-
ined in the first place by his majesty’s council, and where
Sir Marmaduke’s trial for high treason would take place.
They were to be escorted by a party of twelve troopers,
under the command of a lieutenant.
60 A JACOBITE EXILE
The fugitives had before learned that the search for Mr.
Jervoise had been given up; it being supposed that he with
his son and young Carstairs had, with their accomplices,
all ridden for the coast at the first alarm, and had probably
taken ship for France before the orders had arrived that all
outgoing vessels should be searched.
Harry and Charlie had both been away for two or three
days, and had been occupied in getting together ten young
fellows from the two estates, who would be willing and
ready to attempt to rescue Sir Marmaduke from his cap-
tors’ hands. ‘They were able to judge with tolerable accu-
racy when the messenger would return from London, and
two days previously the men had been directed to ride
singly and by different roads, and to put up at various
small inns in Manchester, each giving out that he was a
farmer in from the country, either to purchase supplies or
to meet with a customer likely to buy some cattle he
wished to dispose of. Charlie had paid a visit to Lynn-
wood, and had gone by the long passage into the Priest’s
Chamber, and had carried off the gold hidden there. As
soon as it was known that the messenger had returned,
Herries had borrowed a horse and had ridden with a note
to the farmer, telling him to go up to the hills and bring
the horses down with one of his own to the place where
he had parted from them when they entered Lancaster.
There he was met by Mr. Jervoise and the lads, and
mounting, they started with the spare horse for Blackburn,
choosing that line in preference to the road through Pres-
ton, as there were troops stationed at the latter town. ‘The
next day they rode on to Manchester. ‘They went round
that evening to the various inns where the men had put
up, and directed them to discover whether, as was proba-
ble, the escort was to arrive that night. If so, they were
to mount at daybreak and assemble where the road crossed
the moor three miles north of Chapel-le-Frith, where they
A RESCUE 61
would find Mr. Jervoise awaiting them. At nine o'clock
that evening the troop rode in, and at daybreak Mr. Jer-
voise and the boys started. Two of the men were already
at the spot indicated, and half an hour later the whole of
them had arrived.
Mr. Jervoise led them back to a spat that he had selected,
where the road dipped into a deep valley, in which, shel-
tered from the winds, was a small wood. Leaving one at
the edge to give warning directly the escort appeared on
the road over the brow, he told the rest to dismount. Most
of them were armed with pistols, all had swords. “Do
you,†he said, “who are good shots with your pistols, fire
at the men when I give the word—let the rest aim at the
horses. The moment you have opened fire dash forward
and fallonthem. We are already as numerous as they are,
and we ought to be able to dismount or disable four or five
of them with our first fire. I shall give the order as Sir
Marmaduke arrives opposite me. Probably the officer will
be riding. I shall make the officer my special mark, for it
may be that he has orders to shoot the prisoner if any
rescue is attempted.
“T don’t suppose they will be at all prepared for an
attack. ‘They were vigilant, no doubt, for the first two
days, but once out of Lancashire they will think that there
is no longer any fear of an attempt at rescue. Pursue
those that escape for half a mile or so, and then draw rein,
and as soon as they are out of sight strike due north across
the fells. Keep to the east of Glossop, and then make your
way singly to your homes. It will be better for you to
travel up through Yorkshire till you are north of Ingle-
borough, so as to come down from the north to your farms.
I know that you have all engaged in this affair for love of
Sir Marmaduke or myself, and because you hate to see a
loyal gentleman made the victim of lying knaves, but when
we come back with the king you may be sure that Sir
62 A JACOBITE EXILE
Marmaduke and I will well reward the services you have
rendered.â€
It was an hour before the man on the look-out warned
them that the troop had just appeared over the hill. They
mounted now, and, pistol in hand, awaited the arrival of
the party. Two troopers came first, trotting carelessly
along, laughing and smoking. A hundred yards behind
came the main body, four troopers first, then the lieutenant
and Sir Marmaduke, followed by the other six troopers.
With outstretched arm and pistol pointed through the under-
growth, Mr. Jervoise waited till the officer, who was riding
on his side of the road, came abreast of him. He had
already told the boys that he intended to aim at his
shoulder.
“They are the enemies of the king,†he said, “but I
cannot in cold blood shoot down a man with whom I have
no cause for quarrel. I can depend upon my aim, and he
will not be twelve paces from the muzzle of my pistol.â€
He fired, the officer gave a sudden start and reeled on
his horse, and before he could recover himself the band.
who had fired at the flash of the first pistol, dashed out
through the bushes and fell upon the troopers. Jour men
had dropped, one horse had fallen, and two others were
plunging wildly as with a shout their assailants dashed upon
them. All who could turn their horse’s head rode furiously
off, some along the road forward, others back towards
Manchester. ‘The lieutenant’s horse had rolled over with
him, as that of Mr. Jervoise struck it on the shoulder with
the full impetus of its spring.
“Tt is all over, Sir Marmaduke, and you are a free man.
We have nothing to do now but to ride for it.†And before
the knight had fairly recovered from his astonishment, he
found himself riding south across the moor with his son on
one side of him and Mr. Jervoise and Harry on the other.
“You have saved my life, Jervoise,†he said, holding out
CUARLIE AND HIS FRIENDS RESCUE SIR MARMADUKE,
A RESCUE 63
his hand to his friend. “They had got me so firmly in
their clutches that I thought my chances were at an end.
How are you, Charlie? I am right glad to see you safe and
sound, for they had managed to include you in their pre-
tended plot, and for aught I knew you had been all this
time lying in a cell next mine in Lancaster Castle. But
who are the good fellows who helped you?â€
Mr. Jervoise briefly gave an account of the affair. “They
are only keeping up a sham pursuit of the soldiers, so as to
send them well on their way. I told them not to overtake
them, as there was no occasion for any further bloodshed
when you were once out of their hands. By to-morrow
morning they will all be at work on their farms again, and
if they keep their own counsel need not fear.â€
Suddenly Sir Marmaduke reined in his horse.
“We are riding south,†he said.
“Certainly we are,†Mr. Jervoise said. “Why not?
That is our only chance of safety. They will, in the first
place, suspect us of having doubled back to the hills, and
will search every farmhouse and cottage. Our only hope
of escape is to ride either for Bristol or one of the southern
ports.†<
“T must go back,†Sir Marmaduke said doggedly. “I
must kill that scoundrel John Dormay before I do anything
else. It is he who has wound this precious skein in order
to entrap us, expecting, the scoundrel, to have my estates
bestowed on him as a reward.â€
“Tt were madness to ride back now, Sir Marmaduke. It
would cost you your life, and you would leave Charlie here
fatherless, and with but little chance of ever regaining the
estate. You have but to wait for a time, and everything
will right itself. As soon as the king comes to his own
your estates will be restored, and then I would not seek to
stay your hand if you sought vengeance upon this cunning
knave,â€
64 A JACOBITE EXILE
“Besides, father,†Charlie put in, “much as he deserves
any punishment you can give him, you would not kill cousin
Celia’s husband and Ciceley’s father. When the truth is
all made known his punishment will be bitter enough, for
no honest man would offer him a hand, or sit down to a
meal with him. Ciceley has been as a young sister to me,
and her mother has ever been as kind as if she had been
my aunt. I would not see them grieved even if that rogue
came off scot-free from punishment; but at any rate, father,
I pray you to let it pass at present. This time we have
happily got you out of the clutches of the Whigs, but if you
fell into them again you may be sure they would never give
us another chance.â€
Sir Marmaduke still sat irresolute, and Charlie went
on: “Besides, father, Mr. Jervoise has risked his life in
lingering in Lancashire to save you, and the brave fellows
who aided us to rescue you have risked theirs both in the
fray and afterwards, if their share in it should ever be known,
and it would not be fair to risk failure after all they have
done. I pray you, father, be guided by the opinion of your
good friend Mr. Jervoise.â€
Sir Marmaduke touched his horse’s flank with his heel.
“You have prevailed, Charlie; your last argument decided
me. Ihave no right to risk my life after my good friends
have done so much to save me. John Dormay may enjoy
his triumph for a while, but a day of reckoning will surely
come. Now tell me of the others, Jervoise. Have all
escaped in safety?â€
“All. Your boy brought me the news of your arrest and
that we were charged with plotting William’s assassination.
I rode that night with the news, and next day all were on
the road to the coast, and were happily on board and away
before the news of their escape could be sent to the
ports.â€
“And now, what are your plans, Jervoise—that is, if you
A RESCUE 65
have any plans beyond reaching a port and taking ship for
France?â€
“T am going to Sweden,†Mr. Jervoise said, and then
repeated the reasons that he had given Charlie for taking
this step.
“T am too old for the wars,†Sir Marmaduke said. “I
was sixty last birthday, and though I am still strong and
active, and could strike a shrewd blow in case of need, I
am too old for the fatigues and hardships of campaigning.
I could not hope at my age to obtain a commission in the
Swedish service.â€
“No, I did not think of your joining the army, Sir Mar-
maduke, though I warrant you would do as well as most,
but I thought that you might take up your residence at
Stockholm as well as at St.Germains. You will find many
Scottish gentlemen there, and not a few Jacobites, who,
like yourself, have been forced to fly. Besides, both the
life and air would suit you better than at St. Germains,
where by all accounts the life is a gay one, and men come
to think more of pleasure than of duty. Moreover, your
money will go much further in Sweden than in France.â€
Sir Marmaduke, checking the horse’s speed, said, “1
have not so much as a penny in my pocket, and methinks
I am like to have some trouble in getting at the hoard
I have been collecting ever since Dutch William came
to the throne for the benefit of His Majesty when he
arrives.â€
“Vou will have no trouble in getting at that, father,â€
Charlie said laughing, “seeing that you have nothing to do
but to lean over and pat your hand into my holsters, which
are so full, as you see, that I am forced to carry my pistols
in my belt.â€
“What mean you, lad?â€
“T mean, father, that I have the whole of the hoard that
was stowed away in the priest’s hiding-place;†and he then
C6 A JACOBITE EXILE
related how Banks had revealed to him the secret of the
hiding-place, and how he had, the night before Sir Marma-
duke was removed from Lancaster Castle, visited the place
and carried away the money. “I could not see Banks,†he
said, “but I left a few words on a scrap of paper, saying
that it was I who had taken the money, otherwise he would
have been in a terrible taking when he discovered that it
was gone.â€
“That is right good news indeed, lad. For twelve years
T have set aside half my rents, so that in those bags in
your holsters there are six years’ income, and the interest
of that money laid out in good mortgages will suffice
amply for my wants in a country like Sweden, where life is
simple and living cheap. The money itself shall remain
untouched for your use should our hopes fail and the estates
be lost for alltime. That is indeed a weight off my mind.
And you are, I hope, in equally good case, Jervoise, for if
not, you know that I would gladly share with you?â€
“T am in very good case, Sir Marmaduke, though I none
the less thank you for your offer. I too have, as you know,
put aside half my income. My estates are not so large as
those of Lynnwood. Their acreage may be as large, but
a good deal of it is mountain land, worth but little. My
fund, therefore, is not as large as yours, but it amounts to
a good round sum; and as I hope, either in the army or in
some other way, to earn an income for myself, it is ample.
I shall be sorry to divert it from the use for which IJ in-
tended it, but that cannot now be helped. I have had the
pleasure year by year of putting it by for the king’s use,
and now that circumstances have changed, it will be
equally useful to myself.â€
“Do you know this country well, Jervoise?â€
“Personally I know nothing about it save that the sun
tells me that at present I am travelling south, Sir Marma-
duke; but for the last few days I have been so closely
A RESCUE 67
studying a map that I know the name of every town and
village on the various routes.â€
“And whither think you of going?â€
“To London or Southampton. Strangers are far less
noticed in large towns than in small, and we could hardly
hope to find a ship bound for Sweden in any of the Dorset
or Devon ports.â€
CHAPTER IV
IN SWEDEN
FTER much discussion the party agreed that it would
be best to make for Southampton. ‘The road thither
was less frequented than that leading to London, and there
were fewer towns to be passed and less chance of interrup-
tion. Mr. Jervoise had brought with him a valise and suit
of clothes for Sir Marmaduke, of sober cut and fashion.
They avoided all large towns, and at the places where they
put up represented themselves as traders travelling from
the Midlands to the southern coast, and they arrived at
Southampton without having excited the smallest suspicion.
Indeed, throughout the journey they had heard no word of
the affray near Chapel-le-Frith, and knew, therefore, that
the news had not travelled as fast as they had. At South-
ampton, however, they had scarcely put up at an inn when
the landlord said:
“T suppose, gentlemen, they are talking of nothing else
in London but the rescue of a desperate Jacobite by his
friends. ‘The news only reached here yesterday.â€
“Tt has occasioned a good deal of scare,†Mr. Jervoise
replied. “I suppose there is no word of the arrest of the
man or his accomplices? We have travelled but slowly,
and the news may have passed us on the way.â€
“Not as yet,†the landlord replied. “They say that all
the northern and eastern ports are watched, and they make
68
IN SWEDEN 69
sure of catching him if he presents himself there. The
general opinion is that he will for a time go into hiding
with his friends in the hills of Cumberland or Westmore-
land, or perhaps on the Yorkshire moors; but they are sure
to catch him sooner or later.â€
“It is a bad business altogether,†Mr. Jervoise said,
“and we can only hope that all guilty persons will in time
get the punishment they so well deserve. How can trade
be carried on if the country is to be disturbed by plots and
conspiracies?â€
“ How, indeed?†the landlord repeated heartily. “Ido
not meddle in politics, being content to earn my living
by my business, and to receive all who can pay their reck-
oning, without caring a jot whether they be Whigs or
Tories?â€
The next morning Mr. Jervoise and Sir Marmaduke went
down to the port, leaving the lads to wander about the
town at their pleasure, as two persons were likely to attract
less attention than four. They found that there were two
vessels in port loading with munitions of war for Sweden,
and that one of them would sail shortly. They at once
went on board her and saw the captain.
“Do you carry any passengers?â€
“None have applied so far,†the captain said; “but if
they were to offer I should not say no to them.â€
“We want to take passage for Sweden,†Mr. Jervoise
said. “The King of that country is, as they say, fitting out
an army. Clothes are as necessary for troops as swords
and guns, and we think we could obtain a contract for these
goods. ‘There is no hope of doing so unless we ourselves
§0 over, and though sorely loath to do so, for neither of us
have ever before set foot on board a ship, we determined on
making the journey together with our two clerks, for whom
we will take passage at the same rate as for ourselves, seeing
that they are both related to us.â€
70 A JACOBITE EXILE
“Have you any goods with you?â€
“We shall take over but a bale or two of cloth as samples
of the goods we can supply; but beyond that we have but
little luggage, seeing that our stay may be a very short one.â€
There was a little haggling for terms, as the two gentle-
men did not wish to appear eager to go; but the matter
was finally settled to the satisfaction of both parties. On
their return to the inn Mr. Jervoise took the host aside.
“We have business connected with our trade in cloth in
Sweden, where we hope to obtain a large contract. The
matter may occupy us a week, or a month or two for aught
we know, and we do not want our horses to be eating their
heads off here while we are away. Besides, we may be able
on our return to take a passage to one of the Devonshire
ports, which would suit us much better, but we should not
be able to do so if there were need for returning here for our
horses. ‘Therefore, we would fain dispose of them, and if
you can find us a purchaser by to-morrow night we will pay
you a fair commission on the money we receive.â€
“T doubt not that I can do that readily enough,†the
landlord said. “Three of them are fine animals, fit for any
gentleman’s riding; the other is a stout hackney. ‘Trust
me, I will get the best price I can for them.â€
‘The next day he came up to their room. ‘TI have had a
good offer for the horses,†he said. ‘Iwo gentlemen who
arrived yesterday from France, and are staying at the inn of
a friend of mine, are requiring horses for themselves and
their servants, and I have promised my friend a slice of my
commission if he will bring them round hither. Will you
name your price for them?â€
“No, I would rather not,†Mr. Jervoise said cautiously.
“Tf we asked too high a figure we might frighten the pur-
chasers away; if we should ask too little we should be the
losers. I daresay they have named to your friend the price
they are willing to give. You had better ask from them a
IN SWEDEN 71
good bit above that, then you can come down little by little,
and maybe, seeing the horses are really good ones, they may
advance a bit. I am not used to a horse deal, and will
leave it to you to make the bargain. We are sorry to part
with the animals, but they might die on the voyage, or get
so injured as to be worthless; and, moreover, we shall have
no use for them there. ‘Therefore, as we must sell we are
ready to take the best terms we can get.â€
When they returned to the inn, after an absence of two
hours, they found that the landlord had sold the horses for
a sum nearly approaching their value, the gentlemen being
as anxious to purchase them as they were to sell. ‘The next
day they bought three or four rolls of west country cloth
and a supply of clothes suitable to their condition, together
with trunks for their carriage. All these were sent down to
the ship in the course of the afternoon, and they themselves
embarked late in the evening, as she was to set sail at
daybreak.
The lads, accustomed to spacious and airy rooms, were
quite taken aback at the small and stuffy cabin allotted to
their joint use, and slept but badly, for the loading of the
ship continued by torchlight, until within an hour of the
time of their departure. After tossing about for some hours
in their narrow beds they were glad to go on deck and to
plunge their heads into a pail of water, and were then, after
combing their long hair, able to take an interest in what
was passing round them. ‘The sailors were busy stowing
away the cargo last received, tidying the decks, and coiling
down the ropes. ‘There were but few persons on the quay,
for those who had been engaged in loading the cargo had
gone off to bed as soon as the last bale was on board.
In half an hour the sailors began to hoist the sails, the
hawsers were thrown off, and with a gentle wind blowing aft
the ship glided along past the shore, being helped by the
tide, which had begun to ebb half an hour before. The
72 A JACOBITE EXILE
lads were greatly interested in watching the well-wooded
slope on the left, with the stately ruins of ‘Tintern Abbey
rising above the trees. ‘Vhen they passed the round fort at
the water’s edge on their right, and issued out from South-
ampton Water into the broad sheet between the island and
the mainland. It was dotted with sails, fishing craft and
coasters for the most part, but with some larger ships bound
from the east to Southampton, and others that had come in
through the Solent. ‘This was very entertaining to the boys,
and they were still more pleased when they saw the forti-
fications of Portsmouth, with cannon pointing seaward, and
with many vessels riding in the strait by the side of the
town.
“That fort would give the French or the Dutch a hot
reception were they at any time to think to capture the
dock-yard and shipping,†Sir Marmaduke said.
“The Dutch have already captured the place, and that
without shedding a drop of blood,†Mr. Jervoise remarked.
“That is true enough,†the knight said, stamping his foot
angrily on the deck, “but what has been won so easily may
be lost as quickly. I have seen several changes since I[
can first remember, and I hope I may live to see another.
However, we need not talk of that now.â€
“No, indeed,†Mr. Jervoise agreed. “It may be, Sir
Marmaduke, that it would be better if we had talked and
thought less of it during the last twelve years, better for
ourselves and for these lads. We might still have been
ready to join His Majesty as soon as he landed, but as, till
then, we could do nothing, it seems to me now that it would
have been wiser had we gone about our business without
worrying our heads, to say nothing of risking them, about
amatter that may not take place during our lives; as we
know well enough the King of France uses the Stuarts only
for his own convenience, and at heart cares nothing for
them or their cause. It is convenient to have the means of
IN SWEDEN 73
creating trouble here, and of so weakening William; and
it may be that some day or other it may suit him to send
over an army here to fight William with the aid of the
Stuarts’ friends, instead of fighting him in Holland or else-
where. But whether he may think fit to do so in one year
or in twenty years hence who can say? It is a question
solely of military policy.
“The Stuarts are simply used by the French king to pull
English chestnuts out of the fire. I would that they had
established themselves anywhere rather than in France. It
does them harm with vast numbers who would otherwise be
their friends, at any rate in England. In Scotland it is other-
wise, for Scotland has always been in alliance with France;
but in England it is different. France has always been the
national foe; and had not Charles and James proved them-
selves so subservient to Louis, William of Orange would
never have been crowned king. ‘There are vast numbers in
England who would rather see a Stuart than a Dutchman on
the throne, but who will never strike a blow to replace them
there, and that because they will come over backed up by
French bayonets. Well, let us talk of something else. lf
the time ever comes to act, we shall be ready, but till then
we can let the matter sleep, the more so as we have a new
life before us, and plenty of other things to occupy our
thoughts.â€â€™
“What is it, father,†Harry asked, “that the Swedes and
Danes are going to fight about?â€
“Tt is a difficult question, Harry; but there can be little
doubt that Denmark is in the wrong. The King of
Sweden died in April, 1697. His’ death was unfortunate,
for the powers contending in Europe had all agreed to
refer their quarrels to his mediation. At his death Den-
mark endeavoured to obtain the honour, but failed; and
by the mediation chiefly of the Swedish regency peace was
concluded between France, England, and Holland in the
T4 A JACOBITE EXILE
autumn of that year; and shortly afterwards the struggle
between the German Emperor, France, and Spain was also
concluded, but not at all to the satisfaction of the Swedish
mediators. While Sweden was occupied in this matter of
the pacification of Europe, the King of Denmark thought
to take advantage of the fact that Charles of Sweden was
but a minor, to press Frederick, Duke of Holstein, who was
in close alliance with him.
“There had long been serious differences between the
rulers of Denmark and Holstein, both of whom were
branches of the Oldenburg family, and this in reference to
the Duchy of Schleswig. The quarrel had arisen from the
act of Christian the Third of Denmark, who decreed that
the descendants of his brother Adolphus should govern
Holstein jointly with the King of Denmark, and that Hol-
stein and Schleswig should belong to them in common,
neither making any change in Holstein without the con-
sent of the other A more foolish arrangement could not
have been conceived, for anyone might have foreseen that
it would lead to disputes and troubles. In fact, quarrels
continually arose until, at the Peace of Rosahild in 1658,
the duchy was adjudged to Denmark. Holstein, however,
never acquiesced in this, and in 1675 there was war, when
Holstein being defeated, the Danes imprisoned its duke,
Christian Albertus, until he signed a renunciation of all
his rights.
“Fis troops were disarmed and all his towns and for-
tresses garrisoned by Danish troops. On his release the
duke went to Hamburg, where he remained till at the
Peace of Fontainebleat, four years later, he was replaced
in possession of his estates and rights of sovereignty. But
this did not last long. New troubles arose, but Sweden,
England, and Holland interested themselves in favour of
the duke, and a peace was concluded in 1689, by which he
was confirmed in the rights given him ten years before,
IN SWEDEN 75
with full liberty to raise a certain number of troops and
of building fortresses, on the condition that he should
raise none to the prejudice of Denmark. This was an-
other of those stipulations which inevitably lead to trouble,
for it afforded to Denmark a pretext for continual com-
plaint and interference. When Frederick the Fourth suc-
ceeded his father as Duke of Holstein in 1694 the quarrel
grew so hot that Denmark would have invaded Holstein
had not the parties to the ‘lreaty of ’89 interfered and
brought about a conference. ‘This lasted all through the
year 1696, but the negotiators appointed to settle the
matter were unable to arrive at any conclusion.
“Vhe following year Charles of Sweden, who had just
succeeded his father, furnished the duke with some troops,
to help him to build some forts that were intended to pro-
tect the frontier in case of invasion by Denmark. Christian
of Denmark at once attacked and captured these forts and
levelled them to the ground. The duke being too weak to
engage in a war with his powerful neighbour did not resent
this attack, and the negotiations were continued as before.
In view of the danger of the situation, and the necessity
for a monarch at the head of affairs, the Swedish Diet met
at Stockholm to take part in the funeral of the late king,
which was to be performed on the 24th of November, and
to deliberate upon the situation.
“By the will of the late king, Charles was not to ascend
the throne until he reached the age of eighteen, but the
diet passed a vote overruling this, and as the regency con-
curred, he was at once crowned, and the alliance with
Holstein was cemented by the marriage, that had been
previously arranged between Charles’s eldest sister and the
Duke of Holstein, being celebrated at Stockholm. Charles
XII. at once concluded treaties with France, ngland, and
Holland, while Denmark is reported to have prepared for
war by making a secret alliance with Augustus of Saxony,
76 A JACOBITE EXILE
King of Poland, and the Czar of Russia. Both these
monarchs were doubtless desirous of extending their
dominions at the cost of Sweden, whose continental pos-
sessions are considerable.
“Augustus is not yet very firmly seated on the throne of
Poland; there are several parties opposed to him, and
these united in obtaining from the diet a refusal to pay
the Saxon troops Augustus had brought with him. ‘The
king no doubt considered that these could be employed
for the conquest of Livonia, and that the addition of so
large a territory to Poland would so add to his popularity
that he would have no further troubles in his kingdom.
“Charles XII., being in ignorance of this secret agree-
ment, sent an embassy to Russia to announce his accession
to the throne. ‘The ambassadors were kept a long time
waiting for an audience, as the czar was bringing a war
with the Turks to a conclusion, and did not wish to throw
off the mask until he was free to use his whole force against
Sweden. ‘The ambassadors were at last received civilly,
but the czar evaded taking the usual oaths of friendship,
and after long delays the embassy returned to Sweden feel-
ing somewhat disquieted as to the intentions of the czar,
but having no sure knowledge of them.
“The King of Poland was more successful in disguising
his leaning towards Denmark, sending the warmest assur-
ances to Charles, requesting him to act as mediator in the
quarrel between himself and the Duke of Brandenburg, and
signing a treaty of alliance with Sweden. But while
sweden had no idea of the triple alliance that had been
formed against her, the intention of Denmark to make war
was evident enough, for King Christian was gathering a
great naval armament. The Duke of Holstein, becoming
much alarmed at these preparations, hastened on the forti-
fications of ‘Tonningen, on the Iider, three leagues from
its mouth. ‘The garrison of the place was a weak one, and
a thousand Swedish troops were thrown in to strengthen it.
IN SWEDEN TT
The King of Denmark complained that this was a breach
of the treaty, but as his own preparations for war were un-
mistakable, no one could blame the Duke of Holstein for
taking steps to defend his territories. As you know,
Christian of Denmark died about this time, and was suc-
ceeded by his son Frederick the Fourth.
“Last August he commenced the war by sending a naval
squadron to cover the passage of four regiments into
Pomerania. Charles of Sweden, seeing that Holstein
must be crushed by its powerful neighbour, called upon
Holland and the Duke of Lunenburg, who were with
Sweden guarantors of the treaty, to enforce its provisions;
and a joint protest was sent to the King of Denmark, who
was informed that if he invaded Holstein they should con-
sider it a breach of the Treaty of Altena and treat him as
a common enemy. Frederick replied by sending some
troops into the duchy.
“No active operations took place until the beginning of
this year. Up to that time Sweden had not doubted the
friendship of the King of Poland, and Charles at first could
hardly believe the reports he received from the governor
of Livonia, that the Saxon troops were approaching the
frontier.
“A few days later, however, came the news that they were
advancing against Riga. The governor prepared for defence
and hastily mounted cannon on the wails. His powers of
resistance, however, were lessened by the fact that the river
Duna was frozen over. Fleming, who commanded the Saxon
troops, arrived before the town early in February with four
thousand men. ‘The governor had set fire to the suburbs on
the previous day; and Fleming was surprised to find that
instead of taking it by surprise, as he had hoped, the place
was in a position to offer a stout resistance. However, he
attacked the fort of Cobrun, on the opposite side of the
river, and carried it by assault.
“The news was brought to young Charles XII. when he
78 A JACOBITE EXILE
was out hunting, a sport of which he is passionately fond.
By all accounts he is an extraordinary young fellow. He is
not content with hunting bears and shooting them, but he
and his followers engage them armed only with forked
sticks. With these they attack the bears, pushing and
hustling the great creatures with the forks of their sticks
until they are completely exhausted, when they are bound
and sent away. In this hunt Charles took fourteen alive,
one of which nearly killed him before it was captured. He
did not break up the hunting party, but continued his sport
to the end, sending off, however, orders for the concentra-
tion of all the troops in Livonia and Finland to act against
the Saxons.
“As soon as the King of Denmark heard of the siege
of Riga he ordered the Duke of Wurtemberg-Neustadt,
his commander-in-chief, to enter Holstein with his army,
sixteen thousand strong. All of that country was at once
overrun, the ducal domains seized, and great contributions
exacted from Schleswig and Holstein. Fleming and the
Saxons, after one severe repulse, forced the garrison of the
fort of Dunamund, commanding the mouth of the Duna, to
surrender. ‘Tonningen is the only fortress that now holds
out in Holstein. So you see, lads, there is every chance
of there being brisk fighting, and I warrant the young King
of Sweden will not be backward in the fray. A man who
is fond of engaging with bears, armed with nothing but a
forked stick, is not likely to hang back in the day of battle.
But at present we will say no more on the matter. Now
that we have got beyond the shelter of the island, the waves
are getting up, and the vessel is beginning to toss and roll.
I see that Sir Marmaduke has retired to his cabin. I mean
to remain here as long as I can, and I should advise you
both to do the same. I have always heard that it is better
to fight with this sickness of the sea as long as possible, and
that it is easier to do so in fresh air than ina close cabin.â€
IN SWEDEN 79
The lads quite agreed with this opinion, but were, in
spite of their efforts, presently prostrate. ‘They remained
on deck for some hours and then crawled to their cabin,
where they remained for the next three days, at the end of
which time they came on deck again, feeling better, but as
weak as if they had suffered from a long illness. Mr.
Jervoise had been in frequently to see them, having escaped
the malady, from which, as he told them, Sir Marmaduke
was suffering to the full as severely as they were.
“So you have found your feet again,†the captain said,
when they appeared on deck. “ You will be all right now.â€
“We feel much better,†Harry said, “now that the storm
is over.â€
“Storm !—what storm? The weather has been splendid.
We cannot wish for anything better. It has been just as
you see it now—a bright sun, and just enough wind for her
to carry whole sail.â€
The lads both looked astonished. “Then why should we
roll and toss about so much?†Harry asked.
“Roll and toss! Nonsense, lad! There has been a
little movement, of course, as there always must be when
there is a brisk wind; but as for rolling and tossing, you
must wait till you see a storm, then you will begin to have
an idea of what the sea is.â€
‘The boys both felt rather crest-fallen, for they had flat-
tered themselves that their sufferings were caused by some-
thing quite out of the ordinary way, and it was mortifying
to know that the weather had been really fine, and there had
been nothing even approaching a storm. ‘The rest of the
voyage was a pleasant one. They found they had regained
their appetites and were able to enjoy their meals; still they
were not sorry when they saw the coast of Sweden, and a
few. hours later entered the port of Gottenburg, where Sir
Marmaduke for the first time came on deck, looking a mere
shadow of his former jovial self.
80 A JACOBITE EXILE
“Well, lads,†he said, “I was glad to hear that you got
through this business quicker than I did. Here we are in
Sweden, and here I at least am likely to stay, unless I can
pass by land through Holland, France, and across from
Calais, for never again will J venture upon a long voyage.
I have been feeling very ungrateful, for over and over again
I wished that you had not rescued me, as death on Tower
Hill would have been nothing to the agonies that I have
been enduring!â€
As soon as the vessel was warped alongside the quay they
landed and put up at an hotel, Sir Marmaduke insisting that
the ground was as bad as the sea, as it kept on rising and
falling beneath his feet. Mr. Jervoise agreed to return on
board the following day to fetch the luggage, which would
by that time have been got up from the hold.
At the hotel they met several persons able to speak Eng-
jish, and from them learnt how matters had been going on
since they had last heard. ‘The town and fortress of
Tonningen had fallen after a vigorous defence; it had been
bombarded for eight days, and had repulsed one assault,
but had been captured at the second attack. England and
Holland had agreed to furnish fleets, and an army of twelve
thousand Swedes were in readiness to march at once, while
other armies were being formed. ‘The king had the week
before reviewed the army gathered at Malmoe, and had on
the previous day arrived at Gottenburg, accompanied by
the Duke of Holstein.
Mr. Jervoise went the same afternoon to find out some
of his friends who resided at Gottenburg. He was fortu-
nate enough to find one of them, who was able to inform
him that his wife’s cousin was now a major in one of the
newly-raised regiments stationed at Gottenburg. He found
him without difficulty. Major Jamieson was delighted at
the coming of his former friend.
“You are the last person I expected to see here, Jervoise.
IN SWEDEN 81
It is true that when we met last you said that if matters
went wrong in England you should come out here instead
of taking refuge in France; but as everything is quiet, 1
had little hope of seeing you again until I paid another
visit to Scotland, of which at present there is but little
prospect. Have you grown tired of doing nothing, and is
it a desire to see something of a stirring life that has
brought you over here?â€
Mr. Jervoise related shortly the events by which he had
been driven into exile, and expressed his desire to serve in
the army of Sweden, and that his son and young Carstairs
should also enter the army. ‘They are but sixteen yet,â€
he said, “but are stout, active fellows, and could hold
their own in a day’s march or in a stout fight with many
men. Of course, if I could obtain commissions for them
all the better, but if not they are ready to enlist in the
ranks. Roughing it will do them no harm.â€
“YVheir age is no drawback,†Major Jamieson said.
“There are many no older both in the ranks and as officers.
Men in Sweden of all ages and of all ranks are joining, for
this unprovoked attack on the part of Poland has raised
the national spirit to boiling heat. he chief difficulty
is their and your ignorance of the language. Were it not
for that T could obtain from the minister of war commis-
sions for you at once.†He sat thinking for some minutes
in silence. ‘I think I see how it can be managed, Jer-
voise. I have some twenty or thirty Scotchmen in my
regiment, and I know a colonel who has as many in his,
and these I could manage to get an exchange for an equal
number of my Swedes. Ships are coming daily from Scot-
land, and most of them bring young fellows who have come
out to join the army.
“Yau know how the Scots fought under eae avus Adol-
phus, and there is scarce a glen in Scotland where there
are not traditions of fathers or grandfathers who fought
82 A JACOBITE EXILE
in Hepburn’s Green Brigade. Therefore, it is natural
that, seeing there is no chance of military service at home,
there should be many young fellows coming out to join.
I can go across this evening to the minister of war, who
is a personal friend of mine, and get him to give you per-
mission to raise a company of Scotchmen for service. I
shall, of course, point out to him that you will enlist them
here. I shall show him the advantage of these men being
gathered together, as their ignorance of the language makes
them for some time useless as soldiers if enrolled in a
Swedish regiment. I shall mention that I have twenty in
my own corps who are at present positively useless, and
in fact a source of great trouble, owing to their under-
standing nothing that is said to them, and shall propose
that they be at once handed over to you. As to the ex-
change, we can manage that quietly between ourselves.
You would have no difficulty with fresh-landed men, as these
will naturally be delighted at joining a company of their
own countrymen.â€
“Thank you very heartily, Jamieson, this altogether
exceeds my hopes, but I fear that I know nothing of drill-
ing them.â€
“Two of my men are sergeants, and having been in the
army for some years, speak Swedish well. ‘They will do
the drilling at first, the manceuvres are not complicated,
and for a pound or two they will be glad to teach you all
the orders necessary. I don’t know how you are situated
as to money, but I can assure you my purse is at your
service.â€
“Thank you; I am, in that respect, excellently well pro-
vided, as is my friend Sir Marmaduke. We have both
made provision for unexpected contingencies.â€
“Then if you will call to-morrow after breakfast I shall
probably have your commission ready. As a matter of
course, you will have the appointment of your own officers,
IN SWEDEN 83
and will only have to send in their names. Each company
is from a hundred and forty to a hundred and fifty strong,
and has a captain, two lieutenants, and two ensigns.â€
Mr. Jervoise’s news was, on his return to the inn, re-
ceived with delight by the two lads; and Sir Marmaduke
said, “I wish I could shake off twenty of my years, Jer-
voise, and join also. Well, well, I daresay I shall get on
comfortably enough. I know there are a good many I’ng-
lish and Scotch Jacobites settled in the town or neighbour-
hood, and I shall not be long before I meet someone I
know. As the matter seems settled, I should advise you
lads to go down the first thing in the morning to the
wharves, there is no saying when ships may come in;
moreover, it is Hkely enough that you may light upon
young fellows who have landed within the last few weeks,
and who have been kept so far, by their ignorance of the
language, from enlisting.â€
“hat is a very good idea,†Mr. Jervoise said; “they
will be delighted to hear a friendly voice, and be only too
glad to enlist in a Scottish company. You can say that
each man will have a free outfit given him.â€
Accordingly, the next morning early the two lads went
down to the wharf. Presently they saw three young fel-
lows, who were evidently Scotch by their dress and caps,
talking together; they strolled up near enough to catch
what they were saying.
“Tt is hard,†one said, “that now we are here we can
make no one understand us, and it seems to me we had
far better have stayed at home.â€
“We shall find some one who speaks our language pres-
ently, Jock,†another said more cheerfully. “The old man
where we lodged last night, said in his broken tongue, that
we had but to go over to Malmoe, or some such place as
that, where there is a big camp, and walk up to an officer
and say we wish to enlist,â€
St A JACOBITE EXILE
“Qh, that is all very well,†the other grumbled; “but if
he did not understand us, we should be no better off than
before.â€
“Are you wanting to enlist?’ Harry said, going up to
them.
‘The men gave an exclamation of pleasure at being ad-
dressed in their own tongue.
“That we do, sir; if you can put us in the way we shall
be grateful.â€
“That I can do easily,†Harry said. “ My father is rais-
ing a company of Scotch and Englishmen for the regiment
commanded by Colonel Jamieson. ‘This will be far better
than joining a Swedish company, where no one will! under-
stand your language, and you will not be able to make out
the orders given. My father will give cach man who
joins a free outfit.â€
“That is the very thing for us, sir. We expected to find
Scotch regiments here, as there were in the old times, and
we had hoped to join them; but whether it is a company
or regiment it makes but little difference, so that we are
with those who speak our tongue.â€
“Very well, then; if you come to the Lion Inn at nine
o’clock, you will see my father there. If you know of any
others in the same mind as yourselves, and willing to join,
bring them with you.â€
“There are ten or twelve others who came over in the
ship with us two days since, and I have no doubt they will
be fine and glad to join.â€
“Well, see if you can hunt them up, and bring them
with you.â€
On returning to the inn, they found that Mr, Jervoise had
already received his commission as captain, and by ten
o'clock fifteen young Scotchmen had been sworn in. All
of them had brought broadswords and dirks, and Captain
Jervoise at once set to work buying at various shops iron
~
IN SWEDEN 85
head-pieces, muskets, and other accoutrements. During
the next three days ten other English and Scotchmen had
joined, and then a ship came in from which they gathered
another four-and-twenty recruits. Arms had already been
purchased for them, and on the following day Captain
Jervoise marched off to Malmoe with his forty-nine recruits.
Harry accompanied them, Charlie being left behind with
his father to gather another fifty men as the ships arrived.
A week later this number was obtained, and Charlie
started with them for the camp, Sir Marmaduke accom-
panying them on horseback, in order to aid Charlie in
maintaining order among his recruits. He had already
fixed upon a small house just outside the town, and having
met two or three old friends who had been obliged to leave
England at William’s accession, he already began to feel
at home.
“Don’t you fidget about me, Charlie,†hesaid. “Ferrers
tells me that there are at least a score of Jacobites here, and
that they form quite a society among themselves. Living
is very cheap, and he will introduce me to a man of busi-
ness, who will see that my money is well invested.â€
CHAPTER V
NARVA
OR the next fortnight drilling went on from morning till
night, the officers receiving instructions privately from
the sergeants, and further learning the words of command
by standing by while the men were being drilled. At the
end of that time both officers and men were sufficiently
instructed to carry out the simple movements which were
alone in use in those days. It was not, however, until two
months later that they were called upon to act. The Eng-
lish and Dutch fleets had arrived, and effected a junction
with that of Sweden, and the Danish fleet had shut them-
selves up in the port of Copenhagen, which was closely
blockaded. A large army had crossed to Zeeland and
repulsed the Danes, who had endeavoured to prevent their
landing, and had then marched up to within sight of the
walls of Copenhagen, which they were preparing to besiege,
when the King of Denmark, alarmed at this unexpected
result of his aggression on Holstein, conceded every point
demanded, and peace was signed.
The negotiations were carried on in Holland, and the
Swedes were extremely angry when they found that they
were baulked of their expected vengeance on their trouble-
some neighbours. ‘The peace, however, left Charles XII.
at liberty to turn his attention to his other foes, and to hurry
86
NARVA 87
to the assistance of Riga, which was beleaguered by the
Saxons and Poles, and of Narva, against which city the
Russians had made several unsuccessful assaults. Without
losing an hour the king crossed to Malmoe. ‘The troops
there were ordered to embark immediately in the vessels in
the harbour. ‘They then sailed to Revel, where the Swedish
commander, Welling, had retired from the neighbourhood
of Riga, his force being too small to meet the enemy in
the open field. No sooner had the troops landed than the
king reviewed them, and General Welling was ordered at
once to march so as to place himself between the enemy
and Wesenberg, where a large amount of provisions and
stores for the use of the army had been collected.
The two lieutenants in the company of Captain Jervoise
were young Scotchmen of good family, who had three
months before come over and obtained commissions, and
both had at the colonel’s request been transferred to his
regiment and promoted to the rank of lieutenants. Cap-
tain Jervoise and his four officers messed together, and were
a very cheerful party; indeed their commander, to the sur-
prise both of his son and Charlie, had quite shaken off his
quiet and somewhat gloomy manner, and seemed to have
become quite another man, in the active and bracing life
in which he was now embarked. Cunningham and Forbes
were both active young men, full of life and energy, while
the boys thoroughly enjoyed roughing it, and the excite-
ment and animation of their daily work.
Sometimes they slept in the open air, sometimes on the
floor of a cottage. ‘Their meals were rough but plentiful.
The king’s orders against plundering were very severe, and
even when in Denmark, the country people, having nothing
to complain of, had brought in supplies regularly. Here
in Linovia they were in Swedish dominions, but there was
little to be purchased, for the peasantry had been brought
to ruin by the foraging parties of the Russians and Poles.
88 A JACOBITE EXILE
There was some disappointment that the enemy had fallen
‘back at the approach of Welling’s force, but all felt sure
that it would not be long before they met them, for the
king would assuredly lose no time in advancing against
them as soon as his army could be brought over. They
were not, however, to wait for the arrival of the main force,
although the cavalry only took part in the first affair.
General Welling heard that a force of three thousand Cir-
cassians had taken up their quarters in a village some
fifteen miles away, and sent six hundred horse under Majors
Patkul and ‘Tisenbausen to surprise them; they were at first
successful, and, attacking the Circassians, set fire to the
village, and were engaged in slaughtering the defenders,
when twenty-one squadrons of Russian cavalry came up and
fell upon them, attacking them on all sides, and posting
themselves so as to cut off their retreat.
The Swedes however gathered in a body, and charged
the Russians so furiously that they cut a way through their
ranks, losing, however, many of their men, while Major
Patkul and another officer were made prisoners.
‘The king was at Revel when this engagement took place,
and although but few of the troops had arrived, he was too
impatient for action to wait until the coming of the fleet.
He therefore marched to Wesenberg with his body-guard
and a few troops from Revel. He at once despatched a
thousand men to cover the frontier, and issued orders for
the rest of the troops to leave the whole of their baggage
behind them, to take three days’ provision in their haver-
sacks, and to prepare to march the next morning.
Major Jamieson came into the cottage occupied by Cap-
tain Jervoise and his officers late in the evening. ‘They
had a blazing fire, for it was now the middle of November
and the nights were very sharp.
“Well, Jervoise, what do you think of the orders?†he
asked, as he seated himself on a log that had been brought
in for the fire.
NARVA 89
“T have not thought much about them, except that we are
going to do a long and quick march somewhere.â€
“And where is that somewhere, do you think?â€
“That I have not the slightest idea.â€
“You would not say that it was to Narva?â€
“T certainly should not, considering that we have but five
thousand infantry and three thousand cavalry, and of these
a large number have been so weakened by fever as to
be unfit for fighting; while at Narva report says there
are eighty thousand Russians in a strongly intrenched
camp.â€
“Well, that is where we are going, Jervoise, nevertheless.
At least that is what the colonel has told me.â€
“He must have been surely jesting, major. We may be
going to push forward in that direction and occupy some
strong position until the army comes up, but it would be
the height of madness to attack an enemy in a strong
position and just tenfold our force.â€
“Well, we shall see,†Jamieson said coolly. “It is cer-
tain that Narva cannot hold out much longer, and I know
that the king has set his heart on relieving it; but it does
seem somewhat too dangerous an enterprise to attack the
Russians. At any rate that is the direction in which we
are going to-morrow. It is a good seventy miles distant,
and as they say that the whole country has been devastated
and the villagers have all fled, it is evident that when the
three days’ bread and meat we carry are exhausted we shall
have to get some food out of the Russian camp if nowhere
else.â€
Captain Jervoise laughed, as did the others. “We can
live for a short time on the horses, Jamieson, if we are hard
pushed for it, though most of them are little beyond skin
and bone.â€
“That is true, the cavalry are certainly scarcely fit for
service. Welling’s troops have had a very hard time of it,
90 A JACOBITE EXILE
and we may thank our stars, though we did not think so at
the time, that we were kept nearly three months at Malmoe
instead of being here with Welling.â€
_ “But do you seriously think, major, that the king means
to attack the Russians?’ Cunningham asked.
“My own idea is that he does, Cunningham. I cannot
see what else there is for us to do. At any rate, if he does,
you may be sure that we shall make a tough fight for it.
The cavalry showed the other day that they can stand up
against many times their number of the Russians, and if
they can do it, I fancy we can. There is one thing, the
very audacity of such an attempt is in its favour.â€
“Well, we will all do our best, you may be sure; but
since Thermopyle, I doubt if men have fought against longer
odds.â€
The next morning the men fell in, Captain Jervoise, who,
like all of his rank, was mounted, took his place at the
head of his company, and the little army marched away
from Wesenberg.
It was a dreary march to Purts, but the sight of the
ruined villages and devastated fields aroused a feeling of
indignation and fury among the troops, and a fierce long-
ing to attack men who had so ruthlessly spread ruin through
a fertile country. Orders were issued that evening that
the men were to husband their provisions as much as pos-
sible, and the order was more stirctly obeyed than such
orders usually are, for the men saw for themselves that there
was no possibility of obtaining fresh supplies in the wasted
country, and were well aware that there existed no train of
waggons and horses capable of bringing up stores from
Wesenberg. ‘There were a few aged men and women
remaining at Purts, and from these they learned that their
next day’s march would take them to a very difficult pass,
which was held by six hundred of the Russian cavalry,
together with a force of infantry and some guns.
NARVA 91
It was the intention of the king to encamp that evening
near the pass, and when within three or four miles of it,
General Meidel, who had with him the quarter-master of
the army and four hundred cavalry, rode on ahead to choose
a site for the camp. He presently saw a large body of
Russian foragers in front of him, and sent back to the king
for permission to attack them. Charles ordered the army
to continue its march, and hurrying forward with some of
his officers joined General Meidel and charged the foragers,
killing many, taking others prisoners, and putting the rest
to flight. He followed close upon their heels, and rode
right up to the mouth of the pass in spite of the heavy fire
of artillery and musketry opened by the Russians. He at
once determined to take advantage of the alarm produced
by the defeat of the Russian cavalry, and although darkness
was now drawing on, brought up some of his infantry and
artillery and attacked with such vigour that the Russians
fled after offering a very feeble resistance.
A battalion of foot were ordered to occupy the pass,
while the rest of the army piled their arms and lay down
where they stood. In the morning they were astonished at
the strength of the position that had been gained so easily.
The defile was deep and narrow, a rapid stream ran through
it, and the ground was soft and marshy. A few determined
men should have been able to bar the advance of an army.
‘The troops were in high spirits at the result of this their
first action against the enemy, and were the more pleased
that they found in the Russian camp sufficient provisions
to replace those they had used; after a hearty meal they
again advanced at a brisk march. ‘The defile was captured
on the evening of the 17th November, and early in the
morning of the 2oth the army reached Lagena, a league
and a half from Narva, and ordering the troops to fol-
low, the king rode forward to reconnoitre the Russian
position.
92 A JACOBITE EXILE
The troops were weary with their long marches, and many
of those who had but recently recovered from fever were
scarce able to drag themselves along, while great numbers
were unfit to take part in a battle until after two or three
days of rest.
The officers of the Malmoe Regiment, for it had taken
its name from the camp where it had been formed, were
gathered in a group at its head discussing the situation.
Most of the officers were of opinion that to attack at once
with men and horses worn out with fatigue was to ensure
destruction, but there were others who thought that in face
of so great an army as that gathered in front of them, the
only hope was in an immediate attack. Major Jamieson
was one of these.
“The king is right,†he said. “Tf the Russian army
have time to form and to advance against us in order of
battle, we must be annihilated. At present their camp is
an extensive one, for, as I hear, it extends in a great semi-
circle four or five miles long, with the ends resting on the
river. ‘hey cannot believe that we intend to attack them,
and if we go straight at them we may possibly gain a foot-
ing in their intrenchments before the whole army can
gather to aid those at the point of attack. It will be almost
asurprise, and [ think the king is right to attempt it, for it
is only by a quick and sudden stroke that we can gain a
success over $O great an army.â€
The halt was but a short one, and as soon as the regi-
ments had arrived at the positions assigned to them they
advanced. As soon as they appeared on a rise of ground
facing the intrenchments the enemy opened fire. ‘The king
had already reconnoitred a portion of their position,
exposing himself recklessly to their shot, and as soon as
the troops came up he issued orders for them to prepare
to attack in two columns. First, however, several of the
regiments were ordered to fall out and to cut down bushes
o
NARVA 93
and make fascines, to enable the troops to cross the ditches.
The intrenchment was a formidable one, being provided
with parapets armed with chevaux-de-frise and flanked by
strong exterior works, while several batteries had been
placed to sweep the ground across which an enemy must
advance.
The right column under General Welling was to march
to a point nearly in the centre of the great semicircle,
while the left under General Rhenschild was to assault a
point about half-way between the centre and the river,
where one of the largest and most powerful of the enemy’s
batteries was placed. The king himself was with this wing
with his body-guard, and he hoped that here he might meet
the czar commanding in person. ‘The Russian emperor had,
however, left the camp that morning to fetch up forty thou-
sand men who were advancing from Plescow, and the com-
mand of the army had been assumed by the Duke of Croy.
The Swedish left wing had with it a battery of twenty-
one guns, while sixteen guns covered the attack on the right.
It was two o’clock in the afternoon when two guns gave the
signal for the advance.
Hitherto the weather had been fine, but it had become
gradually overcast, and just as the signal was given a tre-
mendous storm of snow and hail began. It set right in
the face of the Russians, and concealed from them the
movement of the Swedes, for which, indeed, they were
wholly unprepared, believing that the small force they saw
was but the advance-guard of a great Swedish army, and
that no attack need be expected until the main body arrived.
‘The consequence was the Swedes were almost at the edge
of the ditch before they were perceived, and both columns
attacked with such vigour and courage that in a quarter
of an hour they had gained a footing in the intrenchments
and had so filled up the ditch with the fascinés that the
cavalry were able to follow them,
94 A JACOBITE EXILE
The Russians were so astounded at this sudden attack
that they lost heart altogether. The Swedish left, as soon
as it entered the intrenchments, swept along them, the
Russians abandoning their guns and batteries and making
for their bridge across the river. Unfortunately for them
their huts were built close behind the works, and in rear
was another intrenchment designed to repel assaults from
the town, and the terrified crowd, unable to make their
way rapidly along over ground encumbered by their huts,
crossed the interior intrenchments, thinking to make their
way faster through the fields to the bridge. The Swedish
king, however, placed himself at the head of his body-
guard, and, followed by the rest of his horse, charged
right upon them, cutting down great numbers, and driving
the rest before them towards the river, while the infantry
kept up a heavy fire upon the fugitives in the intrench-
ments.
The panic had spread quickly, and the Russian troops
nearest to the bridge were already pouring over when the
mass of the fugitives arrived. ‘hese pressed upon the
bridge in such numbers that it speedily gave way, cutting
off the retreat of their comrades behind. Ignorant of the
result the terrified crowd pushed on, pressing those in
front of them into the river, and the number of drowned
was no less than that of those who fell beneath the bullets,
pikes, and sabres of the Swedes. In their despair the
Russians, rallied by some of their generals, now attempted
to defend themselves, and by occupying some houses and
barracks, and barricading the passages between these with
overturned waggons, they fought bravely and repulsed for
some time every effort of the Swedes.
Darkness was now falling, and the king hastened to the
spot where the battle was fiercely raging. As he ran
towards it he fell into a morass, from which he was res-
cued with some difficulty, leaving his sword and one boot
DEE Oe
il
NARVA,
AT
Ln
he
a
m
mg
INTRA
THE
STORMING
NARVA 95
behind him. However, he at once pushed on and placed
himself at the head of the infantry engaged in the assault,
but even his presence and example did not avail. The
Russians maintained their position with desperate courage,
and when it became quite dark the assault ceased. The
right column had met with equal success; it had penetrated
the intrenchments, defeated all the Russians who opposed
it, and now moved to assist the left wing.
The king, however, seeing that the Russian defences
could not be carried by a direct assault without great loss,
gathered the army in the space between the town and the
Russian intrenchments, and placed them ina position to
repel an attack should the Russians take the offensive, giv-
ing orders that at daylight the hill on which the enemy had
their principal battery should be assaulted. ‘The guns here
commanded all the intrenchments, and the capture of
that position would render it impossible for the Russians
to continue their defence, or for the now separated wings
of the army to combine.
The officers in command of the Russian right wing, find-
ing themselves unable to cross the river on their broken
bridge, and surrounded by the Swedes, sent in to surrender
in the course of the evening, and two battalions of the
Swedish Guards took possession of the post that had been
so gallantly defended.
The king granted them permission to retire with their
arms, the colours and standards being given up, and the
superior officers being retained as prisoners of war. ‘The
broken bridge was repaired, and early the next morning
the Russian troops passed over. ‘Their left wing was, after
the surrender of their right, in a hopeless position, for on
that side no bridge -had been thrown over the river, and
their retreat was wholly cut off. On learning before day-
break that the right wing had surrendered, they too sent in
to ask for terms, The king granted them freedom to re-
96 A JACOBITE EXILE
turn to their country, but without their standards or arms.
They filed off before him, officers and soldiers bareheaded,
and passed over the bridge, their numbers being so great
that all had not crossed until next morning.
‘The Russians lost over 18,000 men killed or drowned, a
hundred and forty-five cannon and twenty-eight mortars,
all of which were new, besides vast quantities of military
stores and provisions. A hundred and fifty-one colours
and twenty standards, and the greater proportion of their
muskets, together with the military chest, the Duke of Croy,
their commander-in-chief, and the whole of their generals,
colonels, majors, and captains, fell into the hands of the
Swedes as prisoners of war. ‘The total loss in killed and
wounded of the Swedes was under two thousand, the chief
loss being due to the desperate resistance of the Russians
after the battle was irretrievably lost.
It may be doubted whether so complete and surprising
a victory between armies so disproportionate in force was
ever before gained.
The king had exposed himself throughout the day
most recklessly, and was everywhere in the thick of the
Russian bullets, and yet he escaped without so much as a
scratch. ‘The Malmoe Regiment had been with the left
wing, but suffered comparatively little loss, as they were
one of the last to enter the intrenchments, and it was
only when darkness was closing in that they were called up
to take a part in the attack on the position held by the
Russians.
“Never was the saying that fortune favours the brave
more signally verified, Jervoise,’â€â€ Major Jamieson said as
he sat down to a rough breakfast with the officers of the
Scottish company on the morning after the Russian sur-
render.
“'That’s true enough, but Russians are brave too, as they
showed at the end of the day. I fancy you have a Scotch
NARVA OT
proverb to the effect that fou folk come to no harm; I think
that is more applicable in the present case.â€
The major laughed. “The fou folk relates rather to
drunkenness than madness, Jervoise. But of course it
would do for both; I own that the whole enterprise did
seem to me to be absolute madness, but the result has
justified it. That sudden snowstorm was the real cause
of our victory, and had it not been for that I still think that
we could not have succeeded. The Russian cannon cer-
tainly continued to fire, but it was wholly at random, and
they were taken by surprise when we suddenly appeared at
the side of the ditch, while we were across before they
could gather any force sufficient to defend it. After that,
panic did the rest. The commander-in-chief fell early
into our hands. There was no one to give orders, no
one to rally them, and I expect the Russian soldiers
gave us credit for having brought on that storm, to cover
our assault, by the aid of malign spirits. Well, Jads,
and how did you feel when the shots were whistling
about?â€
“YT did not like it at all, major,†Charlie said. “It
seemed such a strange thing marching along in the thick
of that snowstorm, hearing the rush of cannon-balls over-
head, and the boom of guns, and yet be unable to see
anything but the rear files of the company in front.â€
“Tt was an uncanny feeling, Charlie. I felt it myself,
and was very grateful that we were hidden from the enemy,
who of course were blazing away in the direction in which
they had last seen us. We only lost three killed and twelve
wounded altogether, and I think those were, for the most
part, hit by random shots. Well, if this is the way the
king means to carry on war, we shall have enough of it
before we are done.â€
The sick and wounded were sent into the town the first
thing, but it was not until the Russians had all crossed the
98 A JACOBITE EXILE
river that the king himself rode triumphantly into the place
surrounded by his staff, amid the wild enthusiasm of the
inhabitants, whom his victory had saved from ruin and
massacre. ‘The town, although strongly fortified, was not a
large one, and its houses were so dilapidated from the
effects of the Russian bombardment that but few of the
troops could be accommodated there; the rest were quar-
tered inthe Russian huts. On the 26th a solemn service of
thanksgiving for the victory was celebrated, with a salute
from all the cannon of the town and camp, and by salvos
of musketry from the troops. ‘The question of provisions
was the most important now. It was true that large quan-
tities had been captured in the Russian camp, but beyond
a magazine of corn, abandoned by the fugitives at Tama
and brought in, there was no prospect of replenishing the
store when exhausted, for the whole country for a great
distance round had been completely devastated by the
Russians. These had not retreated far, having been rallied
by the czar at Plescow, and quartered in the towns of the
frontier of Livonia, whence they made incursions into such
districts as had not been previously wasted.
“This is dull work,†Archie Cunningham said one day,
“the sooner we are busy again the better. There is noth-
ing to do, and very little to eat; the cold is bitter and fuel
scarce; one wants something to warm one’s blood.â€
“Vou are not likely to have anything of that kind for
some months to come,†Major Jamieson replied dryly.
“You don’t suppose we are going to have a battle of Narva
once a week, do you? No doubt there will be a few skir-
mishes and outpost encounters, but beyond that there will
be little doing until next spring. You can make up your
mind for at least five months of the worst side of a soldier’s
life—duil quarters and probably bad ones, scanty food,
cold, and disease.â€
NARVA 99
“Not a very bright look-out, major,†Forbes laughed.
“T hope it won’t be as bad as that.â€
“Then I-advise you to give up hoping and to make up
your mind to realities, Forbes; there is a good deal of
illness in the camp now, and there will be more and more
as the time goes on. There is nothing like inaction to tell
upon the health of troops. However, we certainly shall not
stay here, it would be impossible to victual the army, and I
expect that before long we shall march away and take up
quarters for the winter. As to operations on a great scale,
they are out of the question. After the thrashing they have
had, the Russians will be months before they are in a con-
dition to take the offensive again; while we are equally
unable to move, because in the first place we are not strong
enough to do so, and in the second we have no baggage
train to carry provisions with us, and no provisions to carry
if we had it.â€
On the 13th of December the king quitted Narva with
the army, and on the roth arrived at Lais, an old castle six
miles from Derpt, and here established his head-quarters.
A few of the troops were stationed in villages, but the
greater part in rough huts in the neighbourhood and along
the frontier.
It was not long before Major Jamieson’s predictions were
verified. A low fever, occasioned by the fatiguing marches
and the hardships they had endured, added to the misery
from the cold and wet that penetrated the wretched huts,
spread rapidly through the army. Many died, and great
numbers were absolutely prostrated. The king was inde-
fatigable in his efforts to keep up the spirits of the troops.
He constantly rode about from camp to camp, entering the
huts, chatting cheerfully with the soldiers, and encouraging
them by kind words and assurances that when the spring
came they would soon gain strength again.
100 A JACOBITE EXILE
At Narva the four young officers had all purchased horses.
Most of the Swedish officers were mounted; and the king
encouraged this, as on occasion he could thereby collect at
once a body of mounted men ready for any enterprise; but
their own colonel preferred that on the march the lieutenants
and ensigns should be on foot with their men, in order to
set them an example of cheerful endurance. ‘Those who
wished it, however, were permitted to have horses, which
were on such occasions led in the rear of the regiment.
Captain Jervoise had approved of the purchase of the
horses, which were got very cheaply, as great numbers had
been captured. “If we can get over the difficulty of the
forage,†he said, “you will find them very useful for pre-
serving your health during the winter. A ride will set your
blood in motion, and wherever we are quartered there are
sure to be camps within riding distance. ‘The king
approves of officers taking part in dashing expeditions, so
you may be able to take a share in affairs that will break
the monotony of camp-life.â€
They found great benefit from being able to ride about.
Forage was indeed very scarce. They had no means of
spending their pay on luxuries of any kind, their only out-
lay being in the purchase of black bread, and an occasional
load of forage from the peasants. ‘Their regiment was with
the force under the command of Colonel Schlippenbach,
which was not very far from Marienburg, a place open to
the incursions of the Russians. Baron Spens was at Signiz,
and Colonel Alvedyhl at Rounenberg, and to both these
places they occasionally paid a visit. In order to keep
the company in health, Captain Jervoise encouraged the
men to get up games, in which the four young officers took
part. Sometimes it was a snowball match in the open; at
other times a snow fort was built, garrisoned, and attacked.
Occasionally there were matches at hockey, while putting the
NARVA 101
stone, throwing the caber, running and wrestling matches,
were all tried in turn, and the company suffered compara-
tively little from the illness which rendered so large a
proportion of the Swedish army inefficient.
Colonel Schlippenbach was an energetic officer, and had
several times ridden past when the men were engaged in
these exercises. He expressed to Captain Jervoise his
approval of the manner in which he kept his men in
strength and vigour.
“T shall not forget it,’’ he said one day, “and if there is
service to be done I see that I can depend upon your
company to do it.â€
In January he took a party of horse and reconnoitred
along the River Aa to observe the motions of the Saxons
on the other side, and hearing that a party of them had
entered Marienburg he determined to take possession of
that place, as, were they to fortify it, they would be able
greatly to harass the Swedes. Sending word to the king of
his intention, and asking for an approval of his plan of
fortifying the town, he took three companies of infantry
and four hundred horse, made a rapid march to Marien-
burg, and occupied it without opposition. He had not
forgotten his promise, and the company of Captain Jer-
voise was one of those selected for the work. Its officers
were delighted at the prospect of a change, and when the
party started Captain Jervoise was proud of the show made
by his men, whose active and vigorous condition con-
trasted strongly with the debility and feebleness evident so
generally among the Swedish soldiers.
As soon as Marienburg was entered, the men were set
to work to raise and strengthen the rampart and to erect
bastions, and they were aided a few days later by a rein-
forcement of two hundred infantry, sent by the king with
some cannon from the garrison of Derpt. As the place
102 A JACOBITE EXILE
was surrounded by a morass, it was ere long put into a posi-
tion to offer a formidable defence against any force that
the Russians or Saxons might bring against it. ‘The Swedes
engaged on the work gained strength rapidly, and by the
time the fortifications were finished they had completely
shaken off the effects of the fever.
CHAPTER V1
A PRISONER
FORTNIGHT after the fortifications of Marienburg
were completed, Colonel Schlippenbach sent off Lieu-
tenant-colonel Brandt with four hundred horse to capture
a magazine at Seffwegen, to which the Saxons had forced
the inhabitants of the country round to bring in their corn,
intending later to convey it to the head-quarters of their
army. The expedition was completely successful. The
Saxon guard were overpowered, and a thousand tons of
corn were brought in triumph into Marienburg. Some of
it was sent on to the army, abundance being retained for
the use of the town and garrison in case of siege. It was
now resolved to surprise and burn Pitschur, a town on the
frontier from which the enemy constantly made incursions.
It was held by a strong body of Russians.
Baron Spens was in command of the expedition. He
had with him both the regiments of Horse-guards. Much
excitement was caused in Marienburg by the issue of an
order that the cavalry and a portion of the infantry were to
be ready to march at daylight, and by the arrival of a large
number of peasants brought in by small parties of the cav-
alry. Many were the surmises as to the operation to be
undertaken, its object being kept a strict secret. Captain
Jervoise’s company was one of those in orders, and paraded
105
104 A JACOBITE EXILE
at daybreak, and after a march of some distance the force
joined that of Baron Spens. ‘The troops were halted in a
wood, and ordered to light fires to cook food and to pre-
pare for a halt of some hours. Great fires were soon blaz-
ing, and after eating their meal most of the troops wrapped
themselves in the blankets that they carried in addition to
their greatcoats, and lay down by the fires.
They slept until midnight, and were then called to arms
again. ‘hey marched all night, and at daybreak the next
morning, the 13th of February, were near Pitschur, and at
once attacked the Russian camp outside the town. ‘I'aken
completely by surprise the Russians fought feebly, and
more than five hundred were killed before they entered the
town, hotly pursued by the Swedes. Shutting themselves
up in the houses, and barricading the doors and windows,
they defended themselves desperately, refusing all offers of
surrender. The Livonian peasants were, however, at work,
and set fire to the town in many places. ‘The flames spread
rapidly. Great stores of hides and leather, and a huge
magazine filled with hemp, added to the fury of the con-
flagration, and the whole town was burned to the ground;
numbers of the Russians preferring death by fire in the
houses to coming out and surrendering themselves.
Many of the fugitives had succeeded in reaching a strong
position on the hill commanding the town. ‘This con-
sisted of a convent surrounded by strong walls mounted
with cannon, which played upon the town while the fight
there was going on. As Baron Spens had no guns with
him he was unable to follow up his advantage by taking
this position, and he therefore gave orders to the force to
retire, the peasants being loaded with booty that they had
gathered before the fire spread. The loss of the Swedes
was thirty killed and sixty wounded, this being a small
amount of loss compared with what they had inflicted upon
the enemy.
A PRISONER 105
“T call that a horrible business, Captain Jervoise,â€
Charlie said, when the troops had returned to Marienburg.
“There was no real fighting in it.â€
“Tt was a surprise, Charlie. But they fought desperately
after they gained the town.â€
“Yes, but we did nothing there beyond firing away at
the windows. Of course I had my sword in my hand; but
it might as well have been in its sheath, for I never struck
a blow, and I think it was the same with most of our men.
One could not cut down those poor wretches, who were
scarce awake enough to use their arms. I was glad you
held our company in rear of the others.â€
“Yes; I asked the colonel before attacking to put us in
reserve, in case the enemy should rally. I did it on pur-
pose, for I knew that our men, not having, like the Swedes,
any personal animosity against the Russians, would not
like the work. If it had come to storming the convent, I
would have volunteered to lead the assault. At any rate I
am glad that, although a few of the men are wounded, no
lives are lost In our company.â€
Harry cordially agreed with his friend. “I like an ex-
pedition, Charlie, if there is fighting to be done; but I
don’t want to have anything more to do with surprises.
However, the cavalry had a good deal more to do with it
than we had; but, as you say, it was a ghastly business.
The only comfort is they began it, and have been robbing
the peasants and destroying their homes for months.â€
Many small expeditions were sent out with equally
favourable results; but Captain Jervoise’s company took no
part in these excursions. Charles XII. was passionately
fond of hunting, and in spite of his many occupations
found time occasionally to spend a day or two in the chase.
A few days after the attack upon Pitschur he came to
Marienburg to learn all particulars of the Russian posi-
tion from Colonel Schlippenbach, as he intended in the
106 A JACOBITE EXILE
spring to attack the triangle formed by three fortresses, in
order to drive the Russians farther back from the frontier.
“T hear that there are many wolves and bears in the
forest five leagues to the north. I want a party of about
fifty footmen to drive the game, and as many horse, in case
we come across one of the parties of Russians. I want
some hearty, active men for the march. I will send the
foot on this afternoon, and ride with the horse so as to
get there by daybreak. Which is your best company of
infantry?â€
“My best company is one composed chiefly of Scotch-
men, though there are some English among them. It
belongs to the Malmoe Regiment, and is commanded by
Captain Jervoise, an Englishman. I do not say that they
are braver than our Swedes; they have not been tested in
any desperate service; but they are healthier and more
hardy, for their officers since the battle of Narva have kept
them engaged in sports of all kinds—mimic battles, foot-
races, and other friendly contests. I have marked them at
it several times, and wondered sometimes at the rough play.
But it has had its effect. While the rest of Suborn’s regi-
ment suffered as much from fever as the other troops, scarce
aman in this company was sick, and they have all the
winter been fit for arduous service at any moment.â€
“That is good indeed, and I will remember it, and will
see that, another winter, similar games are carried on
throughout the army. Let the company be paraded at
once. I will myself inspect them.â€
The company’s call was sounded, and, surprised at a
summons just as they were cooking their dinners, the troops
fell in in front of their quarters, and the officers took their
places in front of them and waited for orders.
“T wonder what is wp now,†Nigel Forbes said to Harry.
“You have not heard anything from your father of our
being wanted, have you?â€
A PRISONER 107
“No; he was just as much surprised as I was when a
sergeant ran up with Schlippenbach’s order that the com-
pany were to fall in.â€
Five minutes after they had formed up, three officers
were seen approaching on foot.
“Tt is the colonel himself,†Forbes muttered, as Captain
Jervoise gave the word to the men to stand to attention.
A wiinute later Captain Jervoise gave the order for the
salute, and Harry saw that the tall young officer walking
with the colonel was the king. Without speaking a word,
Charles walked up and down the line narrowly inspecting
the men, then he returned to the front.
“A fine set of fellows, Schlippenbach. I wish that, like
my grandfather, I had some fifteen thousand of such troops
under my orders. Present the captain to me.â€
The officers were called up, and Captain Jervoise was
presented.
“Your company does you great credit, Captain Jervoise,â€â€™
the king said. “I would that all my troops looked in as
good health and condition. Colonel Schlippenbach tells
me that you have kept your men in good health all through
the winter by means of sports and games. It is’a good
plan. J will try to get all my officers to adopt it another
winter. Do the men join in them willingly?â€
Captain Jervoise and his officers had all, during the nine
months that had passed since they landed in Sweden, done
their best to acquire the language, and could now speak and
understand it thoroughly.
“They like it, your majesty. Our people are fond of
games of this kind. My four officers take part in them
with the men.â€
The king nodded. “That is as it should be. It must
create a good feeling on both sides. Present your officers
to me, Captain Jervoise.â€
This was done, and the king spoke a few words to each.
108 A JACOBITE EXILE
Charlie had often seen the king at a distance, but never
before so close as to be able to notice his face particularly.
He was a tall young fellow, thin and bony; his face was
long, and his forehead singularly high and somewhat pro-
jecting. ‘This was the most noticeable feature of his face.
His eyes were quick and keen, his face clean-shaven, and
had it not been for the forehead and eyes would have
attracted no attention. His movements were quick ‘and
energetic, and after speaking to the officers he strode a step
or two forward, and raising his voice said: “I am pleased
with you, men. Your appearance does credit to yourselves
and your officers. Scottish troops did grand service under
my grandfather, Gustavus Adolphus, and I would that I had
twenty battalions of such soldiers with me. I am going
hunting to-morrow, and I asked Colonel Schlippenbach for
half a company of men who could stand cold and fatigue.
He told me that I could not do better than take them from
among this company, and I see that he could not have
made a better choice; but I will not separate you, and will
therefore take you all. You will march in an hour, and I
will see that there is a good supper ready for you at the
end of your journey.â€
Colonel Schlippenbach gave Captain Jervoise directions
as to the road they were to follow, and the village at the
edge of the forest where they were to halt for the night.
He then walked away with the king. Highly pleased
with the praise Charles had given them, the company
fell out.
“Get your dinners as soon as you can, men,†Captain
Jervoise said. “The king gave us an hour. We must be
in readiness to march by that time.â€
On arriving at the village, which consisted of a few small
houses only, they found two waggons awaiting them, one
with tents and the other with a plentiful supply of provi-
sions and a barrel of wine. ‘lhe tents were erected, and
A PRISONER 109
then the men went into the forest and soon returned with
large quantities of wood, and great fires were speedily
lighted. Meat was cut up and roasted over them, and
regarding the expedition as a holiday, the men sat down to
their supper in high spirits. After it was eaten there were
songs round the fires, and at nine o’clock all turned into
their tents, as it was known that the king would arrive at
daylight. Sentries were posted, for there was never any
saying when marauding parties of Russians, who were con-
stantly on the move, might come along. Half an hour
before daybreak the men were aroused. Tents were struck
and packed in the waggon, and the men then fell in and
remained until the king with three or four of his officers
and fifty cavalry rode up. Fresh wood had been thrown on
the fires, and some of the men told off as cooks.
“That looks cheerful for hungry men,†the king said as
he leaped from his horse.
“T did not know whether your majesty would wish to
breakfast at once,’ Captain Jervoise said; “but I thought
it well to be prepared.â€
“We will breakfast by all means. We are all sharp set
already. Have your own men had food yet?â€
“No, sir; I thought perhaps they would carry it with
them.â€
“No, no; let them all have a hearty meal before they
move, then they can hold on as long as may be necessary.â€
The company fell out again, and in a quarter of an hour
they and the troopers breakfasted. A joint of meat was
placed for the use of the king and the officers who had
come with him, and Captain Jervoise and those with him
prepared to take their meal a short distance away, but
Charles said: “Bring that joint here, Captain Jervoise,
and we will all take breakfast together. We are all hunters
and comrades.â€
In a short time they were all seated round a fire with
110 A JACOBITE EXILE
their meat on wooden platters on their knees, and with
mugs of wine beside them, Captain Jervoise by the king’s
orders taking his seat beside him. During the meal he
asked him many questions as to his reasons for leaving
England and taking service with him.
“So you have meddled in politics, eh?†the king
laughed, when he heard a brief account of Captain Jer-
voise’s reason for leaving home. “Your quarrels in
England and Scotland have added many a thousand good
soldiers to the armies of France and Sweden, and I may
say of every country in Europe. I believe there are some
of your compatriots, or at any rate Scotchmen, in the
czar’s camp. I suppose that at William’s death these
troubles will cease.â€
“T do not know, sir. Anne was James’ favourite
daughter, and it may be she will resign in favour of her
brother, the lawful king. If she does so there is an end
of trouble; but should she mount the throne she would be
ausurper, as Mary was up to her death in’94. As Anne
has been on good terms with William since her sister’s
death, I fear she will act as unnatural a part as Mary did,
and in that case assuredly we shall not recognize her as our
queen.â€
“You have heard the news, I suppose, of the action of
the parliament last month?â€
“No, sir, we have heard nothing for some weeks of what
is doing in England.â€
“They have been making an Act of Settlement of the
succession. Anne is to succeed William, and as she has
no children by George of Denmark, the succession is to
pass from her to the Elector of Hanover, in right of his
wife Sophia, as the rest of the childen of the Elector of the
Palatinate have abjured Protestantism, and are therefore ex-
cluded. How will that meet the views of the English and
Scotch Jacobites?â€
A PRISONER 111
“Tt is some distance to look forward to, sire. If Anne
comes to the throne at William’s death, it will, I think,
postpone our hopes, for Anne is a Stuart, and is a favourite
with the nation in spite of her undutiful conduct to her
father. Still it will be felt that for Stuart to fight against
Stuart, brother against sister, would be contrary to nature.
Foreigners are always unpopular, and as against William,
every Jacobite is ready to take up arms. But I think that
nothing will be done during Anne’s reign. The Elector
of Hanover would be as unpopular among Englishmen in
general as is William of Orange, and should he come to
the throne there will assuredly ere long be a rising to bring
back the Stuarts.â€
Charles shook his head.
“T don’t want to ruffle your spirit of loyalty to the Stu-
arts, Captain Jervoise, but they have showed themselves
weak monarchs for a great country. ‘They want fibre.
William of Orange may be, as you call him, a foreigner
and a usurper, but England has greater weight in the coun-
cils of Europe in his hands than it has had since the death
of Elizabeth.â€
This was rather a sore point with Captain Jervoise, who,
thorough Jacobite as he was, had smarted under the subser-
vience of England to France during the reigns of the two
previous monarchs. “You I!nglishmen and Scotchmen are
fighting people,†the king went on, “and should have a
military monarch. I do not mean a king like myself, who
likes to fight in the front ranks of his soldiers; but one like
William, who has certainly lofty aims, and is a statesman,
and can join in European combinations.â€
“William thinks and plans more for Holland than for
England, sire. He would joina league against France and
Spain, not so much for the benefit of England, which has
not much to fear from these powers, but of Holland, whose
existence now as of old is threatened by them,â€
112 A JACOBITE EXILE
“England’s interest is similar to that of Holland,†the
king said. “I began this war nominally in the interest of
the Duke of Holstein, but really because it was Sweden’s
interest that Denmark should not become too powerful.
But we must not waste time in talking politics. I see the
men have finished their breakfast, and we are here to hunt.
I shall keep twenty horse with me; the rest will enter the
forest with you. I have arranged for the peasants here to
guide you. You will march two miles along by the edge
of the forest, and then enter it and make a wide semi-
circle, leaving men as you go, until you come down to the
edge of the forest again a mile to our left.
“As soon as you do so you will sound a trumpet, and the
men will then move forward, shouting so as to drive the
game before them. As the peasants tell me there are many
wolves and bears in the forest, I hope that you will inclose
some of them in your cordon, which will be about five
miles from end to end. With the horse you will have a
hundred and thirty men, so that there will be a man every
sixty or seventy yards. hat is too wide a space at first,
but as you close in the distances will rapidly lessen, and
they must make up by noise for the scantiness of their
numbers. If they find the animals are trying to break
through they can discharge their pieces; but do not let
them do so otherwise, as it would frighten the animals too
soon, and send them flying out all along the open side of
the semicircle.â€
It was more than two hours before the whole of the
beaters were in position. Just before they had started the
king had requested Captain Jervoise to remain with him
and the officers who had accompanied him, five in number.
They had been posted a hundred yards apart at the edge of
the forest. Charlie was the first officer left behind as the
troop moved through the forest, and it seemed to him an
endless time before he heard a faint shout, followed by
A PRISONER 113
another and another, until at last the man stationed next to
him repeated the signal. ‘Then they moved forward, each
trying to obey the orders to march straight ahead. For
some time nothing was heard save the shouts of the men,
and then Charlie made out some distant shots far in the
wood, and guessed that some animals were trying to break
through the lines. Then he heard the sound of firing
directly in front of him. ‘This continued for some time,
occasionally single shots being heard, but more often shots
in close succession. Louder and louder grew the shouting
as the men closed in towards a common point, and in half
an hour after the signal had been given all met.
“What sport have you had, father?†Harry asked as he
came up to Captain Jervoise.
“We killed seventeen wolves and four bears, with, what
is more important, six stags. I do not know whether we
are going to have another beat.â€
It soon turned out that this was the king’s intention, and
the troops marched along the edge of the forest. Charlie
was in the front of his company, the king with the cavalry
a few hundred yards ahead, when from a dip of ground on
the right a large body of horsemen suddenly appeared.
“Russians !� Captain Jervoise exclaimed, and shouted to
the men, who were marching at ease, to close up. ‘The
king did not hesitate a moment, but at the head of his fifty
cavalry, charged right down upon the Russians, who were
at least five hundred strong. ‘he little body disappeared
in the mélée, and then seemed to be swallowed up.
“Keep together, shoulder to shoulder, men. Double!â€
and the company set off at a run. When they came close
to the mass of horsemen they poured in a volley, and then
rushed forward, hastily fitting the short pikes they carried
into their musket-barrels; for as yet the modern form of
bayonets was not used. ‘Vhe Russians fought obstinately,
but the infantry pressed their way step by step through
114 A JACOBITE EXILE
them until they reached the spot where the king with his
little troop of cavalry were defending themselves desper-
ately from the attacks of the Russians. The arrival of the
infantry decided the contest, and the Russians began to
draw off, the king hastening the movement by plunging into
the midst of them with his horsemen.
Charlie was on the flank of the company as it advanced,
and after running through a Russian horseman with the
short pike that was carried by officers he received a tre-
mendous blow on his steel cap, that stretched him insensi-
ble on the ground. When he recovered he felt that he
was being carried, and soon awoke to the fact that he was
a prisoner.
After a long ride the Russians arrived at Plescow.
They had lost some sixty men in the fight. Charlie was
the only prisoner taken. He was, on dismounting, too
weak to stand, but he was half-carried and half-dragged to
the quarters of the Russian officer in command. The latter
addressed him, but finding that he was not understood, sent
for an officer who spoke Swedish.
“What were the party you were with doing in the wood?â€
“We were hunting wolves and bears.â€
“Where did you come from?â€
“From Marienburg.â€
“ How strong were youeâ€â€™
“Fifty horse and a hundred and forty foot,†Charlie
replied, knowing there could be no harm in stating the
truth.
“But it was a long way to march merely to hunt, and your
officers must have been mad to come out with so small a
party to a point where they were likely to meet with us.â€
“Tt was not too small a party, sir, as they managed to
beat off the attack made upon them.â€
The Russian was silent for a moment, then he asked:
“Who was the officer in command?â€
A PRISONER 115
“The officer in command was the King of Sweden,â€
Charlie replied. An exclamation of surprise and anger
broke from the Russian general when the answer was trans-
latedtohim. “You missed a good chance of distinguishing
yourself,†he said to the officer in command of the troops.
“Here has this mad King of Sweden been actually putting
himself in your hands, and you have let him slip through
your fingers. It would have got you two steps in rank and
the favour of the czar had you captured him, and now he
will be in a rage indeed when he hears that five hundred
cavalry could do nothing against a force only a third of
their number.â€
“T had no idea that the King of Sweden was there him-
self,†the officer said humbly.
“Bah, that is no excuse. There were officers, and you
ought to have captured them instead of allowing yourself
to be put to flight by a hundred and fifty men.â€
“We must have killed half the horsemen before the
infantry came up.â€
“All the worse, colonel, that you did not complete the
business. The infantry would not have been formidable
after they discharged their pieces. However, it is your
own affair, and I wash my hands of it. What the czar will
say when he hears of it I know not, but I would not be in
your shoes for all my estates.†As Charlie learned after-
wards, the colonel was degraded from his rank by the angry
czar, and ordered to serve as a private in the regiment he
commanded. The officer who acted as translator said
something in his own tongue to the general, who then,
through him, said—“'This officer tells me that by your
language you are not a Swede.â€
“Tam not. Iam English, and I am an ensign in the
Malmoe Regiment.â€
“All the worse for you,†the general said. “The czar
has declared that he will exchange no foreign officers who
may be taken prisoneys,â€â€™
116 A JACOBITE EXILE
“Very well, sir,†Charlie said, fearlessly. “He will be
only punishing his own officers. ‘There are plenty of them
in the King of Sweden’s hands.â€
The general, when this reply was translated to him,
angrily ordered Charlie to be taken away, and he was soon
lodged in a cell in the castle. His head was still swimming
from the effects of the blow that had stricken him down,
and without even trying to think over his position he threw
himself down on the straw pallet, and was soon asleep. It
was morning when he woke, and for a short time he was
unable to imagine where he was, but soon recalled what
had happened. He had been visited by some one after he
had lain down, for a platter of bread and meat stood on the
table, and a jug of water. He was also covered with two
thick blankets. These had not been there when he lay
down, for he had wondered vaguely as to how he should
pass the night without some covering. He took a long
draught of water, then ate some food. His head throbbed
with the pain of the wound. It had been roughly bandaged
by his captors, but needed surgical dressing.
“T wonder how long I am likely to be before I am
exchanged,â€â€ he said to himself. “A long time, I am
afraid; for there are scores of Russian officers prisoners
with us, and I don’t think there are half a dozen of ours
captured by the Russians. Of course no exchange can take
place until there are a good batch to send over, and it may
be months may pass before they happen to lay hands on
enough Swedish officers to make it worth while to trouble
about exchanging them.â€
An hour later the door opened and an officer entered,
followed by a soldier with a large bowl of broth and some
bread.
“T am a doctor,†he said in Swedish. “I came in to
see you yesterday evening, but you were sound asleep, and
that was a better medicine than any I can give; so I told
A PRISONER 117
the man to throw those two barrack rugs over you, and leave
your food in case you should wake, which did not seem to
me likely. I see, however, that you did wake,†and he
pointed to the plate.
“That was not till this morning, doctor; it is not an hour
since I ate it.â€
“Vhis broth will be better for you, and I daresay you can
manage another breakfast. Sit down and take it at once
while it is hot. Iam in no hurry.†He gave an order in
Russian to the soldier, who went out, and returned in a
few minutes with a small wooden tub filled with hot water.
By this time Charlie had finished the broth. ‘The doctor
then bathed his head for some time in hot water, but was
obliged to cut off some of his hair in order to remove the
bandage. Ashe examined the wound Charlie was astounded
to hear him mutter to himself:
“Tt is a mighty nate clip you have got, my boy; and if
your skull had not been a thick one, it is lying out there on
the turf you would be.â€
Charlie burst into a fit of laughter. “So you are English
too,†he exclaimed, as he looked up into the surgeon's
face.
“At laste Irish, my boy,†the doctor said, as surprised
as Charlie had been. “’To think we should have been
talking Swedish to each other instead of our native tongue.
And what is your name? And what is it you are doing
here as a Swede, at all?â€
“My name is Charles Carstairs. I come from JLanca-
shire, just on the borders of Westmoreland. My father
is a Jacobite, and so had to leave the country. He went
over to Sweden, and I with some friends of his got com-
missions.â€
“Then our cases are pretty much alike,†the doctor said.
“YT had gone through Dublin University, and had just
passed as a surgeon when King James landed. It didn’t
118 A JACOBITE EXILE
much matter to me who was king, but I thought it was a
fine opportunity to study gunshot wounds, so I joined the
royal army, and was at the battle of the Boyne. I had
plenty of work with wounds early in the day, but when,
after the Irish had fairly beat the Dutchman back all day,
they made up their minds to march away at night, I had to
lave my patients and be offtoo. ‘Then I was shut up in Lim-
erick; and I was not idle there, as you may guess. When
at last the surrender came I managed to slip away, having
no fancy for going over with the regiments that were to
enter the service of France. I thought I could have gone
back to Dublin, and that no one would trouble about me;
but some one put them up to it, and I had to go without
stopping to ask leave. I landed at Bristol, and there for
a time was nearly starving.
“I was well-nigh my wits’ end as to what to do for a liy-
ing, and had just spent my last shilling, when I met an
English captain who told me that across at Goettenburg
there were a good many Irish and Scotchmen who had,
like myself, been in trouble at home. He gave me a pas-
sage across, and took me to the house of a man he knew.
Of course, it was no use my trying to doctor people when
they could not tell me what was the matter with them,
and I worked at one thing and another, doing anything I
could turn my hands to, for four or five months. That is
how I got to pick up Swedish. Then some people told me
that Russia was a place where a doctor might get on, for
that they had got no doctors for their army who knew any-
thing of surgery, and the czar was always ready to take on
foreigners who could teach them anything. I had got my
diploma with me, and some of my friends came forward
and subscribed enough to rig me out in clothes and pay my
passage. What was better, one of them happened to have
made the acquaintance of Le lord, who was, as you may
nave heard, the czar’s most intimate friend.
A PRISONER 119
“TJ wished myself back a hundred times before I reached
Moscow, but when I did everything was easy for me. Le
Ford introduced me to the czar, and I was appointed sur-
geon of a newly-raised regiment, of which Le Ford was
colonel. ‘That was eight years ago, and I am now a sort of
surgeon-general of a division, and am at the head of the
hospitals about here. ‘Till the war began I had not for
five years done any military work, but had been at the head
of a college the czar has established for training surgeons
for the army. I was only sent down here after that busi-
ness at Narva. So you see I have fallen on my feet. ‘The
czar’s is a good service, and we employ a score or two of
Scotchmen, most of them in good posts. He took to them
because a Scotchman, General Gordon, and other foreign
officers, rescued him from his sister Sophia, who intended
to assassinate him, and established him firmly on the
throne of his father. It is a pity you are not on this side.
Perhaps it isn’t too late to change, eh?â€
Charlie laughed. “My father is in Sweden, and my
company is commanded by a man who is as good as a
father to me, and his son is like my brother. If there
were no other reason I could not change. Why, it was
only yesterday I was sitting round a bivouac fire with King
Charles, and nothing would induce me to fight against
him.â€
“T am not going to try to persuade you. ‘The czar has
treated me well, and I love him. By the way, I have not
given you my name after all. It’s Terence Kelly.â€
“Ts not the czar very fierce and cruel?â€
“‘Bedad, I would be much more cruel and fierce if I were
in his place. Just think of one man with all Russia on his
shoulders. ‘There is he trying to improve the country,
working like a horse himself, knowing that, like every
other Russian, he is as ignorant as a pig, and setting to
improve himself—working in the dockyards of Holland
120 A JACOBITE EXILE
and England, attending lectures, and all kinds of subjects.
Why, man, he learnt anatomy, and can take off a leg as
quickly as I can. He is building a fleet and getting to-
gether an army. It is not much good yet, you will say, but
it will be some day. You can turn a peasant into a soldier
in six months, but it takes a long time to turn out generals
and officers who are fit for their work.
“Then, while he is trying everywhere to improve his
country, every man jack of them objects to being im-
proved, and wants to go along in his old ways. Didn't
they get up an insurrection only because he wanted them
to cut off their beards? Any other man would have lost
heart and given it up years ago. It looks as hopeless a
task as for a mouse to drag a mountain, but he is doing it.
I don’t say that he is perfect. He gets into passions, and
it is mighty hard for anyone he gets into a passion with.
3ut who would not get into passions when there is so much
work to be done, and every one tries to hinder instead of
to help? It would break the heart of St. Patrick! Why,
that affair at Narva would have broken down most men.
Here for years has he been working to make an army, and
the first time they meet an enemy worthy of the name,
what do they do? Why, they are beaten by a tenth of their
number of half-starved men, led by a mad-brained young
fellow who had never heard a shot fired before, and lose all
their cannon, guns, ammunition, and stores. Why, I
was heart-broken myself when I heard of it; but Peter,
instead of blowing out his brains or drowning himself, set
to work, an hour after the news reached him, to bring up
fresh troops, to re-arm the men, and to prepare to mect the
Swedes again as soon as the snow is off the ground. If
James of Ingland had been Peter of Russia he would be
ruling over Ireland now, and England and Scotland too.
But now I must be off. Don’t you worry about your head,
IT haye seen as bad a clip given by a blackthorn. I have
A PRISONER 121
got to go round now and see the wounded, and watch
some operations being done, but I will come in again this
evening. Don’t eat any more of their messes if they bring
them in; you and I will have a snug little dinner together.
I might get you put into a more dacent chamber, but the
general is one of the old pig-headed sort. We don’t pull
together, so I would rather not ask any favours from him.
The czar may come any day—he is always flying about. I
will speak to him when he comes, and see that you have
better entertainment.â€
CHAPTER VII
EXCHANGED
ATE in the afternoon, Dr. Kelly came in again to the
cell. ‘Come along,†he said; “I have got lave for
you to have supper with me, and have given my pledge that
you won't try to escape till it is over, or make any onslaught
on the garrison, but will behave like a quiet and peaceable
man.â€
“You are quite safe in giving the pledge, doctor,â€
Charlie laughed.
“Come along then, me boy, for they were just dishing
up when I came to fetch you; it is cold enough outside,
and there is no sinse in putting cold victuals into one in
such weather as this.â€
They were not long in reaching a snugly-furnished room,
where a big fire was burning. Another gentleman was
standing with his back to it. He was a man of some seven
or eight-and-twenty, with large features, dark brown hair
falling in natural curls over his ears, and large and power-
ful in build.
“This is my friend, Charlie Carstairs,†the doctor said.
“This, Carstairs, is Peter Michacloff, a better doctor than
most of those who mangle the czar’s soldiers.â€
“Things will better in time,†the other said, “when your
pupils begin to take their places in the army.â€
122
EXCHANGED 123
“T hope so,†the doctor said, shrugging his shoulders.
“There is one comfort, they can’t be much worse.†At
this moment a servant entered bearing a bowl of soup and
three basins. ‘They at once seated themselves at the table.
“So you managed to get yourself captured yesterday,â€
Dr. Michaeloff said to Charlie. “I have not had the
pleasure of seeing many of you gentlemen here.â€
“We don’t come if we can help it,†Charlie laughed.
“But the Cossacks were so pressing that I could not resist.
In fact I did not know anything about it until I was well
on the way.â€
“T hope they have made you comfortable,†the other said
sharply.
“T can’t say much for the food,†Charlie said, “and still
less for the cell, which was bitterly cold. Still, as the
doctor gave me two rugs to wrap myself up in, I need not
grumble.â€
“That is not right,†the other said angrily. ‘I hear that
the King of Sweden treats our prisoners well. You should
have remonstrated, Kelly.â€
The Irishman shrugged his shoulders. ‘I ventured to
hint to the general that I thought an officer had a right to
better treatment even if he were a prisoner, but I was told
sharply to mind my own business, which was with the sick
and wounded. I said as the prisoner was wounded I thought
it was a matter that did come to some extent under my
control.â€
“What did the pig say?â€
“He grumbled something between his teeth that I did
not catch, and as I thought the prisoner would not be kept
there long, and was not unaccustomed to roughing it, it was
not worth while pressing the matter further.â€
“Have you heard that an officer has been here this after-
noon with a flag of truce to treat for your exchange?†Dr.
Michaeloff said, turning suddenly to Charlie.
124 A JACOBITE EXILE
“No; I have not heard anything about it,†Charlie
said.
“He offered a captain for you, which you may consider
a high honour.â€
“Tt is, no doubt,†Charlie said with a smile. “TI suppose
his majesty thought, as it was in his special service I was
caught, he was bound to get me released if he could.â€
“Tt was a hunting party, was it not?â€
“Ves. There was only the king with four of his officers
there, and my company of foot and fifty horse. I don’t
think I can call it an escort, for we went principally as
beaters.â€
“Rustoff missed a grand chance there, Kelly. What
regiment do you belong to?†And he again turned to
Charlie.
“The Malmoe Regiment. The company is commanded
by an English gentleman, who is a neighbour and great
friend of my father. His son is an ensign, and my greatest
friend. ‘The men are all either Scotch or English, but most
of them Scotch.â€
“They are good soldiers the Scotch; none better. There
are a good many in the Russian service, also in that of
Austria and France; they are always faithful and to be relied
upon even when native troops prove treacherous. And you
like Charles of Sweden?â€
“There is not a soldier in his army but likes him,â€
Charlie said enthusiastically. “He expects us to do much,
but he does more himself. All through the winter he did
everything in his power for us, riding long distances from
camp to camp to visit the sick and to keep up the spirits
of the men. If we live roughly so does he, and on the
march he will take his meals among the soldiers, and wrap
himself up in his cloak, and sleep on the bare ground just
as they do. And as for his bravery, he exposes his life
recklessly—too recklessly, we all think—and it seemed a
EXCHANGED 125
miracle that, always in the front as he was, he should have
got through Narva without a scratch.â€
“Ves, that was a bad bit of business that Narva,†the
other said thoughtfully. “Why do you think we were
beaten in the horrible way we were—because the Russians
are no cowards?â€
“No; they made a gallant stand when they recovered
from their surprise,†Charlie agreed. “But in the first
place, they were taken by surprise.â€
“They ought not to have been,†the doctor said angrily.
“They had news two days before brought by the cavalry,
who ought to have defended that pass, but didn’t.â€
“Still it was a surprise when we attacked,†Charlie said,
“for they could not suppose that the small body they saw
were going to assail them. Then we had the cover of that
snowstorm, and they did not see us until we reached the
edge of the ditch. Of course, your general ought to have
made proper dispositions, and to have collected the greater
part of his troops at the spot facing us, instead of having
them strung out round that big semicircle, so that when we
made an entry they were separated, and each half was igno-
rant of what the other was doing. Still, even then they
might have concentrated between the trenches and the
town. But no orders had been given. The general was
one of the first we captured, the others waited for the orders
that never came until it was too late. If the general who
commanded on the left had massed his troops, and marched
against us as we were attacking the position they held
on their right, we should have been caught between two
fires.â€
“Tt was a badly managed business altogether,†Dr.
Michaeloff growled; “but we shall do better next time.
We shall understand Charles’s tactics better. We reckoned
on his troops, but we did not reckon on him. Kelly tells
me that you would not care to change service,â€
126 A JACOBITE EXILE
“My friends are in the Swedish army, and I am well
satisfied with the service. I daresay if Russia had been
nearer England than Sweden is, and we had landed there
first, we should have been as glad to enter the service of
the czar as we were to join that of King Charles. Every one
says that the czar makes strangers welcome, and that he is
a liberal master to those who serve him well. As to the
quarrel between them, Iam not old enough to be able to give
my opinion on it, though, as far as 1 am concerned, it seems
to me that it was not a fair thing for Russia to take advan-
tage of Sweden’s being at war with Denmark and Augustus
of Saxony, to fall upon her without any cause of quarrel.â€
“Nations move less by morality than interest,†Dr.
Michaeloff said calmly. “Russia wants a way to the sea
—the Turks cut her off to the south, and the Swedes from
the Baltic. She is smothered between them, and when she
saw her chance she took it. ‘That is not good morality, I
admit that it is the excuse of the poor man who robs the
rich, but it is human nature, and nations act in the long
run a good deal like individuals.â€
“But you have not told me yet, doctor,†Charlie said,
turning the conversation, ‘whether the proposal for an
exchange was accepted.â€
“The general had no power to accept it, Carstairs. It
had to be referred to the czar himself.â€
“T wish his majesty could see me then,†Charlie laughed.
“He would see that I am but a lad, and that my release
would not greatly strengthen the Swedish army.â€
“But then the czar may be of opinion that none of his
officers who allowed themselves to be captured by a handful
of men at Narva would be of any use to him,†Dr. Michaeloff
laughed. é
“That may, doubtless, be said of a good many among
them,†Charlie said, “but individually none of the cap-
tains could be blamed for the mess they made of it.â€
EXCHANGED 127
“Perhaps not, but if all the men had been panic-stricken,
there were officers enough to have gathered together and
cut their way through the Swedes.â€
“No doubt there were; but you must remember, Dr.
Michaeloff, that an officer’s place is with his company, and
that it is his duty to think of his men before thinking of
himself. Supposing all the officers of the left wing, as you
say, had gathered together and cut their way out, the czar
would have had a right to blame them for the capture of
the whole of the men. How could they tell that at day-
break the general would not have given orders for the left
wing to attack the Swedes? ‘They were strong enough still
to have eaten us up had they made the effort, and had the
czar been there in person I will warrant he would have
tried it.â€
“That he would,†Dr. Michaeloff said warmly. “You
are right there, young sir. The czar may not be a soldier,
but at least he is a man, which is more than can be said
for the officer who ordered sixty thousand men to lay down
their arms to eight thousand.â€
“Tam sure of that,’ Charlie said. “A man who would
do as he has done, leave his kingdom and work like a com-
mon man in dockyards to learn how to build ships, and who
tules his people as he does, must be a great man. I don’t
suppose he would do for us in England, because a king has
no real power with us, and Peter would never put up with
being thwarted in all his plans by parliament as William is.
But for a counrty like Russia he is wonderful. Of course,
our company being composed of Scotchmen and English-
men, we have no prejudices against him. We think him
wrong for entering upon this war against Sweden, but we
all consider him a wonderful fellow, just the sort of fellow
one would be proud to serve under if we did not serve
under Charles of Sweden. Well, Dr. Kelly, when do you
think the czar will be here?â€
128 A JACOBITE EXILE
The doctor did not reply, but Michaeloff said quietly,
“‘He arrived this afternoon.â€
“He did!†Charlie exclaimed excitedly. “Why did
you not tell me before, Dr. Kelly? Has he been asked
about my exchange, and is the Swedish officer still here?â€
“He is here, and you will be exchanged in the morning.
I have other things to see about now, and must say good-
night; and if you should ever fall into the hands of our
people again, and Dr. Kelly does not happen to be near, ask
for Peter Michaeloff, and he will do all he can for you.â€
“Then I am really to be exchanged to-morrow, doctor?â€
Charlie said as Dr. Michaeloff left the room.
“Tt seems like it.â€
“But did not you know?â€
“No, I had heard nothing for certain. J knew the czar
had come, but I had not heard of his decision. I congratu-
late you.â€
“Tt is a piece of luck,†Charlie said. “I thought it
might be months before there was an exchange. It is very
good of the king to send over so quickly.â€
“Yes; and of the czar to let you go.â€
“Well, I don’t see much in that, doctor, considering that
he gets a captain in exchange for me; still, of course, he
might have refused. It would not have been civil, but he
might have done it.â€
“What did you think of my friend, Charlie?â€
“T like him; he has a pleasant face, though I should
think he has got a temper of his own. He has a splendid
figure, and looks more like a fighting man than a doctor.
I will write down his name so as not to forget it, as he says
he might be able to help me if I am ever taken prisoner
again and you did not happen to be with the army. It is
always nice having a friend; look at the difference it has
made to me finding a countryman here.â€
“Yes, you may find it useful, Carstairs; and he has a
EXCHANGED : 129
good deal of influence. Still I think it probable that if
you ever should get into a scrape again you will be able to
get tidings of me, for I am likely to be with the advanced
division of our army wherever it is, as | am in charge of its -
hospitals. You had better turn in now, for I suppose you
will be starting early, and I have two or three patients |
must visit again before I go to bed. ‘This is your room
next to mine, I managed after all to get it changed.â€
“That is very good of you, doctor, but it really would not
have mattered a bit for one night. It does look snug and
warm with that great fire.â€
“Ves, the stoves are the one thing I don’t like in Russia.
I like to see a blazing fire, and the first thing | do when I
get into fresh quarters is to have the stove opened so that
I can see one. ‘This is a second room of mine. There
were three together, you see, and as my rank is that of a
colonel I was able to get them, and it is handy if a friend
comes to see me to have a room for him.â€
An hour later, just as Charlie was dozing off to sleep, the
doctor put his head in to the door. “You are to start at
daybreak, Carstairs. My servant will call you an hour be-
fore that. I shall be up; I must put a fresh bandage on
your head before you start.â€
“Thank you very much, doctor; I am sorry to get you
up so early.â€
“That is nothing; I am accustomed to work at all hours.
Good-night.â€
At eight o’clock, having had a bowl of broth, Charlie
descended to the court-yard in charge of an officer and two
soldiers, the doctor accompanying him. Here he found a
Swedish officer belonging to the king’s personal staff. “he
Russian handed the lad formally over to his charge, saying,
“By the orders of the czar, I now exchange Ensign Car-
stairs for Captain Potoff, whom you on your part engage to
send off at once.â€
130 A JACOBITE EXILE
“T do,†the Swede said; “that is, I engage that he shall
be sent off as soon as he can be fetched from Revel, where
he is now interned, and shall be safely delivered under an
escort; and that if either by death, illness, or escape I
should not be able to hand him over, I will return another
officer of the same rank.â€
“‘T have the czar’s commands,†the Russian went on, “to
express his regret that, owing to a mistake on the part of
the officer commanding here, Ensign Carstairs has not
received such worthy treatment as the czar would have
desired for him, but he has given stringent orders that in
future any Swedish officers who may be taken prisoners
shall receive every comfort and hospitality that can be
shown them.â€
“Good-bye, Doctor Kelly,†Charlie said as he mounted
his horse, which had been saddled in readiness for him.
“T am greatly obliged to you for your very great kindness
to me, and hope that I may some day have an opportunity
of repaying it.â€
“T hope not, Carstairs. I trust that we may meet again,
but hope that I sha’n’t be in the position of a prisoner.
However, strange things have happened already in this war,
and there is no saying how fortune may go. Good-bye,
and a pleasant journey.â€
A Russian officer took his place by the side of the Swede,
and an escort of twenty troopers rode behind them as they
trotted out through the gate of the convent.
“Tt was very kind of the king to send for me,†Charlie
said to the Swede, “and I am really sorry that you should
have had so long a ride on my account, Captain Prado-
vich.â€
“As to that it is a trifle,†the officer said; “if I had not
been riding here I should be riding with the king else-
where, so that I am none the worse. But in truth I am
glad I came, for yesterday evening I saw the czar himself.
EXCHANGED 131
I conversed with him for some time. He expressed him-
self very courteously with respect to the king and to our
army, against whom he seems to bear no sort of malice for
the defeat we inflicted on him at Narva. He spoke of it
himself, and said, ‘you will see that some day we shall
turn the tables upon you.’ ‘The king will be pleased when
I return with you, for we all feared that you might be very
badly hurt. All that we knew was that some of your men
had seen you cut down. After the battle was over a
search was made for your body. When it could not be
found, questions were asked of some of our own men, and
some wounded Russians who were lying near the spot where
you had been seen to fall.
“Our men had seen nothing, for as the Russians closed
in behind your company as it advanced they had shut their
eyes and lay as if dead, fearing that they might be run
through as they lay by the Cossack lances. ‘The Russians,
however, told us that they had seen two of the Cossacks
dismount by the orders of one of their officers, lift you on
to a horse, and ride off with you. ‘There was therefore a
certainty that you were still living, for the Russians would
assuredly not have troubled to carry off a dead body. His
majesty interested himself very much in the matter, and
yesterday morning sent me off to inquire if you were alive,
and if so, to propose an exchange. I was much pleased
when I reached Plescow yesterday to learn that your wound
is not a serious one. I saw the doctor, who, I found, was
a countryman of yours, and he assured me that it was noth-
ing, and made some joke that I did not understand about
the thickness of North Country skulls.
“The czar arrived in the afternoon, but J did not see
him until late in the evening, when I was sent for. I found
him with the general in command, and several other offi-
cers, among whom was your friend the doctor. The czar
was at first ina furious passion. He abused the general
132 A JACOBITE EXILE
right and left, and I almost thought at one time that he
would have struck him. He told him that he had dis-
graced the Russian name by not treating you with proper
hospitality, and especially by placing you in a miserable
cell without a fire. ‘What will the King of Sweden think?’
he said. ‘He treats his prisoners with kindness and cour-
tesy, and after Narva gave them a banquet, at which he
himself was present. The Duke of Croy writes to me to say
he is treated as an honoured guest rather than as a prisoner,
and here you disgrace us by shutting your prisoner in a
cheerless cell, although he is wounded, and giving him
food such as you might give to a common soldier. The
Swedes will think that we are barbarians. You are released
from your command, and will at once proceed to Moscow
and report yourself there, when a post will be assigned to
you where you will have no opportunity of showing yourself
ignorant of the laws of courtesy. Doctor,’ he went on,
‘you will remember that all prisoners, officers and men,
will be henceforth under the charge of the medical depart-
ment, and that you have full authority to make such ar-
rangements as you may think necessary for their comfort
and honourable treatment. I will not have Russia made
a by-word among civilized peoples.’ Then he dismissed
the rest of them, and afterwards sat down and chatted with
me, just as if we had been of the same rank, puffing a pipe
furiously, and drinking amazing quantities of wine; indeed
my head feels the effects of it this morning, although I was
quite unable to drink cup for cup with him, for had I
done so I should have been under the table long before he
rose from it, seemingly quite unmoved by the quantity he
had drank. I have no doubt he summoned me especially
to hear his rebuke to the general, so that I could take word
to the king how earnest he was in his regrets for your
treatment.â€
“Yhere was nothing much to complain of,†Charlie said;
iepp
JS AS MUCITL
AS T CAN DO
TO KEEP MY SADDLE.â€
EXCHANGED 133
“and, indeed, the cell was a palace after the miserable
huts in which we have passed the winter. I am glad,
however, the czar gave the general a wigging, for he spoke
brutally to me on my arrival. You may be sure now that
any prisoners that may be taken will be well treated; for
Doctor Kelly, who has been extremely kind to me, will
certainly take good care of them. As to my wound, it is
of little consequence. It fell on my steel cap, and I think
I was stunned by its force rather than rendered insensible
by the cut itself.â€
After three hours’ riding they came to a village. As
soon as they were seen approaching there was a stir there.
A man riding ahead waved the white flag that he carried,
and when they entered the village they found a party of
fifty Swedish cavalry in the saddle. ‘The Russian escort,
as soon as the Swedish officer and Charlie had joined their
friends, turned and rode off. A meal was in readiness,
and when Charlie, who was still feeling somewhat weak
from the effects of his wound, had partaken of it, the party
proceeded on their way, and rode into Marienburg before
nightfall. ‘Two or three miles outside the town they met
Harry Jervoise. Two soldiers had been sent on at full
speed directly Charlie reached the village, to report that he
had arrived there and was not seriously wounded, and know-
ing about the time they would arrive, Harry had ridden
out to meet his friend.
“You are looking white,†he said after the first hearty
greeting.
“Tam feeling desperately tired, Harry. The wound is
of no consequence, but I lost a good deal of blood, and it
is as much as I can do to keep my saddle, though we have
been coming on quietly on purpose. However, I shall
soon be all right again, and I need hardly say that I am
heartily glad to be back.â€
“We have all been in a great way about you, Charlie,
134 A JACOBITE EXILE
for we made sure that you were very badly wounded. I
can tell you it was a relief when the men rode in three
hours ago with the news that you had arrived, and were not
badly hurt. The men seemed as pleased as we were, and
there was a loud burst of cheering when we told them the
news. Cunningham and Forbes would have ridden out
with me; but Cunningham is on duty, and Forbes thought
that we should like to have a chat together.â€
On his arrival Charlie was heartily welcomed by Captain
Jetvoise and the men of the company, who cheered lustily
as he rode up.
“You are to go and see the king at once,†Captain Jer-
voise said as he dismounted. ‘I believe he wants to hear
especially how you were treated. Make the best of it you
can, lad; there is no occasion for the feeling of Charles
against the Russians being embittered.â€
“T understand,â€â€™ Charlie said; “I will make things as
smooth as I can.â€
He walked quickly to the little house where the king had
taken up his quarters. There was no sentry at the door,
or other sign that the house contained an occupant of
special rank. He knocked at the door, and hearing a
shout of “Enter,†opened it and went in.
“Ah, my young ensign; is it you?†the king said, rising
from a low settle on which he was sitting by the fire, talk-
ing with Colonel Schlippenbach.
“Hurt somewhat, I see, but not badly, I hope. I was
sure that you would not have been taken prisoner unless
you had been injured.â€
“Twas cut down by a blow that clove my helmet, your
majesty, and stunned me for some time; but beyond mak-
ing a somewhat long gash on my skull, it did me no great
harm.â€
“That speaks well for the thickness of your skull, lad,
and I am heartily glad it is no worse. Now, tell me, how
did they treat you?â€
EXCHANGED 135
“Tt was a somewhat rough cell into which I was thrown,
sir, but I was most kindly tended by an Irish doctor high
in the ezar’s service, and when the czar himself arrived
and learned that I had not been lodged as well as he
thought necessary, | hear he was so angered that he dis-
graced the general, deprived him of his command, and
sent him to take charge of some fortress in the interior of
Russia, and I was by his orders allowed to occupy the
doctor’s quarters, and a bed-room was assigned to me next
to his. I heard that the czar spoke in terms of the warm-
est appreciation of your treatment of your prisoners, and
said that any of your officers who fell into his hands should
be treated with equal courtesy.â€
Charles looked gratified. “I am glad to hear it,†he
said. “In the field, if necessary, blood must flow like
water, but there is no reason why we should not behave
towards each other with courtesy when the fighting is over.
You know nothing of the force there at present?â€
“No, sir, I heard nothing. I did not exchange a word
with anyone save the doctor and another medical man;
and as the former treated me as a friend rather than as an
enemy, I did not deem it right to question him, and had |
done so I am sure that he would have given me no answer.â€
“Well, you can return to your quarters, sir. Your com-
pany did me good service in that fight, and Colonel Schlip-
penbach did not speak in any way too warmly in their
favour. I would that I had more of these brave English-
men and Scotchmen in my service.â€
Charlie’s head, however, was not as hard as he had be-
lieved it to be; and the long ride brought on inflammation
of the wound, so that on the following morning he was in
a high state of fever. It was a fortnight before he was
convalescent, and the surgeon then recommended that he
should have rest and quiet for a time, as he was sorely
pulled down and unfit to bear the hardships of a campaign ;
186 A JACOBITE EXILE
and it was settled that he should go down with the next
convoy to Revel, and thence take ship for Sweden. He
was so weak, that although very sorry to leave the army
just as spring was commencing, he himself felt that he
should be unable to support the fatigues of the campaign
until he had had entire rest and change. A few hours
atter the decision of the surgeon had been given, Major
Jamieson and Captain Jervoise entered the room where he
was sitting, propped up by pillows.
“TI have a bit of news that will please you, Charlie. ‘The
king sent for the major this morning, and told him that
he intended to increase our company to a regiment if he
could do so. He had heard that a considerable number of
Scotchmen and Englishmen had come over, and were de-
sirous of enlisting, but from their ignorance of the lan-
guage their services had been declined. He said that he
was so pleased not only with the conduct of the company
in that fight, but with its discipline, physique, and power
of endurance, that he had decided to convert it into a regi-
ment. He said he was sorry to lose its services for a
time; but as we lost twenty men in the fight, and have
some fifteen still too disabled to take their places in the
ranks, this was of the less importance. So we are all going
to march down to Revel with you. Major Jamieson is
appointed colonel, and I am promoted to be major; the
king himself directed that Cunningham and Forbes shall
have commissions as captains, and you and Harry as lieu-
tenants. ‘The colonel has authority given him to nominate
Scotch and English gentlemen of good name to make up
the quota of officers, while most of our own men will be
appointed non-commissioned officers to drill the new
recruits. The king has been good enough at Colonel
Jamieson’s request to say, that as soon as the regiment is
raised and organized, it shall be sent up to the front.â€
“Vhat is good news, indeed,†Charlie said with more
EXCHANGED 187
animation than he had evinced since his illness. “I have
been so accustomed to be attended to in every way that |
was quite looking forward with dread to the journey among
strangers; still, if you are all going, it will be a different
thing altogether. I don’t think you will be long in raising
the regiment. We only were a week in getting the com-
pany together, and if they have been refusing to accept
the services of our people, there must be numbers of them
at Gottenburg.â€
‘arly on the following morning Charlie and the men
unable to march were placed in waggons, and the company
started on its march to Revel. It was a heavy journey, for
the frost had broken up and the roads were in a terrible
state from the heavy traffic passing. ‘There was no delay
when they reached the port, as they at once marched on
board a ship, which was the next day to start for Sweden.
Orders from the king had already been received that the
company was to be conveyed direct to Gottenburg, and they
entered the port on the fifth day after sailing. The change,
the sea air, and the prospect of seeing his father again
greatly benefited Charlie, and while the company was
marched to a large building assigned to their use, he was
able to make his way on foot to his father’s, assisted by his
soldier-servant Jock Armstrong.
“Why, Charlie,†Sir Marmaduke Carstairs exclaimed as
he entered, “who would have thought of seeing you? You
are looking ill, lad; ill and weak. What has happened to
you?â€
Charlie briefly related the events that had brought about
his return to Gottenburg, of which Sir Marmaduke was
entirely ignorant. Postal communications were rare and
uncertain, and Captain Jervoise had not taken advantage of
the one opportunity that offered after Charlie had been
wounded, thinking it better to delay till the lad could write
and give a good account of himself.
138 A JACOBITE EXILE
“So Jervoise, and his son, and that good fellow Jamie-
son are all back again? ‘That is good news, Charlie; and
you have been promoted? ‘That is capital too, after only
a year in the service. And you have been wounded, and-a
prisoner among the Russians? You have had adventures
indeed! I was terribly uneasy when the first news of that
wonderful victory at Narva came, for we generally have to
wait for the arrival of the despatches giving the lists of the
killed and wounded. I saw that the regiment had not been
in the thick of it, as the lists contained none of your names.
I would have given a limb to have taken part in that won-
derful battle. When you get as old as I am, my boy, you
will feel a pride in telling how you fought at Narva, and
helped to destroy an entire Russian army with the odds ten
to one against you. Of course you will stay here with me;
I suppose you have leave at present?â€
“Ves, father, Colonel Jamieson told me that my first
duty was to get strong and well again, and that I was to
think of no other until I had performed that. And how
have you been getting on, father?â€
“Very well, lad. I don’t pretend that it is not a great
change from Lynnwood, but I get along very well, and
thank heaven daily that for so many years I had set aside
a portion of my rents, little thinking that the time would
come when they would prove my means of existence. My
friends here have invested the money for me, and it bears
good interest, which is punctually paid. With the English
and Scotch exiles I have as much society as I care for, and
as I find I am able to keep a horse,—for living here is not
more than half the cost that it would be in England,—I
am well enough contented with my lot. There is but one
thing that pricks me: that villain John Dormay has, as he
schemed for, obtained possession of my estates, and has
been knighted for his distinguished services to the king.
I heard of this some time since, by a letter from one of our
EXCHANGED 139
Jacobite friends to whom I wrote asking for news. He says
that the new knight has no great cause for enjoyment in his
dignity and possessions, because, not only do the Jacobite
gentry turn their backs upon him when they meet him in
the town, but the better class of Whigs hold altogether
aloof from him, regarding his elevation at the expense of
his wife’s kinsman to be disgraceful, although of course
they have no idea of the evil plot by which he brought
about my ruin. ‘There is great pity expressed for his wife,
who has not once stirred beyond the grounds at Lynnwood
since he took her there, and who is, they say, a shadow of
her former self. Ciceley, he hears, is well. That cub of
a son is in London, and there are reports that he is very
wild, and puts his father to much cost. As to the man
himself, they say he is surrounded by the lowest knaves,
and it is rumoured that he has taken to drink for want of
better company. It is some comfort to me to think, that
although the villain has my estates he is getting no enjoy-
ment out of them. However, I hope some day to have a
reckoning with him. ‘he Stuarts must come to their own
sooner or later, until then I am content to rest quietly here
in Sweden.â€
CHAPTER VIII
THE PASSAGE OF THE DWINA
FEW hours after Charlie’s arrival home, Major Jer-
voise and Harry came round to the house.
“T congratulate you, Jervoise, on your new rank,†Sir
Marmaduke said heartily as he entered; “and you too,
Harry. It has been a great comfort to me to know that
you and Charlie have been together always. At present
you have the advantage of him in looks. My lad has no
more strength than a girl, not half the strength, indeed, of
many of these sturdy Swedish maidens.â€
“Ves, Charlie has had a bad bout of it, Carstairs,†Major
Jervoise said cheerfully; “but he has picked up wonder-
fully in the last ten days, and in as many more I shall look
to see him at work again. I only wish that you could have
been with us, old friend.â€
“Tt is of no use wishing, Jervoise. We have heard
enough here of what the troops have been suffering through
the winter, for me to know that if 1 had had my wish and
gone with you, my bones would now be lying somewhere
under the soil of Livonia.â€
“Ves, it was a hard time,†Major Jervoise agreed, “but
we all got through it well, thanks principally to our turning
to at sports of allkinds. ‘These kept the men in health and
prevented them from moping. The king was struck with
140
THE PASSAGE OF THE DWINA 141
the condition of our company, and he has ordered that in
future all the Swedish troops shall take part in such games
and amusements when in winter-quarters. Of course,
Charlie has told you we are going to have a regiment
entirely composed of Scots and Englishmen. I put the
Scots first, since they, will be by far the most numerous.
‘There are always plenty of active spirits who find but small
opening for their energy at home, and are ready to take
foreign service whenever the chance opens. Besides, there
are always feuds there. In the old days it was chief against
chief, now it is religion against religion; and now as then
there are numbers of young fellows glad to exchange the
troubles at home for service abroad. ‘here have been
quite a crowd of men round our quarters, for directly the
news spread that the company was landing, our countrymen
flocked round, each eager to learn how many vacancies
there were in the ranks, and whether we would receive
recruits. heir joy was extreme when it became known
that Jamieson had authority to raise a whole regiment. I
doubt not that many of the poor fellows are in great
straits.â€â€
“That I can tell you they are,†Sir Marmaduke broke in.
“We have been doing what we can for them, for it was
grievous that so many men should be wandering without
means or employment in a strange country. But the
number was too great for our money to go far among them,
and I know that many of them are destitute and well-nigh
starving. We had hoped to ship some of them back to
Scotland, and have been treating with the captain of a
vessel sailing in two or three days to carry them home.â€
“Tt is unfortunate, but they have none to blame but
themselves. They should have waited until an invitation
for foreigners to enlist was issued by the Swedish govern-
ment, or until gentlemen of birth raised companies and
regiments for service here. However, we are the gainers,
142 A JACOBITE EXILE
for I see that we shall not have to wait here many weeks.
Already, as far as I can judge from what I hear, there must
be well-nigh four hundred men here, all eager to serve.
We will send the news by the next ship that sails, both to
Scotland and to our own country, that men, active and
fit for service, can be received into a regiment, specially
formed of English-speaking soldiers. I will warrant that
when it is known in the Fells that I am a major in the
regiment, and that your son and mine are lieutenants, we
shall have two or three score of stout young fellows coming
over.â€
The next day, indeed, nearly four hundred men were
enlisted into the service, and were divided into eight com-
panies. Each of these, when complete, was to be two
hundred strong. Six Scottish officers were transferred
from Swedish regiments to fill up the list of captains, and
commissions were given to several gentlemen of family as
lieutenants and ensigns. Most of these, however, were
held over, as the colonel wrote to many gentlemen of his
acquaintance in Scotland offering them commissions if they
would raise and bring over men. Major Jervoise did the
same to half a dozen young Jacobite gentlemen in the north
of England, and so successful were the appeals that, within
two months of the return of the company to Gottenburg,
the regiment had been raised to its full strength.
night was spent in drilling the last batch of recruits from
morning till night, so that they should be able to take their
places in the ranks, and then with drums beating and
colours flying the corps embarked at Gottenburg, and sailed
to join the army.
They arrived at Revel in the beginning of May. ‘The
port was full of ships, for twelve thousand men had
embarked at Stockholm and other ports to reinforce the
army and enable the king to take the field in force, and by
the end of the month the greater portion of the force was
THE PASSAGE OF THE DWINA 148
concentrated at Dorpt. Charlie had long since regained
his full strength. As soon as he was fit for duty he had
rejoined, and had been engaged early and late in the work
of drilling the recruist, and in the general organization of
the regiment. He and Harry, however, found time to take
part in any amusement that was going on. They were
made welcome in the houses of the principal merchants
and other residents of Gottenburg, and much enjoyed
their stay in the town, in spite of their longing to be
back in time to take part in the early operations of the
campaign.
When they sailed into the port of Revel they found that
the campaign had but just commenced, and they marched
with all haste to join the force with which the king was
advancing against the Saxons, who were still besieging
Riga. Their army was commanded by Marshal Steinau,
and was posted on the other side of the river Dwina, a
broad stream. Charles XII. had ridden up to Colonel
Jamieson’s regiment upon its arrival, and expressed warm
gratification at its appearance when it was paraded for his
inspection.
“Vou have done well indeed, colonel,†he said. “I
had hardly hoped you could have collected so fine a body
of men in so short a time.†At his request the officers
were brought up and introduced. He spoke a few words
to those he had known before, saying to Charlie:
“T am glad to see you back again, lieutenant. You
have quite recovered from that crack on your crown, I
hope. But I need not ask, your looks speak for them-
selves. You have just got back in time to pay my enemies
back for it.â€
The prospect was not a cheerful one when the Swedes
arrived on the banks of the Dwina. The Saxons were
somewhat superior in force, and it would be a desperate
enterprise to cross the river in the teeth of their cannon
144 A JACOBITE EXILE
and musketry. Already the king had caused a number of
large flat boats to be constructed; the sides were made very
high so as to completely cover the troops from musketry,
and were hinged so as to let down and act as gangways and
facilitate a landing. Charlie was standing on the bank
looking at the movements of the Saxon troops across the
river, and wondering how the passage was to be effected,
when a hand was placed on his shoulder. Looking round, -
he saw it was the king, who, as was his custom, was moving
about on foot unattended by any of his officers.
“Wondering how we are to get across, lieutenant?â€
“That is just what I was thinking over, your majesty.â€
“We want another snowstorm as we had at Narva,†the
king said. “The wind is blowing the right way, but there
is no chance of such another stroke of luck at this time of
year.â€
“No, sir; but Iwas thinking that one might make an
artificial fog.â€
“How do you mean?†the king asked quickly.
“Your majesty has great stacks of straw here, collected
for forage for the cattle. No doubt a good deal of it is
damp, or if not, if could be easily wetted. If we were to
build great piles of it all along on the banks here, and set
it alight so as to burn very slowly but to give out a great
deal of smoke, this light wind would blow it across the
river into the faces of the Saxons, and completely cover our
movements.â€
“You are right!†the king exclaimed. ‘‘ Nothing could
be better. We will make a smoke that will blind and half-
smother them;†and he hurried away. An hour later
orders were sent out to all the regiments, that as soon as it
became dusk the men should assemble at the great forage
stores for fatigue duty. As soon as they did so they were
ordered to pull down the stacks and to carry the straw to
the bank of the river, and there pile it in heavy masses
17
THE PASSAGE OF THE DWINA 145
twenty yards apart. ‘The whole was to be damped, with
the exception of only a small quantity on the windward
side of the heaps, which was to be used for starting the
fire. In two hours the work was completed. The men
were then ordered to return to their camps, have their
suppers, and lie down at once. ‘Then they were to form
up half an hour before daybreak in readiness to take their
places in the boats, and were then to lie down in order
until the word was given to move forward.
‘This was done, and just as the daylight appeared the
heaps of straw were lighted, and dense volumes of smoke
rolled across the river, entirely obscuring the opposite
shore from view. ‘The Saxons, enveloped in the smoke,
were unable to understand its meaning. Those on the
watch had seen no sign of troops on the bank before the
smoke began to roll across the water, and the general was
uncertain whether a great fire had broken out in the forage
stores of the Swedes, or whether the fire had been purposely
raised either to cover the movements of the army and
enable them to march away and cross at some undefended
point, or whether to cover their passage. The Swedish
regiments, which were the first to cross, took their places
at once in the boats, the king himself accompanying them.
In a quarter of an hour the opposite bank was gained.
Marshal Steinau, an able general, had called the Saxons
under arms, and was marching towards the river, when
the wind freshening lifted the thick veil of smoke, and he
saw that the Swedes had already gained the bank of the
river, and at once hurled his cavalry against them.
The Swedish formation was not complete, and for a
moment they were driven back in disorder and forced
into the river. The water was shallow, and the king going
about among them, quickly restored order and discipline,
and charging in solid formation they drove the cavalry
back and advanced across the plain. Steinau recalled his
146 A JACOBITE EXILE
troops and posted them in a strong position, one flank be-
ing covered by a marsh and the other by a wood. He had
time to effect his arrangements, as Charles was compelled
to wait until the whole of his troops were across. As soon
as they were so he led them against the enemy.
The battle was a severe one, for the Swedes were unpro-
vided with artillery, and the Saxons, with the advantages
of position and a powerful artillery, fought steadily.
Three times Marshal Steinau led his cavalry in desperate
charges, and each time almost penetrated to the point
where Charles was directing the movements of his troops;
but at last he was struck from his horse by a blow from the
butt-end of a musket, and his cuirassiers with difficulty
carried him from the field. As soon as his fall became
known disorder spread among the ranks of the Saxons.
Some regiments gave way, and the Swedes rushing forward
with loud shouts, the whole army was speedily in full flight.
This victory laid the whole of Courland at the mercy of
the Swedes, all the towns opening their gates at their
approach.
They were now on the confines of Poland, and the king,
brave to rashness as he was, hesitated to attack a nation
so powerful. Poland at that time was a country a little
larger than France, though with a somewhat smaller popu-
lation, but in this respect exceeding Sweden. With the
Poles themselves he had no quarrel, for they had taken no
part in the struggle, which had been carried on solely by
their king with his Saxon troops.
The authority of the kings of Poland was much smaller
than that of other European monarchs. ‘The office was not
a hereditary one; the king being elected at a diet composed
of the whole of the nobles of the country, the nobility
embracing practically every free man; and as it was
necessary, according to the constitution of the country,
that the vote should be unanimous, the difficulties in the
THE PASSAGE OF THE DWINA 147
way of election were very great, and civil wars of constant
occurrence.
Charles was determined that he would drive Augustus,
who was the author of the league against him, from the
throne, but he desired to do this by means of the Poles
themselves, rather than to unite the whole nation against
him by invading the country. Poland was divided into
two parts, the larger of which was Poland proper, which
could at once place thirty thousand men in the field. The
other was Lithuania, with an army of twelve thousand.
These forces were entirely independent of each other.
The troops were for the most part cavalry, and the small
force permanently kept up was composed almost entirely
of horsemen. ‘They rarely drew pay, and subsisted entirely
on plunder, being as formidable to their own people as to
an enemy.
Lithuania, on whose borders the king had taken post
with his army, was as usual harassed by two factions, that of
the Prince Sapieha and the Prince of Oginski, between
whom a civil war was going on.
The King of Sweden took the part of the former, and
furnishing him with assistance, speedily enabled him to
overcome the Oginski party, who received but slight aid
from the Saxons. Oginski’s forces were speedily dis-
persed, and roamed about the country in scattered parties,
subsisting on pillage, thereby exciting among the people
a lively feeling of hatred against the King of Poland, who
was regarded as the author of the misfortunes that had
befallen the country.
From the day when Charlie’s suggestion of burning
damp straw to conceal the passage of the river had been
attended with such success, the king had held him in high
fayour. There was but a few years’ difference between
their ages, and the suggestion so promptly made seemed
to show the king that the young Englishman was a kin-
148 A JACOBITE EXILE
dred spirit, and he frequently requested him to accompany
him in his rides, and chatted familiarly with him.
“T hate this inactive life,†he said one day, “and would
a thousand times rather be fighting the Russians than
setting the Poles by the ears; but I dare not move against
them, for were Augustus of Saxony left alone he would ere
long set all Poland against me. At present the Poles re-
fuse to allow him to bringin reinforcements from his own
country; but if be cannot get men he can get gold, and
with gold he can buy over his chief opponents and regain
his power. If it costs me a year’s delay I must wait until
he is forced to fly the kingdom, and I can place on the
throne some one who will owe his election entirely to me,
and in whose good faith I can be secure. That done, I
can turn my attention to Russia, which by all accounts
daily becomes more formidable. Narva is besieged by
them, and will ere long fall; but I can retake Narva when
once I can depend upon the neutrality of the Poles.
Would I were king of Poland as well as of Sweden. With
eighty thousand Polish horse and my own Swedish infantry
I could conquer Europe if I wished to do so.
“T know that you are as fond of adventure as [ am, and
Tam thinking of sending you with an envoy I am despatch-
ing to Warsaw.
“Vou know that the Poles are adverse to business of all
kinds. The poorest noble, who can scarcely pay for the
cloak he wears, and who is ready enough to sell his vote
and his sword to the highest bidder, will turn up his nose
at honest trade; and the consequence is, as there is no
class between the noble and the peasant, the trade of the
country is wholly in the hands of Jews and foreigners,
among the latter being, I hear, many Scotchmen, who,
while they make excellent soldiers, are also keen traders.
This class must have considerable power in fact, although
it be exercised quietly. The Jews are, of course, money-
THE PASSAGE OF THE DWINA 149
lenders as well as traders. Large numbers of these petty
nobles must be in their debt, either for money lent or
goods supplied. My agent goes specially charged to deal
with the archbishop, who is quite open to sell his services
to me, although he poses as one of the strongest adherents
of the Saxons. With him it is not a question so much of
money as of power. Being a wise man, he sees that Augus-
tus can never retain his position in the face of the enmity
of the great body of the Poles, and of my hostility. But
while my agent deals with him and such nobles as he indi-
cates as being likely to take my part against Augustus, you
could ascertain the feeling of the trading class, and endeav-
our to induce them not only to favour me, but to exert all
the influence they possess on my behalf. As there are
many Scotch merchants in the city, you could begin by
making yourself known to them, taking with you letters of
introduction from your colonel and any other Scotch gen-
tleman whom you may find to have acquaintanceship, if
not with the men themselves, with their families in Scot-
land. I do not, of course, say that the mission will be
without danger, but that will, I know, be an advantage in
your eyes. What do you think of the proposal?â€
“T do not know, sire,†Charlie said doubtfully. “TI have
no experience whatever in matters of that kind.â€
“This will be a good opportunity for you to serve an
apprenticeship,†the king said decidedly. “There is no
chance of anything being done here for months, and as you
will have no opportunity of using your sword, you cannot
be better employed than in polishing up your wits. I will
speak to Colonel Jamieson about it this evening. Count
Piper will give you full instructions, and will obtain for you
from some of our friends lists of the names of the men who
would be likely to be most useful to us. You will please
to remember that the brain does a great deal more than the
sword in enabling a man to rise above his fellows. You
150 A JACOBITE EXILE
are a brave young officer, but I have many a score of brave
young officers, and it was your quick wit in suggesting the
strategy by which we crossed the Dwina without loss that
has marked you out from among others, and made me see
that you are fit for something better than getting your
throat cut.â€
‘The king then changed the subject with his usual abrupt-
ness, and dismissed Charlie at the end of his ride without
any further allusion to the subject. The young fellow,
however, knew enough of the king’s headstrong dispo-
sition to be aware that the matter was settled, and that
he could not, without incurring the king’s serious dis-
pleasure, decline to accept the commission. He walked
back with a serious face to the hut that the officers of
the company occupied, and asked Harry Jervoise to come
out to him.
“What is it, Charlie?†his friend said. ‘Has his
gracious majesty been blowing you up, or has your horse
broken its knees?â€
“A much worse thing than either, Harry. The king
appears to have taken into his head that I am cut out fora
diplomatist;†and he then repeated to his friend the con-
versation the king had had with him.
Harry burst into a shout of laughter.
“Don’t be angry, Charlie, but I cannot help it. The
idea of your going, in disguise, I suppose, and trying to
talk over the Jewish clothiers and cannie Scotch traders, is
one of the funniest things I ever heard. And do you think
the king was really in earnest?â€
“The king is always in earnest,†Charlie said in a vexed
tone; “and when he once takes a thing into his head
there is no gainsaying him.â€
“That is true enough, Charlie,†Harry said, becoming
serious. “Well, I have no doubt you will do it just as well
as another, and after all there will be some fun in it, and
THE PASSAGE OF THE DWINA 161
you will be in a big city and likely to have a deal more
excitement than will fall to our lot here.â€
“1 don’t think it will be at all the sort of excitement I
should care for, Harry. However, my hope is, that the
colonel will be able to dissuade him from the idea.â€
“Well | don’t know that I should wish that if I were in
your place, Charlie. Undoubtedly it is an honour being
chosen for such a mission, and it is possible you may get
a great deal of credit for it, as the king is always ready to
push forward those who do good service. Look how much
he thinks of you because you made that suggestion about
getting up a smoke to cover our passage.â€
“{ wish I had never made it,†Charlie said heartily.
“Well, in that case, Charlie, it is likely enough we should
not be talking together here, for our loss in crossing the
river under fire would have been terrible.â€
“Well, perhaps it is as well as it is,†Charlie agreed.
“But I did not want to attract his attention; I was very
happy as I was with you all, As for my suggestion about
the straw, anyone might have thought of it. I should never
have given the matter another moment’s consideration, and
I should be much better pleased if the king had not done
so either, instead of telling the colonel about it, and the
colonel speaking to the officers, and such a ridiculous fuss
being made about nothing.â€
“My dear Charlie,†Harry said seriously, “you seem to
be forgetting that we all came out here together to make
our fortune, or at any rate to do as well as we could till the
Stuarts come to the throne again, and our fathers regain
their estates, a matter concerning which, let me tell you, I
do not feel by any means so certain as I did in the old
days. Then, you know, all our friends were of our way of
thinking, and the faith that the Stuarts would return was
like a matter of religion, which it was heresy to doubt for
an instant. Well, you see in the year that we have been
152 A JACOBITE EXILE
out here one’s eyes have got opened a bit, and I don’t feel
by any means sanguine that the Stuarts will ever come to
the throne of England again, or that our fathers will recover
their estates. You have seen here what good soldiers can
do, and how powerless men possessing but little discipline,
though perhaps as brave as themselves, are against them.
William of Orange has got good soldiers. His Dutch
troops are probably quite as good as our best Swedish regi-
ments. ‘They have had plenty of fighting in Ireland and
elsewhere, and I doubt whether the Jacobite gentlemen,
however numerous, but without training or discipline, could
any more make head against them than the masses of Mus-
covites could against the Swedish battalions at Narva. All
this means that it is necessary that we should, if possible,
carve out a fortune here. So far I certainly have no reason
to grumble. On the contrary I have had great luck. Iam
a lieutenant at seventeen, and if I am not shot or carried
off by fever, I may, suppose the war goes on and the army
is not reduced, be a colonel at the age of forty. Now you,
on the other hand, have, by that happy suggestion of yours,
attracted the notice of the king, and he is pleased to nomi-
nate you to a mission in which there is a chance of your
distinguishing yourself in another way, and of being em-
ployed in other and more important business. All this
will place you much farther on the road towards making a
fortune than marching and fighting with your company
would be likely to do in the course of twenty years, and I
think it would be foolish in the extreme for you to exhibit
any disinclination to undertake the duty.â€
“T suppose you are right, Harry, and I am much obliged
to you for your advice, which certainly puts the matter in a
light in which I had not before seen it. If I thought that
I could do it well I should not so much mind, for, as you
say, there will be some fun to be got out of it, and some
excitement, and there seems little chance of doing any-
THE PASSAGE OF THE DWINA 153
thing here for a long time. But what am I to say to the
fellows? How can I argue with them? Besides, I don’t
talk Polish.â€
“J don’t suppose there are ten men in the army who do
so, probably not five. As to what to say, Count Piper will
no doubt give you full instructions as to the line you are
to take, the arguments you are to use, and the inducements
you are to hold out. ‘hat is sure to be all right.â€
“Well, do not say anything about it, Harry, when you
get back. I still hope the colonel will dissuade the
king.â€
“Then you are singularly hopeful, Charlie, that is all I
can say. You might persuade a brick wall to move out of
your way as easily as induce the King of Sweden to give up
a plan he has once formed. However, I will say nothing
about it.â€
At nine o’clock an orderly came to the hut with a mes-
sage that the colonel wished to speak to Lieutenant Car-
stairs. Harry gave his friend a comical look as the latter
rose and buckled on his sword.
“What is the joke, Harry?†his father asked, when
Charlie had left. “Do you know what the colonel can
want him for at this time of the evening? It is not his
turn for duty.â€
“T know, father; but I must not say.â€
“The lad has not been getting into a scrape, I hope?â€
“ Nothing serious, I can assure you; but really I must not
say anything until he comes back.â€
Harry’s positive assurance as to the impossibility of
changing the king’s decision had pretty well dispelled any
hopes Charlie might before have entertained, and he entered
the colonel’s room with a grave face.
“Vou know why I have sent for you, Carstairs? az
“Ves, sir; Iam afraid that I do.â€
“Afraid? ‘hat is to say, you don’t like it.â€
154 A JACOBITE EXILE
“Yes, sir; I own that I don’t like it.â€
“Nor do I, lad, and I told his majesty so; I said you
were too young for so risky a business. ‘The ren scoffed
at the idea. He said, ‘He is not much more than two
years younger than I am, and if I am old enough to com-
mand an army he is old enough to carry out this mission.
We know that he is courageous; he is cool, sharp, and intel-
ligent. Why do I choose him? Has he not saved me from
the loss of about four or five thousand men, and probabl ya
total defeat? A young fellow who can do that ought to be
able to cope with Jewish traders, and to throw dust in the
eyes of the Poles. I have chosen him for this service for
two reasons. In the first place because I know he will do
it well, and even those who consider that I am rash and
headstrong admit that I have the knack of picking out good
men. In the next place I want to reward him for the
service he has done for us. I cannot at his age make a
colonel of him, but I can give him a chance of distinguish-
ing himself in a service in which age does not count for so
much, and Count Piper knowing my wishes in the matter
will push him forward. Moreover, in such a mission as
this his youth will be an advantage, for he is very much
less likely to excite suspicion than if he were an older
man.’
“The king’s manner did not admit of argument, and I
had only to wait and ask what were his commands. These
were simply that you are to call upon his minister to-
morrow, and that you would then receive full instruc-
tions. The king means well by you, lad, and on turning
it over I think better of the plan than I did before. I
am convinced, at any rate, that you will do credit to the
king’s choice.â€
“Twill do my best, sir,†Charlie said. “At present it
all seems so vague to me that I can form no idea whatever
as to what it will be like. TI am sure that the king’s inten-
THE PASSAGE OF THE DWINA 155
tions are at any rate kind. I am glad to hear you say that
on consideration you think better of the plan. Then I
may mention the matter to Major Jervoise?â€
“Certainly, Carstairs, and to his son, but it must go no
farther. J shall put your name in orders as relieved from
duty, and shall mention that you have been despatched on
service, which might mean anything. Come and see me
to-morrow, lad, after you have received Count Piper’s
instructions. As the king reminded me, there are many
Scotchmen at Warsaw, and it is likely that some of them
passed through Sweden on the way to establish themselves
there, and I may very well have made their acquaintance at
Gottenburg or Stockholm.
“Once established in the house of one of my country-
men, your position would be fairly safe and not altogether
unpleasant, and you would be certainly far better off than
a Swede would be engaged on this mission. The Swedes
are of course regarded by the Poles as enemies, but, as there
is no feeling against Mnglishmen or Scotchmen, you might
pass about unnoticed as one oi the family of a Scottish
trader there, or as his assistant.â€
“T don’t fear its being unpleasant in the least, colonel.
Nor do I think anything one way or the other about my
safety. I only fear that I shall not be able to carry out
properly the mission intrusted to me.â€
“Vou will do your best, lad, and that is all that can be
expected. You have not solicited the post, and as it is
none of your choosing, your failure would be the fault of
those who have sent you, and not of yourself; but in a mat-
ter of this kind there is no such thing as complete failure.
When you have to deal with one man you may succeed or
you may fail in endeavouring to induce him to act in a
certain manner, but when you have to deal with a consid-
erable number of men, some will be willing to accept your
proposals, some will not, and the question of success will
156 A JACOBITE EXILE
probably depend upon outside influences and circumstances
over which you have no control whatever. I have no fear
that it will be a failure. If our party in Poland triumph,
or if our army here advances, or if Augustus, finding his
position hopeless, leaves the country, the good people of
Warsaw will join their voices to those of the majority. If
matters go the other way, you may be sure that they will
not risk imprisonment, confiscation, and perhaps death, by
getting up a revolt on their own account. The king will
be perfectly aware of this, and will not expect impossibil-
ities, and there is really no occasion whatever for you to
worry yourself on that ground.â€
Upon calling upon Count Piper the next morning Charlie
found that, as the colonel had told him, his mission was a
general one.
“Tt will be your duty,†the minister said, “to have inter-
views with as many of the foreign traders and Jews in
Warsaw as you can, only going to those to whom you have
some sort of introduction from the persons you may first
meet, or who are, as far as you can learn from the report
of others, ill disposed towards the Saxon party. Here is a
letter, stating to all whom it may concern that you are in the
confidence of the King of Sweden, and are authorized to
represent him. In the first place, you can point out to
those you see that, should the present situation continue, it
will bring grievous evils upon Poland. Proclamations have
already been spread broadcast over the country, saying that
the king has no quarrel with the people of Poland, but, as
their sovereign has without the slightest provocation em-
barked on a war, he must fight against him and his Saxon
troops until they are driven from the country. This you
will repeat, and will urge that it will be infinitely better
that Poland herself should cast out the man who has
embroiled her with Sweden, than that the country should
be the scene of a long and sanguinary struggle, in which
THE PASSAGE OF THE DWINA cae memleors
large districts will necessarily be laid waste, all trade be
arrested and grievous suffering inflicted upon the people
at large.
“Vou can say that King Charles has already received
promises of support from a large number of nobles, and is
most desirous that the people of the large towns, and
especially of the capital, should use their influence in his
favour. ‘That he has himself no ambition and no end to
serve save to obtain peace and tranquillity for his country,
and that it will be free for the people of Poland to elect
their own monarch when once Augustus of Saxony has dis-
appeared from the scene. In this sealed packet you will
find a list of influential citizens. It has been furnished
me by one well acquainted with the place. ‘The Jews are
to be assured that, in case of a friendly monarch being
placed on the throne, Charles will make a treaty with him,
insuring freedom of commerce to the two countries, and
will also use his friendly endeavours to obtain from the king
and Diet an enlargement of the privileges that the Jews
enjoy. ‘To the foreign merchants you will hold the same
language, somewhat altered, to suit their condition and
wants. i
“Vou are not asking them to organize any public move-
ment, the time has not yet come for that, but simply to
throw the weight of their example and influence against
the party of the Saxons. Of course our friends in Warsaw
have been doing their best to bring round public opinion
in the capital to this direction, but the country is so torn
by perpetual intrigues that the trading classes hold aloof
altogether from quarrels in which they have no personal
interest, and are slow to believe that they can be seriously
affected by any changes which will take place. Our envoy
will start to-morrow morning. His mission is an open
one. He goes to lay certain complaints, to propose an
exchange of prisoners, and to open negotiations for peace,
158 A JACOBITE EXILE
All these are but pretences. His real object is to enter
into personal communication with two or three powerful
personages well disposed towards us. Come again to
me this evening when you have thought the matter over.
I shall then be glad to hear any suggestion you may like
to make.â€
“There is one thing, sir, that J should like to ask you.
It will evidently be of great advantage to me if I can obtain
private letters of introduction to Scotch traders in the
city. This I cannot do unless by mentioning the fact that
Iam bound for Warsaw. Have I your permission to do
so, or is it to be kept a close secret?â€
“No. Isee no objection to your naming it to anyone
you can implicitly trust, and who may as you think be
able to give you such introductions, but you must impress
upon them that the matter must be kept a secret. Doubt-
less the Saxons have in their pay people in our camp just
as we have in theirs, and were word of your going sent,
you would find yourself watched and perhaps arrested.
We should of course wish you to be zealous in your mis-
sion, but I would say, do not be over-anxious. We are
not trying to get up a revolution in Warsaw, but seeking to
ensure that the feeling in the city should be in our favour;
and this, we think, may be brought about to some extent
by such assurances as you can give of the king’s friend-
ship, and by such expressions of a belief in the justice of
our cause, and in the advantages there would be in getting
rid of this foreign prince, as might be said openly by one
trader to another when men meet in their exchanges or
upon the street. So that the ball is once set rolling, it
may be trusted to keep in motion, and there can be little
doubt that such expressions of feeling among the mercan-
tile community of the capital will have some effect even
upon nobles who pretend to despise trade, but who are not
THE PASSAGE OF THE DWINA 159
unfrequently in debt to traders, and who hold their views
in a certain respect.â€
“Thank you, sir. At what time shall I come this even-
ing?â€
“At eight o’clock. By that time I may have thought
out farther details for your guidance.â€
CHAPTER IX
IN WARSAW
PON leaving the quarters of Count Piper, Charlie re-
turned to the camp, and after discussing the matter
with Major Jervoise proceeded with him to the colonel’s
but.
“Well, you look brighter this morning, Carstairs. Are
you better pleased now you have thought the matter over?â€
“Yes, sir. What you said last night has been quite con-
firmed by Count Piper, and the matter does not really
seem so difficult. J am merely, as a foreigner in the em-
ployment of the King of Sweden, to talk with foreigners
in Warsaw, to assure them that the king is sincere in his
desire to avoid war with Poland, and will gladly make a
lasting peace between the two countries, to urge upon them
to show themselves favourable to his project for securing
such a peace, by forcing Augustus to resign the crown, and
to use what influence they can in that direction, both upon
their fellow-traders and upon the Poles.â€
“There is nothing very difficult about that,†Colonel
Jamieson said cheerfully, “as it happens to be quite true;
and there can be no real question as to the true interest of
Poland, and especially of the trading classes in the great
towns, from whom heavy contributions towards the ex-
penses of war are always exacted by their own rulers, and
160
IN WARSAW 161
who have to pay a ruinous ransom in case of their city
being captured by the enemy. ‘The traders of Warsaw will
need no reminder of such well-known facts, and will be
only too glad to be assured that, unless as a last resource,
our king has no intention of making war upon Poland,
and they will certainly be inclined to bestir themselves to
avert such a possibility. You have, I suppose, a list of
names of the people with whom you had best put yourself
into communication?â€
“Ves, sir; here is alist. here are, I see, ten Scotch-
men, fifteen Frenchmen, and about as many Jews.â€
“T know nothing of the Frenchmen, and less of the
Jews,†the colonel said, taking the list; “but I ought to
know some of the Scotchmen. ‘They will hail from Dun-
dee and Glasgow, and it may be Dumfries.†He ran his
eye down the list. ‘‘Aha! here is one, and we need go
no further. Allan Ramsay; we were lads together at the
High School of Glasgow, and were class-mates at the
College. His father was a member of the city council, and
was one of the leading traders in the city. Allan was a
wild lad, as I was myself, and many a scrape did we get
into together, and had many a skirmish with the watch.
Allan had two or three half-brothers, men from ten to
twenty years older than himself, and a year or two after I
came out to Sweden and entered the army as an ensign,
who should I meet in the streets of Gottenburg but Allan
Ramsay.
“We were delighted to see each other, and he stopped
with me nearly aweek. He had, after leaving the College,
gone into his father’s business, but when the old man died
he could not get on with his half-brothers, who were dour
men, and had little patience with Allan’s restlessness and
love of pleasure. So, after a final quarrel, they had given
him so much money for his share of the business and a
letter of introduction to a trader in Poland, who had writ-
162 A JACOPITE EXILE
ten to them saying that he wanted a partner with some
capital; and Allan was willing enough to try the life in a
strange country, for he was a shrewd fellow with all his love
of fun. Five years afterwards he came through Gottenburg
again. I did not see him, for my regiment was at Stock-
holm at the time, but he wrote me a letter saying that he
had been in Scotland to marry and bring back one Janet
Black, the daughter of a mercer, whom I remember well
enough as an old flame of his.
“He reported that he was doing well, and that the Poles
were not bad fellows to live among, though less punctual in
their payments than might be wished. He said he did not
suppose that, as a Swedish officer, I should ever be in
Poland, unless Sweden produced another Gustavus Adol-
phus; but if I was, he would be delighted to welcome me,
and that anyone I asked in Warsaw would direct me to his
shop. I wonder that I did not think of him before; but
that is ten years ago, and it had altogether passed out of
my mind till I saw his name here. Unless he is greatly
changed you may be sure of a hearty welcome from Allan
Ramsay for my sake. We need not trouble about the other
names. He will know all about them, and will be able to
put you in the way of getting at them.â€
‘his was a great relief to Charlie, who felt that it would
be an immense advantage to have the house of someone,
from whom he might expect a welcome, to go to on his
arrival in Warsaw, and he was able during the day to talk
over the prospects of the journey with Harry Jervoise with
a real sense of interest and excitement in his mission. In
the evening he again went to the house of the minister.
‘The latter, a close observer of men, saw at once that the
young officer was in much better spirits than he had been
in the morning.
“Have you obtained information respecting any of the
persons whose names I gave you?†he asked.
IN WARSAW 163
“Ves, sir. It seems that most fortunately the trader
named Allan Ramsay is an old friend of Colonel Jamieson,
and the colonel has given me a letter to him which will, he
assures me, procure me a hearty welcome.â€
“And have you thought anything more of your best plan
of action?â€
“Ves, sir. Itseems to me that I had better dress myself
in an attire such as might be worn by a young Scotchman
journeying through the country to place himself with a
relation established in business. I could ride behind the
royal envoy, as if I had received permission to journey
under the protection of his escort, and could drop behind
a few miles from the capital and make my way in alone. I
could not, of course, inquire for Allan Ramsay in Polish,
but I know enough French to ask for him at any shop hav-
ing a French name over it, if I did not happen to light
upon one kept by a Scotchman.â€
“Yes, that plan will do very well. But you will have no
difficulty in finding the house, as I have arranged that a
man shall accompany you as servant. He is a Lithuanian,
and is the grandson of a soldier of Gustavus Adolphus who
married and settled there. His grandfather kept up his
connection with his native country, and the young fellow
speaks Swedish fairly, and, of course, Polish. For the last
three weeks I have employed him in various matters, and
find him shrewd and, I believe, faithful. Such a fellow
would be of great use to you, and could if mecessary act as
your interpreter in any interviews you may have with Polish
Jews, although you will find that most of these men speak
other languages besides their own.â€
He touched a bell, and on a servant entering said:
“Bring Stanislas Bistron here.â€
An. active, well-built young fellow of some four-and-
twenty years of age entered the room a minute later. His
fair hair and blue eyes showed that he took after his Swedish
ancestors.
Lod A JACOBITE EXILE
“This is the gentleman, Stanislas, that you are to accom-
pany to Warsaw as his servant. You will obey him in all
respects as if he had hired you in his service, and should
he arrive at any situation of danger or difficulty I trust that
you will not be found wanting.â€
The man had looked closely at Charlie.
“T will do my best, sir, and I doubt not that the gentle-
man’s service will suit me. He has the look of one who
would be kind to his servants.â€
“Wait at the outside door,†the count said. “Captain
Carstairs will speak to you as he leaves.â€
The man bowed and went out, and the count then said
with a smile at the look of surprise on Charlie’s face, “It
was not a slip of the tongue. Here is a commission signed
by his majesty appointing you to the rank of captain, as he
has long considered that you had well won your promotion
by your suggestion which enabled him to cross the Dwina
without loss, but he thought there would be a difficulty in
placing you over the heads of so many officers senior to
yourself. This inconvenience no longer exists now that
you have what may be considered a staff appointment, and
the rank may, moreover, add to your weight and influence
in your interviews with persons at Warsaw. You will need
money; here is a purse for your expenses. You may meet
with some of these men, especially among the Jewish
traders, who may need a bribe. Bribery is common from
the highest to the lowest in Poland. You will find in this
letter of instructions that you are authorized to promise
sums of money to men whose assistance may be valuable.
It is impossible to fix the sums. ‘These must depend upon
the position of the men and the value of their services;
and I can only say do not be lavish, but at the same time
do not hesitate to promise a sum that will secure the ser-
vices of useful men. Your best plan will be to find out
if you are able what each man expects, and to make what
IN WARSAW 165
abatement you can. The only limit placed is that you must
not commit the royal treasury to a total sum exceeding ten
thousand crowns. You will, I hope, find a smaller sum
suffice. The envoy will start at six to-morrow morning. I
do not know that there are any further instructions to give
you. Youwill find details in these written instructions as to
the manner in which you are to communicate from time to
time the result of your mission, and you will receive orders
when to return.â€
Outside the house Charlie saw his new servant waiting
him.
“You have a horse, Stanislas?â€
“Ves, sir, I have been provided with one. J have also a
brace of pistols and a sword.â€
“JT hope you will not have to use them, but in these dis-
turbed times they are necessaries.â€
“J have better clothes than these, sir, if you wish me to
look gay.â€
“By no means,†Charlie replied. “YI am going in the
character of a young Scotchman on my way to join a rela-
tive in business in Warsaw, and you accompany me in the
capacity of guide and servant. As I should not be ina
position to pay high wages, the more humble your appear-
ance the better. We start at six in the morning. ‘The
envoy will leave the royal quarters at that hour, and we
travel with his escort. Join me a quarter of an hour before
that at my but. You had better accompany me there now,
so that you may know the spot. I shall not require your
services before we start, as my soldier servant will saddle
my horse and have all in readiness.â€
Harry came to the door of the hut as he saw his friend
approaching.
“Well, Charlie, is all satisfactorily settled?â€
“Ves, quite satisfactorily, I think. ‘That is my new
servant. Count Piper has appointed him; he speaks
Swedish and Polish.â€
166 A JACOBITE EXILE
“That will be a great comfort to you, Charlie. Jock
Armstrong, who has not picked up ten words of Swedish
since he joined, would have been worse than useless.â€
“T have another piece of news, Harry, that I am in one
way very glad of, and in another sorry for. I had always
hoped that we should keep together, and that just as we
joined together, and were made lieutenants at the same
time, it would always be so.â€
“You have got another step?†Harry exclaimed. “TI
am heartily glad of it. I thought very likely you might
get it. Indeed, I was surprised that you did not get it at
once after our fight with the Saxons. I am sure you de-
served it if ever a fellow did, considering what it saved
us all.â€
“Of course it is for that,†Charlie replied, “ though I
think it is very absurd. Count Piper said the king would
have given it to me at once, only it would have taken me
over the heads of so many men older than myself; but he
considered that now I am going on a sort of staff work
away from the regiment I could be promoted, and he
thought too that the title of Captain would assist me in my
mission.â€
“Of course it will,†Harry said warmly. “That is just
what I told you, you know; this business was not quite
to your liking, but it was a good long step towards making
your fortune. Don’t you think that I shall be jealous of
your going ahead, for Jam not in the least. I am sorry
you are going away, for I shall miss you terribly; but I am
quite content to be with the regiment, and to work my
way up gradually. As it is, I am senior lieutenant in the
regiment, and the first battle may give me my company;
though I don’t expect it, for I do not think my father
would wish the colonel to give me the step if it occurred,
for all the other lieutenants are older than we are, though
they are junior to us in the regiment, and I feel sure that
IN WARSAW 167
he would prefer me to remain for another two or three years
as lieutenant; in fact, he said as much to me a short time
ago. Still, when Iam fit to command a company, there
is no doubt I shall get it.
“Of course I am sorry you are going, very sorry, Charlie;
but even if you go altogether on to the staff I shall see a
good deal of you, for as the king is always with the army,
this must be your head-quarters still. I wonder how long
you will be away. I like the look of the fellow who is
going with you. It was an honest open sort of face, as far
as I saw it. At any rate, it is a comfort to think that you
won’t be absolutely alone, especially among people whose
language you don’t know. Mind, if you are sending let-
ters to Count Piper, be sure you send a few lines by the
same messenger to let me know how you are going on.
Not long letters, you know; I expect you will have your
hands pretty well full, but just enough to give me an idea
of how you are, and what you are doing.â€
The following morning Charlie started. He had said
good-bye to no one except the colonel, Major Jervoise,
and Harry, as it was not considered advisable that his
departure with the envoy for Warsaw should be talked
about. He only joined the party, indeed, after they had
ridden out of the camp. He had laid aside his uniform,
and was dressed in clothes which Major Jervoise had pro-
cured for him from one of the last-joined recruits who had
but just received his uniform. ‘The lieutenant command-
ing the escort of twenty troopers rode up to him as he
joined the party.
“Baron Seckers informs me that he has given permission
to a young Scotchman and his servant travelling to Warsaw
to ride under his protection. Are you the person in
question, sir?â€
“Tt is all right, Lieutenant Iberstein,†Charlie said with
asmile. “Don’t you recognize me?â€
168 A JACOBITE EXILE
“Of course—Lieutenant Carstairs. I was at the hunt
where you were taken prisoner; but I did not expect to
see you in this garb.â€
“Iam going on duty,†Charlie said, “and am dressed
according to orders. Do not address me by my name. I
am at present Sandy Anderson, going to join a relation in
Warsaw.â€
“Ah, ah! is that so? Going to put your head into the
den of the Lion Augustus. Well, I rather envy you, for it
is likely by all accounts to be dull work here for some
time. It is hard to be sitting idle while the Russian guns
are thundering round Narva. Now I must join the baron
again. Where would you rather ride—after us or behind
the escort?â€
“Behind the escort. I think it will be more natural,
and I can chat more freely with my servant. He is a
Lithuanian, but speaks Swedish, and I hope to get some
information from him.â€
The lieutenant rode on, and as he passed the troopers
he told them that the two men behind had the baron’s per-
mission to ride with them, in order that they might have
protection from the bands of pillagers who were roaming
through the country.
“Now, Stanislas,†Charlie said. “We can talk freely
together. Do you know Warsaw?â€
“I have been there several times, sir, but I never stopped
there long. Still, I can find my way about the town.â€
“When were you there last?â€
“Some two months ago. It was just before I entered
the Swedish service.â€
“And what do the people say about the war?â€
“They are bitterly opposed to it. ‘The king entered
upon it without consulting the diet, which was altogether
contrary to the constitution. It is true that the king may
do so in cases of emergency, and obtain the sanction of
IN WARSAW 169
the diet afterwards. There was no urgency here, and the
king made his agreement with the czar and the King of
Denmark without anyone knowing of it. He certainly
obtained a sort of sanction from the diet afterwards, but
every one knows how these things are worked. He has a
strong party, of course, because it is the interest of a great
many people to retain him in power, as no one can say
who would be chosen to succeed him. But among the
people in general, the traders and the peasants, he is
hated, and so are his Saxon soldiers. Suppose he had
gained a slice of Swedish territory, it would not have bene-
fited them; while, as it is, all sorts of misfortunes and
troubles have come upon the country, and none can say
how much greater may ensue. Poland is always split up
into parties. They used to unite against the Turk, and
they would unite again against the Swedes if their country
was invaded; but as long as King Charles keeps his army
beyond the frontier, they are too deeply engaged in their
own quarrels to think of anything else.â€
“Then, even if I were known in the city to be in the
Swedish service, there would be little danger, Stanislas?â€
“T do not say that at all,†the man said gravely. “In
the first place, Warsaw is held by Saxon soldiers, who would
show you but scant mercy were you known to be a Swedish
officer; and in the second place, the lower classes are ever
ready to make tumults; and, if worked upon by the arch-
bishop or the nobles of the king’s party, they would readily
enough tear a stranger to pieces. Going as you do as a
Scotchman, there is, I hope, little danger, especially if you
are received into a Scottish household.â€
The journey passed without incident until they were
within a few miles of Warsaw, when Charlie, after formally
thanking Baron Seckers for the protection his escort had
afforded him, fell behind with his servant. Several parties
of armed men had been met with, but they knew better than
170 A JACOBITE EXILE
to interfere with the little body of Swedish cavalry; while
in the towns through which they passed, the baron was
respectfully received as the envoy of the dreaded King of
Sweden.
“Ts there another gate to the city on this side of the
town beside that by which the Swedes will enter? If so, it
would be as well to use it, so that there should seem to be
no connection between us and them,†said Charlie.
There was another gate, and by this they rode into
Warsaw, at that time a city of far greater importance than
it is at present. ‘The gate was unguarded, and they passed
through without question. The citizens were talking
excitedly in groups, evidently discussing the question of
the arrival of the Swedish envoy and the chances of peace,
and no attention was paid to the travellers, whose appear-
ance denoted them to be persons of no importance.
Richly-attired nobles, in costumes of almost oriental mag-
nificence, galloped through the streets on splendid horses,
scattering the groups of citizens, and paying no attention
whatever to the angry murmurs that followed them. Charlie
stopped at a small inn, and there the horses were put up.
Stanislas made inquiries for the shop of Allan Ramsay,
mentioning that his employer was a relation of the Scottish
merchant, and had come out to be with him until he had
learned the language.
“The Scots know their business,†the landlord grumbled.
“They and the French and the Jews together have their
hand in every one’s pocket. They buy the cattle and grain
of the peasants for what they choose to give for them, and
send them out of the country, getting all the profits of the
transaction; while as to the nobles, there is scarce one who
is not deep in their books.â€
“Still, you could not do without them,†Stanislas said;
“there must be somebody to buy and to sell, and as the
nobles won’t do it, and the peasants can’t, I don’t see that
IN WARSAW 171
the foreigners are to be blamed for coming in and taking
the trade.â€
“That is true enough,†the landlord admitted reluctantly.
“Still, there is no doubt the country is kept poor, while
between them these men gather up the harvest.â€
“Better that than let it rot upon the ground,†Stanislas
said unconcernedly; and then, having obtained the name
of the street where several of the Scottish traders had places
of business, he and Charlie started on foot. They were
not long in finding the shop with the sign of the merchant
swinging over the door.
“Vou had better wait outside, Stanislas, while I go in
and see the master. No; if he is not in the shop his men
will not understand me, so come in with me till you see
that I have met him, and then go back to the inn for the
night. Whether I join you there will depend upon the
warmth of my welcome.â€
Two or three young Poles were in the shop. Stanislas
asked them for Allan Ramsay, and they replied that he was
taking his evening meal upstairs, whereupon Charlie pro-
duced the letter from Colonel Jamieson, and Stanislas
requested one of them to take it up to the merchant.
Three minutes later the inner door opened, and a tall man
with a ruddy face and blue eyes entered, holding the open
letter in his hand. Charlie took a step forward to meet
him.
“So you are Sandy Anderson,†he said heartily, with a
merry twinkle in his eye, “my connection, it seems, and
the friend of my dear class-mate Jamieson? Come up-
stairs. Who is this Scotch looking lad with you?â€
“THe is my servant and interpreter. His grandfather
was a Swede, and to him he owes his fair hair and com-
plexion. Heisa Lithuanian. He is to be trusted, I hope,
thoroughly. He was sent with me by—â€
“Never mind names,†the Scotchman said hastily. “We
172 A JACOBITE EXILE
will talk about him afterwards. Now come upstairs. Your
letter has thrown me quite into a flutter. Never say any-
thing in English before those Poles,†he said as he left the
shop; “the fellows pick up languages as easily as I can
drink whisky when I get the chance. One of them has
been with me two years, and it is quite likely he under-
stands at any rate something of what is said. Here we
are.â€
He opened a door and ushered Charlie intoa large room
comfortably furnished. His wife, a boy eight years of age,
and a girl a year older, were seated at the table. “Janet,â€
the merchant said, “this is Captain Carstairs, alias Sandy
Anderson, a connection of ours, though I cannot say for
certain of what degree.â€
“What are you talking of, Allan?†she asked in surprise ;
for her husband, after opening and partly reading the letter,
had jumped up and run off without saying a word.
“What I say, wife. This gentleman is, for the present,
Sandy Anderson, who has come out to learn the business
and language with the intent of some day entering into
partnership with me; also, which is more to the point, he
is a friend of my good friend Jock Jamieson, whom you
remember well in the old days.â€
“Tam very glad indeed to see any friend of Jock Jamie-
son,†Janet Ramsay said warmly, holding out her hand to
Charlie, “though I do not in the least understand what my
husband is talking about, or what your name really is.â€
“My name is Carstairs, madam. I ama captain in the
Swedish service, and am here on a mission for King Charles.
Colonel Jamieson, for he is now colonel of the regiment to
which I belong—â€
“What!†the merchant exclaimed; “do you mean to
say that our Jock Jamieson is a colonel? Well, well, who
would have thought he would have climbed the tree so
quickly?â€
IN WARSAW 173
“Tt is a regiment entirely of Scotch and Englishmen,â€
Charlie said; ‘and he was promoted to take its command
only a short time since.â€
“Well, please to sit down and join us,†Mrs. Ramsay
said. ‘It is bad manners indeed to keep you talking while
the meat is getting cold on the table. When you have
finished, it will be time enough to question you.â€
While the meal was going on, however, many questions
were asked as to Colonel Jamieson, the regiment, and its
officers.
“As soon as matters are more settled,†the merchant
said, “I will give myself a holiday, and Janet and I will go
and spend a few days with Jock. Many of the names of
the officers are well known to me, and two or three of the
captains were at Glasgow College with Jock and myself. It
will be like old times to have four or five of us talking over
the wild doings we had together.â€
The supper over the children were sent off to bed.
Allan Ramsay lita long pipe. A bottle of wine and two
glasses were placed on the table, and Mrs. Ramsay with-
drew to see after domestic matters and prepare a room for
Charlie.
“Now, lad, tell me all about it,’ Allan Ramsay said.
“Jock tells me you are here on a mission which he would
leave it to yourself to explain; but it is no business of
mine, and if you would rather keep it to yourself I will
ask no questions.â€
“There is no secret about it as far as you are concerned,
Mr. Ramsay, for it is to you and to other merchants here
that I have come to talk it over;†and he then went fully
into the subject.
The Scotchman sat smoking his pipe in silence for some
minutes after he had concluded. “We do not much
meddle with politics here. We have neither voice nor
part in the making of kings or of laws, and beyond that
174 A JACOBITE EXILE
we like to have a peace-loving king, it matters little to us
whom the diet may set up over us. If we were once to
put the tips of our fingers into Polish affairs we might give
up all thought of trade. They are for ever intriguing and
plotting, except when they are fighting; and it would be
weary work to keep touch with it all, much less to take
part in it. It is our business to buy and to sell, and so
that both parties come to us it matters little; one’s money
is as good as the other. If I had one set of creditors
deeper in my books than another, I might wish their party
to gain the day, for it would, maybe, set them up in funds,
and I might get my money; but as it is, it matters little,
There is not a customer I have but is in my debt; money
is always scarce with them; for they are reckless and ex-
travagant, keeping a horde of idle loons about them, spend-
ing as much money on their own attire and that of their
wives as would keep a whole Scotch clan in victuals. But
if they cannot pay in money, they can pay in corn or in
cattle, in wine or in hides.
“I do not know which they are fondest of—plotting, or
fighting, or feasting; and yet, reckless as they are, they
are people to like. I£ they do sell their votes for money,
it is not a Scotchman that should throw it in their teeth;
for there is scarce a Scotch noble since the days of Bruce
who has not been ready to sell himself for English gold.
Our own Highlanders are as fond of fighting as the Poles,
and their chiefs are as profuse in hospitality and as reck-
less and spendthrift. But the Poles have their virtues, they
love their country and are ready to die for her. ‘They are
courteous and even chivalrous, they are hospitable to an
excess, they are good husbands and kindly masters, they
are recklessly brave; and if they are unduly fond of finery,
I who supply so many of them should be the last to find
fault with them on that score. ‘They are proud and look
down upon us traders, but that does not hurt us; and if
IN WARSAW 175
they were to take to trading themselves, there would be no
place for us here. But this has nothing to do with our
present purpose.
“Certainly if it was a question of Polish affairs, neither
the foreign nor the Jewish merchants here would move a
finger one way or the other. We have everything to lose
and nothing to gain. Suppose we took sides with one of
the parties, and the other got the upper hand. Why, they
might make ordinances hampering us in every way, laying
heavy taxes on us, forbidding the export of cattle or horses,
and making our lives burdensome. True, if they drove us
out they would soon have to repeal the law, for all trade
would be at an end. But that would be too late for many
of us. However, I do not say that at the present time
many would not be disposed to do what they could against
Augustus of Saxony. We are accustomed to civil wars;
and though these may cause misery and ruin in the districts
where they take place, they do not touch us here in the
capital. But this is a different affair. Augustus has, with-
out reason or provocation, brought down your fiery King
of Sweden upon us; and if he continues on the throne we
may hear the Swedish cannon thundering outside our
walls, and may have the city taken and sacked. ‘Therefore
for once politics become our natural business. But though
you may find many well-wishers, I doubt if you can obtain
any substantial aid. With Saxon troops in the town, and
the nobles divided, there is no hope of a successful rising
in Warsaw.â€
“The king did not think of that,†Charlie said; “his
opinion was that were it evident that the citizens of Warsaw
were strongly opposed to Augustus of Saxony, it would have
a great moral effect, and that perhaps they might influence
some of the nobles who, as you say, are deeply in their
books, or upon whose estates they may hold mortgages, to
join the party against the king.â€
176 A JACOBITE EXILE
“They might do something that way,†Allan Ramsay
agreed. “Of course I have no money out on mortgages.
I want badly enough all the money I can lay hands on in
my own business. Giving credit, as we have to, and often
very long credit, it requires a large capital to carry on
trade. But the Jews, who no doubt do hold large mort-
gages on the land, cannot exert much power. ‘They can-
not hold land themselves, and were one of them to venture
to sell the property of any noble of influence he would be
ruined. ‘The whole class would shrink from him, and like
enough there would be a tumult got up, his house would
be burned over his head, and he and his family murdered.
Still, as far as popular opinion goes, something might be
done. At any rate I will get some of my friends here
to-morrow, and introduce you to them and talk it over.
But we must be careful, for Augustus has a strong party
here, and were it suspected that you are a Swedish officer
it would go very hard with you. To-morrow you must
fetch your servant here. JI have already sent round to the
inn, and you will find your valises in your room. You
said you could rely thoroughly upon him?â€
“Yes, he was handed over to me by Count Piper himself;
and moreover, from what I have seen of him, I am myself
confident that he can be trusted. He is of Swedish de-
scent, and is, I think, a very honest fellow.â€
For a fortnight Charlie remained at Allan Ramsay’s,
and then, in spite of the pressing entreaties of his host
and hostess, took a lodging near them. He had by this
time seen a good many of the leading traders of the town.
The Scotch and Frenchmen had all heartily agreed with
his argument that it was for the benefit of Poland, and
especially for that of Warsaw, that Augustus of Saxony
should be replaced by another king who would be accepta-
ble to Charles of Sweden; but all were of opinion that but
little could be done by them towards bringing about this
IN WARSAW ae
result. With the Jewish traders his success was less de-
cided. They admitted that it would be a great misfortune
were Warsaw taken by the Swedes, but as Poles they re-
tained their confidence in the national army, and were
altogether sceptical that a few thousand Swedes could with-
stand the host that could be put in the field against them.
Several of them pointedly asked what interest they had in
the matter, and to some of these Charlie was obliged to
use his power of promising sums of money in case of
SUCCESS.
There were one or two, however, of whom he felt doubt-
ful. Chief among these was Ben Soloman Muller, a man
of great influence in the Jewish community. ‘This man had
placed so large a value upon his services that Charlie did
not feel justified in promising him such a sum. He did
not like the man’s face, and did not rely upon the promises
of silence he had given before the mission was revealed to
him. It was for this reason principally that he determined
to go into lodgings. Should he be denounced, serious
trouble might fall upon Allan Ramsay, and it would at least
minimize this risk were he not living at his house when he
was arrested. Ramsay himself was disposed to make light
of the danger.
“T believe myself that Ben Soloman is an old rogue, but
he is nota fool. He cannot help seeing that the position
of the king is precarious, and were he to cause your arrest
he might get little thanks and no profit, while he would be
incurring the risk of the vengeance of Charles should he
ever become master of the town. Did he have you arrested
he himself would be forced to appear as a witness against
you, and this he could hardly do without the matter becom-
ing publicly known. I do not say, however, that if he
could curry favour with the king’s party by doing you harm
without appearing in the matter, he would hesitate for a
moment. Even if you were arrested here, I doubt whether
178 A JACOBITE EXILE
any great harm would befall me, for all the Scotch merchants
would make common cause with me, and although we have
no political power, we have a good deal of influence one
way or another, and Augustus at this time would not care to
make fresh enemies. However, Jad, I will not further dis-
pute your decision. Were I quite alone I would not let
you leave me so long as you stop in this city without taking
great offence, but with a wife and two children a man is
more timid than if he had but himself to think of.â€
Charlie therefore moved into the lodging, but every day
he went for three or four hours to the shop, where he kept
up his assumed character by aiding to keep the ledgers,
and in learning from the Polish assistants the value of the
various goods in the shop. One evening he was returning
after supper to his lodging when Stanislas met him.
“T observed three or four evil-looking rascals casting
glances at the house te-day, and there are several rough-
looking fellows hanging about the house this evening. I
do not know if it means anything, but I thought I would let
you know.â€
“T think it must be only your fancy, Stanislas; I might
be arrested by the troops were I denounced, but I apprehend
no danger from men of the class you speak of. However,
if we should be interfered with, I fancy we could deal with
several rascals of that sort.â€
At the corner of his street three or four men were stand-
ing. One of them moved as he passed and pushed rudely
against him, sending his hat into the gutter. Then as his
face was exposed the fellow exclaimed:
“Tt is he, death to the Swedish spy!â€
They were the last words he uttered. Charlie’s sword
flew from its scabbard, and with a rapid pass he ran the
man through the body. ‘The others drew instantly and fell
upon Charlie with fury, keeping up the shout of, “ Death to
the Swedish spy!†It was evidently a signal, for men
IN WARSAW 179
darted out of doorways and came running down the street
repeating the cry.
“Go, Stanislas!â€â€™ Charlie shouted as he defended himself
against a dozen assailants. ‘Tell Ramsay what has hap-
pened; you can do no good here.†A moment later he
received a tremendous blow on the back of the head from
an iron-bound cudgel, and fell senseless.to the ground.
CHAPTER X
IN EVIL PLIGHT
\ HEN Charlie recovered his senses he found himself
lying bound in a room lighted by a dim lamp, which
sufficed only to show that the beams were blackened by
smoke and age, and the walls constructed of rough stone-
work. There was, so far as he could see, no furniture what- .
ever in it, and he imagined that it was an underground cellar,
used perbaps at some time or other as a store-room. It
was some time before his brain was clear enough to under-
stand what had happened, or how he had got into his pres-
ent position. Gradually the facts came back to him, and
he was able to think coherently in spite of a splitting head-
ache and a dull throbbing pain at the back of his head.
“T was knocked down and stunned,†he said to himself
at last. “I wonder what became of Stanislas; I hope he
got away. ‘This does not look like a prison. J should say
that it was a cellar in the house of one of the gang that set
upon me. It is evident that some one has betrayed me,
probably that Jew, Ben Soloman. What have they brought
me here for? I wonder what are they going to do with
me.†His head, however, hurt him too much for him to
continue the strain of thought, and after a while he dozed
off to sleep. When he awoke a faint light was streaming
in through a slit two or three inches wide, high up on the
180
IN EVIL PLIGHT 181
wall. He still felt faint and dizzy from the effects of the
blow. Parched with thirst he tried to call out for water,
but scarce a sound came from his lips.
Gradually the room seemed to darken and become indis-
tinct, and he again lapsed into insensibility. When he
again became conscious, some one was pouring water
between his lips, and he heard a voice speaking loudly and
angrily. He had picked up a few words of Polish from
Stanislas—the names of common things, the words to use
in case he lost his way, how to ask for food and for stabling
for a horse, but he was unable to understand what was said.
He judged, however, that some one was furiously upbraiding
the man who was giving him water, for the latter now and
then muttered excuses.
“He is blowing the fellow up for having so nearly let me
slip through their fingers,†he said to himself. “ Probably
they want to question me, and find out who I have been
in communication with. They shall get nothing at present
anyhow.†He kept his eyes resolutely closed. Presently
he heard a door open and another man come in. A few
words were exchanged, and this time wine instead of water
was poured down his throat. ‘Then he was partly lifted up,
and felt a cooling sensation at the back of his head. Some
bandages were passed round it and he was laid down again.
There was some more conversation, then a door opened
and two of the men went out; the third walked back to
him, muttering angrily to himself. Charlie felt sure that
he had been moved from the place in which he had been
the evening before, his bonds had been loosed, and he was
lying on straw and not on the bare ground. Opening his
eyelids the slightest possible degree, he was confirmed in
his belief by seeing that there was much more light than
could have entered the cellar. He dared not look farther,
and in a short time fell into a far more refreshing sleep
than that he before had.
182 A JACOBITE EXILE
The next time he woke his brain was clearer, though
there was still a dull sense of pain where he had been
struck. Without opening his eyes he listened attentively.
‘There was some sound of movement in the room, and pres-
ently he heard a faint regular breathing. This continued
for some time, and he then heard a sort of grunt. “He
is asleep,†he said to himself, and opening his eyes
slightly looked round. He was in another chamber. It
was grimy with dirt, and almost as unfurnished as the cel-
lar, but there was a window through which the sun was
streaming brightly. He himself lay upon a heap of straw.
At the opposite side of the room was a similar heap, and
upon this a man was sitting, leaning against the wall with
his chin dropped on his chest.
The thought of escape at once occurred to Charlie.
Could he reach the window, which was without glass and
a mere opening in the wall, without awakening his guard,
he could drop out and make for Alan Ramsay’s. As soon
as he tried to move, however, he found that this idea was
for the present impracticable. He felt too weak to lift his
head, and at the slight rustle of straw caused by the at-
tempt, the man opposite roused himself with a start. He
gave another slight movement, and then again lay quiet
with his eyes closed. The man came across and spoke,
but he made no sign. Some more wine was poured be-
tween his lips, then the man returned to his former posi-
tion and all was quiet. As he lay thinking his position
over, Charlie thought that those who had set his assailants
to their work must have had two objects—the one to puta
stop to his efforts to organize an agitation against the
king, the second to find out by questioning him who were
those with whom he had been in communication, in order
that they might be arrested and their property confiscated.
He could see no other reason why his life should be spared
by his assailants, for it would have been easier and far less
IN EVIL PLIGHT 183
troublesome to run him through as he lay senseless on the
ground than to carry him off and keep him a prisoner.
This idea confirmed the suspicion he had first enter-
tained, that the assault had been organized by Ben Solo-
man. He could have no real interest in the king, for he
was ready to join in the organization against him could he
have obtained his own terms. He might intend to gain
credit with the royal party by claiming to have stopped a
dangerous plot, and at the same time to benefit himself by
bringing about the expulsion or death of many of his for-
eign trade rivals. For this end the Jew would desire that
he should be taken alive, in order to serve as a witness
against the others. “ He will not get any names from me,â€
he said; ‘besides, none of them have promised to take
any active measures against Augustus. I did not ask them
to doso. There is no high treason in trying to influence
public opinion. Still, it is likely enough that the Jew
wants to get me to acknowledge that an insurrection was
intended, and will offer me my freedom if I will give such
testimony. As I am altogether in his power, the only
thing to do is to pretend to be a great deal worse than I
am, and so to gain time till Iam strong enough to try to
get away from this place.â€
All this was not arrived at at once, but was the result of
half-dreamy cogitation extending over hours, and inter-
rupted by short snatches of sleep. He was conscious that
from time to time some one came into the room and spoke
to his guard, and that three or four times wine was poured
between his lips. Once he was raised up and fresh cloths
dipped in water and bandages applied to his head. In
the evening two or three men came in, and he believed
that he recognized the voice of one of them as that of Ben
Soloman. One of the men addressed him suddenly and
sharply in Swedish.
“ How are you feeling, are you in pain? We have come
here to give you your freedom.â€
184 A JACOBITE EXILE
Charlie was on his guard, and remained silent with his
eyes closed.
“Tt is of no use,†Ben Soloman said in his own lan-
guage, “the fellow is still insensible. The clumsy fool
who hit him would fare badly if I knew who he was. I
said that he was to be knocked down, silenced, and brought
here; and here he is, of no more use than if he were
dead.â€â€™
“He will doubtless come round in time,†another said
in an apologetic tone. “We will bring him round if you
will have patience, Ben Soloman.â€
“Well, well,†the other replied, “a few days will make
no difference; but mind that he is well guarded directly
he begins to gain strength. I will get him out of the town
as soon as I can. Allan Ramsay has laid a complaint be-
fore the mayor that his countryman has been attacked by a
band of ruffians, and has been either killed or carried off
by them. It is a pity that servant of his was not killed.â€
“We thought he was dead. Two or three of us looked
at him, and I could have sworn that life was out of him.â€
“Well, then, you would have sworn what was not true,
for he managed to crawl to Ramsay’s, where he lies, I am
told, dangerously ill, and an official has been to him to
obtain his account of the fray. It was a bungled business
from beginning to end.†;
“We could not have calculated on the fellows making
such a resistance,†the other grumbled. “This one seemed
but a lad, and yet he killed three of our party, and the
other killed one. A nice business that; and you will have
to pay their friends well, Ben Soloman, for I can tell you
there is grumbling at the price, which they say was not
enough for the work, which you told them would be easy.â€
“Tt ought to have been,†the Jew said sullenly; “fifteen
or twenty men to overpower a lad. What could have been
more easy? However, I will do something for the friends
~
IN EVIL PLIGHT 185
of the men who were fools enough to get themselves killed,
but if I hear any grumbling from the others it will be worse
for them; there is not one I could not lay by the heels in
jail. Well, as to this young fellow, I shall not come again,
I do not want to be noticed coming here. Keep a shrewd
look-out after him.â€
“There is no fear about that,†the man said; “it will be
long ere he is strong enough to walk.â€
“When he gets better, we will have him taken. away to a
safe place outside the town; once there, I can make him
say what I like.â€
“ And if he does not get well?â€
“In that case we will take away his body and bury it
outside. I will see to that myself.â€
“T understand,†the other sneered. “You don’t want
anyone to know where it is buried, so as to be able to bring
it up against you.â€
“You attend to your own business,†the Jew said angrily.
“Why should I care about what they say? At any rate
there are some matters between you and me, and there is
no fear of your speaking.â€
“Not until the time comes when I may think it worth
my while to throw away my life in order to secure your
death, Ben Soloman.â€
“Tt is of no use talking like that,†the Jew said quietly;
“we are useful to each other. I have saved your life from
the gibbet, you have done the work I required. Between
us, it is worse than childish to threaten in the present mat-
ter. I do not doubt that you will do your business well,
and you know that you will be well paid for it; what can
either of us require more?â€
Charlie would have given a good deal to understand the
conversation, and he would have been specially glad to
learn that Stanislas had escaped with his life; for he had
taken a great fancy to the young Lithuanian, and was
186 A JACOBITE EXILE
grieved by the thought that he had probably lost his life in
his defence.
Three days passed. His head was now clear and his
appetite returning, and he found, by quietly moving at
night when his guard was asleep, that he was gaining
strength. ‘The third day there was some talking among
several men who entered the room, then he was lifted, wrapt
up in some cloths, and put into a large box. He felt this
being hoisted up, it was carried downstairs, and then placed
on something. A minute afterwards he felt a vibration,
followed by a swaying and bumping, and guessed at once
that he was on a cart, and was being removed either to
prison or to some other place of confinement; the latter he
considered more probable. The journey was a long one;
he had no means of judging time, but he thought that it
must have lasted two or three hours. ‘Then the rumbling
ceased, the box was lifted down, and carried a short dis-
tance, then the lid was opened and he was again laid down
on some straw. He heard the sound of cart wheels, and
knew that the vehicle on which he had been brought was
being driven away. He was now so hungry that he felt he
could no longer maintain the appearance of insensibility.
Two men were talking in the room, and when for a moment
their conversation ceased, he gave a low groan and then
opened his eyes. They came at once to his bedside with
exclamations of satisfaction.
“How do you feel?†one asked in Swedish.
“JT do not know,†he said ina lowtone. “Where am I,
how did I get here?â€
“You are with friends; never mind how you got here.
You have been ill, but you will soon get well again. Some
one hit you on the head, and we picked you up and brought
you here.â€
“T am weak and faint,†Charlie murmured; “have you
any food?â€
IN EVIL PLIGHT 187
“Vou shall have some food directly it is prepared. Take
a drink of wine, and see if you can eat a bit of bread while
the broth is preparing.â€
Charlie drank a little of the wine that was put to his lips,
and then broke up the bread and eat it crumb by crumb,
as if it were a great effort to do so, although he had diff-
culty in restraining himself from eating it voraciously.
When he had finished it he closed his eyes again, as if
sleep had overpowered him. An hour later there was a
touch on his shoulder.
“Here is some broth, young fellow; wake up and drink
that, it will do you good.â€
Charlie, as before, slowly sipped down the broth, and
then really fell asleep, for the jolting had fatigued him ter-
ribly. It was evening when he awoke; two men were sit-
ting at a blazing fire. When he moved one of them
brought him another basin of broth, and fed him with a
spoon. Charlie had been long enough in the country to
know by the appearance of the room that he was in a peas-
ant’s hut. He wondered why he had been brought there,
and concluded that it must be because Allan Ramsay had
set so stringent a search on foot in the city, that they
considered it necessary to take him away.
“They will not keep me here long,†he said to himself.
“J am sure that I could walk now, and in another two or
three days I shall be strong enough to go some distance.
That soup has done me a deal of good; I believe half my
weakness is from hunger.†He no longer kept up the
appearance of unconsciousness, and in the morning put
various questions to the man who spoke Swedish as to what
had happened and how he came to be there. ‘This man
was evidently from his dress and appearance a Jew, while
the other was as unmistakably a peasant, a rough power-
fully-built man with an evil face. The Jew gave him but
little information, but told him that in a day or two, when
188 A JACOBITE EXILE
he was strong enough to listen, a friend would come who
would tell him all about it. On the third day he heard the
sound of an approaching horse, and was not surprised
when, after a conversation in a low tone outside, Ben
Soloman entered. Charlie was now much stronger, but he
had carefully abstained from showing any marked improve-
ment, speaking always in a voice a little above a whisper,
and allowing the men to feed him after making one or two
pretended attempts to convey the spoon to his mouth.
“Well, Master Englishman,†Ben Soloman said, as he
came up to his bedside, “what do you think of things?â€
“I do not know what to think,†Charlie said feebly. “I
do not know where I am, or why I am here. I remember
that there was a fray in the street, and I suppose I was hurt,
but why was I brought here instead of being taken to my
lodgings?â€
“Because you would be no use to me in your lodging,
and you may be a great deal of use to me here,†Ben
Soloman said. “You know you endeavoured to entrap me
into a plot against the king’s life.â€
Charlie shook his head and looked wonderingly at the
speaker. “No, no,†he said, “there was no plot against
the king’s life; I only asked if you would use your influ-
ence among your friends to turn popular fecling against
Augustus.â€
“Nothing of the kind,†the Jew said harshly. “You
wanted him removed by poison or the knife. ‘There is no
mistake about that, and that is what I am going to swear,
and what, if you want to save your life, you will have to
swear too; and you will have to give the names of all con-
cerned in the plot, and to swear that they were all agreed
to bring about the death of the king. Now you understand
why you were brought here. You are miles away from
another house, and you may shout and scream as loud as
you like. You are in my power.â€
IN EVIL PLIGHT 189
“T would die rather than make a false accusation.â€
“Tisten to me,†the Jew said sternly. ‘‘You are weak
now, too weak to suffer much, this day week I will return,
and then you had best change your mind and sign a docu-
ment I shall bring with me, with the full particulars of the
plot to murder the king, and the names of those concerned
in it. This you will sign. I shall take it to the proper
authorities, and obtain a promise that your life shall be
spared on condition of your giving evidence against these
persons.â€
“T would never sign such a villainous document,†Charlie
said.
“Vou will sign it,†Ben Soloman said calmly. “When
you find yourself roasting over a slow charcoal fire, you will
be ready to sign anything I wish you to.â€
So saying, he turned and left the room. He talked for
some time to the men outside, then Charlie heard him
ride off.
“Vou villain,†he said to himself, “when you come at
the end of a week you will not find me here; but if I geta
chance of having a reckoning with you, it will be bad for
you.â€
Charlie’s progress was apparently slow; the next day he
was able to sit up and feed himself, two days later he could
totter across the room and lie down before the fire. The
men were completely deceived by his acting, and consider-
ing any attempt to escape in his present weak state alto-
gether impossible, paid but little heed to him, the peasant
frequently absenting himself for hours together. Looking
from his window, Charlie saw that the hut was situated in
a thick wood, and from the blackened appearance of the
peasant’s face and garments he guessed him to be a charcoal-
burner, and therefore judged that the trees he saw must
form part of a forest of considerable extent.
‘The weather was warm, and his other guard often sat for
190 A JACOBITE EXILE
a while outside the door. During his absence Charlie lifted
the logs of wood piled beside the hearth, and was able to
test his returning strength, assuring himseif that, although
not yet fully recovered, he was gaining ground daily. He
resolved not to wait until the seventh day; for Ben Soloman
might change his mind and return before the day he had
named. He determined, therefore, that on the sixth day
he would make the attempt. He had no fear of being
unable to overcome his Jewish guard, as he would have the
advantage of a surprise. He only delayed as long as possi-
ble, because he doubted his powers of walking any great
distance and of evading the charcoal-burner, who would on
his return certainly set out in pursuit of him. Moreover,
he wished to remain in the hut nearly up to the time of the
Jew’s return, as he was determined to wait in the forest
and revenge himself for the suffering he had caused him and
for the torture to which he intended to put him.
The evening before the day on which he decided to
“make the attempt the charcoal-burner and the Jew were in
earnest conversation. ‘The word signifying brigand was
frequently repeated, and although he could not understand
much more than this, he concluded from the peasant’s talk
and gestures that he had either come across some of these
men in the forest, or had gathered from signs he had
observed, perhaps from their fires, that they were there.
The Jew shrugged his shoulders when the narration was
finished. ‘lhe presence of brigands was a matter of indif-
ference to him. ‘The next day the charcoal-burner went off
at noon.
“Where does he go to?†Charlie asked his guard.
“He has got some charcoal fires alight, and is obliged to
go and see to them. They have to be kept covered up
with wet leaves and earth so that the wood shall only
smoulder,†the man said, as he lounged out of the hut to
his usual seat,
IN EVIL PLIGHT 191
Charlie waited a short time, then went to the pile of logs
and picked out a straight stick about a yard long and two
inches in diameter. With one of the heavier ones he
could have killed the man, but the fellow was only acting
under the orders of his employer, and although he would
doubtless, at Ben Soloman’s commands, have roasted him
alive without compunction, he had not behaved with any
unkindness, and had, indeed, seemed to do his best for
him. ‘Taking the stick, he went to the door. He trod
lightly, but in the stillness of the forest the man heard him,
and glanced round as he came out. Seeing the stick in
his hand he leaped up, exclaiming, “‘ You young fool!†and
sprang towards him. He had scarce time to feel surprise
as Charlie quickly raised the club. It described a swift
sweep, fell full on his head, and he dropped to the ground
as if shot.
Charlie ran in again, seized a coil of rope, bound his
hands and feet securely, and dragged him into the hut.
Then he dashed some cold water on his face. The man
opened his eyes and tried to move. ‘You are too tightly
bound to move, Pauloff,†he said. “I could have killed
you if I had chosen, but I did not wish to. You have not
been unkind to me, and I owe you no grudge; but tell your
rascally employer that I will be even with him some day
for the evil he has done me.â€
“Vou might as well have killed me,†the man said, “ for
he will do so when he finds I let you escape.â€
“Then my advice to you is, be beforehand with him.
You are as strong a man as he is, and if I were in your
place, and a man who meant to kill me came into a lonely
hut like this, I would take precious good care that he had
no chance of carrying out his intentions.â€
Charlie then took two loaves of black bread and a portion
of goat’s flesh from the cupboard, found a bottle about a
quarter full of coarse spirits, filled it up with water and put
192 A JACOBITE EXILE
it in his pocket, and then, after taking possession of the
long knife his captive wore in his belt, went out of the hut
and closed the door behind him. He had purposely moved
slowly about the hut as he made these preparations, in order
that the Jew should believe that he was still weak; but,
indeed, the effort of dragging the man into the hut had
severely taxed his strength, and he found that he was much
weaker than he had supposed.
The hut stood in a very small clearing, and Charlie had
no difficulty in seeing the track by which the cart had
come, for the marks of the wheels were still visible in the
soft soil. He followed this, until after about two miles’
walking he came to the edge of the wood. Then he
retraced his steps for a quarter of a mile, turned off, and
with some difficulty made his way into a patch of thick
undergrowth, where, after first cutting a formidable cudgel,
he lay down, completely exhausted. Late in the afternoon
he was aroused from a doze by the sound of footsteps, and
looking through the screen of leaves he saw his late jailers
hurrying along the path. The charcoal-burner carried a
heavy axe, while the Jew, whose head was bound up with a
cloth, had a long knife in his girdle. They went as far as
the end of the forest, and then retraced their steps slowly.
They were talking loudly, and Charlie could gather from
the few words he understood, and by their gestures, some-
thing of the purport of their conversation.
“T told you it was of no use your coming on as far as
this,†the Jew said; ‘why, he was hardly strong enough to
walk.â€
“He managed to knock you down, and afterwards to drag
you into the house,†the other said.
“Tt does not require much strength to knock a man down
with a heavy club when he is not expecting it, Conrad.
He certainly did drag me in, but he was obliged to sit down
afterwards, and I watched him out of one eye as he was
IN EVIL PLIGHT 193
making his preparations, and he could only just totter about.
J would wager you anything he cannot have gone two hun-
dred yards from the house; that is where we must search
for him, I warrant we shall find him hidden in a thicket
thereabouts.â€
“We shall have to take a lantern then, for it will be
dark before we get back.â€
“Our best plan will be to leave it alone till morning.
If we sit outside the hut and take it in turns to watch we
shall hear him when he moves, which he is sure to do when
it gets dark. It will be a still night, and we should hear
a stick break half a mile away. We shall catch him safe
enough before he has gone far.â€
“Well, I hope we shall have him back before Ben Solo-
man comes,†the charcoal-burner said, ‘or it will be worse
for both of us. You know as well as I do he has got my
neck in a noose, and he has got his thumb on you.â€
“Tf we can’t find this Swede, I would not wait here for
any money. I would fly at once.â€
“Vou would need to fly, in truth, to get beyond Ben
Soloman’s clutches,†the charcoal-burner said gruffly.
“He has got agents all over the country.â€
“Then what would you do?â€
“There is only one thing to do. It is our lives or his.
When he rides up to-morrow we will meet him at the door
as if nothing had happened, and, with my axe, I will
cleave his head asunder as he comes in. If he sees me
in time to retreat you shall stab him in the back. Then
we will dig a big hole in the wood and throw him in, and
we will kill his horse and bury it with him. Who would
ever be the wiser? I was going to propose it last time,
only I was not sure of you then; but now that you are in it
as deep as I am—deeper indeed, for he put you here
specially to look after this youngster—your interest in the
matter is as great as mine.â€
194 A JACOBITE EXILE
The Jew was silent for some time, then he said: “He
has got papers at home which would bring me to the
gallows.â€
“Pooh!†the other said. “You do not suppose that
when it is found that he does not return, and his heirs
open his coffers, they will take any trouble about what
there may be in the papers there except such as relate to
his money. I will warrant there are papers there which
concern scores of men besides you, for I know that Ben
Soloman likes to work with agents he has got under his
thumb. But even if all the papers should be put into the
hands of the authorities, what would come of it? They
have got their hands full of other matters for the present,
and with the Swedes on their frontier and the whole coun-
try divided into factions, who do you think is going to
trouble to hunt up men for affairs that occurred years ago?
Even if they did, they would not catch you. They have
not got the means of running you down that Ben Soloman
has. I tell you, man, it must be done. ‘There is no other
way out of it.â€
“Well, Conrad, if we cannot find this fellow before Ben
Soloman comes I am with you in the business. I have
been working for him on starvation pay for the last three
years, and hate him as much as you can.â€
When they reached the hut they cooked a meal, and
then prepared to keep alternate watch.
Charlie slept quietly all night, and in the morning re-
mained in his hiding-place until he heard in the distance
the sound of a horse’s tread. ‘Then he went out and sat
down, leaning against a tree by the side of the path, in an
attitude of exhaustion. Presently he saw Ben Soloman
approaching. He got up feebly and staggered a few paces
to another tree farther from the path. He heard an angry
shout, and then Ben Soloman rode up, and with a torrent
of execrations at the carelessness of the watchers leapt
CHARLIE ENCOUNTERS BEN SOLOMAN IN THE Woon,
IN EVIL PLIGHT 195
from his horse and sprang to seize the fugitive, whom he
regarded as incapable of offering the slightest resistance.
Charlie straightened himself up as if with an effort,
and raised his cudgel. “TI will not be taken alive,†he
said.
Ben Soloman drew his long knife from his girdle. “ Drop
that stick,†he said, “or it will be worse for you.â€
“Tt cannot be worse than being tortured to death, as
you said.â€
The Jew, with an angry snarl, sprang forward so sud-
denly and unexpectedly that he was within the swing of
Charlie’s cudgel before the latter could strike. He
dropped the weapon at once and caught the wrist of the
uplifted hand that held the knife. ‘The Jew gave a cry of
astonishment and rage as they clasped each other, and he
found that instead of an unresisting victim he was in a
powerful grasp. For a moment there was a desperate
struggle.
The Jew would, at ordinary times, have been no match
for Charlie, but the latter was far from having regained
his normal strength. His fury at the treatment he had
received at the man’s hands, however, enabled him for
the moment to exert himself to the utmost, and after sway-
ing backwards and forwards in desperate strife for a
minute they went to the ground with a crash, Ben Soloman
being undermost.
The Jew’s grasp instantly relaxed, and Charlie, springing
to his feet and seizing his cudgel, stood over his fallen
antagonist. The latter, however, did not move. His
eyes were open ina fixed stare. Charlie looked at him in
surprise for a moment, thinking he was stunned, then he
saw that his right arm was twisted under him in the fall,
and at once understanding what had happened, turned him
half over. He had fallen on the knife, which had pene-
trated to the haft, killing him instantly.
196 A JACOBITE EXILE
“T didn’t mean to kill you,†Charlie said aloud, “much
as you deserve it, and surely as you would have killed me
if I had refused to act as a traitor: I would have broken
your head for you, bet that was all. However, it is as well
as itis. It adds to my chance of getting away, and I have
no doubt there will be many who will rejoice when you are
found to be missing. Now,†he went on, “as your agents
emptied my pockets, it is no robbery to empty yours.
Money will be useful, and so will your horse.â€
He stooped over the dead man and took the purse from
his girdle, when suddenly there was a rush of feet, and in
a moment he was seized. The thought flashed through
his mind that he had fallen into the power of his late
guardians, but a glance showed that the men standing
round were strangers.
“Well, comrade, and who are you?†the man who was
evidently the leader asked. “You have saved us some
trouble. We were sleeping a hundred yards or two away
when we heard the horseman, and saw as he passed he
was the Jew of Warsaw, to whom two or three of us owe
our ruin, and it did not need more than a word for us to
agree to wait for him till he came back. We were sur-
prised when we saw you, still more so when the Jew
jumped from his horse and attacked you. We did not
interfere, because if he had got the best of you he might
have jumped on his horse and ridden off, but directly he
fell we ran out, but you were so busy in taking the spoil
that you did not hear us.
“T see the Jew is dead; fell on his own knife. It is
just as well for him, for we should have tied him to a tree
and made a bonfire of him if we had caught him.â€
Charlie understood but little of this, but said when the
other finished: “I understand but little Polish.â€
“What are you then—a Russian? You do not look like
one.â€
IN EVIL PLIGHT 197
“T am an Englishman, and am working in the house of
Allan Ramsay, a Scotch trader in Warsaw.â€
“Well, you are a bold fellow anyhow, and after the smart
way in which you disposed of this Jew and possessed your-
self of his purse, you will do honour to our trade.â€
“T hope you will let me go,†Charlie said. “ My friends
in Warsaw will pay a ransom for me if you will let me return
there.â€
“No, no, young fellow. You would of course put down
this Jew’s death to our doing, and we have weight enough
on our backs already. He is a man of great influence, and
all his tribe would be pressing on the government to hunt
us down. You shall go with us, and the purse you took
from Ben Soloman will pay your footing,â€
Charlie saw that it would be useless to try and alter the
man’s decision, especially as he knew so little of the lan-
guage. He therefore shrugged his shoulders, and said that
he was ready to go with them if it must be so. The Jew’s
body was now thoroughly searched. Various papers were
found upon him, but as these proved useless to the brigands
they were torn up.
“Shall we take the horse with us?†one of the men asked
the leader.
“No, it would be worse than useless in the forest. Leave
it standing here, it will find its way back in time. Then
there will be a search, and there will be rejoicing in many
a mansion throughout the country when it is known that Ben
Soloman is dead. ‘They say he has mortgages on a score of
estates, and though I suppose these will pass to others of
his tribe, they can hardly be as hard and mercenary as this
man was. I wonder what he was doing in this forest alone?
Let us follow the path and see where he is going. Honred,
you have a smattering of several languages, try then if you
can make our new comrade understand.†‘The man tried
in Russian without success, then he spoke in Swedish, in
which language Charlie at once replied.
198 A JACOBITE EXILE
“Where does this pathway lead to?â€
“Vo a hut where a charcoal-burner lives. I have been
imprisoned there for the last fortnight. It was all the Jew’s
doing. It was through him that I got this knock here; â€
and he pointed to the unhealed wound at the back of his
head.
“Well, we may as well pay them a visit,†the chief said,
when this was translated to him. “We are short of flour,
and they may have some there, and maybe something else
that will be useful.â€
CHAPTER XI
WITH BRIGANDS
apes man who had spoken to Charlie drew the long knife
from the back of the Jew, wiped it on the grass, and
handed it to him.
“That ought to be your property,’
done you good service.â€
Not sorry to have a weapon in addition to his cudgel,
Charlie placed it in his belt and then started with the
bandits. He would not have cared to face the charcoal-
burner alone; but now that the band regarded him as
enrolled among their number, he felt no uneasiness respect-
ing him. When they issued from the trees the Jew was
seen standing at the door of the hut. He at once ran in
on seeing them, and came out again accompanied by the
charcoal-burner, who carried his axe on his shoulder. The
Jew started on catching sight of Charlie among the ranks of
the brigands, and said a word or two to his companion.
“Well, Master Charcoal-burner,†the leader of the party
said, “how is it that honest woodmen consort with rogues
of the town?â€
“T don’t know that they do so willingly,†the man said
eruffly. “But some of us to our cost have put our heads
into nooses, and the rogues of the town have got hold of
the other end of the ropes, and we must just walk as we are
told to.â€
,
he said. “It has
199
200 A JACOBITE EXILE
“Well, that is true enough,†the brigand said. “And
you, Jew, what are you doing here?â€
“Tam like Conrad,†he replied sulkily. “It is not only
countrymen who have their necks in a noose, and I have to
do what I am ordered.â€
“By a bigger rogue than yourself?â€
“That is so; bigger and cleverer.â€â€™
“You are expecting him here now, our new comrade tells
us. Well, you need expect him no longer; he will not
come. If you will go along the path you will come upon
his body, and may bury him if you like to take the trouble.â€
An exclamation of satisfaction broke from the two men.
“You have done us a service indeed,†the charcoal-
burner said. “We had thought to do it for ourselves this
morning, for after the escape of him you call your new
comrade he would have shown us no mercy.â€
“You may thank our new comrade and not us,†the
brigand said. “We only arrived on the spot when it was
all over.â€
‘The Jew looked at Charlie in astonishment.
“What! did he kill Ben Soloman?â€
“That did he; or rather the Jew killed himself. There
was a grapple hand to hand and a wrestle, the Jew fell
undermost, and was pierced with his own knife.â€
“But the lad is but just out of a sick-bed and has no
strength for a struggle, and Ben Soloman, though past
middle life, was strong and active.â€
“Neither strong enough nor active enough,†the man
laughed. “You have been nicely taken in; who would
have thought that two Jews and a Pole would have been
cheated by an English lad? His face shows that he has
been ill, and doubtless he has not yet recovered his full
strength, but he was strong enough anyhow to overthrow
Ben Soloman. Now, what have you in the hut? we are in
need of provisions.â€
WITH BRIGANDS 201
The hut was ransacked; the flour, two bottles of spirits,
and a skin of wine seized, and the meat cut up and roasted
over the fire. After the meal was eaten the captain called
upon Charlie to tell his story more fully, and this he did
with the aid of the man who spoke Swedish; starting, how-
ever, only at the point when he was attacked in the street,
as he felt it better to remain silent as to his connection
with the Swedish army.
“But what was the cause of Ben Soloman’s hostility to
you?â€
“There are some in Warsaw who are of opinion that
Augustus of Saxony has done much harm to Poland in
engaging without cause in the war against Charles of
Sweden, and who think that it would be well that he
should be dethroned, and some other prince made king in
his place. To this party many of the traders belong, and
the Jew had reason to think that I was acquainted with
the design, and could give the names of those concerned
in it, There was really no plot against Augustus, but it
was only intended that a popular demonstration against
his rule should be made. But Soloman wanted me to give
evidence that there was a conspiracy against the king’s
life, so that he might gain great credit by exposing it,
and might at the same time rid himself of many of his
rivals in the trade.â€
“He was an artful fox,†the leader of the brigands said
when this had been translated to him. “But where is the
Jew he put over you?â€
Three or four of the men sprang to their feet and ran
out, but the Jew was nowhere to be seen. The captain
was furious, and abused his men right and left, while his
anger was in no way mitigated when one of them told
him that if he had wanted the Jew kept, he should have
given one of them orders to look after him. This was so
evident that the chief was silenced for a moment.
202 A JACOBITE EXILE
“How long is it since any of you saw him last?â€
“He went round with the wine-skin, and filled our cups
just as we sat down to breakfast,†one of the men said.
“T have not noticed him since.†Nor had any of the
others.
“Then it will be no use to pursue; he has had more
than half an hour’s start, and long before this he will have
mounted Ben Soloman’s horse and have ridden off.
“Well, comrade,†he said, turning to Charlie, “this set-
tles your movements. I was but half in earnest before as
to your joining us; but it is clear now that there’s nothing
else for you to do for the present. ‘This fellow will,
directly he gets to Warsaw, denounce you as the murderer
of his master. That he is sure to do to avert suspicion
from himself, and if you were to return there it would go
hard with you. So for a time you must throw in your lot
with us.â€
When this was translated to Charlie, he saw at once the
force of the argument. He could not have denied that
the Jew had fallen in a hand-to-hand struggle with himself,
and were he to appear in Warsaw he might be killed by the
co-religionists of Ben Soloman; or if he escaped this,
might lie in a dungeon for months awaiting his trial, and
perhaps be finally executed. There was nothing for him
now but to rejoin the Swedes, and it would be some time
yet before he would be sufficiently recovered to undertake
such a journey.
“T should not mind if I could send a letter to Allan
Ramsay, to tell him what has befallen me; he will be
thinking I am dead, and will at any rate be in great anxiety
about me.â€
“J have taken a liking to you, young fellow,†the leader
said, “and will send in one of my men to Warsaw with a
letter; that is, if you can write one.â€
“Yes, I can write. Fortunately there are paper, pen,
WITH BRIGANDS 203
and an ink-horn on that shelf. Ben Soloman brought
them the last time he came to write down the lies he
wanted me to testify to. Iam greatly obliged to you, and
will do it at once.â€
As he had, only the day before he was attacked, sent off
a messenger to Count Piper telling him all he had done
the previous week, there was no occasion to repeat this,
and he had only to give an account of his capture and the
events that had since occurred.
“You see,†he said, “I cannot return to Warsaw; the
Jew who was here unfortunately heard that it was in a
struggle with me Ben Soloman was killed, and he will of
course denounce me as his murderer, though the deed was
done in fair fight. I should have all his tribe against me,
and might be imprisoned for months awaiting trial. Iam
still very weak, and could not attempt the journey to the
frontier. J am, however, gaining strength, and as soon as
Lam quite recovered I shall take the first opportunity of
leaving the men I am with, and making for the Swedish
camp. Please forward this news by a sure hand to Count
Piper, and express my sorrow that my mission has not
been completed, although indeed I do not think that my
further stay at Warsaw would have been any great service,
for it is clear that the great majority of the traders will
not move in the matter until the Swedes advance, and,
from their point of view, it is not to their interest to do
so. I know but little of the men I am with at present,
beyond the fact that they are bandits, nor can I say whether
they are disbanded soldiers or criminals who have escaped
from justice; but at any rate they show me no ill-will. I
have no doubt I shall be able to get on fairly with them
until I am able to make my escape. I wish I had poor
Stanislas with me; only one of the men here speaks Swed-
ish, and he docs not know very much of the language. 1
cannot say at present whether the twenty men here are the
204 A JACOBITE EXILE
whole of the band, or whether they are only a portion of
it; nor do I know whether the men subsist by plundering
the peasants or venture on more serious crimes. Thank-
ing you for your great kindness during my stay at Warsaw,
I remain, yours gratefully,—Cuaruie Carsrairs.â€
While he was occupied in writing this letter an animated
conversation was going on between the bandits. Charlie
gathered that this related to their future operations, but
more than this he could not learn. Ina postscript to the
letter he requested Allan Ramsay to hand over to the
bearer some of the clothes left in his lodgings, and to pay
him for his trouble.
“As to the money I left in your hands, I do not think
it worth while for you to send it. However much these
men may consider me a comrade, I have not sufficient
faith in their honesty to believe that money would reach
me safely; but if you send me a suit of clothes, two or
three gold pieces might be wrapped up in a piece of cloth
and shoved into the toe of ashoe. The parcel must be a
small one, or there would be little chance of the man
carrying it far. I will ask him, however, to bring me a
sword if you will buy one for me, and my pistols.â€
He folded up the letter and gave it to the captain.
There was no means of fastening it, but this mattered little,
because, being. written in English, there was no chance of
its being read. The captain handed it to one of the men
with instructions for its delivery. The messenger started
at once; the others, after remaining a short time in the
hut, set out through the forest. After an hour’s walking
Charlie was unable to go further. The captain seeing
this ordered four of the men to stop with him and to follow
the next morning. As soon as he had gone on with the
rest of the band, the men set about collecting sticks and
making a fire. Charlie, who was utterly exhausted, threw
himself on the ground, and was not long before he fell
WITH BRIGANDS 205
sound asleep. When he awoke the shades of evening were
already falling, and the men were sitting over the fire
roasting a portion of a goat, one of a flock they had fallen
in with in the wood, where large numbers roamed about in
a semi-wild state.
The man who could speak Swedish was one of those who
had remained with him, and from him he learnt that the
present head-quarters of the band were some six miles
farther away. ‘This distance was performed next morning,
frequent halts being made to enable him to sit down and
rest; and it was not till five hours after the start that they
arrived. Overgrown as it now was with trees and under-
growth, he could see that a village once stood there. It
must, however, have been abandoned a very long time, as
trees of considerable size grew among the low walls and
piles of stones that marked where cottages had stood. ‘The
place occupied by the brigands had in former times been a
castellated building of some strength, standing on a knoll
in the middle of the village, which had probably been
inhabited by the retainers of its owner. Part of the wall
had fallen, but a large arched room, that had doubtless been
the banqueting hall of the castle, remained almost intact,
and here the brigands had established themselves. Several
fires burned on the flagged floors, the smoke finding its way
out through holes and crevices in the roof. Some fifty men
were gathered round these, and were occupied in cooking
their mid-day meal.
“TI am glad to see that you have arrived,†the captain
said, coming across to Charlie. “I expected you two hours
ago, and intended as soon as we had finished our meal to
send out another four men to meet you and help to carry
you in.â€
“Thank you,†Charlie said. “It is not the men’s fault
we are late, but the last part of the way we came on very
slowly. Iwas getting so exhausted that I had to stop every
few hundred yards.â€
206 A JACOBITE EXILE
“Well, you had better eat something, and then lie down
for asleep. Meat is plentiful with us, for there are thou-
sands of goats in the forest, and occasionally we get a deer
or wild boar. If we had but bread and wine we should live
like nobles. Our supplies, however, are low at present,
and we shall have to make an expedition to-morrow or next
day to replenish them.â€
Charlie ate a few mouthfuls of meat, and then lay down
and slept for some hours ona bed of leaves. He was awoke
by loud and excited talking among the men, and learnt from
Honred that one of the men who had been left on watch at
the mouth of the path by which he had entered the forest,
had just brought in the news that a party of a hundred
infantry led by the Jew had arrived with a cart. In this
the body of Ben Soloman had been sent off, while the troops
had established themselves in the little clearing round the
hut.
“This comes of letting that Jew escape,†the captain
said. “No doubt he told the story his own way, and the
Jewish traders went to the governor and asked that troops
should be sent to root us out. Well, they are far enough
away at present, and I have sent off to have their move-
ments watched. It is a good nine miles from here to the
hut, and they may look for a week before they find this
place, unless that rascally Jew has heard of it from the
woodman, or they get hold of the fellow himself, though I
should think they will hardly do that. I fancy he has some
cause of quarrel with the authorities, and will not put him-
self in the way of being questioned closely if he can
help it.â€
The next morning when Charlie awoke, two men were
standing beside him. His eyes first fell on the one who
had been to the town, and who held a large bundle in
his hand. Then he turned his eyes to the other, and gave
an exclamation of pleasure as he saw that it was Stanislas.
WITH BRIGANDS 207
He looked pale and weak, and was evidently just recovering
from a severe illness.
“Why, Stanislas!†he exclaimed, “this is a pleasure
indeed. I never for a moment dreamt of seeing you. I
heard from the Jew who guarded me that you got away, but
I was afraid that you had been badly wounded. Why, my
brave fellow, what brings you here?â€
“Thave come to be with your honour,†the man said.
“Tt was, of course, my duty to be by your side. I was
very ill for a week, for I had half a dozen wounds, but I
managed after the assailants left me to crawl back to Mr.
Ramsay’s to tell him what had happened. I don’t remem-
ber much about the next few days. Since then I have been
mending rapidly; none of the wounds were very serious,
and it was more loss of blood than anything else that ailed
me. Mr. Ramsay searched high and low for you, and we
had all given you up for dead till a few hours before this
man arrived with your letter. We heard you had killed
Ben Soloman. I had a long talk with your messenger, who
received a handsome present from Mr. Ramsay, and he
agreed to conduct me here upon my solemn promise that if
the captain would not receive me I would not give any
information on my return as to the whereabouts of the
band. Mr. Ramsay hired a light cart, and that brought us
yesterday far into the forest. We camped there, and I had
not more than a couple of miles to walk to get here this
morning.â€
“Have you seen the captain?†Charlie asked eagerly.
“Yes; I was stopped by some sentries a quarter of a mile
away, and was kept there while my guide came on and got
permission of the captain for me to be brought in. When
I met him I had no great difficulty in persuading him to
let me stop, for Mr. Ramsay had given me fifty rix-dollars
to give him; and so, your honour, here I am, and here is a
letter from Mr. Ramsay himself.â€
208 A JACOBITE EXILE
“T cannot tell you how glad I am to have you, Stanislas.
J am getting better, but I am so weak, that I took five hours
yesterday to get six miles. Now I have got you to talk to
I shall pick up strength faster than I have been doing, for
it has been very dull work having no one who could under-
stand me. ‘There is only one man here who understands a
word of Swedish.â€
“We will soon get you round, sir, never fear. I have
brought with me four casks of wine. They were left at the
place where the cart stopped last night, but the captain has
sent off men already to bring them in. You will be all the
better for a suit of clean clothes.â€
“That I shall; it is a month now since I had a change,
and my jerkin is all stained with blood. I want a wash
more than anything; for there was no water near the hut,
and the charcoal-burner used to bring in a small keg from
a spring he passed on his way to his work. ‘That was
enough for drinking, but not enough for washing—a matter
which never seemed to have entered into his head or that
of the Jew as being in the slightest degree necessary.â€
“There is a well just outside,†Stanislas said. ‘I saw
them drawing water in buckets as we came in. I suppose
it was the well of this castle in the old time.â€
“Twill go and have a wash, and change my clothes the
first thing,†Charlie said. “Mr. Ramsay’s letter will keep
till after that.†.
They went out to the well together.
“So you heard the story that I had killed Ben Soloman
before you left?â€
“Yes; before your letter arrived Mr. Ramsay sent for
me, and told me a Jewish trader had just informed him that
news had come that Ben Soloman had been murdered, and
the deed had been done by the young Scotchman who had
been with him. Mr. Ramsay did not believe the story in
the slightest. He admitted that Ben Soloman might have
WITH BRIGANDS 209
been murdered, and even said frankly that, hated as he was,
it was the most natural end for him to come to; but that
you should have done so was, he said, absurd. In the first
place, he did not think that you were alive; and in the
second, it was far more probable that you had been mur-
dered by Ben Soloman than that he should have been
murdered by you.
“However, even berore your letter came three or four
hours later, there seemed no longer any doubt that you had
killed the Jew. By that time there was quite an uproar
among his people. He was the leader of their commu-
nity, and had dealings with so many nobles that his influ-
ence was great; and although he was little liked, he was
regarded as an important person, and his loss was a very
heavy one to the Jewish community. A deputation went
to the governor, and we heard that troops would be at once
sent out to capture you and the band of brigands you had
joined. Mr. Ramsay told me that it was fortunate indeed
that you had not returned to the city. But no doubt he
has told you all that in the letter.â€
“I feel quite another man, Stanislas,†Charlie said when
he had changed his garments. “Now I can read the
letter you brought me.†as
After expressing the great satisfaction he felt at the news
that Charlie was alive, Mr. Ramsay went on to say that
even were he well he could not return to Warsaw in the
present state of public feeling,
“Your story that you were attacked, grievously wounded,
and after being confined here for some days, carried away
and confined in the wood by order of Ben Soloman, and
that he visited you there, would be treated with derision.
The version given by the man who brought in the story of
the Jew’s death was that he himself was staying in the
cottage of a charcoal-burner, an acquaintance of his, and
that a party of brigands, of whom you were one, arrived
>
210 A JACOBITE EXILE
there, and that they were boasting of having caused the
death of Ben Soloman, who had fallen by your hand. He
managed to escape from the brigands, and on the road
found the dead body of his employer, who was, he knew,
that morning coming out to give him some instructions.
My opinion, and that of my friends who knew you, was
that the fellow had himself killed and robbed his master;
but your letter, of course, showed that his account was
true to some extent—that Ben Soloman had fallen in a
struggle with you, and that you yourself were a prisoner
in the hands of these bandits. Still, as it would be next
to impossible for you to prove the truth of your story, and
as the Jews of the place, who are numerous and influential,
are dead against you, your life would certainly be forfeited
were you to be captured.
“T know your story to be true, but it would appear wildly
improbable to others that this wealthy Jew should have
conspired in the first place to cause an attack to be made
upon an unknown young stranger, still less that he should
have had him carried off to the forest, and should have
gone to visit him there. ‘The explanation that you were a
Swedish officer in disguise would not benefit you in any
way, while it would involve us who knew you, in your
danger, and would cause the Jew to be regarded as a man
who had lost his life in endeavouring to unmask a plot
against Poland. ‘Therefore, I think it is extremely fortu-
nate that you are for the present safe in the hands of
these brigands, and should certainly advise you to make
no attempt to leave them until you are perfectly well and
strong.
“1 have, as you directed me, hidden a few pieces of
gold in your shoe, and have handed the rest of your money
to your man, who is starting to join you. He will conceal
it about him. I have just heard that a body of troops are
starting at once for the forest, and that orders have been
WITH BRIGANDS 211
sent to other towns to send detachments into it at differ-
ent points, so it is evident the authorities are determined to
catch you if possible. If you had killed half a dozen
traders in a smaller way they would have cared little about
it; but just at present, pressed as the king is by want of
money, he is bound to do everything he can to please the
Jewish traders, as it is upon them that he must rely for
loans for the payment of his troops.
“Tn this matter, then, he will leave no stone unturned to
gratify them, and TI should strongly advise your band to
move away from the neighbourhood, at any rate for a
time. ‘They may plunder whole villages with impunity,
but what is regarded as the murder of the richest citizen
of Warsaw, a man mixed up in business and politics with
half the principal nobles of the land, is a different matter
altogether. Do not think of trying to traverse the country
until you are perfectly strong. It will be a dangerous
business at the best, but with your man with you to bear
the brunt of replying to questions, I have every confidence
that you will succeed in making your way through. As to
this, I can give no advice, as there is no saying as to the
point from which you may start, or the directions in which
you may travel.
“Should you at any time find yourself in a town in which
there are any of my countrymen established in trade, and
you will find them nearly everywhere, use my name. I
think it is pretty generally known to Scotchmen in Poland.
You will see I have inclosed a note that will be useful to
you.â€
The inclosure contained only a few words: “I, Allan
Ramsay, merchant of Warsaw, do declare the bearer of this
note to be my friend, and beg any countrymen of mine to
whom he may present himself, to assist him in every way,
and should he require money, to furnish him with it, I
undertaking to make myself responsible for the same,
212 A JACOBITE EXILE
and to pay all monies and other charges that he may
incur.â€
“The first thing to do,†Charlie said, as he placed the
letters in his doublet, “is to let the leader of our band
know that other bodies of troops besides that at the hut
are about to enter the forest. He may decide that it is
necessary to march away at once.â€
As soon, indeed, as the outlaw received the tidings, he
issued orders for the band to prepare for instant departure.
“A party of five or six men together,†he said to Charlie,
“might hide in this forest for years. Buta band of fifty
is too large to be long concealed. To begin with, they
must get food, and must either buy it or hunt for it; and
in the second, there are a considerable number of men
living in the forest, charcoal-burners and herders of goats
and swine, and any of these, if questioned by the troops,
might mention that they had seen a considerable number
of men passing. As it is, we will break up into parties of
seven or eight, and appoint a rendezvous where we may
meet again.â€
The band was speedily mustered, for with the exception
of those who were watching the forest through which the
troops at the hut must march to reach them, the whole
were close at hand. A messenger was sent off to call in the
scouts. ‘Then the booty that had been taken during their
late excursions was brought out and emptied on the
ground. It consisted of money and jewellery. It was
divided inte equal portions, of which each member took
one, the lieutenants of the band two, and the captain three.
“Vou don’t share this time,†the latter said to Charlie;
“tut next time, of course, you and your comrade will each
have your portion.â€
When this was done, the men were told off in parties of
six or seven, and instructions given as to the point of ren-
dezvous. Each band chose its own leader, and in an hour
2
WITH BRIGANDS 213
from the reception of the news the place was deserted, and
the parties were making their way in different directions
through the forest. Charlie and Stanislas formed part of
the captain’s own force, which numbered ten in all.
“Do you think they will all turn up at the meeting-
place?†Charlie asked the leader, whose name he now
ascertained was Ladislas Koffski.
“They may,†he said. “But it is seldom that bands
when they once disperse like this ever come together again.
It is impossible to content every one, and any man who is
chosen leader of a party may, if he is dissatisfied, persuade
those with him to join some other band. Even if they do
not go in a body, many are sure to break off and make for
their homes to enjoy the booty they have gathered. But
upon the other hand, as we go we shall gather up fresh
recruits. With so many disbanded soldiers and discon-
tented men roaming the country, there is no difficulty in
getting as many men as one cares to keep together.
“Fifty is the outside that is advisable, for with more,
even if one makes a good haul, it comes to so little a head
that the men are dissatisfied. Of course they work in small
parties, but this does not succeed so well as when a small
band are under a single leader.â€
“How long have you been at this work?â€
“Since last autumn.â€
“And you find it pay?â€
“We do not get much in money. As you saw, there were
but four rix-dollars a head, and that is the result of a
month’s work. Still that is not bad for men who might
otherwise starve. Sometimes we do worse and sometimes
better, but that is about the average. Still, the life is a
pleasant one, and unless we disbanded soldiers took to it,
what would there be for us to do? If government would
keep us on regular pay there would soon be no brigands
left, except the men who have escaped from justice. But
214. A JACOBITE EXILE
the treasury is empty, and even at the best of times the
troops are badly and irregularly paid, and are forced to
plunder to keep life together. They are almost in rags,
and though we Poles do not mind fighting, there is generally
a difficulty in getting sufficient infantry. As for the cay-
alry, they are nobles, and draw no pay. How do you feel
to-day?â€
“Better. The night’s rest and a wash and change of
clothes this morning have made me feel another man.
How far do you intend to march?â€
“We shall go slowly for a day or two. The other parties
have all pushed on ahead fast, but by taking matters quietly,
and by keeping a sharp look-out, we need have no great
fear of being surprised. I know the forest well and its
thickest hiding-places, so we can afford to travel slowly,
and as you become accustomed to it you will be able to
make longer journeys.â€
For ten days they travelled through the forest, increasing
their distance daily as Charlie regained his strength. The
last day or two they did not make less than twenty miles a
day. Their faces were turned steadily east. Occasionally
they passed large tracts of cleared land, villages, and culti-
vated fields. At some of these they stopped and replen-
ished their stock of flour, which they took without paying
for it, but did no farther damage. Of meat they had
abundance. ‘Two or three men started each day as soon
as they halted, and in a short time returned with a goat
or young pig.
“We are now close to the Bug River,†Ladislas said at
their last halting-place. “To-morrow we shall meet some
at least of our comrades. I do not expect a great many,
for we were pretty equally divided as to the direction we
should travel in. Practically we were safe from pursuit
when we had gone fifteen miles, for the forest there spreads
out greatly, and those in search of us would know that
WITH BRIGANDS 215
further pursuit would be useless. Many of my men did
not care about going farther, but all this part of the country
has been so harried for the last two or three years that we
thought it best to try altogether new ground. When we
have crossed the Bug we shall be beyond the forest, but
there are great swamps and morasses, and hills with patches
of wood; many streams take their rise there, all meeting
farther on and forming the Dnieper. We must keep north
of that river, for to the south the country is thinly populated,
and we should have difficulty in maintaining ourselves.â€
Charlie made no comment, but he was glad to hear that
the band intended to keep to the north of the Dnieper, for
that river would have formed a serious obstacle to his mak-
ing his way to rejoin the Swedes. The next day they
reached the bank of the Bug, and following the river down,
came after an hour’s walking upon a great fire, round which
fifteen men were stretched. ‘These as the captain’s party
approached rose to their feet with a shout of welcome.
“That is better than I expected,†Ladislas said as they
came up to them. “Five-and-twenty is quite enough for
work here. In the forests one can do with more, but,
moving steadily on as we mean to do till we get pretty near
the eastern frontier, five-and-twenty isample. It is enough
when together to surprise a village, and it is not too many
travelling in twos and threes to attract attention. Things
always go on better too after a dispersal. Many who are
discontented or who want to command a band of their own
break off, and one starts fresh with just the men one likes
best to keep.â€
“We had begun to give you up, captain,†one of the
men said as he joined the other party. ‘We have been
here six days.â€
“We travelled but slowly at first, and it is only the last
two days we have really made fair journeys: but there
was no reason for any great haste. ‘The world is ali our
?
216 A JACOBITE EXILE
own, and at any rate as long as we were in the forest there
was no fear of wanting food. So I see some of our com-
rades have left us.â€
“We can do very well without them, captain. There
were thirty of us here two days ago. Essos and Polinski
quarrelled, and Essos was killed. Then Polinski wanted
us to elect him captain, and to move away at once. Four
or five who have always been grumblers joined him at once,
and persuaded some of the others till we were about equally
divided. It came pretty nearly to a fight; but neither liked
to begin, and they moved away.â€
“There are quite enough of us left,†Ladislas said. “As
to Essos and Polinski, I am heartily glad that they have
gone. I know they have both been scheming for the
leadership for some time. Most of the others can be very
well spared too. ‘There are plenty of us here for travel.
There is no doubt, as we agreed before starting, that there
is not much more to be done in this part of the country.
What with the civil wars and the bands of soldiers without
a leader, and others like ourselves who do not mean to
starve, the peasants have been wrought up into a state of
desperation. They have little left to lose, but what they
have got they are ready to fight to the death for, and lately
at the first alarm they have sounded the bells and assembled
for miles round, and, equipped with scythes and _ flails,
routed those who meddled with them. We had more than
one hot fight, and lost many good men. Besides, many of
the nobles who have suffered have turned out with their
followers and struck heavy blows at some of the bands; so
that the sooner we get out of this countiy, which is becom-
ing a nest of hornets, the better, for there is little booty and
plenty of hard blows to be got.
“We will go on as we agreed till near the eastern frontier,
The country is well covered with forest there, and we can
sally out on which side we like, for if there is not much
WITH BRIGANDS 217
gold to be had in the Russian villages, there is plenty of
vodka, and sometimes things worth taking in their churches.
‘The priests and headmen too have generally got a little
store, which can be got at with the aid of a few hot coals or
a string twisted tight enough round a thumb. At any rate
we sha’n’t starve; but we must move on pretty fast, for we
shall have to get up a warm hut in the forest and to lay in
a stock of provisions before the winter sets in. So we
must only stop to gather a little plunder when a good
opportunity offers.â€
CHAPTER XII
TREED BY WOLVES
HARLIE and Stanislas were that evening sitting apart
from the rest at a short distance from the fire talking
over the future. ‘They agreed that it would be compara-
tively easy to withdraw from the band as they journeyed
forward, if, as seemed likely, they travelled in very small
parties. If indeed they found themselves with two others
they could leave openly, for these would scarcely care to
enter upon a desperate struggle merely for the sake of
retaining two unwilling companions in the band. The
difficulties would only begin when they started alone. As
they were talking the captain came across to them.
“I can guess,†he said, “that you are talking together as
to the future. I like you, young Englishman, and I like
your companion, who seems an honest fellow, but I would
not keep you with me by force. I understand that you are
not placed as we are. We have to live. Most of us would
live honestly if we could, but at present it is the choice of
doing as we do or starving. We occasionally take a few
crowns if we come across a fat trader, or may ease a rich
farmer of his hoard, but it is but seldom such a chance
comes in our way. As a rule we simply plunder because
we must live. It is different with you. Your friends may
be far away, but if you can get to them you would have all
218
TREED BY WOLVES 219
that you need. Therefore, this life, which is hard and
rough, to say nothing of its danger, does not suit you; but
for all that, you must stay with us, for it would be madness
for you to attempt to escape.
“As I told you, the peasants are maddened, and would
kill any passing stranger as they would a wild beast. ‘They
would regard him as a spy of some band lke ours or of a
company of disbanded soldiers, sent forward to discover
which houses and villages are best worth plundering. In
your case you have other dangers to fear. You may be
sure that news has been sent from Warsaw to all the differ-
ent governors with orders for your arrest for killing Ben
Soloman, and these orders will be transmitted to every town
and village. Your hair and eyes would at once betray you
as strangers, and your ignorance of the language would be
fatal to you. If, therefore, you escaped being killed as a
robber by the peasants, you would run the risk of arrest at
the first town or village you entered.
“Translate that to him, Stanislas. He is learning our
language fast, but he cannot understand all that.â€
“That is just what we were talking about,†Charlie said
when Stanislas had repeated the captain’s speech, “and the
danger seems too great to be risked. ‘Think you, that when
we get farther to the east, we shall be able to make our way
more easily up into Livonia?â€
“Much more easily, because the forest is more extensive
there; but not until the winter is over. The cold will be
terrible, and it would be death to sleep without shelter.
Besides the forests are infested with wolves, who roam
about in packs, and would scent and follow and devour you.
But when spring comes you can turn your faces to the
north and leave us if you think fit, and I promise you that
no hindrance shall be thrown in your way. I only ask you
not to risk your lives by trying now to pass through Poland
alone.â€
220 A JACOBITE EXILE
“I think you are right, Ladislas, and I promise you
that we will not attempt to leave you during our journey
east. As you say, it would be impossible for us to
travel after winter had once set in. It is now the end of
September.â€
“And it will be November before we reach our destina-
tion. We shall not travel fast; we have no motive for
doing so. We have to live by the way, and to gather a
little money to help us through the winter. We may shoot
a bear or an elk sometimes, a few deer, and hares, but we
shall want two or three sacks of flour and some spirits.
For these we must either get money or take the goods.
The first is the best, for we have no means of dragging
heavy weights with us, and it would not do to infuriate the
peasants by plundering any of them within twenty miles of
the place where we mean to winter. ‘Chat would set them
all against us.â€
“T tell you frankly, Ladislas, that we shall not be willing
to aid in any acts of robbery. Of course, when one is with
an army one has to plunder on a large scale, and it has
often gone terribly against the grain when I have had to
join parties sent out to forage. But it has to be done; I
would rather not join men in taking food, yet I understand
that it may be necessary. But as to taking money, I will
have nothing to do with it. At the same time I understand
that we cannot share your food and be with you without
doing something. Stanislas has brought me a little money
from Warsaw, and I shall be ready to pay into the common
treasury a sum sufficient to pay for our share of the food.
As to money taken, we shall not expect any share of it. If
you are attacked we shall of course fight, and shall be ready
to do our full share in all work. So at any rate you will not
be losers by taking us with you.â€
“That is fair enough,†the captain said when Stanislas
had translated what Charlie said, suppressing, however, his
TREED BY WOLVES Path
remarks about foraging with the army, as the brigands were
ignorant that Charlie and he had any connection with the
Swedes, or that he was not, as he had given out, a young
Englishman come out to set up as a trader.
The band now journeyed slowly on, keeping near the
north bank of the Dnieper. ‘They went by twos and threes,
uniting sometimes and entering a village or surrounding a
farmhouse at night, and taking what they wanted. The
people were, however, terribly poor, and they were able to
obtain but little beyond scanty supplies of flour and occa-
sionally a few gold or silver trinkets. Many other bands
of plunderers had passed along in the course of the summer,
and the robbers themselves were often moved to pity by the
misery that they everywhere met with. When in small
parties they were obliged to avoid entering any villages, for
once or twice furious attacks were made upon those who
did so, the women joining the men in arming themselves
with any weapon that came to hand and in falling upon the
strangers.
Only once did they succeed in obtaining plunder of
value. ‘hey had visited a village, but found it contained
nothing worth taking. One of the women said,“ Why do
you trouble poor people like us? ‘There is the count’s
chateau three miles away. They have every luxury there,
while we are starving.†After leaving the village the man
to whom she had spoken repeated what she had said, and
it was agreed to make the attempt. At the first cottage
they came to they made further inquiries, and found that
the lord of the soil was very unpopular; for, in spite of the
badness of the times, he insisted on receiving his rents
without abatement, and where money was not forthcoming,
had seized cattle and horses, assessing them at a price
far below what they would have fetched at the nearest
market.
They therefore marched to the house. It was a very
222 A JACOBITE EXILE
large one. The captain thoughtfully placed Charlie and
Stanislas among the six men who were to remain without,
to prevent any of the inmates leaving the chateau. With
the rest he made a sudden attack on the great door of the
house, and beat it down with a heavy sledge-hammer.
Just as it gave way some shots were fired from the inside,
but they rushed in, overpowered the servants, and were
soon masters of the place. In half an hour they came
out again laden with booty, each man carried half a dozen
bottles of choice wine from the count’s cellar slung at his
belt. On their shoulders they carried bundles containing
silver cups and other valuables; while six of them had
bags of silver money that had been extracted from the
count by threats of setting fire to the chateau and burning
him and his family.
A halt was made two or three miles away, when the
silver was divided into shares as usual, the men being well
satisfied when they learned that Charlie and his compan-
ion claimed no part of it; some of the provisions they had
also taken were eaten; each man had a flask of wine, with
which the count’s health was derisively drunk.
“This has been a good night’s work,†the leader said,
“and you have each sixty rix-dollars in your pockets, which
is more than you have had for months past. ‘That will
keep us in provisions and spirits all through the winter;
but mind, although we took it without much trouble, we
have not heard the last of the business. No doubt by this
time the count has sent off a messenger to the nearest town
where there are troops, and for a day or two we shall have
to march fast and far. It is one thing to plunder villages,
and another to meddle with a rich nobleman.â€
For the next forty-eight hours they marched by night
instead of by day, keeping always together, and prepared
to resist an attack. One morning they saw, from their
hiding-place among some high reeds near the river, a body
TREED BY WOLVES 223
of about sixty horsemen ride past at a distance. ‘They
were evidently searching for something, for parties could
be seen to break off several times, and to enter woods and
copses, the rest halting till they came out again. As the
band had with them enough food for another three days,
they remained for thirty-six hours in their hiding-place,
and then, thinking the search would by that time be dis-
continued, went on again. The next day they killed two
or three goats from a herd, the boy in charge of them mak-
ing off with such speed that, though hotly pursued and fired
at several times, he made his escape. ‘hey carried the
carcasses to a wood, lit a fire, and feasted upon them.
Then having cooked the rest of the flesh, they divided it
among the band.
By this time the wine was finished. The next day they
again saw horsemen in the distance, but remained in hid-
ing till they had disappeared in the afternoon. ‘They then
went into a village, but scarcely had they proceeded up
the street when, the doors were opened, and from every
house men rushed out armed with flails, clubs, and axes,
and fell upon them furiously, shouting “Death to the rob-
bers!†They had evidently received warning that a band
of plunderers were approaching, and everything had been
prepared for them. ‘The band fought stoutly, but they
were greatly outnumbered, and as but few of them carried
firearms they had no great advantage in weapons. Char-
lie and Stanislas, finding that their lives were at stake, were
forced to take part in the fray, and both were with the sur-
vivors of the band, who at last succeeded in fighting their
way out of the village, leaving half their number behind
them, while some twenty of the peasants had fallen. Re-
duced now to twelve men and the captain, they thought
only of pushing forward, avoiding all villages, and only
occasionally visiting detached houses for the sake of ob-
taining flour. The country became more thinly populated
204 A JACOBITE EXILE
as they went on, and there was a deep feeling of satisfac-
tion when at length their leader pointed to a belt of trees
in the distance and said, “That is the beginning of the
forest. A few miles farther, and we shall be well within
it.â€
By nightfall they felt, for the first time since they had set
out on their journey, that they could sleep in safety. A
huge fire was lit, for the nights were now becoming very
cold, and snow had fallen occasionally for the last four or
five days, and in the open country was lying some inches
deep. The next day they journeyed a few miles farther,
and then chose a spot for the erection of a hut. It was
close to a stream, and the men at once set to work with
axes to fell trees and clear a space. It was agreed that the
captain and two of the men of the most pacific demeanour
should go to the nearest town, some forty miles away, to
lay in stores. They were away five days, and then re-
turned with the welcome news that a cart laden with flour
and a couple of barrels of spirits was on a country track
through the forest a mile and a half away.
“How did you manage, captain?†Charlie asked.
“We went to the house of a well-to-do peasant, about a
mile from the borders of the wood; I told him frankly
that we belonged to a band who were going to winter in
the forest, that we would do him no harm if he would
give us his aid, but that if he refused he would soon have
his place burnt over his head. As we said we were ready
to pay a fair sum for the hire of his cart, he did not hesi-
tate a moment about making the choice. The other two
remained at his cottage, so as to keep his family as hos-
tages for his good faith, and I went with him to the town,
where we bought six sacks of good flour and the two barrels
of spirits. We got a few other things—cooking pots and
horns, and a lot of coarse blankets, and a thick sheep-skin
coat for each man; they are all in the car, I see that you
TREED BY WOLVES 225
have got the hut pretty nearly roofed in, so in a day or
two we shall be comfortable.â€
‘They went in a body to the place where the cart had
been left, but it required two journeys before its contents
were all transported to the hut. Another three days and
this was completed; it was roughly built of logs, the inter-
stices being filled in with moss. ‘There was no attempt at
a door, an opening being left four feet high and eighteen
inches wide for the purpose of an entry. The skin of a
deer they had shot since they arrived was hung up outside,
and a folded rug inside; there was no occasion for windows,
a certain amount of light made its way in by an orifice a
foot square, that had been left in the roof for the escape
of smoke. The hut itself consisted of one room only,
about eighteen feet square. When this was finished, all
hands set to work to pile up a great stack of firewood close
to the door, so as to save them from the necessity of going
far until snow had ceased falling and winter had set in in
earnest.
The cart had brought six carcasses of sheep that had
been purchased from a peasant; these were hung up out-
side the hut to freeze hard, and the meat was eaten only
once a day, as it would be impossible to obtain a fresh
supply until the weather became settled enough to admit
of their hunting. ‘Lhe preparations were but just finished
when the snow began to fall heavily. For a week it came
down without intermission, the wind howled among the
trees, and even Charlie, half-stifled as he was by the smoke,
felt no inclination to stir out, except for half an hour's
work to clear away the snow from the entrance, and to carry
in wood from the pile. The time passed more cheerfully
than might have been expected. He had by this time
begun to talk Polish with some facility, and was able to
understand the stories that the men told as they sat round
the fire, sometimes tales of adventures they themselves
226 A JACOBITE EXILE
had gone through, sometimes stories of the history of
Poland, its frequent internal wars, and its struggles with
the Turks.
Making bread and cooking occupied some portion of
the time, and much was spent in sleep. At the end of a
week the snow ceased falling and the sun came out, and all
were glad to leave the hut and enjoy the clear sky and the
keen air. While they had been confined to the hut, two
of the men had made a large number of snares for hares,
and they at once started into the forest to set these in
spots where they saw traces of the animals’ passage over
the snow. The rest went off in parties of two’s and three’s
in search of other game. With the exception of Charlie,
all were accustomed to the woods; but as Stanislas had
much less experience than the others, the captain decided
to go with them.
“Tt is easy for anyone to lose his way here,†he said;
“in fact, except to one accustomed to the woods, it would
be dangerous to go far away from the hut. As long as it
is fine you will find your way back by following your own
tracks, but if the weather changed suddenly, and it came
on to snow, your case would be hopeless. One of the ad-
vantages of placing our hut on a stream, is that it forms a
great aid to finding one’s way back. If you strike it above
you follow it down, if below upwards, until you reach the
hut. Of course you might wander for days and never hit
it, still it is much more easy to find than a small object
like the hut, though even when found it would be difficult
to decide whether it had been struck above or below the
hut. Now, there is one rule if at any time you get lost:
don’t begin to wander wildly about, for if you did, you
would certainly walk in a circle, and might never be found
again; sit down quietly and think matters over, eat if you
have got any food with you; then examine the sky, and try
to find out from the position of the sun, or the direction
TREED BY WOLVES DOs
in which the clouds are going, which way the hut ought to
lie. Always take with you one of your pistols; if you fire
it three times at regular intervals, it will be a signal that
you want help, and any of us who are within hearing will
come to aid you.â€
With the exception of hares, of which a good many
were snared, the hunting was not productive. Tracks of
deer were seen not unfrequently, but it was extremely
difficult, even when the animals were sighted, to get across
the surface of the snow to within range of the clumsy
arquebuses that two or three of the men carried. ‘They
did, however, manage to shoot a few by erecting a shelter
just high enough for one man to lie down under, and leav-
ing it until the next snowstorm so covered it that it seemed
but a knoll in the ground, or a low shrub bent down and
buried under the weight of the snow. These shelters were
erected close to paths taken by the deer, and by lying
patiently all day in them the men occasionally managed to
get a close shot. Several bears were killed and two elks,
These afforded food for a long time, as the frozen flesh
would keep until the return of spring. Holes were made
in the ice on the stream, and baited hooks being set every
night, it was seldom that two or three fish were not found
fast on them in the morning. Altogether, therefore, there
was no lack of food; and, as under the teaching of the
captain, Charlie in time learnt to be able to keep his
direction through the woods, he was often able to go
out either with Stanislas or alone, thus keeping clear of
the close smoky hut during the hours of daylight. Upon
the whole he found the life by no means an unpleasant
one.
Among the articles purchased by the captain were high
boots linedwith sheep-skin coming up to the thigh. With
these and the coats, which had hoods to pull over the head,
Charlie felt the cold but little during the day; while at
228 A JACOBITE EXILE
night he found the hut often uncomfortably warm, sleeping
as they all did in the same attire in which they went out.
In February the weather became excessively severe, more
so, the peasants and charcoal-burners, they occasionally
met with, declared, than they ever remembered. ‘The
wild animals became tamer, and in the morning when
they went out they frequently found tracks of bears that
had been prowling round the hut in search of offal or bones
thrown out. They were now obliged to hang their supply
of meat by ropes from boughs at some distance from the
ground, by which means they were enabled to prevent the
bears getting at it. =
They no longer dared to venture far from the hut, for
large packs of wolves ranged through the forest, and, driven
by hunger, even entered villages, where they attacked and
killed many women and children, made their entrance
into sheds, and tore dogs, horses, and cattle to pieces, and
became at last so dangerous that the villagers were obliged
to keep great fires burning in the streets at night to frighten
them away. Several times the occupants of the hut were
awakened by the whining and snarling of wolves outside.
But the walls and roof were alike built of solid timber, and
a roughly-made door of thick wood was now fastened every
night against the opening, and so stoutly supported by
beams behind it as to defy assault. Beyond, therefore, a
passing grumble at being awakened by the noise, the men
gave themselves no trouble as to the savage animals out-
side.
“Tf these brutes grow much bolder,†the captain said
one day, “we shall be prisoners here altogether. They
must have come down from the great forest that extends
over a large part of Russia. ‘The villages are scarce there,
and the peasants take good care to keep all their beasts in
shelter, so no doubt they are able to pick up more at the
edge of the forest here.â€
TREED BY WOLVES 229
“How far are we from the Russian frontier?â€
“JT do not think anyone could tell you. For aught I
know, we may be in Russia now. ‘These forests are a sort
of no-man’s-land, and I don’t suppose any line of frontier
has ever been marked. it is Russia to the east of this
forest some thirty miles away, and it is Poland to the
west of it. The forest is no good to anyone except the
charcoal-burners. I have met both Russians and Poles in
the wood, and, as there is plenty of room for all—ay, and
would be were there a thousand to every one now working
in it—they are on friendly terms with each other, espe-
cially as the two nations are at present allied against
Sweden.â€
In spite of the wolves Charlie continued his walks
in the forest, accompanied always by Stanislas. Both
carried axes and pistols, and although Charlie had heard
many tales of solitary men and even of vehicles being
attacked by the wolves in broad daylight, he believed
that most of the stories were exaggerations, and that the
chances of two men being attacked in daylight were small
indeed.
He had found that the track by which the cart had
brought the stores was a good deal used, the snow being
swept away or levelled by the runners of sledges, either
those of peasants who came into the forest for wood or
charcoal, or of travellers journeying between Russia and
Poland. He generally selected this road for his walk, both
because it was less laborious than wading through the
untrodden snow, and because there was here no fear of
losing his way, and he was spared the incessant watchfulness
for signs that was necessary among the trees. At first he
had frequently met peasants’ carts on the road, but since
the cold became more severe and the wolves more numerous
and daring, he no longer encountered them; he had indeed
heard from some of the last he saw that they should come
230 A JACOBITE EXILE
no more, for that the charcoal-burners were all abandoning
their huts and going into the villages.
One afternoon, when they had on their return nearly
reached the spot where they left the road to strike across
the forest to the hut, they heard a noise behind them.
“That is a pack of wolves in full cry!†Stanislas ex-
claimed. ‘You had better get up into a tree. ‘They are
after something.â€
They hastily clambered into a tree, whose lower branches
were but six or seven feet from the ground. A moment
later two horses wild with fright dashed past, while some
twenty yards behind them came a pack of fifty or sixty
wolves. They were almost silent now, with their red
tongues hanging out.
“The brutes have been attacking a sledge,†Stanislas said
in a low tone. “You saw the horses were harnessed, and
their broken traces were hanging by their side. It is easy
to read the story. he sledge was attacked, the horses mad
with fear broke their traces and rushed off, or perhaps the
driver, seeing at the last moment that escape was impos-
sible, slashed the ropes with his knife, so as to give the
tere a chance. I expect they got a start, for the wolves
would be detained a little at the sledge.â€
“Do you think the poor beasts will get safe out of the
forest, Stanislas? â€
“Tdon’t think so, but they may. The chase has evidentl y
been a long one, and the wolves have tired themselves with
their first efforts to come up to them. It did not seem to
me that they were gaining when they passed us. It is
simply a question of endurance, but I fancy the wolves will
last longest. See, here is a party of stragglers. I suppose
they stopped longer at the sledge.â€
“Tt seems to me they are on our scent, Stanislas. Do
you see they are coming along at the side of the road where
we walked, with their heads down.â€
TREED BY WOLVES 231
“T am afraid they are. Well, we shall soon see. Yes,
they are leaving the road where we did.â€â€™
A moment later a dozen wolves ran up to the trunk of the
tree, and there gathered snuffing and whining. Presently
one caught sight of the two figures above them, and with an
angry yelp sprang up in the air, and immediately all were
growling, snarling, and leaping. Charlie laughed out loud
at their impotent efforts.
“It is no laughing matter, sir,†Stanislas said gravely.
“They cannot climb up here, Stanislas.â€
“No, but they can keep us here. It will be dark in an
hour, and likely enough they will watch us all night.â€
“Then we had better shoot two of them, and jump down
with our hatchets. Keeping back to back, we ought to be
able to face ten wolves.â€
“Yes, if that were all; but see, here come three or four
more, and the dozen will soon swell to a score. No, we
shall have to wait here all night, and probably for some time
to-morrow, for the men are not likely to find us very early,
and they will hardly hear our pistols unless some of them
happen to come in this direction.â€
“Do you think if we shoot two or three of them the rest
will go?â€
“Certainly not. It will be all the worse. Their com-
rades would at once tear them to pieces and devour them,
and the scent of blood would very soon bring others to the
spot.â€
“Well, if we have got to wait here all night, Stanislas,
we had better choose the most comfortable place we can at
once before it gets dark. We must mind we don’t go to
sleep and tumble off.â€
“There will be no fear of our sleeping,†Stanislas said.
“The cold will be too great for that. We shall have to
keep on swinging our hands and feet and rubbing our noses
to prevent ourselves from getting frost-bitten.â€
2a2 A JACOBITE EXILE
“Well, I have never felt the cold in these clothes,â€
Charlie said.
“No, sir, but you have never been out at night sitting
cramped on a tree.â€â€™
Hour after hour passed. Even in the darkness they
could see the wolves lying in the snow below them, occa-
sionally changing their position, keeping close together for
warmth, and often snarling or growling angrily as one or
two shifted their position and tried to squeeze in so as to
get into a warm spot.
The cold was intense, and in spite of swinging his legs
and arms Charlie felt that his vital heat was decreasing.
“This is awful, Stanislas. I do not think we can last on
till morning.â€
“I begin to have doubts myself, sir. Perhaps it would
be better to leap down and make a fight of it.†4
“We might shoot some of them first,†Charlie said.
“How many charges have you?â€
“T have only two besides one in the barrel.â€
“And I have only three,†Charlie said. “Powder has
run very short; the captain was saying yesterday that we
must send to the village and try to get some more. _ Still
six shots will help us.â€
“Not much, sir, there must be thirty or forty of them
now. I have seen some come from the other way. I
suppose they were part of the pack that followed the
horses.â€
Charlie sat for some time thinking. Then he exclaimed:
“T think this is a dead tree.â€
“It is, sir; I noticed it when we climbed up. The head
has gone, and I think it must have been struck with light-
ning last summer.â€
“Then I think we can manage.â€
“Manage what, sir?†the man asked in surprise.
“Manage to make a fire, Stanislas. [First of all we will
TREED BY WOLVES 233
crawl out towards the ends of the branches as far as we can
get, and break off twigs and small boughs. If we can’t get
enough, we can cut chips off, and we will pile them all
where these three big boughs branch off from the trunk.
We have both our tinder-boxes with us, and I see no reason
why we should not be able to light a fire up here.â€
“So we might,†Stanislas said eagerly. “But if we did
we might set the whole tree on fire.â€
“No bad thing either,†Charlie rejoined. “You may
be sure the fire will keep the wolves at a respectful
distance, and we could get down and enjoy the heat
without fear.â€â€™
“T believe your idea will save our lives, sir; ten
minutes ago I would not have given a crown for our
chances.’?
‘They at once crawled out upon two of the great branches,
and a renewed chorus of snarls from below showed that
their foes were watchful. The snapping of the small
branches excited a certain amount of unéasiness among
them, and they drew off a short distance. In ten minutes
Charlie and his companion worked themselves back to the
main trunk, each carrying an armful of twigs. ‘They first
cut off a number of small dry chips and made a pile of
these at the junction of one of the branches with the trunk.
‘They then got out their tinder-boxes and bunches of rags,
shook a few grains of powder from one of the horns among
the chips, and then got the tinder alight. A shred of rag
that had been rubbed with damp powder was applied to the
spark and then placed among the shavings; a flash of light
sprang up, followed by a steady blaze, as the dried chips
caught. One by one at first, and then, as the fire gained
strength, several sticks at a time were laid over the burning
splinters, and in five minutes a large fire was blazing.
Charlie and his companion took their seats where the other
two big branches shot out from the trunk, these were two or
234 A JACOBITE EXILE
three feet higher than that on which the fire had been
lighted, and ere long a sensation of genial warmth began to
steal over them. Fresh sticks were lighted as the first were
consumed, and before long the trunk where the flames
played on it began to glow. Light tongues of flame rose
higher and higher, until the trunk was alight ten or twelve
feet up.
“The wolves are all gone,†Charlie said, looking down.
“T don’t suppose they have gone very far, sir; but when
the tree once gets fairly alight, you may be sure they won’t
venture anywhere near it.â€
They had already been forced to move some little dis-
tance away from the trunk by the heat, and as the flames
rose higher and higher, embracing in the course of half an
hour the whole of the trunk and upper branches, they felt
that it was perfectly safe to drop off into the snow beneath
them. Blazing brands soon began to fall. ‘hey stood a
short distance away so as to be beyond the risk of accident,
but at Charlie’s suggestion they ran in from time to time,
gathered up the brands and laid them at the foot of the
trunk, and in a short time a second fire was kindled here.
‘The tree was now a pyramid of fire, lighting up the snow
for a long distance round. Outside this circle the wolves
could be heard whining and whimpering, occasionally
uttering a long-drawn howl.
“They know that they are baulked of their prey,â€
Stanislas said. “We shall have some of the big branches
falling soon, and shall be able to keep up a roaring fire that
will last until daylight. I should think by that time the
wolves will be tired of it, and will make off; but if not, the
captain will be sure to send men out to search for us. He
will guess we have been treed by wolves, and we have only
to get into another tree and fire our pistols to bring them
in this direction.â€
TREED BY WOLVES 235
“But they may be attacked too,†Charlie remarked.
“There are ten of them, and they are sure to come armed
with axes and swords. ‘They ought to be able to fight their
way through a good-sized pack; besides the wolves will be
so cowed by this great fire, that I don’t think they will have
the courage to meddle with so strong a party.â€
One by one the arms of the tree fell, burnt through at the
point where they touched the trunk. ‘They would have
been far too heavy to be dragged, but three or four of them
fell across the lower fire and there lay blazing. Not know-
ing which way the tree itself would fall, Charlie and his
companion were obliged to remain at some distance
off, but the heat there was amply sufficient for them. At
last the trunk fell with a crash, and they at once estab-
lished themselves as near the fire as they could sit without
being scorched, and there chatted until morning began to
break.
They felt sure that some at least of the wolves were
around them, as they occasionally caught sight of what
looked like two sparks among the undergrowth, these being
as they knew the reflection of the fire in the eyes of a wolf.
There was a tree hard by in which they could if necessary
take refuge, and they therefore resolved to stay near the fire.
Fortunately the night had been perfectly still, and as the
tree they had fired was a detached one, the flames had not
spread, as Charlie had at one time been afraid they would
do. Half an hour after daylight had fairly broken they
discharged three shots at regular intervals with their pistols,
then they waited half an hour.
“Shall we fire again?â€
“No. Not until we hear shots from them,’ Charlie
replied. “We have but four charges left, and if the wolves
made a sudden rush we might want to use them.â€
After a time both thought they heard the distant report of
)
236 A JACORITE EXILE
a musket. Stanislas looked at Charlie ane The
latter shook his head.
“No, no! Stanislas. That gun would be heard twice as
far as cone of these pistols, let us wait until we are pretty
sure that they are near. I don’t like leaving ourselves
without other protection than our axes.â€
CHAPTER XIII
A RESCUED PARTY
ASMER a considerable pause a gun was again fired, this
time much nearer to them. Charlie drew out his pistol
and was about to reply, when his companion touched his
arm,
“Took!†he said.
Charlie turned in time to see several gray forms flit
rapidly between the bushes. He stepped to the edge of
the road, and saw some wolves spring out through the bushes
and go straight along the road.
“What can have scared them?†he asked in surprise ;
“the gun was not near enough for that.â€
“No, besides they would have fled deeper into the forest
instead of taking to the road. Perhaps they hear some-
thing coming.â€
Almost at the same moment two shots were heard in the
direction towards which the wolves were making.
“TVhat is it!†Charlie exclaimed excitedly. “Another
body of wolves haye attacked a passing traveller. Heap
the wood on, Stanislas. If we make a great fire, and they
get as far as this, possibly they could spring off and take
refuge here, At any rate the brands will be better weapons
even than our axes.â€
The ends of such branches as they were able to move
257
238 A JACOBITE EXILE
were brought together, and a few blows with their axes
speedily broke off several of the outer ends of charred
wood. These were thrown on, and the fire soon blazed
up high again.
Two more shots were heard, this time close at hand.
‘They ran into the road; a sledge with several figures in
it was coming along at full speed. It was almost sur-
rounded by wolves, and as they looked two of them sprang
at the horses’ heads; but two shots again rung out and they
dropped backwards among their companions, many of
whom threw themselves at once upon their bodies, while
the sledge continued on its headlong course.
“Were! here!’� Charlie shouted at the top of his voice,
waving his hands to show the direction which they were
to take.
A moment later the sledge dashed past them and swept
up to the fire.
“Seize the blazing brands!†Charlie shouted as those
in the sledge threw themselves out.
He and Stanislas rolled the two first wolves over with
their pistols, and then joined the others.
The driver had run at once to the horses, and had
muffled them by throwing his coat over the head of one
and a rug over the head of the other, and though snorting
and trembling in every limb they stood quiet until he had
thrown a head-rope round each of their necks and fastened
them to the heaviest of the branches. ‘Then he seized a
handful of fallen leaves which were exposed by the melting
of the snow above them and threw them into the fire,
whence a dense smoke poured out.
The wolves had again stopped to devour the two animals
that had been shot, and this gave time to the men by their
united efforts to move a heavy branch and place it across
two others whose ends lay in the fire, so as to form with
them a sort of triangular breast-work, the face of which
CHARLIE ANID ‘THE TRAVELLERS ARE SURROUNDED BY WOLVES,
A RESCUED PARTY 239
next to them was manned by the two travellers, their ser-
vants, Charlie, and Stanislas, with blazing brands.
Charlie and his companion hastily loaded their pistols
again. ‘The two gentlemen had each rifles and a brace of
pistols, as had their servants. A lady and child had been
lifted from the sledge, and these crouched down at the
angle by the fire. The sledge and the two horses pro-
tected one of the faces of the position, and the driver at
his master’s orders took his position on the front seat
again, so as to shoot down any wolf that might try to attack
the flank of the outside horse.
The wolves looked doubtful at the appearance of the
dense smoke rising up, but after a little hesitation they
rushed to the attack. Four were rolled over by bullets
from the rifles, and as they came within a few yards the
pistols cracked out in rapid succession. As soon as these
were all emptied the six men caught up the blazing brands,
and struck full in the faces of the wolves, shouting loudly
as they did so. Seized with a momentary panic, the ani-
mals turned and fled, and then a fierce fight took place
between the injured wolves and their companions. There
was but just time to recharge the rifles and pistols when
they came on again. Although the fire of the defenders
was as deadly as before, the wolves seemed this time de-
termined to get at their victims. In vain were blows
showered on their heads, while those who first sprang on
the tree were stabbed with the knives the defenders held in
their left hands.
The contest could have had but one termination, when
suddenly two shots were heard, and then with loud shouts
a party of men burst through the forest, and with pistol
and axe fell on the wolves. This unexpected onslaught
had a decisive effect, and with loud howls and yelps the
wolves turned and fled,
Up to this time not a word had been exchanged by the
240 A JACOBITE EXILE
defenders beyond Charlie’s first shout of “Lay this branch
across those two,†and the order of one of the gentlemen
to the coachman to take his place in the sledge, where he
had done his work well, for four wolves lay dead by the
flank of the outside horse. Several of those that had
sprung at the heads of the horses had been shot or cut
down by the master, who had placed himself close to them,
and the horses’ thick mufflings had saved them from any
serious injury.
As soon as the wolves fled the gentleman turned to
Charlie, and flinging down his weapons threw his arms
round his neck.
“You have preserved us from death, sir. You have
saved my wife and child from being torn to pieces. How
can I express my thanks to you?â€
“Tt was fortunate that we happened to be here,†Charlie
said, “and that we had this fire handy.â€
A cry from the child called off the gentleman’s attention,
and he ran to his wife, who had sunk fainting on the
ground; and Charlie, not a little pleased at this diversion,
turned to Ladislas and his men, who were looking on with
the most intense astonishment at the scene. Charlie leapt
over the branch and grasped Ladislas by the hand.
“You have arrived at the nick of time, Ladislas. An-
other three minutes and it would have been all over with
ust
“Yes, I could see it was a close thing as soon as I caught
sight of you. We have been wondering all night what be-
came of you, and set out as soon as it was light. We fired
a shot occasionally, but we listened in vain for your three
shots.â€
“We fired them half an hour after daylight,†Charlie
said; “but as we had then only five charges left between
us, and there were wolves all round, we dared not waste
them.â€
A RESCUED PARTY 241
“We heard firing at last,†the captain went on. “First
two shots faintly, then two nearer, and a minute later two
others. We knew then that you must be engaged with
wolves, and we were running as hard as we could in the
direction of the shots when we heard a number fired close
together. Of course we could make nothing of it, but on
we ran. Then there was another outbreak of firing, this
time quite close. A moment later we caught sight of a
confused mass. There was a fire and a sledge with two
horses, and a man standing up in it shooting; and we
could see a desperate fight going on with the wolves in
front, so Alexander and Hugo fired their pieces into the
thick of them. We set up a yell and went at them with
our axes, yet I did not feel by any means sure that they
would not be too many for us. But what on earth does
it all mean? and how is it that you have lived through the
night? We had no expectation of finding you alive.
However, that fire tells its own tale, as though nothing
less than burning up a big tree would content you.â€
“T will tell you all presently. It is too long a story now.
Let us help these travellers to go their way before the wolves
rally again.â€
“They will not do that,†the captain said confidently;
“af it was night they might hang about the neighbourhood,
but they are cowardly beasts in the daytime, and easily
scared. ‘They are still going away at their best pace, I will
be bound.â€
While Charlie was speaking to Ladislas one of the trav-
ellers had been talking to Stanislas, who in answer to his
question had informed him that he was in Charlie’s service,
and that the latter was an English gentleman, who had from
a variety of circumstances, especially the suspicion with
which all strangers were regarded, been unable to travel
through the country, and had therefore been passing the
winter hunting with this company of disbanded soldiers
242 A JACOBITE EXILE
who had so opportunely arrived to their assistance. The
other traveller had by this time carried his wife beyond the
heat of the fire, and had applied some snow to her forehead,
pouring a little brandy from the flask between her lips.
She had now begun to revive, and leaving her he approached
the party. His brother met him, and in a few words told
him what he had learned from Stanislas.
“My friends,†he said, “my brother tells me that you
are a party of discharged soldiers who are passing the
winter in a hut here in the forest, supporting yourselves by
shooting and fishing. JI have to thank Providence for the
thought that sent you here. I have to thank you for your
prompt assistance, to which we are indebted for our lives.
T am Count Nicholas Staroski, and can at least make a sub-
stantial return for the service you have done me. My
estates lie some sixty miles to the north. You will have
no difficulty in finding me. Present yourselves there at
Faster, I shall certainly be at my chateau then. I will then
talk over what can be done for you. ‘Those who like to
settle down on land shall have land, those who would like
employment in my household shall have it, those who would
prefer money to go their own way and settle in their own
villages shall each have a heavy purse.†‘Then he turned to
Charlie. ‘You, sir, as my brother has learned from your
brave follower here, are an English gentleman. ‘To you I
owe far heavier obligation than to these soldiers, for you
and your man incurred a terrible risk, and well-nigh sacri-
ficed your lives for ours. I pray you come with us and stay
with us for a time. I shall then hear your plans and your
object in visiting this country, and if I can in any way
further them you may be sure I will do so to the utmost;
for the present I can promise you at least exceilent hunting
and the heartiest welcome.â€
“T thank you very heartily, Count Staroski, and accept
gladly your invitation; but I must first speak to the captain
A RESCUED PARTY 242
of these men, to whom I am much beholden for the kind-
ness he has shown me.â€
He went across to Ladislas, who had heard what was
said.
“You will not think it ungrateful for me to quit you so
suddenly, Ladislas,â€â€™ he said in a low voice.
“Assuredly not. You have done us a service indeed in
thus enabling us to obtain favour with the count. He is
one of our richest and most powerful nobles, and our for-
tunes are as good as made.â€
“T will introduce you to him personally,†Charlie said.
“This, count, is the leader of the party. He has shown me
very great kindness, and has proved a true friend. From
what I have seen of him I have no doubt whatever that, in
spite of certain acts of lawlessness to which he and his
friends have been driven of late, you will find him, in any
position you may be good enough to give him, an honest
and thoroughly trustworthy man.â€
“T will bear it in mind,†the count said. “Now the
sooner we are off the better. How far is it to the next
village?â€
“ About seven miles, count.â€
The count gave orders for the sledge to be taken on to
the road again.
“One moment,†the captain said, taking Charlie aside.
“Pray tell us in a few words what has happened. ‘The
burning of the tree is a mystery to us, and we shall die of
curiosity if we have to remain here for another two months
with the matter unexplained.â€
In as few words as possible Charlie related to the men
the story of the preceding night, which was greeted with
exclamations of surprise and admiration.
“Truly you have your wits about you,†the captain said.
“T should have been frozen to death if T had been in your
position, for I should certainly never have thought of lighting
244 A JACOBITE EXILE
a fire up in a tree. Well, good-bye, if we do not see you
again may all good fortune attend you, and may the saints
protect you from all danger.â€
Charlie shook hands with the men all round, and then
hurried down to the sledge. ‘The coachman was already
in the front seat, the countess and her child had taken their
places, and the two armed servants and Stanislas were stand-
ing behind in readiness to jump on to a board fastened
above the runners.
“T must apologize for keeping you waiting, countess,â€
Charlie said ashe ran up. “I had to explain to my friends
in a few words how this had all come about.â€
“We are also longing to know,†the count said. “But I
have not yet introduced you to my wife, nor have I learned
the name of the gentleman to whom I owe so much.â€
“ Ah, sir,†the young countess said, holding out her hand
after Charlie had given his name, “what do we not owe
you? I shall never forget it all, never.â€
“\We will talk when we have started, Feodora; let us get
out of this forest as soon as we can.â€
He took his place beside his wife, and set the child on
his knees; his brother and Charlie sitting opposite to him.
The servants spread a bear-skin rug over their knees, and
then jumped into their places as the driver cracked his
whip, and the horses started.
“Vou must think us almost mad to be driving through
the forest at this time of the year,†the count said to
Charlie. ‘But the countess is a Russian, we have been
staying two months at her father’s place a hundred miles to
the east; my two youngest children are at home, and two
days since a message arrived saying that one of them was
dangerously ill. We had heard, of course, many tales of
the numbers and fierceness of the wolves, but we hoped that
by travelling only by day and with excellent horses there
was not much to fear, especially as we were five armed men,
A RESCUED PARTY 245
We fell in with a few wolves yesterday, but beat them off
easily enough. Last night we stopped at a little village in
the forest. ‘They certainly made me feel uneasy there with
their tales about the wolves, but there was no help for it.
We started as soon as day broke, and had driven some
fifteen miles before we came up to you. We had not gone
five when the wolves began to show themselves.
“At first they kept well behind us, but presently we came
upon a large number, who joined in near where we saw an
overturned sledge with the snow stained with blood all
round it. From there we kept up a running fight, and must
have killed a score; but their numbers increased rather than
diminished, and when a fresh pack came up from ahead, a
quarter of a mile before we saw you, it looked as if our
case was hopeless; for the horses, which had been going at
the top of their speed from the time we started, were begin-
ning to flag, while the wolves were fast closing in upon us,
and were just beginning to attack the horses when I saw
you in the road. And now, pray tell us how you came to
be there so opportunely, and how it was that you had that
great fire blazing.â€
Charlie gave the full history of the previous night’s
adventure.
“Wonderful!†the count and his brother exclaimed; and
the former went on: “I have heard many stories of escapes
from wolves, but never one like yours. It was an admirable
thought, indeed, that of at once obtaining heat and fright-
ening the wolves away by setting the tree on fire. ‘That
thought saved our lives as well as your own, for our fate
would have been the same as those unfortunate travellers
whose horses you saw, and who brought the wolves upon
you. And now, sir, would it be impertinent to ask for what
purpose you have come to Poland? Lelieve me, I only put
the question in order to see if I can in any way be of assist-
ance to you.â€
246 A JACOBITE EXILE
“T do not know, count, whether my avowal will affect
you unfavourably, but I know that it will make no difference
in your conduct towards me. Iam, as my servant told you,
an Englishman by birth; but I and my father were obliged,
in consequence of political opinions, to leave the country,
and I am now a captain in the service of Charles of
Sweden.†Exclamations of surprise broke from his hearers.
“Well, sir,†the count said smiling, ‘as his majesty King
Charles, although not yet one-and-twenty, is one of the
greatest generals in Europe, I cannot consider it strange
that you, who appear to me to be no older, should be a
captain in his service. But I own that I pictured to myself
that the officers of these wonderful soldiers were fierce-
looking men, regular iron veterans.â€
“Tam but eighteen,†Charlie said, “and I myself feel it
absurd that I should bea captain. It is but two years since
I was appointed an ensign, and the king happening to be
with my company when we had a sharp fight with the Rus-
sians, he rewarded us by having us made into a regiment;
so each of us got promotion. I was appointed captain last
May, as a reward for a suggestion that turned out useful.â€
“May I ask what it was, Captain Carstairs, for it seems
to me that you are full of happy ideas?â€
“King Charles, as you may have heard, speaks freely to
officers and soldiers as he moves about the camp. I was
standing on the edge of the river, looking across at the
Saxons, on the day before we made the passage, when the
king came up and spoke to me. He said there was no
hope of our passage being covered, —as our advance against
the Russians at Narva had been,—by a snowstorm; and I
said that as the wind was at our backs, if we were to set fire
to the great straw-stacks the smoke would hide our move-
ments from the Saxons. The idea was a very simple one,
and would no doubt have occurred to the king himself;
however, he put it into execution with success, and was
A RESCUED PARTY 247
good enough afterwards to promote me to the rank of
captain.â€
“So it was owing to you that our army—or rather the
Saxon army, for but few Poles were engaged in the battle
—was defeated,†the count said smiling. ‘Well, sir, it
will do you no harm with us, for personally we are entirely
opposed to Augustus of Saxony. But you have not yet
explained how you, an officer in the Swedish service, came
to be here.â€
“Twas sent by King Charles to Warsaw to ascertain the
feeling of the trading classes there. I had an introduction
to a Scottish merchant, and I passed as a countryman of
his, who had come out to enter his business. One of the
objects of my mission was to endeavour to induce the
foreign merchants in Warsaw to do what they could to
promote a feeling in favour of peace with the Swedes, and
the substitution of another king in place of Augustus.â€
“It is not very clear, Captain Carstairs, how you can be
fulfilling that object by passing your winter with a party of
robbers—for I suppose your disbanded soldiers were little
better—in a forest on the confines of Russia.â€
Charlie laughed. “It is rather a long story, count.
Perhaps you will kindly tell me the news about public
affairs first.â€
“By no means,†the count said. “That is a long story
too, and my wife would much rather hear yours than listen
to it; she has not yet recovered from the events of this
morning. But we will wait until we are at the village; we
have left the forest behind us, and another half hour will
take us to Stromoff, where we can get pretty good accommo-
dation.â€
The horses, a splendid pair of animals, had during their
passage through the forest shown every sign of fear, starting
hervously, swerving, and going in sharp, sudden rushes, and
always needing a constant strain on the reins to keep them
248 A JACOBITE EXILE
from bolting. Once away from the trees, however, they
settled down into a fast trot, and the seven miles to Stromoff
were done in less than half an hour. No sooner did the
landlord of the inn learn the name of his guest, than he, his
wife, and sons bustled about in the greatest haste to make
things comfortable for them. Huge fires were lighted in
the guest rooms, and the common room was cleared of the
other customers until the chamber should be sufficiently
warmed for occupation; while in the kitchen preparations
were made for a meal, to which, in half an hour from their
arrival, the party in the sledge sat down. When this was
over, settles were placed round the fire, and Charlie then
gave a full account of his adventures from the time he was
attacked in.the streets of Warsaw.
“So it was you, Captain Carstairs, after whom there was
so keen a search in September. The death of Ben Solo-
man made a great stir, and I can assure you that there are
a great many people who owe you a debt of gratitude. The
man had no sons, and all his property passed to his widow,
whom he had, it seems, treated harshly during his lifetime.
She was from Holland, and wished to return to her people,
so as his means were very large she made the easiest terms
with all those on whose estates her husband had held mort-
gages, in order to wind up her affairs as soon as possible;
thus his death was the subject of wide rejoicings. How-
ever, if you had been caught at the time, I fear it would
have gone hard with you; for the Jews were all very keen
about it—as the man, rascal though he was, was one of the
chief heads of their religion,—and were you to fall into
their hands in any of the towns they would either kill you
or send you to Warsaw.â€
“And now, sir, will you tell me what has taken place
since September?â€
“Things have moved slowly. Augustus endeavoured after
his defeat on the Dwina to make peace with Charles on
A RESCUED PARTY 249
his own account, and without the knowledge of the diet;
but Charles refused to give audience to any of his agents,
and would not even see the beautiful Countess of Konigs-
mark, who is, you know, herself a Swede, and whom Augus-
tus sent, thinking that her blandishments might win over
the young king. It was useless. Charles maintained the
ground that he took up from the first—namely, that he
would treat with the diet, but would have nothing what-
ever to say to Augustus. So the diet sent an embassy of
four senators. Instead of receiving them with every pomp
and ceremony, as they expected, the king met them on
horseback. He demanded that, as a first condition, they
should dethrone Augustus. Parties in the diet were pretty
equally divided; but the proposal was rejected, for even
those most hostile to Augustus resented the proposal that
we, a free and unconquered people, should be ordered by
a foreign prince to change our king. So nothing came
of it.
“The Swedish army advanced a certain distance into
Poland, and there were a great number of skirmishes, but
there has been no serious fighting, nor is there much
chance of any until the snow has gone and the country
dried up in the spring. At present Augustus is quarrelling
with the diet, who still set themselves against the importa-
tion of more Saxon troops. But doubtless before the
campaign begins in earnest he will have settled matters
with the senators, and will have his own way in that
respect. There is, however, little chance of the diet
agreeing to call out the whole forces of the country, and
the next battle will, like the last, be between the Swedes
and the Saxons, who may have with them perhaps a few
thousand Poles belonging to the king’s party.â€
“You don’t belong to the king’s party, count?â€
“No; I, like the majority of our nobles, have no inter-
est whatever in the war, for we were never consulted before
250 A JACOBITE EXILE
it began. It is an affair between Saxony and the Swedes;
let them fight it out. It would be a bad day for Poland if
Augustus and the Russians were to overcome and despoil
Sweden. We want no addition of territory, for that would
be to strengthen our kings against us. We see the trouble
caused by Augustus having Saxony at his command, and
if he had other territory the country would be divided into
two parts, one of which would have nothing in common
with the other. Still less do we wish to see Russia gain
territory to the north of us. Hitherto we have thought
but little of the Muscovites, but this war has shown that
they can put great armies into the field, and the czar is
making them into a nation which may some day be for-
midable to us.
“Charles has sent every assurance that he has no ill-will
towards Poland, and is.an enemy not of the country but
of its king,—who had formed a coalition against him ina
time of profound peace,—and that his hostility will alto-
gether cease with the overthrow and expulsion of Augustus.
So you see we who live at a distance from the capital, and
hold ourselves altogether aloof from the intrigues of court,
look on at the fray as if it were one in which we have no
part or lot. If Augustus drives out the Swedes, we shall
probably have trouble with him afterwards. If Charles
drives out Augustus we shall have a fresh king, and shall
no doubt choose one upon the recommendation of Charles,
who will then march away again, leaving us to manage
our own affairs. ‘Therefore, we have no animosity what-
ever against you as a Swedish officer, but for comfort’s sake
it is better that nothing should be said of this, and that I
should introduce you to my friends simply as an English
gentleman who has rendered me the greatest possible ser-
vice.â€
The countess retired to bed a short time after they had
finished their meal, and the others sat up talking until late
A RESCUED PARTY 251
in the evening. Charlie learnt that the country was still
in a greatly disturbed state. Parties of disbanded soldiers
and others, rendered desperate by cold and hardship, were
everywhere plundering the peasantry, and many encoun-
ters had taken place between them and the nobles, who
with their retainers had marched against them. Travel
would be dangerous for a long time to come.
“Therefore, until the spring you must not think of mov-
ing,†the count said; “indeed, I think that your best plan
when you start will be to work due north and join the
Swedish forces near Narva. It will be shorter as well as
less dangerous. Still we can talk of that later on.â€
‘The next morning they started early, and arrived in the
afternoon at the chateau of the count. It was not a forti-
fied building, for the Poles differed from the western
nations, abstaining from fortifying their towns and resi-
dences, upon the ground that they were a free people capa-
ble of defending their country from foreign invasion, and
therefore requiring no fortified towns, and that such places
added to the risks of civil war, and enabled factions to
set the will of the nation at defiance. The building was a
large one, but it struck Charlie as being singularly plain
and barn-like in comparison with the residences of country
gentlemen in England. A number of retainers ran out as
they drove up into the courtyard, and exclamations of sur-
prise and dismay rose as the wounds on the horses’ flanks
and legs were visible; and when, in a few words, the
count told them that they had been attacked by wolves,
and had been saved principally by the English gentleman
and his follower, the men crowded round Charlie, kissed
bis hands, and in other ways tried to show their gratitude
for his rescue of their master and mistress.
“Come along,†the count said, taking his arm and lead-
ing him into the house. “The poor fellows mean well,
and you must not be vexed with them.â€
252 A JACOBITE EXILE
The countess’s first question had been for her child, and
with an exclamation of thankfulness when she heard that it
was better, she had at once hurried into the house. As
soon as they had entered the count left Charlie in charge
of his brother, and also hurried away. He was not long
before he returned.
“The child is doing well,†he said, “and now that it has
got its mother again, it will, I think, improve rapidly.
The doctor said this morning that he considered it out of
danger, but that it needed its mother sorely to cheer and
pet it.â€
In a very short time the tables were laid. The count,
his brother, and Charlie sat at an upper table, and the hall
was filled with the various officers and retainers. The
count’s arrival was expected, for a horseman had been sent
forward on their arrival at the inn the evening before.
The dinner had therefore been cooked in readiness, and
Charlie was astonished at the profusion with which it was
served. Fish, joints, great pies, and game of many kinds,
were placed on the table in unlimited quantities, the drink
being a species of beer, although excellent wine was served
at the high table. He could now understand how often
the Polish nobles impoverished themselves by their un-
bounded hospitality and love of display.
“T suppose for to-morrow you will like to remain quiet,â€
the count said, ‘‘but after that we will try to amuse you.
There is game of all sorts to be shot, or if you have had
enough sport lately there will be a sledge and horses at
your disposal whenever you choose to ride or drive, and in
a few days we will give an entertainment in honour at
once of our return, your visit, and the child’s restoration
to health. ‘Then you will have an opportunity of seeing
our national dances.â€
Charlie had had enough shooting, but he greatly enjoyed
the drives in the sledges behind the spirited horses. The
A RESCUED PARTY 253
entertainment came off a fortnight after his arrival at the
chateau. The guests for the most part arrived early in
the afternoon, many having driven in from great distances.
The preparations had been on an immense scale, and the
scene at night was a brilliant one. Never had Charlie seen
anything like the magnificence of the dresses, not of the
ladies only but also of the gentlemen; the Poles having the
true oriental love for rich costumes, a taste that their
national dress permitted them to gratify to the utmost.
Next to the splendour of the dresses Charlie was surprised
at the grace and spirit of the dancing, which was far more
vivacious than that of western nations. The Poles were
long considered to be the best dancers in the world. It was
their great national amusement; and all danced, from noble
to peasant, entering into it with spirit and enthusiasm, and
uniting the perfection of rhythmical motion with the grace
and ease peculiar to them and to their kinsmen the
Hungarians.
The dancing was kept up with unflagging energy during
the whole night, and then after a substantial breakfast the
men and women were muffled up in furs, and took their
places in the sledges.
The count would gladly have had Charlie remain with
him until spring began, but he was anxious to rejoin the
army; and seeing that this was so, the count did everything
in his power to facilitate his journey, which, after talking
it over, had been decided should be direct towards the
royal camp. ‘The count’s brother insisted upon accom-
panying him on the journey, as in this way many of the
difficulties would be avoided. ‘I'wo sledges were prepared,
the one for the use of Charlie and Count John, and the
other for the two servants and baggage. Both were horsed
by the fastest animals in the count’s stables.
Charlie himself had been loaded with presents, which he
had been obliged somewhat reluctantly to accept, as he saw
254 A JACOBITE EXILE
that a refusal would hurt and mortify his kind hosts. He
had, on his arrival, been provided with an ample wardrobe
of clothes of all kinds, and to these were now added dol-
mans, cloaks, rugs, and most costly furs; a splendid gun,
pistols, and a sword, with the hilt studded with gems, com-
pleted his outfit; while Stanislas had been presented with a
heavy purse of money. ‘he whole of the retainers of the
castle were assembled to see them start, and the count and
countess at parting made him promise to come and pay
them another visit if the fortune of war should bring him
within the possibility of reaching them.
The journey was a delightful one. Each night they put
up at the chateau of some nobleman. ‘To many of these
Count John Staroski was personally known; at the others
his name secured at once a hearty welcome for himself and
his companion. Travelling only by day, and at the full
speed of the horses, they escaped interruption by the
marauding bands, and in fourteen days after starting they
drove into the town where Charles of Sweden had his head-
quarters, after being twice stopped and questioned by bodies
of Swedish horse. The town was crowded with troops, and
they had some difficulty in finding a lodging for themselves
and stabling for the horses. As soon as this was done
Charlie proceeded alone to the quarters of Count Piper.
CHAPTER XIV
THE BATTLE OF CLISSOW
Geese sént in his name, and was shown in at once.
“JT am glad indeed to see you, Captain Carstairs,†the
minister said as he entered; “we had given you up for lost.
We heard first that you had been murdered in the streets of
Warsaw. A month later a man brought a letter to me from
your Scotch friend Ramsay, to say that you were accused of
the murder of a Jew trader, a man, it seems, of some
importance in Warsaw. Ramsay said that you were in the
company of a band of brigands, and that the man who went
with you as your servant had joined you, and had taken you
some money. He forwarded the letter you had sent him
explaining your position, and said he thought that upon the
whole it was the best thing you could have done, as a vigor-
ous search had been set on foot at the instance of the Jews,
and there would have been but little chance of your making
your way through the country alone. He added that he felt
confident that, if alive, you would manage. somehow to
rejoin us before the campaign opened in the spring. Iam
glad that you have been able to do so, but your appearance
at present is rather that of a wealthy Polish noble than of
a companion of brigands.â€
“T was able to do some service to Count Staroski, as
when travelling with his wife and child, and his brother,
255
256 A JACOBITE EXILE
Count John, he was attacked by a pack of wolves. I have
been staying with him for some weeks, and his brother has
now had the kindness to accompany me here. He has
thereby made my passage through the country easy, as we
have travelled with fast horses in his sledge, and have always
put up at the chateaux of nobles of his acquaintance. I
have, therefore, avoided all risk of arrest at towns. In the
letter forwarded to you I explained the real circumstances
of the death of the Jew.â€
“Yes, we quite understood that, Captain Carstairs. You
had a very narrow escape from death at his hands, and as
the danger was incurred purely in the king’s service, it will
not be forgotten. Up to the time when the Jew organized
the attack upon you in Warsaw, I was well satisfied with
your reports of your work. So far nothing has come of it,
as Augustus has been too strong for any movement against
him, but we hope ere long to defeat him so decisively that
our friends will be able to declare against him. I will
inform the king of your return, and I have no doubt he will
be glad to hear your story from your own lips. He loves
tales of adventure, and time hangs somewhat heavily on
hand, as until the frost breaks nothing can be done in the
field.â€
On the following day, indeed, Charlie was sent for to the
royal quarters, and had to recount the story of his adven-
tures in full to the king, who was highly interested in them,
and at the conclusion requested him to introduce Count
John Staroski, in order that he might express to him his
obligation for the service he had rendered to one of his
officers. ‘This done, Charlie drove out with the count to
the village where Colonel Jamieson’s regiment was quar-
tered, and where his return was received with delight by
Harry, and with great pleasure by Major Jervoise and his
tellow-officers. He was obliged to give a short outline of
what he had been doing since he left, but put off going into
details for a future occasion,
THE BATTLE OF CLISSOW 257
“And are you coming back to us now, Charlie?†Harry
asked.
“Certainly; my success in the diplomatic way was not
sufficiently marked for them to be likely to employ me in
that line again. We must return this afternoon, as the king
has invited us both to sup with him to-night.â€
‘Two days later Count John Staroski started upon his
return journey, much pleased with the reception he had
met with from the King of Sweden, and determined to
work vigorously among the nobles of his acquaintance to
bring about the dethronement of Augustus of Saxony.
Charlie had already seen Count Piper, who had told him
that, although the king and himself were both well satis-
fied with the work he had done, there was not at present
any mission of the same sort on which he could be em-
ployed. Indeed, it was evident that until the Saxons had
been decisively defeated political action would be useless,
and that, therefore, for the present he could either remain
at head-quarters, or rejoin his regiment. Charlie at once
chose the latter alternative.
“Very well, Captain Carstairs, you can rejoin when you
like, but remember J may claim your services again. You
see, now that you have acquired a knowledge of Polish,
your value for this sort of work is largely increased.â€
As soon as the frost had broken the Swedish army com-
menced its advance. Skirmishes frequently took place,
but Augustus had as yet no army with which he could meet
them in the field, and he summoned a diet at Warsaw, in
hopes of persuading the Poles to decide upon calling out
the whole national force. In this he failed altogether.
The citizens, led by the foreign traders, were already
openly opposed to him, and their attitude so encouraged
his opponents in the diet, that many of these rose and
openly denounced the government and the conduct of the
king that had brought the country into its present diffi-
culties,
258 A JACOBITE EXILE
As the Swedish army advanced they were joined by the
Duke of Holstein, and, in spite of the efforts of a consid-
erable body of the enemy under Prince Wisniowiski, pro-
gressed steadily, crossed the river Memel, and when near
Grodno, were met by an embassy sent by the diet, to en-
deavour to persuade Charles not to advance further.
An interview took place between the king, the Poles,
and his ministers, the conversation on both sides being
in Latin. But as the ambassadors had no definite plans to
propose, and their leaders were wholly devoted to Augus-
tus, the king refused to allow his advance to be arrested,
and continued his march. When near Praga they crossed
the plain where Charles Gustavus, King of Sweden, had
defeated the Polish army in a great battle, that had lasted
for three days. The city was occupied, and a contribu-
tion of 20,000 crowns imposed upon it, in addition to food
for the army while it remained there. Plundering, how-
ever, was strictly forbidden, and as the king issued a proc-
lamation declaring that he was no enemy of the Polish
Republic, but simply of their king, the inhabitants were
on the whole well satisfied with the conduct of the invaders.
A halt was made here for some time, and a bridge was
thrown across the Vistula, while the army rested after the
long and fatiguing marches it had made. A fresh attempt
was made to arrest the advance of the Swedes, and the
Cardinal Primate himself met the king; but nothing came
of the negotiations, and the army entered Warsaw. Here
they were warmly received, and great entertainments were
given to the king. ‘Towards the end of June they again
advanced to meet the force that Augustus had gathered,
and on the 6th of July the Swedes arrived within a few
miles of Clissow. The next day some reinforcements
arrived, and the king decided to give battle on the follow-
ing day, which was the anniversary of the victory on the
Dwina the previous year.
Sm
THE BATTLE OF CLISSOW 259
His army was twelve thousand strong, while that of
Augustus was nearly double that strength, and was very
strongly posted, his camp being surrounded by morasses,
although situated on rising ground which commanded the
whole of the country round it. ‘The bogs in the front were
found to be so impassable, that the Swedes were forced to
make a circuit to the left, where the ground was firmer.
This movement obliged the enemy also to change front, a
movement that caused considerable confusion, as they
themselves were forced to traverse boggy ground to take
up a new position facihg that by which the Swedes would
now advance.
The attack was commenced by the division commanded
by the Duke of Holstein, but scarcely had he set his
troops in motion than he was mortally wounded by a ball
from a falconet. His troops, however, pushed forward
vigorously; the Polish division opposed to them resisted
the two first assaults bravely, but gave way at the third
attack, and were driven from the ground in such confusion
that they took no further part in the engagement.
While this was going on the Saxon cavalry had been
repulsed by that of Charles, and passing in their retreat
under the fire of three infantry regiments, suffered so
heavily that they left the field. The Swedish foot now
advanced all along the line, and in the centre destroyed
several battalions of Saxons. But the Swedish right was
attacked so vigorously by the Saxon left under Field-
marshal Steinau, that for a time the conflict was doubtful.
The Swedish horse-guards and other cavalry, however,
charged with such determination that the Saxon horse on
this flank were also defeated and driven off the field, while
the Swedish infantry, advancing without firing, drove
several battalions of Saxon foot into a village, where, be-
ing surrounded, almost all were killed or taken prisoners.
The Saxon horse gathering once more attempted bravely
260 A JACOBITE EXILE
to retrieve the fate of the day, and engaged the Swedish
horse with such desperate valour, that a considerable por-
tion of the Saxon infantry were enabled under cover of the
conflict to draw off, cross the morasses, and make their
escape.
The battle lasted four hours, and had been throughout
severely contested. ‘The Saxons lost four thousand killed
and wounded, and three thousand taken prisoners, while
the Swedes had eleven hundred killed and wounded.
Forty-eight cannon were captured by the victors, together
with all the baggage and waggons. The death of the
Duke of Holstein, a gallant prince who was exceedingly
popular with the army and beloved by the king, cast a
gloom over this great victory which virtually laid Poland
at the feet of the victors, and insured the fulfilment of the
object for which Charles had persisted in the war.
Jamieson’s regiment had been on the left wing, but as
it had been held in reserve to strengthen the line at any
point at which it might give way, the Scotch had taken
but a small share in the fighting, and had but thirty men
killed and wounded by the shot and bullets that passed
over the heads of the fighting line.
The captain of one of the companies was among those
killed, and Charlie, who had, since he rejoined the regi-
ment, been doing duty as lieutenant, now took the vacant
place.
The army still advanced. Augustus sent in several pro-
posals for peace, but these were all rejected. The Saxons
had speedily rallied after the battle, but were not in a
position to oppose the advance of the victorious Swedes,
who occupied Cracow without meeting with any resistance.
Seeing that Augustus would not be strong enough to hazard
another pitched battle, Charles had, on the morning after
the victory, ordered three of his regiments, of which
Jamieson’s was one, to march with all speed to reinforce
THE BATTLE OF CLISSOW 261
Major-general Schlippenbach, who had sent an urgent re-
quest for aid, as he heard that the Russian army fifty thou-
sand strong was preparing to cross the frontier, and as he
had but six thousand he could not hope to oppose their
advance successfully.
As the king’s orders enjoined the troops to march with
the greatest possible speed, they performed the journey
back to Warsaw in four days, although the distance exceeded
a hundred miles. Mounted messengers had been sent on
before them, and on reaching the town they found boats
already prepared to take them down the river to Danzic,
where orders had already been sent for ships to be in readi-
ness to convey them to Revel. ‘The fatigues since the cam-
paign opened had been severe, and the troops all enjoyed
the long days of rest while the craft that conveyed them
dropped quietly down the Vistula. Then came the short
sea-passage.
On their arrival at Revel bad news met them. They had
come too late. On the 16th of July the Russian army had
passed the frontier, and the Swedes had tried to oppose
them at the passage of the river Embach; but the water was
low from the effects of a long drought, and the Russians
were enabled to ford it at several points. The Swedes fell
upon those who first crossed, and for two hours repulsed
their attacks, obtaining at some points considerable advan-
tage and capturing some guns, but as fresh reinforcements
poured across the river the tide of battle turned. The
Russian cavalry drove back the Swedish horse, who, as they
retreated, rode through the infantry and threw them into
disorder. These were attacked by the Russians before they
could recover from their confusion, and were almost entirely
destroyed or taken prisoners.
The general and many of the mounted officers effected
their escape, rallied the broken cavalry, and fell back
towards Revel. ‘The Russians spread over the country and
262 A JACOBITE EXILE
plundered it, burning the little town of Valk, murdering
its inhabitants, and carrying off into slavery the whole of
the population who fell into their hands. ‘The arrival of
the three regiments was hailed with much satisfaction by the
people of Revel, who feared that the Russians might besiege
the town. ‘They did not, however, approach within many
miles, but after completely wasting the country retired
across the frontier.
The victory that had been gained over the Swedes at
Embach, and the destruction of the greater part of General
Schlippenbach’s force, enabled the czar to turn his arms
against Ingria, the extreme eastern province of Sweden,
which included the shores of Lake Ladoga and the whole
of the coast of the Baltic between Narva and Finland.
Urgent messages were sent by the governor of that province
to General Schlippenbach requesting him to send him aid,
as he had not even sufficient men to garrison the walled
towns. ‘lhe general was, however, afraid that Narva would
be again besieged, and he therefore dared not reduce his
small force to any considerable degree, but drew one com-
pany from each of the three regiments, and embarked them
on board a ship for the mouth of the Neva. As there
seemed little prospect of service for a time near Revel, all
the officers were eager that their company should be chosen
for the service in Ingria. Colonel Jamieson therefore said,
“I do not wish to choose one company more than another;
all can equally be depended upon. Therefore, I think the
fairest way will be to draw lots as to which shall go.â€
The lot fell upon Charlie’s company, which therefore
formed part of the expedition. On reaching the mouth of
the Neva they heard that the town of Notteburg, situated
at the point where the Neva issues from the lake, was
already besieged by the Russians, and that the Swedish
vessels on the lake had been obliged to come down the
river. A fort had been raised by the Russians on the bank
THE BATTLE OF CLISSOW 263
to prevent succour being conveyed into the town, and two
thousand men had crossed the river and occupied a small
redoubt on the northern side, so that the town was com-
pletely invested. Tbe newly-arrived force was ordered to
march at once with a hundred horse and four field-pieces,
the whole under the command of Major Sion, who was well
acquainted with the country.
“What do you think of this expedition, Captain Car-
stairs?†his lieutenant, John Bowyer, asked him.
“I would rather be back with King Charles,†Charlie
replied. “Of course I don’t know the geography of the
place, but if the Russians keep their eyes at all open I don’t
see how a force like ours with cavalry and guns can hope
to enter the town unnoticed. ‘he addition of the horse-
men seems to me altogether ridiculous, as they could be no
good whatever if they did enter the town. As for those
four field-pieces, they will hamper our march; and as they
say the Russians have already some forty cannon in posi-
tion about the town, those little pieces would be useless.
Four hundred infantry making the attempt at night under
good guidance might manage to slip into the place, but this
procession of ours is, to my mind, tempting destruction,
for we certainly cannot hope to cut our way by force through
the whole Russian army.
“But even if we do get inside the town, our plight can be
no better. ‘The Russians’ cannon are bombarding it night
and day, and more batteries are in course of erection, and
Schlippenbach the governor, who is, I believe, a brother
of the general, has but a few pieces to reply to them. Were
there an army advancing to the relief of the place it would
be different altogether, for our reinforcement might be of
vital importance in repelling assaults until aid arrived. But
there is no hope of aid; the king’s army is some nine hun-
dred miles away, and his hands are full. General Schlip-
penbach has sent as many men as he could spare. They
264 A JACOBITE EXILE
say there are at least twenty thousand Russians round the
town, and where is an army to come from that can compel
them to raise the siege? ‘To my mind, we shall either be
destroyed making our way into the town, or, if we do get
in, shall be made prisoners of war, if not massacred—for
the Russians have but vague ideas as to giving quarter—
when the town falls, which may be a fortnight hence.â€
“Tt seems a bad look-out altogether,†the lieutenant
remarked.
“Very much so. The best possible thing that could
befall us would be for the Russians to make us out before
we get too far into their lines, in which case we may be
able to fall back before they can gather in overwhelming
strength, and may thus draw off without any very great
loss.â€â€™
Major Sion called the captains of the infantry companies
and the troop of horse to a sort of council of war, when the
little force halted for an hour at three o'clock in the
afternoon,
“We have another ten miles to march, gentlemen, and I
should like to ask your opinion as to whether it would be
best to try to force our way in as soon as we get there, or
to halt at a distance of three or four miles from the Rus-
sians, and make our effort at daybreak before they are
fairly afoot.â€
The other three officers gave their opinion in order of
seniority, and all advocated the plan of falling upon the
Muscovites at daybreak.
“And what do you think, Captain Carstairs?†Major
Sion asked Charlie.
“TI regret to say, major, that my opinion differs from
that of the other gentlemen, and this for several reasons,
In the first place, if we halt so near the Russians our
presence in their neighbourhood may be betrayed by a
peasant, and we may be surprised in the night. If no
THE BATTLE OF CLISSOW 265
such mishap should take place, we should have to be on
foot two hours before sunrise. I in no way doubt your
knowledge of the road, but it is at all times difficult to
make out a mere track, like that we are following, at night,
and in the morning we might well find ourselyes involved
in the Russian intrenchments, from which we could not
extricate ourselves before a large force had gathered round
us, in which case we must be all either killed or taken
prisoners. My own suggestion would be that we should
remain here another two hours, and then continue our
march so as to reach the spot where we are to endeavour
to break through their line about sunset. Should we be
observed, as we most likely should be, we might at that
hour be taken for a freshly-arrived body of Russian troops.
There would be no risk of losing our way, and we might
hope to be close upon them before we were discovered to
be enemies. If we succeed, as I trust we shall, in break-
ing our way through and reaching the town, well and good.
If, on the other hand, we find greater obstacles than we
expect, and are forced to fall back fighting, we shall have
the advantage that darkness will be setting in. The Rus-
sians, the greater part of whom will be ignorant of our
strength, will lose time before they move, fearing they
may be assaulted in other quarters, and in the darkness we
might be able to make good our escape, which it is certain
none of us would do should we meet with a repulse at day-
break.â€
“Your reasons are very just, Captain Carstairs. Though
certainly my opinion was in accordance with that given by
your fellow-officers, I am bound to say that your argument
seems unanswerable. What say you, gentlemen? I have
two objects in view—the first to reinforce the garrison of
Notteburg, the second to save the troops under my com-
mand if I should fail in doing so. I know the country
well, but its features will be considerably altered. Trees
266 A JACOBITE EXILE
will have been cut down, houses levelled, intrenchments
thrown up, camps scattered here and there, and I own that
in the dark, I might, as Captain Carstairs says, very easily
miss my way. I think his proposal therefore unites the
greatest chances of getting through their line and entering
the town, with a possibility of drawing off the troops with-
out great loss in case of failure.â€
The other three officers at once agreed, and orders were
issued for the men to lie down until five o’clock and rest
themselves before pursuing their march. It was past that
hour before they were in motion again. Major Sion, with
a peasant from the neighbourhood of Notteburg, rode
ahead. Then came the troop of cavalry, with the guns
close behind them, followed by the infantry. As they
approached the Russian lines the peasant several times
went on in advance, and presently a trooper rode down the
line with the order that the troops with firearms were to
light their matches and the spearmen to keep in a com-
pact body. They were now not far from the Russian lines,
and the destruction that had been wrought during the last
ten days was visible to them. Every tree and bush had
been felled for use in the intrenchments or for the erection
of shelters. A few blackened walls alone showed where
houses had stood. Gardens had been destroyed and
orchards levelled.
Light smoke could be seen rising at many points from
the Russian fires, and when the troops were halted they
were but half a mile from the intrenchments.
Word was passed down that the rapid Swedish march was
to be moderated, and that they were to move carelessly
and at a slow rate as if fatigued by a long march, and that
the spears were to be carried at the trail, as they were so
much longer than those used by the Russians that their
length would, if carried erect, at once betray the national-
ity of the troops. There was no attempt at concealment,
THE BATTLE OF CLISSOW 267
for the cavalry would be visible for a considerable distance
across the flat country. Considerable bodies of men
could be seen gathered round fires at a distance of not
more than a quarter of a mile on either hand, but as the
column passed between them there was no sign of any
stir.
In a short time the order was passed for the troops to
form from column into line, and the cavalry officer who
brought it said that there was a Russian battery erected
right across the road a little more than a quarter of a mile
ahead.
“Vhings look better, Captain Carstairs,†the lieutenant
said, as the company, which happened to be leading, fell
into line.
“Yes, I have no doubt we shall take their battery, com-
ing down, as we do, upon its rear. The question is, Are
there any intrenchments ahead? Major Sion told us when
we halted that the peasant assured him that there were no
works beyond it, and that it was the weakest point of the.
line; but it is three days since he came out from Notte-
burg, and working hard as the Russians evidently do, they
may have pushed on their intrenchments far in advance of
the battery by this time.â€
The force halted fora moment. The guns were unlim-
bered, turned round, and loaded. Then the line of cavalry
opened right and left, the four pieces poured a discharge
of grape into the Russians clustered thickly in the battery
four hundred yards away, and then with a shout the Swed-
ish cavalry charged, the infantry coming on at a run behind
them. ‘The surprise was complete. With cries of terror
the Russians for the most part leapt from the battery and
fled, and the few who attempted to defend their guns were
sabred by the cavalry.
“There are other works ahead!’’ Major Sion exclaimed,
as sitting on his horse he looked over the parapet, “and
268 A JACOBITE EXILE
bodies of troops scattered all about. Push forward, men,
at a double, and do you, Captain Sherlbach, cut a way for
us with your cavalry.â€
The sun had set a few minutes before the guns were fired,
and Charlie, as he led his men over the earthwork and saw
the Russian lines in front, congratulated himself upon the
fact that in another half hour it would be quite dark. As
they approached the next line of works a scattering fire of
musketry opened upon them, but the aim was wide, and
without loss they reached the work. The Russians, though
inferior in numbers, defended themselves obstinately, and
continually received reinforcements of bodies of men run-
ning up from allsides. In five minutes the Swedes cleared
the works of them, but as they prepared to advance again
they saw a large body of horse riding down to bar their
advance, while numbers of footmen were running to occupy
some intrenchments ahead of them. ‘Trumpets were
sounding to the right, left, and rear.
“We cannot force our way farther,†the major said to
Charlie. “We knew nothing of these works, and they are
fatal to our enterprise. We must retreat while we can.
Do you not think so?â€
“Ves, sir, I think the enterprise is quite hopeless.â€
The order was given; the troops faced about, formed
into closer order, and at the double retraced their steps,
the spearmen of each company forming its front line and
the musketeers the second. Already it was growing dusk.
The cavalry riding ahead scattered the small bodies of men
who threw themselves in their way, and the battery they
had first taken was entered without loss. There was a
momentary halt here for the men to recover their wind.
Then the musketeers poured a volley into a dark line ad-
vancing upon them, the horsemen charged in among them,
the long pikes of the front line cleared the way, and with
a shout the Swedes passed through their foes and pressed
forward.
THE BATTLE OF CLISSOW 269
But more troops were gathering to bar their way, and the
major changed the line of march sharply to the right,
sweeping along by the side of the force through which they
had just cut their way, the musketeers on the flank firing
into them as they passed. ‘The movement was an adroit
one, for in the gathering darkness the enemy in front would
not be able to distinguish friends from foes, or to perceive
the nature of the movement. For a few minutes they were
unmolested, then the course was again changed, and Charlie
was beginning to think that in.the darkness they would yet
make their escape, when a dull heavy sound was heard in
their rear.
“That's the Russian cavalry, Bowyer; take the musket-
eers on with you, and keep close to the company ahead.
I will break them up with the pikemen. Tf they do come
up to you, give them a volley and then continue your
retreat with the rest.â€
While the captains of the other two companies had placed
their pikemen in the front line, Charlie had placed his in
the rear, in order to repel any attack of cavalry from that
direction. He now formed them in a close clump, taking
his place among them. ‘The Russian squadrons came along
with a deep roll like that of thunder. ‘They were but thirty
yards away when they perceived the little cluster of men
with levelled lances. A few, unable to check their horses,
tushed upon the points, but most of them reined in their
little steeds in time. In a moment the Swedes were sur-
rounded by a wall of yelling horsemen, some of whom tried
to break through the hedge of spears, while others dis-
charged their pistols. Charlie listened anxiously for the
roll of a volley of musketry, but no sound came, and he
felt sure that the whole body of cavalry had halted round
him, and that his movement had saved the rest, who would
now, if fortunate, be able to make their way off in the
darkness. But the men were falling now from the pistol-
270 A JACOBITE EXILE
fire of the Cossacks, and feeling that the work had been
done he determined to make one effort to save the men
with him.
“Level your spears, and charge through them shoulder
to shoulder,†he said; “it is your only chance. Once
through, throw away your spears and break up in the dark-
ness; most of you may escape. Now!â€
With a shout the Swedes rushed forward in a body;
horses and riders went down before them. There was a
tush from behind. Charlie shouted to the rear rank to
face about, but in the confusion and din his words were
unheard. There was a brief struggle in the darkness.
Charlie emptied his pistols and cut down more than one of
his opponents, then a sword fell on his shoulder, while at
the same moment he was ridden over by a Cossack, and was
stunned by the force of his fall. When he recovered con-
sciousness several men with torches were moving about
him, and at the orders of an officer were examining the
bodies of the fallen. He saw them pass their swords
through the bodies of three of his own men who were lying
near him, and as they came up to him he closed his eyes
expecting a similar fate.
“This is an officer, captain,†one of the torch-bearers
said in Russian.
“Very well; carry him to the camp, then. If he is alive
the general may want to question him.â€
Seeing that he breathed, four of the Russian soldiers
took him upon their shoulders and carried him away. ‘The
pain of his wound, caused by the movement, was acute, but
he retained consciousness until, after what seemed to him a
journey of immense length he was again laid down on the
ground, close to a large fire. Several officers stood round
him, and he asked, first in Polish and then in Swedish, for
water, and at the orders of one who seemed of superior
rank to the others, some was at once brought to him.
THE BATTLE OF CLISSOW 271
“Vour king treats his prisoners well,†the officer said.
“We will do everything we can for you.â€
Half an hour later a doctor came to his side, and cutting
open his coat, applied a bandage to his shoulder.
“Ts it a serious wound?†Charlie asked in Swedish.
“Tt might be worse, but it will be a troublesome one; it
is a sabre-cut, and has cleft right through your shoulder-
bone. Are you hurt anywhere else?â€
“No, I do not think so. I was knocked down in the
dark and I believe stunned, though I have a sort of recol-
lection of being trampled on, and I feel sore all over.â€
The surgeon felt his ribs and limbs, repeatedly asking
him if it hurt him. When he finished the examination he
said: “You are doubtless badly bruised, but I don’t think
anything is broken. Our Cossack horses are little more
than ponies, had they been heavy horse they would have
trod your life out.â€
A few moments later there was a sound of trampling
horses. They halted close by. The officers drew back,
and a moment later Marshal Scheremetof, the commander
of the Russian army, came up to Charlie’s side.
“Which of you speaks Swedish?†he asked the officers,
and one of them stepped forward. “Ask him what force
was this that attacked us, and with what object.†As
Charlie saw no reason for concealment, he replied that it
was a body of four hundred Swedish infantry and a troop
of horse, with four guns, and that their object was to enter
the town.
“They must have been mad to attempt to cut their way
through our whole army,†the general said, when the answer
was translated to him; “but by St. Paul they nearly suc-
ceeded. ‘The Swedes are mad, but this was too much even
for madmen. Ask him whence the force came. It may be
that a large reinforcement has reached Vyburg without our
knowing it.â€
ie A JACOBITE EXILE
“We arrived two days since,†Charlie replied, when the
question was put to him. “Wecame in a ship together
from Revel.â€
“Did others come with you?†was next asked at the
general’s dictation.
“No other ship but ours has arrived.â€
“But others are coming?â€
As Charlie had no doubt that great efforts would be made
to send further reinforcements he replied:
““Many more troops are coming, but I cannot say when
they will arrive.†:
“Will it be soon?â€
“That I cannot say, but I don’t think they will come
from Revel. There was a talk of large reinforcements, but
whether from Sweden or from the king’s army, I cannot
say.â€
“Are you a Swede?†the general asked.
“Tam an Englishman in the Swedish service, general.â€
“We have many of your countrymen with us,†the gen-
eral said. “It would have been better for you had you
come to the czar. See that he is well treated,†he said to
the officers, and then mounted and rode away.
CHAPTER XV
AN OLD ACQUAINTANCE
pBe next morning Charlie was placed in a tent in which
lay several officers who had been wounded either the
night before or by shots from the town. He learned with
great pleasure, upon questioning the doctor, that the Swedes
had got off safely in the darkness. Some eight or ten men
only had straggled and been made prisoners, and not more
than twenty had been left dead on the field. He had the
satisfaction therefore of knowing that the defence made
by his own pikemen had been the means of saving the whole
force. In other respects he had nothing to complain of,
for he was well attended to, and received the same treat-
ment as the Russians.
For another ten days the roar of the cannon continued,
some seventy guns keeping up an incessant fire on the
town. At the end of that time the governor capitulated,
and was allowed to march out with the honours of war.
Only forty out of the brave garrison remained un-
wounded at the end of the siege. They, as well as such of
their comrades as were strong enough to travel, passed
through the lines of the Russians, and marched to Vyburg.
Three weeks after being made a prisoner Charlie’s
wound was so far healed that the surgeon pronounced him
able to sit a horse, and under the escort of an officer and
278
274. A JACOBITE EXILE
four Cossacks he was taken by easy stages to Bercov, a
prison fortress a short distance from Moscow. He had
inquired from the surgeon who attended him for Dr. Kelly.
The doctor knew him, but said that he was not with the
army, but was, he believed, away visiting some towns on
the Volga, where a serious pestilence was raging.
Charlie remained but a short time at Bercov. His
wound was healing rapidly, and the surgeon who attended
him assured him that there was every prospect of his mak-
ing a complete cure if he would but keep his arm for some
weeks ina sling. He had nothing to complain of, either
as to his comfort or food. The governor, who spoke a
little Polish, visited him every day, and asked many ques-
tions as to his native country. On one of these visits he
said to him, “You asked me yesterday if I knew Dr.
Kelly, one of the chief surgeons of the army, who, as you
had heard, was at present on the Volga. You mentioned
that he was a friend of yours, and that you had made his
acquaintance when you were unlucky enough before to be
a prisoner in our hands. I am sorry to say that I have to-
day seen an official report, in which his name appears
among the list of those who have fallen victims to the
pestilence.â€
“Tam sorry to hear that,†Charlie exclaimed; “both
because he was very kind to me and I liked him much,
and because in the second place I was sure that he would
have used his influence with the czar to obtain my exchange
as soon as possible.â€
“It is very unfortunate,†the governor said, “ especially
as these exchanges are of rare occurrence. A few officers
may be taken prisoners on each side in the skirmishes, but
the numbers are too small to make the loss of any impor-
tance either to Russia or Sweden, and it is months since
either have taken any steps to bring about exchanges. I
myself have no influence. My appointment here is a sort
AN OLD ACQUAINTANCE 275
of punishment for having offended the czar by not having
brought up my regiment in time to take part in the fight
when you attacked us at Narva. I saved the regiment, but
that was not regarded as any excuse for having been three
days longer on the march than the czar expected; so I was
sent here as a sort of dismissal from active service. You
know no one else who could move in your matter?â€
“No one; the governor of the castle at Plescow was a
surly fellow, and was reprimanded by the czar, at least so
I heard, for not having treated me sufficiently well. I
was only three or four days there, and the only officer I saw
besides Dr. Kelly was a friend of his, another doctor. He
was at the table when I dined with Kelly. He seemed to
me to be a fine fellow, and, by the by, he did say jokingly
that if I was ever made prisoner again I was to ask for
him, and that he would do anything he could for me.â€
“What was his name?†the governor asked.
“Peter Michaeloff. Do you know him?†he added as
he saw a look of surprise in the governor’s face.
“T know one of that name,†the governor said doubt-
fully, “I don’t know that he is a doctor; though he may
be, for he knows something of many things.â€
“Oh, he was a doctor,†Charlie said confidently. “I
know Kelly said he could take off a limb as well as he
could do it himself.â€
“What sort of man was he?â€
“He was a tall strong man with black hair and gray eyes.
He has rather a positive way of talking, and seemed to
have very strong opinions about things. He looked good-
tempered, but I should say that he could be passionate
enough if he were put out.â€
“That might be the Peter Michaeloff I know,†the gov-
ernor said. “You are sure he said that you were to ask
for him if you were a second time taken prisoner?â€
“J am quite certain he said so, though I don’t know
276 A JACOBITE EXILE
whether the promise meant much. But he certainly spoke
as if he thought he might be able to help me, and though
it did not seem likely that I could have such bad luck
twice, I think he meant at the time what he said, and I
should think he was the sort of man who would keep his
word.â€
“T will make some inquiries,†the governor said, “and
find out if I can where he is at present. Yes, I should
think that he would be able to assist you if he chose to
interest himself in the matter.â€
Ten days later the governor came into Charlie’s room.
“An officer has arrived with an order for your removal,â€
he said. “You are to be taken up again to Notteburg.â€
“I am very sorry,†Charlie said; “I have been very
comfortable here. You have been very kind to me, and IJ
feel sure the change will not be for the better; besides,
we are nearly into September now, and in that marshy
country round the lake and river the winter will be even
more severe than it is here. ‘The only thing I can think
of is that the Swedes at Vyburg may have taken a Russian
captain prisoner, and that they are going to exchange
us.â€
The governor shook his head. “There are no longer any
Swedes at Vyburg, all Ingria is in our hands and the Swedes
have retired into Finland. It may be that it is the work
of your friend. I sent a message to Peter Michaeloff,
should he be found in that neighbourhood, by an officer
who was going there, telling him that you were here, and
that having met him when a prisoner at Plescow you relied
on his good offices. Should the officer have found him
there, and have given him my message, he may probably
have begged the field-marshal to order you to be taken to
the prison there, where he could be near you and visit you
sometimes.â€
“Your doctors must have a good deal more influence in
AN OLD ACQUAINTANCE 277
your army than they have among the Swedes,†Charlie
remarked, ‘if that is how it has come about.â€
“Tt would be a matter of favour,†the governor said.
“Tf Michaeloff is acquainted with the field-marshal, or had
attended him when unwell, he could ask a little favour of
that sort. If the field-marshal sent you here he could
send for you again without more trouble than signing his
name to the order.â€
“Well, if it is Michaeloff who has done this,’ Charlie
grumbled; “no doubt he meant it kindly, but I would
much rather that he left me here. A ride of two hundred
and fifty miles in August is not pleasant to begin with,
and the thought of winter in those swamps is enough to
make one shiver.â€
“With a comfortable room and a warm stove you will
not find much to complain of, Captain Carstairs,†the
governor said with a smile; “and no doubt Michaeloff
may be enabled to obtain leave for you to go out with
him on parole. Iwas about myself to ask you, now that
you are strong and well again, whether you would like to
give your parole, and offer you the use of my horse for a
ride when inclined for it.â€
“Thank you, governor; if Michaeloff can do that it will
certainly be a boon, but I am not disposed to agree that the
change can be his work. In the first place, we don’t know
that he is there; in the second, I can hardly think that he
could have managed it; and most of all, I do not see he
could possibly have had a hand in the matter, for even sup-
posing the officer had found him directly he arrived and
then given him the message, and he had acted upon it at
once, there would have been no time for the order to get
here. It would have needed a messenger riding night and
day with frequent relays of horses to have got to Notteburg
and back since the day I spoke to you about the matter.
When am I to start?â€
278 A JACOBITE EXILE
“As soon as you have eaten your breakfast. The order
says ‘send at once,’ and field-marshals expect their orders
to be attended to promptly.â€
On descending to the courtyard after breakfast, Charlie
was surprised to see that instead of a horse as he had
expected, a well-appointed carriage with an ample supply
of rugs was standing there. The governor was there to see
him off.
“Well, sir,†Charlie said, “if this is the way in which
you convey prisoners from one place to another in Russia,
I shall certainly be able when I meet King Charles to report
to him most favourably as to the treatment of his officers
who have fallen into the czar’s hands. This will make the
journey a very much more pleasant one than I had
expected.â€
“Tam glad you are pleased,†the governor said, “and
that you have no unpleasant recollection of your stay here.â€
A minute later the carriage dashed out through the gate
of the prison. An officer was seated by Charlie’s side, two
Cossacks galloping in front, while two others rode behind.
“It was worth making the change if only for this drive,â€
Charlie thought cheerfully as the dust flew up in a cloud
before the horses’ hoofs, and he felt a sense of exhilaration
from the keen air that blew in his face. The journey was
performed with great rapidity. One of the Cossacks gal-
loped ahead as soon as they arrived at the station, where
they changed horses and had fresh ones in readiness at the
next post-house. The Cossacks themselves were changed
at every other station, fresh relays from the men stationed
there taking their place. Excellent meals were served three
times a day, and each night a comfortable bed was provided
at the last post-house where they stopped. The officer was
a pleasant fellow, but he spoke nothing except Russian,
and although Charlie fancied he understood him to some
extent when he spoke to him in Polish, he shook his head
and gave no answers in that language.
AN OLD ACQUAINTANCE 279
Late in the evening of the third day they arrived at
Notteburg. The building at which the carriage stopped
was of considerable size, it stood in the heart of the town,
and had no outward appearance of a prison. It was appar-
ently at a side entrance at which they stopped. On the
officer knocking at the door, it was opened by two Cossacks,
who, after exchanging a few words in Russian with the
officer, led Charlie along a passage and up a narrow stair-
case, which led into a somewhat spacious corridor. They
opened a door, and he found himself in a comfortable
room. A table laid for dinner with handsome silver and
appointments stood in the middle of the room, which was
carpeted with tartar rugs. One of the Cossacks opened an
inner door, which led into a bed-room snugly furnished.
“Tt must be the doctor after all,†Charlie murmured to
himself in great surprise. “I see now that there was plenty
of time for a letter to come up here and have gone back
again, and I suppose the good fellow has got leave for me
to stay for a night in his quarters before I am handed over
to the prison. Well, for the last three days I have travelled
like a prince, and this is the closing act of it.â€
He enjoyed a good wash, then returned to the other room,
and sat down in a comfortable chair to wait for his host.
He was on the point of dozing off when the door opened
and Peter Michaeloff entered. Charlie sprang to his feet.
“Well, Captain Carstairs,†the Russian said, holding out
his hand, “so it seems you had bad luck again. You must
have quite an affection for our prisons.â€
“T shall have at least a pleasant remembrance of the
kindness shown to me as a prisoner,†Charlie said; “and I
am sure it is you that I have to thank for my transfer here
and for the pleasant journey I have had. I could not have
travelled more comfortably if I had been a Russian
grandee.â€
“Well, I am glad to meet you again,†the doctor said
280 A JACOBITE EXILE
heartily. ‘‘ Let me see, it is some twenty months since we
supped together last at Kelly’s quarters. Poor fellow! I
shall miss him greatly. You have heard of his death?â€
“The governor of Bercov told me of it a fortnight ago.
I was indeed sorry to hear it. I shall never forget his
kindness to me.â€
“Yes, he was a good man, skilful in his profession, and
full of zeal and energy. ‘The blood runs faster somehow in
the veins of you islanders than of us sluggish Muscovites.
If we could but at one sweep banish every Russian official
from the highest to the lowest, and fill their places with men
from your islands, what progress we should make, what work
could we get done, what reforms could be carried out!
However, at present,†he went on changing the subject
abruptly, “the point is supper. Iam as hungry as a bear,
for I have been at work since daylight, and have eaten
nothing since I broke my fast.â€
He rang a hand-bell placed on the table; two Cossacks
entered bearing dishes, and the doctor and his guest at once
fell to on the supper, which was excellent.
“Hard work deserves good food,†the Russian said in
reply to a remark of Charlie’s as to the excellence both of
the food and wine. “Your Charles does not think so,
T hear, and lives on the roughest of food. What will be the
consequence? He will wear himself out; his restless activ-
ity will exhaust his powers and weaken his judgment. I
can eat rough food if I can get no better, but I take the
best when opportunity offers. What have you been doing
ever since you left Plescow? I inquired after you the other
day when our troops broke up Schlippenbach’s force on the
Embach; I found you were not among the prisoners, and I
wondered if you were among the killed.â€
“T was not in Livonia at the time, I was with the king’s
army at Warsaw. ‘Three regiments were sent off the day
after the battle of Clissow by boats down the Vistula, and
AN OLD ACQUAINTANCE 281
then by ship to Revel; mine was one of them, but we
arrived a fortnight too late.â€
“Then you were present at Charles’ third victory? How
that young fellow handles his troops, and what wonderful
troops they are! Now we will get into our easy chairs
again, and you shall tell me something about what you have
been doing since we last met.â€
Charlie gave a sketch of his adventures,
“So you fought at the Dwina too? You have had luck
in going through three battles without a wound.â€
When Charlie stated that he had gone to Warsaw on a
private mission, whose nature was immaterial to the story,
the doctor broke in—“ You need not tell me what it was, it
was of course something to do with Augustus. The way
Charles is hunting down that unfortunate king is shocking,
it is downright malignity. Why, he has wasted fifteen
months over it already, and it has cost him Ingria. He
could have made any terms with Poland he liked after his
victory on the Dwina, and would then have been free to use all
his forces against us. As it is, he has wasted two summers,
and is likely to waste another, and that not for any material
advantage, but simply to gratify his hatred against Augustus;
and he has left us to take Ingria almost without a blow, and
to gain, what Russia has wanted for the last hundred years,
a foothold on the Baltic. He may be a great general, but
he is no politician; no real statesman would throw away
solid advantages in order to gratify personal pique.â€
“He considers Augustus the author of this league against
him,†Charlie said. “He and the czar had no grounds at
ail of quarrel against him.â€
“We talked over that the last time we met,†the doctor
said with a laugh, “and I told you then that a foothold on
the Baltic was so necessary to Russia, that she would have
accepted the alliance of the Prince of Darkness himself to
getit. As to Augustus, I don’t defend him; he was ambi-
282 A JACOBITE EXILE
tious, as I suppose most of us are; he thought he saw an
opportunity of gaining territory. He has found that he
has made a mistake, and will of course lose a province.
But Charles’ persecution of him goes beyond all bounds;
never before did a sovereign insist upon a nation consent-
ing to dethrone its king at his dictation. But go on with
your story.â€
He listened without remark until Charlie concluded.
“‘T wish you had been in our service,†he said, “instead
of that of Sweden; you would have mounted fast. You
have all the requisites for success, above all, promptitude of
decision and quickness of invention. You did well in get-
ting away from that Jewish scoundrel in the hut and in
killing his master, but it was your adventure with the wolves
that showed your quality. That idea of setting fire to the
tree in which you were sitting, in order at once to warm
yourself and to frighten away the wolves, would never have
occurred to a Russian, and the quickness with which you
formed, with three logs, a redoubt against the wolves
showed a quick military eye, and the ability to think and
act ina moment of danger. Now tell me how it was that
you were the only officer captured the other day.â€
Charlie briefly related how he, with the pikemen of his
company, had stayed behind to check the pursuit of the
Russian horse, and to gain time for the main body to lose
themselves in the darkness. ‘The Russian struck his fist on
the arm of his chair.
“Tt was well done,†he said. “There is the difference.
A Russian captain would have done it if he had been
ordered, and he and his men would, without a question,
have sacrificed themselves to cover the retreat of the rest,
but he would never have done it on his own initiative; the
idea would never have struck him; he would have plodded
along until the enemy’s cavalry came up and annihilated
them all. By the way, why did you not ask for me at
once?â€
AN OLD ACQUAINTANCE 283
“T had asked for Dr. Kelly the day after I was taken
prisoner, and was told that he had gone to the Volga. I
thought that he would be back before long, and it was only
when I heard of his death that it occurred to me to endeav-
our to find one who had kindly promised, after a few
hours’ acquaintance only, to befriend me should [ ever find
myself in a similar scrape.â€
“Tt would have saved you the journey down to Moscow.
I heard, of course, that a Swedish captain had been made
prisoner that night, but I was myself at Moscow at the time,
and did not happen to notice the name of the officer taken.
Were you well treated at Bercov?â€
“The governor there was most kind, and all the arrange-
ments of the prison seem excellent; I had no reason what-
ever to complain. ‘The governor was good enough to come
frequently himself to talk to me. He is a fine soldierly
man, and though he did not say much, I think he is eating
his heart out at being laid on the shelf there, instead of
aiding to fight the battles of his country.â€
The Russian took out a pocket-book and made a note,
then he rose. “It is time for bed,†he said. “1am up
at daybreak.â€
“T hope I shall see you often in the prison,†Charlie
said. “I suppose I shall go in there to-morrow morning.
lam indebted to you indeed, for the very great kindness
you have shown me.â€
“No, you will not go in early. Ihave got leave for you
for another day, and I am going to take you for a drive in
the morning. You will be called an hour before sunrise.
Take your breakfast as soon as you are dressed, do not wait
for me; I have work to do before I start, and shall breakfast
elsewhere.â€
As soon as Charlie had breakfasted the next morning a
Cossack told him that the carriage was below, and he fol-
lowed him to the door where he had entered on the previ-
284 A JACOBITE EXILE
ous evening. The carriage was a simple one, but the three
horses harnessed abreast to it were magnificent animals.
Charlie stood admiring them for some little time.
“T should think,†he said to himself, “the doctor must
be a man of large property, and most likely of noble family,
who has taken up his profession from pure love of it. He
is evidently full of energy, and has an intense desire to see
Russia greater and higher in the rank of nations. I sup-
pose that, like Kelly, he is one of the principal medical
officers in the army. Certainly he must be a man of con-
siderable influence to obtain my transfer here so easily, and
to see that I travelled so comfortably. I wonder where he
is going to take me this morning.â€
Four or five minutes later Charlie’s friend appeared at
the door. He was evidently out of temper. He sprung
hastily into the vehicle, as if he had altogether forgotten
that he had asked Charlie to accompany him. ‘Then, as
his eye fell on him, he nodded and said briefly, “Jump
in.†A little surprised at the unceremonious address,
Charlie sprang into the seat beside him without hesitation,
seeing that his companion was evidently so much out of
temper that he was not thinking of what he was doing at
the moment. The coachman cracked his whip, and the
spirited horses went off at a rate of speed that threatened
danger to persons traversing the narrow streets of the town.
The cracking of the coachman’s whip, and an occasional
loud shout and the jangling of the bells, gave, however,
sufficient warning of their approach.
Charlie smiled at the alacrity with which every one sprang
out of the way, and either leapt into doorways or squeezed
themselves against the wall. He was surprised, however,
to see that not only did the townspeople show no resent-
ment at the reckless pace at which the carriage was driven,
but that the soldiers, officers as well as men, cleared out as
quickly, and without any expression of indignation or anger.
AN OLD ACQUAINTANCE 285
Indeed, most of them, as soon as they gained a place of
safety, saluted his companion. ‘‘’These Russians have evi-
dently a higher respect for their doctors than have the
Swedes,†he said to himself. ‘I am sure that not even the
chief surgeon of the army would be treated with anything
like the same respect, and indeed no one would recognize
him at all if he were not in uniform.â€
The doctor seemed to pay no attention to what was pass-
ing round him, but was muttering angrily to himself. It
was not until they dashed out into the open country that he
seemed to remember Charlie’s presence at his side.
“These people are enough to vex one of the saints by
their stupidity,†he said. ‘‘Unless they have some one
standing behind them with a whip, they cannot be trusted
to do what they are told. It is not that they are not will-
ing, but that they are stupid. No one would believe that
people could be so stupid; they drive me well-nigh to mad-
ness sometimes, and it is the more irritating because against
stupidity one is powerless. Beating a man or knocking him
down may do him good if he is obstinate or if he is care-
less, but when he is simply stupid it only makes him more
stupid than before; you might as well batter a stone wall.
You slept well and breakfasted well, Captain Carstairs?â€.
“excellently well, thank you. What superb horses you
have, doctor.â€â€™
“Ves; I like travelling fast. Life is too short to throw
away time in travelling. A busy man should always keep
good horses.â€
“Tf he can afford to do so,†Charlie said with a laugh.
“T should say that every one, busy or not, would like to sit
behind such horses as these, and, as you say, it would save
a good deal of time to one who travelled much. But three
such horses as these would only be in the reach of one with
a very long purse.â€
“They were bred here, Their sire was one of three
286 A JACOBITE EXILE
given by the king of England to the czar: the dams were
from the imperial stables at Vienna. So they ought to be
good.â€
Charlie guessed that the team must have been a present
from the czar, and remembering what Dr. Kelly had said
of the czar’s personal communications with him, he thought
that the ruler of Russia must have a particular liking for
doctors, and that the medical profession must be a more
honoured and profitable one in Russia than elsewhere.
After driving with great rapidity for upwards of an hour
along the banks of the Neva, Charlie saw a great number
of people at work on an island in the middle of the river
some distance ahead, and soon afterwards, to his surprise,
observed a multitude on the flat, low ground ahead.
“This is what I have brought you to see,†his companion
said. “Do you know what they are doing?â€
“It seems to me that they are building a fortress on that
island.â€
“You are right. We have got a footing on the sea, and
we are going to keep it. While Charles of Sweden is fool-
ing away his time in Poland in order to gratify his spite
against Augustus we are strengthening ourselves here, and
never again will Sweden wrest Ingria from our hands.â€
“Tt is marvellous how much has been done already,â€
Charlie said as he looked at the crowd of workmen.
“Everything was prepared,†his companion said.
“While the army was invading Livonia and driving the
remnant of the Swedes into Revel, thousands of carts laden
with piles of wood, stone, and cement were moving towards
Ingria. ‘Tens of thousands of workmen and peasants were
in motion from every part of Russia towards this point, and
the day after Notteburg surrendered they began their work
here. It was the opportunity in the lifetime of a nation,
and we have seized it. ‘The engineers who had in disguise
examined it months ago had reported that the island was
AN OLD ACQUAINTANCE 237
covered at high tides, and was unfit to bear the foundations
of even the slightest buildings. Piles are being driven
in as close as they will stand over every foot of ground in
it. Over this a coating of concrete many feet thick will
be laid, and on this the fortress, which is to be the centre
and heart of Russia, will rise. In the fort will stand a pile
which will be the tomb of the future czars of Russia, and
there in front of us, where you see fifty thousand peasants
at work, shall be the future capital of the empire.â€
“But it is a swamp,†Charlie said in astonishment, alike
at the vastness of the scheme and the energy with which
it was being prosecuted.
“Nature has made it a swamp,†his companion said
calmly, “but man is stronger than nature. The river will
be embanked, the morass drained, and piles driven every-
where, as has been done in the island, and the capital will
rise here. The fort has already been named the Fortress
of St. Peter and St. Paul. The capital will be named alike
after the patron saint and its founder—Petersburg.â€â€™
They had now reached the spot. ‘The carriage stopped
and they alighted. Charlie saw with astonishment that
a wide deep cut had been driven between the road and the
river in a straight line. Looking down into it he saw that
it was paved with the heads of piles, and that carts were
already emptying loads of concrete down upon it.
“very bag of cement, every stone that you see, has
been brought from a great distance,†his companion said.
“There is not a stone to be had within fifty miles of this
spot. The work would seem well-nigh impossible, but it
is the work of a nation. In another month there will be
a hundred and fifty thousand peasants at work here, and
well-nigh as many carts bringing materials for the work
and provisions for the workers.â€
“Tt is stupendous! But it will take years to complete,
and it will surely be terribly unhealthy here?â€
â€
288 A JACOBITE EXILE
“T calculate the work will occupy ten years, and will
cost a hundred thousand, may be two hundred thousand
lives,†the other said calmly; ‘but what is that to the mak-
ing of a nation? Before, Russia was stifled, she could not
grow; now we have a communication with the world. ‘The
island that lies at the mouth of the Neva will be fortified
and become a great naval arsenal and fort. Along the
walls which will rise here will be unloaded the merchandise
of Europe, and in exchange the ships will carry away our
products. Some day we shall have another port on the
south, but for the present this must suffice. You will say
that this is dangerously near our frontier, but that will soon
be remedied. As we have pushed the Swedes out of Ingria,
so in time shall we drive them from Livonia on the west
and from Finland on the north. But I must to work.â€
And he motioned to a group of five or six officers, who had
been standing a short distance away, to approach him.
Charlie was struck with the air of humility with which
they saluted his companion, who at once asked a number
of questions as to the supplies that had arrived, the progress
that had been made at a point where they had met with a
deep slough into which the piles had penetrated without
meeting with any firm ground, the number of huts that had
been erected during the past three days for the reception
of labourers, the state of stocks of meat and flour, and
other particulars. ‘To each he gave short, sharp orders.
When they had left he turned to Charlie.
“You guess who I am, I suppose?â€
“T guess now, your majesty,†Charlie said respectfully,
“but until now the idea that my kind friend was the czar
himself never entered my mind. I understood from Dr.
Kelly that you were a surgeon.â€
“I don’t think he said so,†the czar replied. “He
simply said that I could perform an amputation as well as
he could, which was not quite true. But I studied surgery
AN OLD ACQUAINTANCE 289
fora time in Holland, and performed several operations
under the eyes of the surgeons there. I saw that you did
not recognize my name. It is known to every Russian,
but doubtless you never heard of me save as Peter the Czar.
Directly you mentioned it to the commandant at Bercoy
and described my appearance he knew who it was you were
speaking of, and despatched a messenger at once to me.
He will be here in the course of a week or so. Upon your
report of the state of the prison, I at once despatched an
order for him to hand over his command to the officer next
in rank and to proceed hither at once. He is evidently a
good administrator, and heaven knows I have need of such
men here. I was pleased with you when I saw you with
my friend Dr. Kelly. It was pleasant not to be known and
hear a frank opinion such as you gave me, and as you
know, I sent you back on the following morning. I cer-
tainly told Kelly at the time not to mention who I was, but
I did not intend that he should keep you in ignorance of
it after I had left, and it was not until I heard from your
jailer at Bercov that you were ignorant that Peter Michaeloff
was the czar, that I knew that he had kept you in igno-
rance of it until the end. I should have liked to have kept
you as my guest for a time, but winter comes on early and
suddenly, and if you did not go now you might be detained
here until the spring. I have therefore given orders that
one of the Swedish vessels we captured on the lake should
be got in readiness and its crew placed on board again.
You shall embark in an hour, and it shall carry you to any
port in Sweden you may choose. The wind is from the
east, and you have every chance of a quick run thither.â€
Charlie expressed his warm thanks to the czar for his
thoughtful kindness.
“JT have much to do now,†the czar said, “and must
hand you over to the care of one of my officers. He will
accompany you in my carriage to the spot where the vessel
290 A JACOBITE EXILE
is lying, near the mouth of the river, and will there see you
on board. Should the fortune of war again throw you into
our hands, do not lose an hour in sending a message to
Peter Michaeloff.â€
So saying, the czar shook hands with Charlie, beckoned
an officer to him and gave him instructions, and then
moved away among the workmen, while Charlie with his
conductor took their places in the vehicle and drove
rapidly off. An hour later he was on board the Swedish
vessel, whose master and crew were delighted at their
sudden and unlooked for release. ‘The former was over-
joyed, for the vessel was his own property.
“You will find your things in your cabin, sir,†he said.
“They were sent on board this morning, together with
food and wine sufficient for a month’s voyage, whereas
with this wind we ought not to be more than four days.
At which port will you land?â€
“JT would rather go to Gottenburg, captain, though it is
farther for you than Stockholm.â€
“Tt shall be Gottenburg, sir. It is, thanks to you, that
I have got my liberty and my ship, and a day or two can
make no difference to me.â€
Charlie, indeed, had thought the matter over as he drove
along. He would not be able to rejoin the army until it
had gone into winter quarters, and therefore decided that
he would go to Gottenburg, apply for six months’ leave,
and spend the winter with his father. Somewhat puzzled
at the mention of his things having gone on board, he
went into the cabin, and found there a handsome pelisse
trimmed with costly furs, two robes composed of valuable
skins, and a change of clothes. The wind held fair, blow-
ing strongly, and four days later he arrived at Gottenburg.
CHAPTER XVI
IN ENGLAND AGAIN
GEasue was received with delight by his father, whom
he had not seen since the spring of the previous year.
“Then you got my letter, Charlie?†Sir Marmaduke
asked when the first greetings were over; “and yet I do
not see how you could have done so. It is little over a
fortnight since I wrote, and I had not looked for you for
another month yet.â€
“T have certainly received no letter, father. A fortnight
ago I was in a Russian prison, and my arrival here in so
short a time seems to me almost miraculous;†and he then
briefly related his singular experiences.
“Now about the letter, father,†he said as he concluded.
“T suppose you must have written to ask me to get leave
for a time, as it seems that you were expecting me shortly.
I suppose you felt that you would like me with you fora
time.â€
So I should, lad, of that you may be sure, but I should
not have called you away for that. No, I had this letter
the other day from old Banks. You know he writes to me
once a year. His letters have been only gossip so far, for
you know my precious cousin kicked him out of the house
as soon as he took possession; but this is a different
matter. Read it for yourself.â€
291
292 A JACOBITE EXILE
Charlie took the letter, and with some trouble spelt
through the crabbed handwriting.
It began: “Honoured sir and master, I hope that this
finds you and Captain Charles both well in health. I have
been laid up with rhematis in the bones, having less com-
fort in my lodgings than I used to have at Lynnwood. Your
honour will have heard that King William has fallen from
his horse and broken his collar-bone and died. May the
Lord forgive him for taking the place of better men. Anne
has come to the throne, and there were some hopes that
she would, of herself, step aside and let him to whom the
throne rightly belongs come to it. Such, however, has not
been the case, and those who know best think that things
are no forwarder for William’s death, rather indeed the
reverse, since the Princess Anne is better liked by the
people than was her sister’s husband. ‘There is no sure
news from Lynnwood. None of the old servants are there;
and I have no one from whom I can learn anything for cer-
tain. ‘Things, however, are, I hear, much worse since
young Mr. Dormay was killed in the duel in London, of
which I told you in my last letter.
“Dame Celia and Mistress Ciceley go but seldom abroad,
and when seen they smile but little, but seem sad and
downcast. ‘The usurper has but small dealing with any of
the gentry. There are always men staying there, fellows
of a kind with whom no gentleman would consort, and they
say there is much drinking and wild going on. As Cap-
tain Charles specially bade me, I have done all that I
could to gather news of Nicholson. ‘Till of late I have
heard nothing of him. He disappeared altogether from
these parts just after your honour went away. News once
came here from one who knew him, and who had gone up
to London on a visit to a kinsman, that he had met him
there dressed up in a garb in no way according with his
former position, but ruffling it at a tavern frequented by
IN ENGLAND AGAIN 293
loose blades, spending his money freely, and drinking and
dicing with the best of them.
“A week since he was seen down here in a very sorry
state, looking as if luck had gone altogether against him,
Benjamin Haddock, who lives, as you know, close to the
gate of Lynnwood, told me that he saw one pass along the
road just as it was dusk, whom he could swear was that
varlet Nicholson. He went to the door and looked after
him to make sure, and saw him enter the gate. Next day
Nicholson was in Lancaster. He was spending money
freely there, and rode off on a good horse, which looked ill
assorted with his garments, though he purchased some of
better fashion in the town. It seemed to me likely that he
must have got money from the usurper. I do not know
whether your honour will deem this news of importance,
but I thought it well to write to you at once. Any further
news I may gather I will send without fail. Your humble
servant, John Banks.â€
“There is no doubt that this is of importance,â€â€™ Charlie
said, when he had read the letter through. “It is only by
getting hold of this villain that there is any chance of our
obtaining proof of the foul treachery of which you were the
victim. Hitherto we have had no clue whatever as to
where he was to be looked for. Now there can be little
doubt that he has returned to his haunts in London. I
understand now, father, why you wanted me to get leave.
You mean that I shall undertake this business.â€
“That was my thought, Charlie. You are now well-nigh
twenty, and would scarce be recognized as the boy who leit
four years ago. The fellow would know me at once, and [
might be laid by the heels again under the old warrant;
besides being charged with breaking away from the custody
of the soldiers. Besides, in this business youth and strength
and vigour are requisite. I would gladly take the matter
in my own hands, but methinks you would have a better
294. A JACOBITE EXILE
chance of bringing it toa favourable issue. Now that Anne
is on the throne, she and her advisers will look leniently
upon the men whose only fault was devotion to her father;
and if we can once get this foul charge of assassination
lifted from our shoulders, I and Jervoise and the others
who had to fly at the same time, may all be permitted to
return, and obtain a reversal of the decree of the Act of
Confiscation of our estates.
“I have no friends at court, but I know that Jervoise was
a close acquaintance years ago of John Churchill, who is
now Duke of Marlborough, and they say high in favour with
Anne. I did not think of it when I wrote to you, but a
week later it came to my mind that his intervention might
be very useful, and I took advantage of an officer leaving
here for the army to send by hima letter to Jervoise, telling
him that there was now some hope of getting at the traitor
who served as John Dormay’s instrument in his plot
against us. I said that I had sent for you, and thought it
probable you would take the matter in hand; and I prayed
him to send me a letter of introduction for you to the
duke, so that if you could by any means obtain the proof
of our innocence of this pretended plot, he might help you
to obtain a reversal of the Act of Confiscation against us
all, Ihave asked him to write at once, and I will send the
letter after you as soon as I get it. I know nothing of
London, but I have heard of the Bull’s Head, in Fenchurch
Street, as being one frequented by travellers from the coun-
try. You had best put up there, and thither I will forward
the note from Jervoise.â€
“The letter will be a useful one indeed, father, when I
have once wrung the truth from that villain Nicholson. It
will be an expedition after my own heart. ‘here is first
the chance of punishing the villain, and then the hope of
restoring you to your place at dear old Jynnwood.â€
“You must be careful, Charlie. Remember it would
IN ENGLAND AGAIN 295
never do to kill the rascal. ‘That would be the greatest of
misfortunes; for, with his death, any chance of unmasking
the greater villain would disappear.â€
“JT will be careful, father. 1 cannot say how I shall set
about the matter yet, that must depend upon circumstances ;
but as you say, above all things I must be careful of the fel-
low’s life. When is there a ship sailing, father?â€
“The day after to-morrow, Charlie. You will want that
time for getting clothes, suitable to a young gentleman of
moderate condition up from the country on a visit to Lon-
don. You must make up your mind that it will be a long
search before you light on the fellow, for we have no clue
as to the tavern he frequents. As a roistering young squire
wanting to see London life, you could go into taverns fre-
quented by doubtful characters, for it is probably in such a
place that you will find him. However, all this I must
leave to you. You showed yourself in that Polish business
well able to help yourself out of a scrape, and if you could
do that among people of whose tongues you were ignorant,
you ought to be able to manage on English soil.â€
“At any rate I will do my best, father, of that you may
be sure. I have the advantage of knowing the fellow, and
am pretty certain that he will not know me.â€
“Not he, Charlie,†his father said confidently. “ Even
in the last two years, since you were here with Jervoise and
the others, you have changed so much that I myself might
have passed you in the street without knowing you. Now,
you had better go off and see about your things; there is no
time to be lost. I have drawn out a hundred guineas of
my money, which will, I should say, serve you while you
are away; but don’t stint it, lad. Let me know if it runs
short and I will send you more.â€
“T have money too, father. I have four months’ pay
due, besides money I have in hand, for there was but little
need for us to put our hands in our pockets.â€
296 A JACOBITE EXILE
Ten days later, Charlie arrived in the Port of London,
and took up his abode at the Bull’s Head, where he found
the quarters comfortable indeed after the rough work of
campaigning. The next morning he took a waiter into his
confidence.
“T have come to London to see a little life,†he said,
“and I want to be put into the way of doing it. I don’t
want to go to places where young gallants assemble; my
purse is not deep enough to stand such society. I should
like to go to places where I shall meet hearty young fellows,
and could have a throw of the dice, or see a main fought
by good cocks, or even sally out and have a little fun with
the watch. My purse is fairly lined, and I want some
amusement,—something to look back upon when I go
home again. What is the best way to set about it?â€
“Well, sir, if that is your humour, I have a brother who
is one of the mayor’s tipstaffs. He knows the city well, ay
and Westminster too, and the purlieus of St. James’s, and
whether you want to meet young gallants or roistering
blades, or to have a look in at places where you can hire a
man to cut another’s throat for a few crowns, he can show
you them. He will be on duty now, but I will send him a
message to come round this evening, and I warrant me he
will be here. He has showed young squires from the coun-
try over the town before this, and will guess what is on
hand when he gets my message.â€
Having nothing to do, Charlie sauntered about the town
during the day, looking into the shops, and keeping a keen
eye on passers-by, with the vague hope that he might be
lucky enough to come across his man,
After he had finished his supper, the waiter came up and
told him that his brother was outside.
“T have spoken to him, sir, and he warrants that he can
take you into the sort of society you want to meet, whatever
it may be.†Charlie followed him out. A man was stand-
ing under the lamp that swung before the door.
>
IN ENGLAND AGAIN 297
“This is the gentleman I was speaking to you of, Tony.â€
As the man took off his cap Charlie had a good view of
his face. It was shrewd and intelligent. “ You understand
what I want?†he asked, as the waiter ran into the house
again to attend to his duties.
“Yes, sir; so far as I] understood him, you wish to go to
taverns of somewhat inferior reputations, and to see some-
thing of that side of London life. If you will pardon my
boldness, it is somewhat of a dangerous venture. In such
places brawls are frequent and rapiers soon out. You look
to me like one who could hold his own in a fray,†he added
as his eye ran over the athletic figure before him, “but it is
not always fair fighting. These fellows hang together, and
while engaged with one, half a dozen might fall upon you.
As to your purse, sir, it is your own affair. You will
assuredly lose your money if you play or wager with them.
But that is no concern of mine. Neither, you may say, is
your life; but it seems to me that it is. One young gentle-
man from the country, who wanted, like you, to see life,
was killed in a brawl, and I have never forgiven myself for
having taken him to the tavern where he lost his life. Thus
I say, that though willing enough to earn a crown or two
outside my own work, I must decline to take you to places
where, as it seems to me, you are likely to get into trouble.â€
“You are an honest fellow, and I like you all the more
for speaking out frankly to me,†Charlie said, “and were
I, as I told your brother, thinking of going to such places
solely for amusement, what you say would have weight with
me; but as I see that you are to be trusted, I will tell you
more. I want to find a man who did me and mine a griev-
ous ill turn. I have no intention of killing him or any-
thing of that sort, but it is a matter of great importance to
lay hand on him. All I know of him is that he is a
frequenter of taverns here, and those not of the first char-
acter. Just at present he is, 1 have reason to believe,
298 A JACOBITE EXILE
provided with funds, and may push himself into places
where he would’not show himself when he is out of luck.
Still it is more likely he is to be found in the lowest dens
among rascals of his own kidney. I may lose a little
money, but I shall do so with my eyes open, and solely to
obtain a footing at the places where I am most likely to
meet him.â€
“That alters the affair,†the man said gravely. “It will
add to your danger; for as you know him, I suppose he
knows you also.â€
“No; it is four years since we met, and I have so greatly
changed in that time that I have no fear he would recognize
me; at any rate, not here in London, which is the last place
he would suspect me of being in.â€
“That is better. Well, sir, if that be your object, I will
do my best to help you. What is the fellow’s name and
description?â€
“He called himself Nicholson when we last met; but
like enough that is not his real name, and if it is, he may
be known by another here. He is a lanky knave of middle
height, but more than that, except that he has a shifty look
about his eyes, I cannot tell you.â€
“And his condition, you say, is changeable?â€
“Very much so, I should say. 1 should fancy that when
in funds he would frequent places where he could prey on
careless young fellows from the country like myself. When
his pockets are empty I should say he would herd with the
lowest rascals.â€â€™
“Well, sir, as you say he is in funds at present, we will
this evening visit a tavern or two frequented by young
blades, some of whom have more money than wit, and by
men who live by their wits and nothing else. But you must
not be disappointed if the search prove a long one before
you run your hare down, for the indications you have given
me are very doubtful. He may be living in Alsatia, hard
IN ENGLAND AGAIN 299
by the Temple, which, though not so bad as it used to be,
is still an abode of dangerous rogues. But more likely you
may meet him at the taverns in Westminster or near
Whitehall; for if he has means to dress himself bravely it is
there he will most readily pick up gulls. I will, with your
permission, take you to the better sort to begin with, and
then when you have got more accustomed to the ways of
these places you can go to those a step lower, where, I should
think, he is more likely to be found; for such fellows spend
their money freely when they get it, and unless they man-
age to fleece some young lamb from the country, they soon
find themselves unable to keep pace with the society of
places where play runs high, and men call for their bottles
freely. Besides, in such places, when they become unable
to spend money freely they soon get the cold shoulder from
the host, who cares not to see the money that should be
spent on feasting and wine diverted into the pockets of
others. 1 shall leave you at the door of these places; I am
too well known to enter. I put my hand on the shoulder
of too many men during the year for me to go into any
society without the risk of some one knowing me again.â€
‘They accordingly made their way down to Westminster,
and Charlie visited several taverns. At each he called for
wine, and was speedily accosted by one or more men, who
perceived that he was a stranger, and scented booty. He
stated freely that he had just come up to town, and intended
to stay some short time there. He allowed himself to be
persuaded to enter the room where play was going on, but
declined to join, saying that as yet he was ignorant of the
ways of town, and must see a little more of them before he
ventured his money, but that when he felt more at home he
should be ready enough to join in a game of dice or cards,
being considered a good hand at both. After staying at
each place about half an hour he made his way out, getting
rid of his would-be friends with some little difficulty, and
with a promise that he would come again ere long.
800 A JACOBITE EXILE
For six days he continued his inquiries, going out every
evening with his guide, and taking his meals for the most
part at one or other of the taverns, in hopes that he might
happen upon the man of whom he was in search. At the
end of that time he had a great surprise. As he entered
the hotel to take supper the waiter said to him, “There is a
gentleman who has been asking for you in the public room.
He arrived an hour ago, and has hired a chamber.â€
“Asking for me?†Charlie repeated in astonishment.
“You must be mistaken.â€
“Not at all, sir. He asked for Mr. Charles Conway, and
that is the name you wrote down in the hotel-book when
you came.â€â€™
“That must be me, sure enough, but who can be asking
for me I cannot imagine. However, I shall soon know.â€
And ina state of utter bewilderment as to who could have
learnt his name and address, he went into the coffee-room.
There happened at the moment to be but one person there,
and as he rose and turned towards him, Charlie exclaimed
in astonishment and delight, “Why, Harry, what on earth
brings you here? I am glad to see you, indeed, but you
are the last person in the world I should have thought of
meeting here in London.â€
“You thought I was in a hut made as wind-tight as pos-
sible, before the cold set in in earnest. So I should have
been, with six months of a dull life before me, if it had not
been for Sir Marmaduke’s letter, Directly my father read
it through to me he said, ‘Get your valises packed at once,
Harry. Iwill go to the colonel and get your leave granted.
Charlie may have to go into all sorts of dens in search of
this scoundrel, and it is better to have two swords than one
in such places. Besides, as you know the fellow’s face you
can aid in the search, and are as likely to run against him
as he is. His discovery is as important to us as it is to
him, and it may be the duke will be more disposed to
IN ENGLAND AGAIN 301
interest himself when he sees the son of his old friend than
upon the strength of a letter only.†You may imagine [
did not lose much time. But I did not start after all until
the next morning, for when the colonel talked it over with
my father he said, ‘Let Harry wait till to-morrow. I shall
be seeing the king this evening. He is always interested
in adventure, and I will tell him the whole story, and ask
him to write a few lines, saying that Harry and Carstairs
are young officers who have borne themselves bravely and
to his satisfaction. It may help with the duke, and will
show at any rate that you have both been out here and not
intriguing at St. Germains.’
“The colonel came in late in the evening with a paper,
which the king had told Count Piper to write and sign, and
had himself put his signature to it. I have got it sewn up
in my doublet with my father’s letter to Marlborough.
They are too precious to lose, but I can tell you what it is
word for word: ‘By order of King Charles XII. of Sweden.
This is to testify to all whom it may concern, that Captain
Charles Carstairs and Captain Harry Jervoise—’ â€
“Oh, Iam glad, Harry!â€â€™ Charlie interrupted. ‘It was
horrid that I should have been a captain for the last year
and you a lieutenant. Iam glad indeed.â€
“Yes, it is grand, isn’t it, and very good of the king to
do it like that. Now I will go on—‘have both served me
well and faithfully during the war, showing great valour, and
proving themselves to be brave and honourable gentlemen,
as may be seen, indeed, from the rank that they, though
young in years, have both attained, and which is due solely
to their deserts.’ What do you think of that?â€
“Nothing could be better, Harry. Did you see my
father at Gottenburg?â€
“Yes. The ship I sailed by went to Stockholm, and I
was lucky enough to find there another starting for England
in a few hours. She touched at Gottenburg to take in
302 A JACOBITE EXILE
some cargo, and I had time to see Sir Marmaduke, who
was good enough to express himself as greatly pleased that
I was coming over to join you.â€
“Well, Harry, I am glad indeed. Before we talk, let
us go in and have supper, that is if you have not already
had yours. If you have, I can wait a bit.â€
“No; they told me you had ordered your supper at six,
so I told them I would take mine at the same time; and
indeed I can tell you that I am ready for it.â€
Aiter the meal, Charlie told his friend the steps he was
taking to discover Nicholson.
“Do you feel sure that you would know him again,
Harry?â€
“Quite sure. Why, I saw him dozens of times at Lynn-
wood.â€
“Then we shall now be able to hunt for him separately,
Harry. Going to two or three places of an evening, I
always fear that he may come in after I have gone away.
Now one of us can wait till the hour for closing, while the
other goes elsewhere.â€
For another fortnight they frequented all the places
-where they thought Nicholson would be most likely to show
himself; then, after a consultation with their guide, they
agreed that they must look for him at lower places.
“Like enough,†the tipstaff said, “he may have run
through his money the first night or two after coming up
to town. That is the way with these fellows. As long as
they have money they gamble; when they have none, they
cheat or turn to other evil courses. Now that there are
two of you together, there is less danger in going to such
places; for though these rascals may be ready to pick a
quarrel with a single man, they know that it is a dangerous
game to play with two who look perfectly capable of de-
fending themselves.â€
For a month they frequented low taverns. They dressed
IN ENGLAND AGAIN 308
themselves plainly now, and assumed the character of
young fellows who had come up to town, and had fallen
into bad company and lost what little money they had
brought with them, and were now ready for any desperate
enterprise. Still no success attended their search.
““T can do no more for you,†their guide said. “TI have
taken you to every house that such a man would be likely
to use. Of course there are many houses near the river
frequented by bad characters. But here you would chiefly
meet men connected in some way with the sea, and you
would be hardly likely to find your man there.â€
“We shall keep on searching,†Charlie said. “He may
have gone out of town for some reason, and may return
any day. We shall not give it up till spring.â€
“Well, at any rate, sirs, I will take your money no
longer. You know your way thoroughly about now, and if
at any time you should want me, you know where to find
me. It might be worth your while to pay a visit to Isling-
ton, or even to go as far as Barnet. The fellow may have
done something, and may think it safer to keep in hiding,
and in that case Islington and Barnet are as likely to suit
him as anywhere.â€
The young men had, some time before, left the inn and
taken a lodging. ‘This they found much cheaper, and as
they were away from breakfast until midnight, it mattered
little where they slept. They took the advice of their
guide, stayed a couple of nights at Islington, and then
went to Barnet. In these places there was no occasion to
visit the taverns, as being comparatively small, they would
either in the day-time or after dark have an opportunity of
meeting most of those living there. Finding the search
ineffectual, Charlie proposed that they should go for a long
walk along the north road.
“T am tired of staring every man I meet in the face,
Harry. And I should like for once to be able to throw it
304 A JACOBITE EXILE
all off and take a good walk together as we used to do in the
old days. We will go eight or ten miles out, stop at some
wayside inn for refreshments, and then come back here for
the night, and start back again for town to-morrow.â€
Harry at once agreed, and taking their hats they started.
‘They did not hurry themselves, and carefully avoiding
all mention of the subject that had occupied their thoughts
for weeks, they chatted over their last campaign, their
friends in the Swedish camp, and the course that affairs
were likely to take. After four hours’ walking they came
to a small wayside inn standing back twenty or thirty yards
from the road.
“Tt is a quiet-looking little place,†Charlie said, “and
does but a small trade, I should say. However, no doubt
they can give us some bread and cheese, and a mug of ale,
which will last us well enough till we get back to Barnet.â€
The landlord placed what they demanded before them
and then left the room again, replying by a short word or
two to their remarks on the weather.
“A surly ill-conditioned sort of fellow,†Harry said.
“Tt may be, Harry, that badness of trade has spoiled his
temper. However so long as his beer is good it matters
little about his mood.â€
They had finished their bread and cheese, and were
sitting idly, being in no hurry to start on their way back,
when a man on horseback turned off from the road and
came up the narrow lane in which the house stood. As
Charlie, who was facing that way, looked at him he started,
and grasped Harry’s arm.
“Tt is our man,†he said; “itis Nicholson himself! To
think of our searching all London these weeks past and
stumbling upon him here.â€
The man stopped at the door, which was at once opened
by the landlord.
‘All right, I suppose, landlord,†the man said as he
swung himself from his horse.
IN ENGLAND AGAIN 305
“There is no one here except two young fellows, who
look to me as if they had spent their last penny in London,
and were travelling down home again.†He spoke in a
lowered voice, but the words came plainly enough to the
ears of the listeners within. Another word or two was
spoken, and then the landlord took the horse and led it
round to a stable behind, while its rider entered the room.
He stopped for amoment at the open door of the tap-room
and stared at the two young men, who had just put on their
hats again. ‘They looked up carelessly, and Harry said —
“Fine weather for this time of year.â€
The man replied by a grunt, and then passed on into the
landlord’s private room.
“That is the fellow, sure enough, Charlie,†Harry said
in a low tone. “TI thought your eyes might have deceived
you, but I remember his face well. Now what is to be
done?â€
“We won’t lose sight of him again,†Charlie said.
“Though if we do we shall know where to pick up his
traces, for he evidently frequents this place. I should
say he has taken to the road, there were a brace of pistols
in the holsters. ‘That is how it is that we have not found
him before. Well, at any rate, there is no use trying to
make his acquaintance here. ‘The first question is, Will
he stay here for the night or not—and if he does not,
which way will he go?â€
“He came from the north,†Harry said. “So if he goes
it will be towards town.â€
“That isso. Our best plan will be to pay our reckoning
and start. We will go a hundred yards or so down the
road, and then lie down behind a hedge, so as to see if he
passes. If he does not leave before nightfall, we will come
up to the house and reconnoitre. If he does not leave by
ten, he is here for the night, and we must make ourselves as
snug as we can under a stack. ‘The nights are getting cold,
306 A JACOBITE EXILE
but we have slept out in a deal colder weather than this.
However, 1 fancy he will go on, it is early for a man to
finish a journey. If he does, we must follow him and keep
him in sight if possible.â€
Two hours later they saw from their hiding-place Nichol-
son ride out from the lane. He turned his horse’s head in
their direction.
“That is good,†Charlie said. “If he is bound for
London we shall be able to get into his company somehow;
but if he had gone up to some quiet place north, we might
have had a lot of difficulty in getting acquainted with him.â€
As soon as the man had ridden past they leapt to their
feet, and at a run kept along the hedge. He had started
at a brisk trot, but when, a quarter of a mile on, they
reached a gate, and looked up the road after him, they saw
to their satisfaction that the horse had already fallen into
a walk.
“He does not mean to go far from Barnet,†Charlie ex-
claimed. “If he had been bound farther he would have
kept on at a trot. We will keep on behind the hedges as
long aswe can. If he were to look back and see us always
behind him he might become suspicious.â€
They had no difficulty in keeping up with the horseman.
Sometimes when they looked out he was a considerable
distance ahead, having quickened his pace; but he never
kept that up long, and by brisk running, and dashing reck-
lessly through the hedges running at right angles to that
they were following, they soon came up to him again.
Once he had gone so far ahead that they took to the road,
and followed it until he again slackened his speed; they
thus kept him in sight till they neared Barnet.
“We can take to the road now,†Harry said. “Even if
he should look round he will think nothing of seeing two
men behind him, we might have turned into it from some
by-lane. At any rate we must chance it. We must find
where he puts up for the night.â€
CHAPTER XVII
THE NORTH COACH
ARNET was then, as now, a somewhat straggling place.
Soon after entering it the horseman turned off from the
main road. His pursuers were but fifty yards behind him,
and they kept him in sight until, after proceeding a quarter
of a°mile he stopped at a small tavern, where he dis-
mounted, and a boy took his horse and led it round by the
side of the house.
“Run to earth!†Harry said exultantly. “He is’ not
likely to move from there to-night.â€
“At any rate he is safe for a couple of hours,†Charlie
said. “So we will go to our inn and have a good meal.
By that time it will be quite dark, and we will have a look
at the place he has gone into; and if we can’t learn any-
thing we must watch it by turns till midnight. We will
arrange at the inn to hire a horse. One will be enough,
He only caught a glimpse of us at that inn, and certainly
would not recognize one of us if he saw himalone. The
other can walk.â€
“But which way, Charlie? He may go back again.â€
“Tt is hardly likely he came here merely for the pleasure
of stopping the night at that little tavern. I have no doubt
he is bound for London. You shall take the horse, Harry,
and watch until he starts, and then follow him, just manag-
3807
308 A JACOBITE EXILE
ing to come up close to him as he gets into town. I will
start early and wait at the beginning of the houses, and
it is hard if one or other of us does not manage to find out
where he hides.â€
They had no difficulty in arranging with the landlord for
a horse, which was to be left in a stable he named in town.
They gave him a deposit, for which he handed them a
note, by which the money was to be returned to them by
the stable-keeper on their handing over the horse in good
condition.
After the meal they sallied out again and walked to the
tavern, which was a small place standing apart from other
houses. ‘There was a light in the tap-room, but they guessed
that here, as at the other stopping-place, the man they
wanted would be ina private apartment. Passing the house
they saw a light in a side-window, and noiselessly opening
a little wicket-gate they stole into the garden. Going a
short distance back from the window, so that the light
should not show their faces, they looked in, and saw the
man they sought sitting by the fire, with a table on which
stood a bottle and two glasses beside him, and another man
facing him.
“Stay where you are, Harry. I will steal up to the win-
dow and find out whether I can hear what they are saying.â€
Stooping close under the window he could hear the mur-
mur of voices, but could distinguish no words. He rejoined
his companion. “Iam going to make a trial to overhear
them, Harry, and it is better that only one of us should be
here. You go back to the inn and wait for me there.â€
“What are you going to do, Charlie?â€
“T am going to throw a stone through the lower part of
the window. Then I shall hide. They will rush out, and
when they can find no one they will conclude that the stone
was thrown by some mischievous boy going along the road.
When all is quiet again I will creep up to the window, and
THE NORTH COACH 309
it will be hard if I don’t manage to learn something of what
they are saying.â€
The plan was carried out, and Charlie, getting close up
to the window, threw a stone through one of the lowest of
the little diamond-shaped panes. He heard a loud exclama-
tion of anger inside, and then sprang away and hid himself
at the other end of the garden. A moment later he heard
loud talking in the road, and a man with a lantern came
round to the window, but in a few minutes all was quiet
again, and Charlie cautiously made his way back to the
window and crouched beneath it. He could hear plainly
enough now the talk going on within.
“What was I saying when that confounded stone inter-
rupted us?â€
“You were saying, captain, that you intended to have
a week in London, and then to stop the North coach.â€
“Yes, I have done well lately, and can afford a week’s
pleasure. Besides, Jerry Skinlow got a bullet in his shoul-
der last week in trying to stop a carriage on his own
account, and Jack Mercer’s mare is laid up lame, and it
wants four to stop a coach neatly. Jack Ponsford is in
town, I shall bring him out with me.â€
“T heard that you were out of luck a short time ago.â€
“Yes, everything seemed against me. My horse was
shot, and just at the time I had been having a bad run at
the tables and had lost my last stiver. 1 was in hiding for
a fortnight at cne of the cribs; for they had got a descrip-
tion of me from an old gentleman, who with his wife and
daughter I had eased of their money and watches. It was
a stupid business. I dropped a valuable diamond ring
on the ground, and in groping about for it my mask came
off, and like a fool I stood up in the full light of the car-
riage-lamp. So I thought it better for all reasons to get
away for a month or so until things quieted down. I wanted
to visit my banker, and it was a good many miles to
tramp.â€
310 A JACOBITE EXILE
“Oh, you have got a banker, captain?â€
“T have one who is just as good, though I cannot say he
shells out his money willingly—in fact he was rude enough
to say when I called this time, that if I ever showed my
face to him again he would shoot me even if he were hung
for it. Bad taste, wasn’t it? At any rate I mustn’t call
on him again too soon.â€
“You haven’t settled on the night yet, I suppose, cap-
tain?†:
“About the end of next week. Friday will be a full
moon, I think, and I like a moon for the work. It gives
light enough to see what you are doing, and not light
enough for them to see much of you. So I suppose I may
as well fix Friday. I will send up a message for Jack
Mercer and Jerry Skinlow to be here on Thursday evening.
J will be here that afternoon and settle matters with them
as to where they shall meet me, and what each man shall
do. Then I will ride back to town, and come ont again
just as it gets dark, with Jack Ponsford.â€
“T suppose you will do it north of here?â€
“No, I will do it a mile or two out of town. The road
north of this is getting rather a bad reputation, and in
going out of Barnet the guard now looks to his blunderbuss,
and the passengers get their pistols ready. It isn’t once
in a hundred times they have pluck enough to use them,
but they always think they will until the time comes. Near
town we shall take them by surprise, and stop them before
they have time to think of getting out their arms. Con-
found that window; shove something into the hole, John-
son. I can feel the cold right down my back.â€
A cloth was pushed into the broken pane, and Charlie
could hear no more of what was said inside. He had
heard, indeed, enough for his purpose, but he had hoped
to gather the name of the place at which the man would
put up in London. However, he was well satisfied with
his success, and at once made his way back to the inn.
THE NORTH COACH 311
“Well, Charlie, how have you succeeded?†Harry asked
as he sat down at the table.
“Could not be better, Harry, though I did not find out
where he puts up in London. However, that is of small
consequence. In the first place, I found out that our sus-
picions were right, and that the fellow is a highwayman,
and seems to be captain of a gang consisting anyhow of
three, and perhaps of more, fellows like himself. In the
second place, he intends with his three comrades to attack
the coach on Friday week, two or three miles out of town.
Nothing could better suit our purpose, even if we had
planned the affair ourselves. Of course we will be there.
If we can capture him while engaged in that work, we can
get anything out of him. He has either got to confess or
be hanged.â€
“That is a stroke of good luck indeed,†Harry exclaimed.
“Tt will be rather difficult to manage, though. ‘The fel-
lows will be sure to be masked; and if we were to shoot
him instead of one of the others, it would be fatal.â€
“Yes, that would be awkward. Besides,†Charlie said,
“even if we did recognize him and shot his horse, he might
jump up behind one of the other men, or might make off
across the country, and we might lose sight of him before
we could get down from the top of the coach to pursue.â€
“It might be better if we were mounted instead of being
on the coach.â€
“Better in some ways, Harry; but if they heard two
mounted men coming along beside the coach, they would
probably take the alarm and not attack at all; while, if we
were to keep a bit behind and ride up as soon as we heard
the firing—for they generally shoot one of the horses to
bring the coach to a stand-still—they might ride off as
soon as they heard the sound of the horses on the road.
Those fellows are splendidly mounted, their lives depend
upon it, and nothing we should be able to hire would be
likely to have a chance with them.â€
312 A JACOBITE EXILE
“Well, we shall have plenty of time to think this over,
Charlie. I suppose we shall carry out our plan to-morrow,
as we arranged.â€
“Certainly. It is as important to find out where he
lives in London as it was before, for if he gets away we
can then look him up there. We may as well go to bed
at once, for I shall start at four, so as to get to town before
him however early he may be off. But as we know now
he is going up on pleasure and not on business, I don’t
suppose he will be in any hurry in the morning.â€
Charlie arrived in town about eight o’clock, and having
breakfasted at the first tavern he came to, walked along
for some distance to decide upon the spot where he should
take up his position. As Nicholson was going up, as he
said, to enjoy himself, it was not likely that he would put
up at Islington, but would take up his quarters in the cen-
tre of the town. He therefore decided to walk on until he
came to some junction of important roads, and there wait,
as the man might make either for the city or Westminster,
though the latter appeared the more probable direction.
Here he walked up and down for an hour, and then enter-
ing a tavern took his place at the window, where he could
see up the street, called for a stoup of wine, and prepared
for a long wait. It was not indeed until three o’clock
that he saw Nicholson coming along. He was more gaily
dressed than he had been on the previous day. He had
on a green cloth coat with gold braid round the cuffs, an
embroidered waistcoat, yellow breeches, top-boots, and
three-cornered hat. He was riding at foot-pace.
Charlie went to the door as soon as he passed, and saw
that, as he expected, he took the road to Westminster.
Looking round he saw Harry riding about a hundred yards
behind. Charlie had no difficulty in keeping up with
Nicholson, and traced him to a house in a quiet street
lying behind the Abbey. A boy came out and held the
THE NORTH COACH 313
horse while its rider dismounted, and then led it away to
the stable of an inn a short distance away. Charlie turned
at once and joined Harry.
“T need not have taken all the trouble I have, Harry,
still there was no knowing. Evidently the fellow has no
fear of being detected, and is going to pass for a week as
a gentleman from the country. I suppose he is in the
habit of stopping at that house whenever he comes up with
his pockets lined, and is regarded there as a respectable
gentleman by the landlord. Now you had better take your
horse to the stable where you agreed to hand it over, and
we will meet at our lodgings and plan what to do next.â€
‘The discussion did not lead to much, there did not seem
to them anything to do until the day when the coach was
to be attacked, but they agreed it would be well to take
the advice of their friend the tipstaff. Hitherto they had
not told him more of their motive for desiring to find Nich-
olson than Charlie had said at his first interview with him.
‘They thought it would be better now to make him more
fully acquainted with the facts, for they had found him
shrewd, and eager to assist them to the best of his power.
‘They therefore sent a boy with a note to him at the court,
and at seven o’clock he came to their lodgings.
“We have found our man,†Charlie said as he entered.
“Tam very glad to hear it, gentlemen. I had quite
given up all hopes that you would be able to do so, and
thought he must have left town altogether for a time.â€
“Sit down and take a glass of wine; we want your advice
in this matter, and unless you know how much there is at
stake you will not be able to enter fully into the affair.
Some four years ago this fellow was concerned in a plot by
which six gentlemen, among whom were our friends, were
brought to ruin. They were in the habit of meeting
together, being all of similar political opinions, and advan-
tage was taken of this by a man, who hoped to profit largely
314 A JACOBITE EXILE
by their ruin, especially by that of my father. In order
to bring this about he recommended this fellow we are in
search of to my father, who happened at the time to be in
want of a servant.
“The fellow undoubtedly acted as a spy, for I once
caught him at it. But spying alone would have been of no
use, for there was nothing at any time said that would have
brought harm upon them. They simply discussed what
thousands of other people have discussed, the measures that
should be taken on behalf of the Stuarts if one of them
came over from France supported by a French force. The
fellow, however, swore that the object of these meetings was
to arrange for an assassination of William. He gave full de-
tails of the supposed plot, and in order to give substance to
his statements he hid ina cabinet of my father’s a number of
compromising papers, professing to be letters from abroad.
“These were found by the officers sent to arrest my
father. He and his five friends managed to escape, but
their estates were forfeited. Of course, what we want to
prove is the connection between this spy ard his employer,
who, for his services jn bringing this supposed plot to light,
received as a.reward my father’s estates. There is no way
of doing this unless this man can be brought to confess his
own villainy in the matter of the letters, and to denounce
the scoundrel whose agent he was. Probably by this time
he has got nearly all he can expect from his employer, and
will at least feel no scruples in exposing him if by so doing
he can save his own neck. Now, we have not only dis-
covered the man, but have found out that he is a notorious
highwayman and the leader of a gang; but more, I have
found out the day and hour on which he proposes to stop
and rob the North coach.â€
“Well, Mr. Carstairs, if you have done that,†the man
said, “you have done marvels. That you should find the
man might be a piece of good luck, but that you should have
learned all this about him seems to me wonderful.â€
THE NORTH COACH 315
“Tt was a lucky accident altogether. We saw him,
watched him, and managed to overhear a conversation from
which we gathered these facts. It was all simple enough.
Of course our idea is that we should, if possible, catch him
in the act of robbing the coach, bind and take charge of
him, saying that we should hand him over to justice, when
the coachman and passengers would, of course, appear to
testify against him. Instead of doing this we should take
him somewhere, and then give him the option of either
making a clean breast of the whole story, and remaining in
our custody until called upon to testify to his statement in
a court of justice whenever required, or of being handed
over to the authorities to be tried and hung as a highway-
man. One of our greatest difficulties is how to effect his
capture. ‘The attack will be made at night on the coach,
and in the darkness we might shoot him or he might get
away. He is at present in London at a lodging in a street
behind the Abbey, where, doubtless, his real profession is
altogether unsuspected by the people of the house. Now,
you know the whole affair, let us have your opinion as to
the manner in which we had best set about the business.â€
‘The man sat for some time in silence.
“T can think of no better plan than yours, sir, and yet it
seems to me that there is scarcely any chance of your
catching him at the coach. Of course it would be easy
enough if you did not care whether you killed or caught
him. All you would have to do would be to get half a
dozen stout fellows armed with pistols on the coach with
you instead of passengers, and then you would be pretty
certain to kill some of them, perhaps all; but as you can’t
do that, and are afraid to shoot lest you should kill him, it
seems to me that you have a very small chance of catching
him that way.â€
Charlie and his friend so thoroughly saw this that they
sat silent when he ceased speaking.
316 A JACOBITE EXILE
“We could not arrest him now, I suppose?†Harry said
at last.
“Well, you see, you have got nothing against him. He
may have been a Knight of the Road for the last five years,
but you have no witnesses to prove it, and it is not much
use to accuse him of intending to rob the North mail.
You have no proofs even of that, it is only your word
against his. There is no doubt that after they have robbed
the coach they will separate, they may go away in twos or
singly. Now, you see, we know three of this fellow’s
hiding-places. He would hardly choose the one at Barnet,
it is too close; it is more likely he would choose the next
place, the little inn in which you saw him first; but I think
it more likely still that he and his mates will divide the
plunder half a mile or so from the place where they stopped
the coach, and will then separate, and I am inclined to
think his most likely course is to strike off from the main
road, make a long round, and come down before morning
to where he is now. He may take his horse into its stable,
or more likely he may leave it at some place he may know
of on the road leading out through Putney, and then arrive
at his lodgings just about daybreak. He wouid explain he
had been at a supper and had kept it up all night, and no
one would even have a suspicion he had been engaged in
the affair with the coach. I am sure that is his most likely
plan.â€
“Then what would you do?†Harry asked.
“What I should do is this. I will get two sharp active
boys. I know of two who would just do, they have done
jobs for us before now. I will give them the exact descrip-
tion of those two taverns, and send them down the day
before the coach is to be attacked, and tell them that that
night they are each to keep watch over one of them, see
who goes in, watch till they come out, and then follow
them, for days if necessary, and track them down. Then
THE NORTH COACH 317
they can send word up by the guard of the coach each day; so
that if we find our man does not come back here by Saturday
morning, we shall have news that will put us on his track
again before long. However, I think he is sure to come
back here. You had better point out to me this evening
where he lodges, and I shall be able to find out before long
whether they are respectable people or whether they are
likely to be pals of his. If they are respectable I will see
them on Friday evening, show them my badge, and tell
them that the man who has been lodging here is a notorious
highwayman, and that J am going to arrest him. To pre-
vent any chance of a mistake I will put three or four of my
mates round the house, to see that no one goes out to give
him the alarm. I will come down and open the door for
you at two o’clock in the morning; you can then come up
with me into his bed-room, and as he comes in I will nab
him.
“Tf, on the other hand, I find the people of the house
have a doubtful reputation in the neighbourhood, we must
simply hide in door-ways, make a rush upon him as he goes
up to the house and overpower him there. Jf one stands
in his doorway and leaps out on him as he comes up, he
won’t have much chance of using a pistol. I will have a
cart ready close by. We will truss him up tightly, gag him
and put him into it, and I will have some place ready for
us to drive him to, if you think that plan is as good as any
other.â€
“T think it is an excellent plan and could not be better,â€
Charlie exclaimed, and his friend heartily agreed with
him,
“T think you will be able to get anything out of him
when you get him there,†said the tipstaff. “He is sure
to have some of the swag about him, and even if none of
the passengers of the coach are able to swear to him, that
and the talk you overheard would be sufficient to hang
him,â€
318 A JACOBITE EXILE
“Can those boys you speak of write?â€
“Not they, sir.â€
“There might be a difficulty about a verbal message.â€
“The guard will give it all right if he gets half a crown
with it; you need not trouble about that, sir. I will
have a man to meet each coach as it comes in. And now
we have arranged matters, sir, I will go with you to see
the house, and will send a sharp fellow down to-morrow
to make inquiries about the people of the place.â€
When they returned the friends sat for a long time talk-
ing together. The suggested plan looked so hopeful that
they felt confident of its success.
“T think, Charlie,†Harry said, “it would be a good
thing for us to present ourselves to the Duke of Marl-
borough; then we shall see if he is disposed to take an
interest in us and help us. If he is, he will tell us what
had best be done towards getting Nicholson’s statement
made in the presence of some sort of official who will act
on it. If he gives us the cold shoulder we shall have to
do as best we can in some other direction, and it will be
well to have the matter settled if possible before we catch
the fellow.â€
“T think that will be a very good plan, Harry. I know
where he lives. I inquired directly I came over. ‘To-
morrow morning we can go there and inquire at the door
at what hour he receives callers.â€
The next day at eleven o’clock the young men, dressed
in their best attire, called at the duke’s. ‘They were
informed that the great man was at home, and would be as
likely to see them then as at any other hour. Accordingly
they entered, and were shown into an ante-room, and sent
their names in by a footman. He returned with a request
that they would follow him, and were shown into a library,
where a singularly handsome man in the prime of life was
sitting at a desk. He looked at them in some surprise.
“THE KING OF SWEDEN SVURAKS VERY HIGHLY OF YOU Bovrii?
THE NORTH COACH 319
“Ts there not some mistake, young gentlemen?†he
asked. ‘‘ My servant gave the names as Captain Jervoise
and Captain Carstairs. J do not recall the names as those
of officers in her majesty’s service.â€
“No, my lord, we have the honour to be captains in the
service of King Charles of Sweden, as this document signed
both by his minister, Count Piper, and by the king himself
will testify.â€
The duke took the paper and read it.
“The king of Sweden speaks very highly of you both,
gentlemen,†he said cordially. ‘It is no mean credit to
have gained such warm praise from the greatest general of
his time. What can I do for you? Do you wish to be
transferred from the service of Sweden to that of her
majesty! We have need of good officers, and I can prom-
ise that you shall receive the same rank that you now hold,
and it is likely that before long you will have an opportu-
nity of seeing some service under your national flag.â€
“T thank you warmly for your kindness, my lord, but it
is not with that view that we have now come to you,
though I am sure that we both should prefer to fight under
our own flag rather than under that of a foreign king, how-
ever kindly he may be disposed to us personally. We have
called upon a private matter, and J am the bearer of this
letter from my father, who had once the honour of your
lordship’s friendship.â€
“Tervoise,†the duke repeated, as he took the letter.
“Not Mat Jervoise, surely?â€
“That is my father’s name, sir.â€
“Do I remember him? Why, he was one of my closest
friends when I was a lad, and I once stayed with him at
his father’s place for a fortnight on a journey I took to
the north. But I will read his letter.—What changes
happen,†he said as he Jaid it down. “To think that
Mat Jervoise should be an exile, his old home in the hands
320 A JACOBITE EXILE
of strangers, and he a major in the Swedish service, and
that I should never have heard a word about it! Well,
young sir,†and he held out his hand to Harry, “I can
promise you my aid and protection to the utmost in what-
ever matter you may be concerned. I seem to remember
the name of your companion too.â€
“His father, Sir Marmaduke, was a neighbour of ours.
‘There has always been great friendship between the two
families.â€
“Of course, | remember him now. He was some fifteen
or twenty years older than your father. I remember that
I went over with your father and grandfather and dined at
his place. He is still alive and well, I hope?â€
“He is both, sir,†Charlie said; “but, like Major Jer-
volse, an exile.â€
“You amaze me, but I will not ask you to tell me more
now. I have to be at St. James’s at twelve. Let me see,
this evening I shall be engaged. Come to-morrow morn-
ing at half-past eight, and I shall then be able to give you
an hour, or may be two if necessary, and will then hear
the whole story fully.â€
The young men on presenting themselves the next morn-
ing at the hour named were at once ushered in.
“Now, let us lose no time,†the duke said, after shaking
hands heartily. ‘‘ Which of you will tell the story?â€
“Carstairs will do so, my lord,†Harry replied. “The
mischief was hatched in his house, and my father and six
other gentlemen were the victims of the treachery of a
kinsman of his.â€
Charlie told the story of the events that had brought
about the ruin of his father and friends.
“It is monstrous!†the duke exclaimed indignantly,
when he had brought this part of his story to a conclusion.
“That my old friend Mat Jervoise should be concerned in
a plot for assassination, is, I would pledge my life, untrue;
THE NORTH COACH 321
and Sir Marmaduke Carstairs was, I know, an honourable
gentleman, who would be equally incapable of such an act.
‘That they were both Jacobites I can well believe, for the
Jacobites are strong everywhere in the north, but, as half
of us are or have been Jacobites, that can scarcely be
counted as an offence. At any rate a Stuart is wpon the
throne now, and as long as she reigns there is no fear that
a civil war will be set up by another of the race. ‘The
story as you have told it, sir, is, I doubt not for a moment,
true, but at present it is unsupported, and though on my
assurance of their loyalty I think I can promise that her
majesty would extend a pardon to the gentlemen who have
been so unjustly accused, I fear that she could not by her
own act restore the estates that have been confiscated,
unless you can bring some proof that this fellow you speak
of was suborned to get up false evidence against them.â€
“That, sir, is what I shall have the honour to inform you
now.â€
And Charlie then related the story of their quest for the
man Nicholson and its result.
“ Rarely devised and carried out,†the duke said warmly.
“Do you lay the knave by the heels, and frighten him into
confessing the truth, and I will see to the rest of the matter.
I do not know that I ought to let the North coach be
robbed after the information you have given me, but as we
will hunt down all the other fellows, and shall probably
recover the booty they carry off, the passengers will have
no reason to grumble. Well, young sirs, the king of
Sweden has given you a testimonial as to your bravery and
conduct; if necessary I will give you one for your ingenuity
in planning and carrying out a difficult scheme. 50 you
have both been with the Swedes through their campaign
against the Russians and Poles. Ienvy you. King Charles’
service is a grand school for soldiers, and that victory of
Narva is the most extraordinary one ever seen. Had you
-the honour of any personal intercourse with the king?â€
322 A JACORITE EXILE
“Only during three days when our company formed part
of his escort at a hunting expedition,†Harry, whom he
addressed, replied. “‘ But Carstairs spoke to him more fre
quently. He has been a captain nearly two years, while 4
only had my promotion two months ago. We were in the
same regiment and of the same rank, but Carstairs was
promoted by the king after the battle at the passage of the
Dwina, as a reward for the suggestion he made in conversa-
tion with him that the passage might be made under the
screen of smoke caused by the lighting of the forage stacks.â€
“T must have a long talk with you both. It is certain
that next spring the campaign with France will re-open,
and your experience in the field will be very useful to me.
The Swedes are wonderful soldiers. The Muscovites at
present are little better than barbarians carrying European
arms, but the Saxons are good troops, and the Swedes have
twice beaten them heavily, and they evidently retain the
fighting qualities that under Gustavus Adolphus shook the
imperial power to its centre.
“The trouble is to find time. Iam pestered with men
desirous of employment in the army, with persons who want
favours at court, with politicians of both parties, with peo-
ple with schemes and intrigues of all kinds. I have to be
in attendance at the palace, and to see into the whole details
of the organization of the army. Ihave no doubt that at
present my ante-chamber is crowded with people who want
to see me.†He looked at his tablets. “ Next Wednesday
evening I am free, except for a reception at Lord Godol-
phin’s, but I can look in there late. I will not ask you
here, because I want you to myself. I will have a private
room at Parker's coffee-house in Covent Garden. We will
sup at seven. When you go there ask for Mr. Church’s
room, and make yourself comfortable there until I come,
for I can never answer for my own hours. In that way we
shall be free from all chance of interruption, and I can
THE NORTH COACH 323
pick your brains undisturbed. You will remember the day
and hour. Should there be any change in this private mat-
ter of yours, do not hesitate to come to me here.â€
Tony Peters, their guide and adviser, reported favourably
as to the people with whom the highwayman was lodging.
“The house is kept by the widow of an usher at the
palace. She entertains gentlemen from the country who
come up on business at the courts of justice, or with people
of influence at court. I have ascertained that our man
passes as a well-to-do trader of Salisbury, who comes up
two or three times a year to transact business, and to enjoy
for a short time the pleasures of town. He is liberal in
his payments, and is held in high respect by the woman,
whose only objection to him as a lodger is the late hours he
keeps. He is a crafty fellow this, for by always going to
the same house, and comporting himself with moderation,
he secures a place of retirement, where, however close the
quest after him, there will be no suspicion whatever as to
his profession on the part of the people he is with.
“My man found out all these matters from the servant
wench. We shall have no difficulty in taking him quietly.
The woman will be so terrified when I tell her what he is
wanted for, that she will do anything rather than have a
scandal that would damage the reputation of the house.â€
He assured Charlie that he need give the matter no
further thought. All the arrangements would be made, and
unless he heard farther from him he and Harry would only
have to present themselves at the door of the house in ques-
tion at two o’clock on the morning of Saturday.
The evening with the duke passed off pleasantly. The
general’s questions turned not so much upon the actual
fighting as upon the organization of the Swedes, their
methods of campaigning, of victualling the army, of hut-
ting themselves in winter, the maintenance of discipline in
camp, and other military points that would be of service to
him in his next campaign,
324 A JACOBITE EXILE
“Your king is very wise in so strictly repressing all plun-
dering and violence,†he said. “Only so can a general
maintain an army in an enemy’s country. If the peasantry
have confidence in him, and know that they will get a fair
price for their produce, they will bring it into the market
gladly, in spite of any orders their own government may
issue to the contrary. J am determined that if I again lead
an English army in the field I will follow King Charles’
example; though I shall find it more difficult to enforce my
orders than he does, for he is king as well as general, and
his Swedes are quiet, honest fellows, while my army will be
composed of ne’er-do-wells—of men who prefer to wear the
queen’s uniform to a prison garment, of debtors who wish
to escape their creditors, and of men who find village-life
too quiet for them, and prefer to see the world, even at the
risk of being shot, to honest labour on the farms. It requires
a stern hand to make a disciplined army out of such mate-
rials, but when the time of fighting comes one need wish
for no better.â€
Before parting with them the duke inquired farther into
their arrangements for the arrest of the highwayman, and
said he should expect to see them on Saturday, and that if
he heard that all had gone well he would at once take steps
for bringing the matter before a court that would deal with
it. The young men felt restless as the day approached.
They had seen no more of Tony, but they felt complete
confidence in him, and were sure that they would hear if
any difficulties arose; but though throughout Friday they
did not quit their lodging, no message reached them.
CHAPTER XVIII
A CONFESSION
T the appointed hour, as the clock of the Abbey was
striking, they gave three gentle knocks at the door of
the house. It was immediately opened by Tony, who held
a candle in his hand, closed the door quietly behind them,
and then led them into a parlour.
“Well, Tony, I suppose all has gone well, as we have not
heard from you.â€
“There was nothing to tell you, sir, and, indeed, I have
been mightily busy. In the first place, I got two days’
leave from the courts, and went down myself in a light cart
with the boys and two men. ‘hat way I made sure that
there should be no mistake as to the houses the boys were
to watch. ‘lhe two men I sent on ten miles beyond the
farthest tavern there to watch the road, and if any horse-
man goes by to-night to track him down. ‘This evening I
came here. I brought with me one of my comrades from
the courts, and we told the good woman the character of
the lodger we had seen leave the house a quarter of an hour
before. She almost fainted when we showed her our
badges, and said we must arrest him on his return as a
notorious highwayman and breaker of the laws. She ex-
claimed that her house would be ruined, and it took some
time to pacify her by saying that we would manage the job
825
326 A JACOBITE EXILE
so quietly that no one in the house need know of it, and
that we would, if possible, arrange it so that the place of
his arrest should not be made public. At that she at once
consented to do all that we wished her. We searched his
room carefully, and found some watches, rings, and other
matters that answered to the description of those stolen
from a coach that was stopped near Dorking three weeks
ago. My mate has taken them away. As she was afraid
that a scuffle in the bed-room might attract the attention of
the four other gentlemen who are lodging here, I arranged
that it should be done at the door. In that case, lf there
was any inquiry in the morning, she could say that it was
some drunken fellow who had come to the house by mistake
and had tried to force his way in. So she put this parlour
at our disposal, and as I have got the shutters up and the
curtains drawn, there is no fear of his noticing the light,
for as we may have some hours to wait, it is more pleasant
to have a candle than to sit in the dark.â€
“Does she come down to let him in?†Harry asked.
“No, sir, the door is left on the latch. She says he finds
his way up to his room in the dark, and the candle and a
tinder-box are always placed handy for him there. We
will take our shoes off presently, and when we hear footsteps
come up to the door and stop we will blow out the candle
and steal out into the passage so as to catch him directly
he closes the door. I have got handcuffs here, some rope,
and a gag.â€
“Very well, then. I will undertake the actual seizing of
him,†Charlie said. “You slip on the handcuffs, and you,
Harry, if you can find his throat in the dark, grip it pretty
tightly till Tony can slip the gag into his mouth. Then he
can light the candle again, and we can then disarm and
search him, fasten his legs, and get him ready to put in the
cart.â€
The hours passed slowly, although Tony did his best to
A CONFESSION 327
divert them by telling stories of various arrests and cap-
tures in which he had been concerned. ‘The clock had just
struck five when they heard a step coming up the quiet
street.
“That is likely to be the man,†Tony said. “It is about
the hour we expected him.â€
He blew out the candle and opened the door quietly, and
they went out into the passage. A moment later the step
stopped at the door, the latch clicked, and it was opened.
A man entered and closed the door behind him. As he
did so Charlie, who had marked his exact position, made a
step forward and threw his arms round him. The man
gave an exclamation of surprise and alarm, and then strug-
gled fiercely, but he was in the hands of one far stronger
than himself. A moment later he felt that his assailant
was not alone, for he was grasped by the throat, and at the
same time he felt something cold close round his wrists.
There was a sharp click, and he knew that he was hand-
cuffed. Then a low voice said, “I arrest you in the name
of the queen for being concerned in the robbery of the
Portsmouth coach at Dorking.†Then a gag was forced
between his tecth. Bewildered at the suddenness of the
attack, he ceased to struggle, and remained quiet in the
grasp of his captors till there was the sound of the striking
of flint and steel hard by. Then Tony came out of the
parlour with a lighted candle, the highwayman was lifted
into the room, and the door was shut. He then saw that
his captors were three in number. ‘There were two young
gentlemen and a smaller man, who, as he looked at him,
held out a badge, and showed that he was an officer of the
law. His pistols and sword were removed, then his pockets
were searched, and two watches and three purses, with some
rings and bracelets, were taken out and laid on the table.
“Tt came off, you see,†‘Tony said to Charlie.
“Well, Master Nicholson, to use one of your aliases, of
328 A JACOBITE EXILE
which you have, no doubt, a score or more, you may con-
sider yourself under arrest not only for the robbery of the
Portsmouth coach three weeks ago but of the North coach
last evening.†: :
The prisoner started. It seemed impossible to him that
that affair should be known yet, still less his connection
with it.
“You know what that means?†Tony went on grimly,
“Tyburn. Now I am going to make you a little safer still.
You have been a hard bird to catch, and we don’t mean to
let you slip through our fingers again.â€
So saying he bound his arms closely to his side with a
rope, and then with a shorter piece fastened his ankles
securely together.
“Now I will fetch the cart.†He had been gone but five
minutes when they heard a vehicle stop at the door. ‘The
others lifted the highwayman by his shoulders and feet, car-
ried him out, and laid him in the cart. Tony closed the
door quietly behind them, and then jumped up by the side
of the driver, who at once started the horse at a brisk trot.
‘They crossed Westminster Bridge, and after another ten
minutes’ drive stopped at a small house standing back from
the road, in a garden of its own. :
“We will carry him in, Tony,†Charlie said, “if you will
get the door open.†‘They carried him in through the door,
at which a woman was standing, into a room, where they
saw to their satisfaction a blazing fire. The prisoner was
laid down on the ground. Leaving him to himself, Charlie
and his friends sat down to the table, which was laid in
readiness. ‘I'wo cold chickens, and ham, and bread had
been placed on it.
“Now, Tony, sit down; you must be as hungry as we
are.â€
“Thank you, gentlemen; I am going to have my break-
fast in the kitchen with my wife.â€
A CONFESSION 3829
As he spoke the woman came in with two large tankards
full of steaming liquid, whose odour at once proclaimed it
tobe spiced ale. “Well, wife, we have done a good night’s
work,†Tony said.
“A good night’s work for all of us,†Charlie put in.
“Your husband has done us an immense service, Mrs.
Peters, and when our fathers come to their own again they
will not forget the service he has rendered us.â€â€™
When they had made a hearty meal Tony was called in
again. ‘Now, Tony, we will proceed to business. You
have got pen and ink and paper, I suppose?â€
“JT have everything ready, sir. 1 will clear away this
table so as to have all in order.â€
When this was done the highwayman was lifted up and
placed in a chair, and the gag removed from his mouth.
“You don’t remember us, I suppose, my man?†Charlie
began. ‘The last time I saw you was when I brought my
stick down on your head when you were listening outside
a window at Lynnwood.â€
An exclamation of surprise broke from the prisoner.
“Yes, I am Charlie Carstairs, and this gentleman is
Harry Jervoise. By the way, I have made a mistake: I
have seen you twice since then. ‘The first time was in a
wayside tavern some twelve miles beyond Barnet nine days
ago; the second time was at another tavern in Barnet.
You will remember that a mischievous boy threw a stone
and broke one of the lattice panes of the window where
you were sitting talking over this little affair of the North
coach.â€
A deep execration broke from the lips of the highway-
man.
“Now you see how we know all about it,†Charlie went
on. ‘Now it entirely depends on yourself whether in the
course of another hour we shall hand you over to a magis-
trate as the leader of the gang who robbed the North coach
330 A JACOPITE EXILE
and took part in the robbery near Dorking—we have found
some of the watches and other plunder in your bed-room,
—or whether you escape trial for these offences. You
may be wanted for other similar affairs.â€
“Yes, sir,†Tony put in. ‘Now I see him he answers
exactly to the description of a man the officers have been
in search of for a long time. He goes by the name of
Dick Cureton, and has been engaged in at least a dozen
highway robberies to my knowledge.â€
“You see,†Charlie went on, “there is no doubt what-
ever what will happen if we hand you over to the officers.
You will be hung at Tyburn to a moral certainty. There
is no getting out of that. Now, on the other hand, you
have the alternative of making a clean breast of your deal-
ings with John Dormay, of how he put you at Lynnwood
to act as a spy, how you hid those two letters he gave you
in my father’s cabinet, and how he taught you the lying
story you afterwards told before the magistrates at Lancas-
ter. After having this story written down you will sign it
in the presence of this officer and his wife, and you will
also repeat that story before any tribunal before which you
may be brought.
“I don’t know whether this is a hanging matter, but at
any rate I can promise that you shall not be hung for it.
The Duke of Marlborough has taken the matter in hand,
and will, I have no doubt, be able to obtain for you some
lesser punishment if you make a clean breast of it. I
don’t say that you will be let free; you are too dangerous
aman for that; but at any rate your punishment will not
be a heavy one—perhaps nothing worse than agreeing to
serve in the army. You understand that in that case noth-
ing whatever will be said as to your being Dick Cureton
or of your connection with these last coach robberies.
You will appear before the court simply as Robert Nichol-
son, who, having met Captain Jervoise and myself, felt
A CONFESSION 3381
constrained to confess the grievous wrong he did to our
fathers and other gentlemen at the bidding of, and for
money received from, John Dormay.â€
“T do not need any time to make up my mind,†the
highwayman said. “Iam certainly not going to be hung
for the advantage of John Dormay, who has paid me poorly
enough, considering that it was through me that he came
into a fine estate. I take it that you give me your word of
honour, that if I make a clean breast of it and stick to my
story afterwards, this other business shall not be brought
up against me.â€
“Ves, we both promise that on our word of honour.â€
“Very well then; here goes.â€
The story he told was in precise accordance with the
suspicions that his hearers had entertained. He had been
tramping through the country, sometimes pilfering, some-
times taking money as a foot-pad. He had one day met
John Dormay and demanded his money; he was armed
only with a heavy cudgel, and thought Dormay was de-
fenceless. The latter, however, produced a pistol from
his pocket, and compelled him to drop his stick, and then
taking him by the collar made him walk to his house. He
had asked him questions as to his previous life, and had
then given him the choice of going to jail or of acting
under his instructions, in which case he would be well
rewarded. Naturally he had chosen the second alternative.
And having him completely under his thumb, John Dor-
may had made him sign a paper acknowledging his attempt
at highway robbery upon him.
The rest of the story was already known to his hearers.
He had several times overheard the conversations in the
dining-room, but had gathered nothing beyond talk of what
would be done if the Pretender came over. John Dormay
had taught him the story of the assassination plot, and had
given him the letters to hide. He now swore that the
332 A JACOBITE EXILE
whole story was false, and had been told entirely at the
dictation of John Dormay, and from fear of the conse-
quence to himself if he refused to obey his orders. When
he had finished Tony’s wife was called in, and she made
her mark and her husband signed his name as witnesses to
the signature of Robert Nicholson.
“Now, I hope I may have something to eat,†the man
said recklessly. ‘I am ready to tell my story to whomso-
ever you like, but am not ready to be starved.â€
“Give him food, Tony,†Charlie said, “and keep a sharp
look-out after him. We will go across and show this paper
to the duke.â€
“TI will bring the matter at once before the council,†the
general said, when Charlie gave him the document and
briefly stated its contents. “‘There is a meeting at three
o’clock to-day. I shall see the queen previously, and will
get her to interest herself in the matter, and to urge that
justice shall be done without any delay. I will arrange
that the man shall be brought before the council at the
earliest date possible. If you will come here this evening
I may be able to tell you more. Come at eight. I shall
be in then to dress, as I take supper at the palace at nine.â€
“T have ventured to promise the man that he shall not
be hung, my lord.â€
“You were safe in doing so; the rogue deserves the
pillory or branding, but as he was almost forced into it,
and was the mere instrument in the hands of another, it is
not a case for hanging him. He might be shipped off to
the plantations as a rogue and a vagabond.. What are you
smiling at?â€
“T was thinking, sir, that as you said there were a good
many of that class in the army, the man might have the
option of enlisting given him.â€
“And so of getting shot in the Netherlands instead of
getting hung at Tyburn, eh? Well, I will see what I can
do.â€
es
eo
ee)
A CONFESSION
At eight o’clock they again presented themselves. The
duke looked at them critically.
“You will do,†he said. ‘‘ Put your cloaks on again and
come with me. Where do you suppose that you are
going?â€
“ Before the council, sir,†Harry suggested.
“Bless me, you don’t suppose that your business is so
pressing that ministers have been summoned in haste to sit
upon it. No, you are going to sup with the queen. I
told her your story this afternoon. She was much inter-
ested in it, and when I informed her that, young as you
both were, you had fought behind Charles of Sweden in all
his desperate battles, and that he had not only promoted
you to the rank of captain, but that he had under his own
hand given you a document expressing his satisfaction at
your conduct and bravery, she said that I must bring you
to supper at the palace. I told her that, being soldiers,
you had brought with you no clothes fit for appearance at
court; but as at little gatherings there is no ceremony, she
insisted that I should bring you as youare. My wife Sarah
went on half an hour ago in her chair. There will proba-
bly be two others, possibly Godolphin and Harley, but
more likely some courtier and his wife. You do not feel
nervous, I hope? After being accustomed to chat with
Charles of Sweden, to say nothing of the Czar of Russia,
Carstairs, you need not feel afraid of Queen Anne, who is
good-nature itself.â€
Nevertheless, both the young men felt nervous. After
being conducted up some private stairs, the duke led them
into an oak-panelled room of comparatively small size,
lighted by numerous tapers, which displayed the rich hang-
ings and furniture. A lady was sitting by the fire. A tall,
handsome woman, with a somewhat imperious face, stood
on the rug before her talking to her, while a pleasant-
looking man, who by his appearance and manner might
384 A JACOBITE EXILE
have been taken for a country squire, was sitting opposite
playing with the ears of a spaniel lying on his knee. ‘The
tall lady moved aside as they entered, and Charlie noticed
a little glance of affectionate welcome pass between her and
the duke—for the pair were devotedly attached to each
other—then he bowed to the seated lady.
“Madam,†he said, “allow me to present to you the two
young officers of whose bravery Charles of Sweden has writ-
ten so strongly, and whose parents have with other gentle-
men been driven from the land by villainy.â€
The young men bowed deeply. Anne held out her hand,
and each in turn bending on one knee, raised it to his lips.
“There,†she said, “let that be the beginning and end of
ceremony. ‘This is not a court gathering, but a family
meeting. I want to hear your stories, and I want you for
the time to forget that I am Anne of England. I know
that your fathers have always been faithful to our house, and
I hope that their sons will ere long do as good service for
me as they have done for a foreign prince. You have not
seen these gentlemen yet, Sarah?â€
“No, my husband has kept them to himself.â€
“T have had but little time to give them, Sarah, and
wanted it all to question them on the Swedish modes of
warfare.â€
“And you thought I should be an interruption? I am
glad to meet you both, nevertheless. Since my husband
likes you, I am sure to do so;†and she smiled pleasantly
as she gave a hand to each.
They were then introduced to the Prince Consort, George
of Denmark. At this moment supper was announced.
The queen and the duchess went in together, followed by
the four gentlemen.
“Lord Godolphin and Mr. Harley were to have been of
the party to-night,†the queen said as she took her seat at
table, “but I put them off till to-morrow, as I wanted to
hear these gentlemen's story.â€
A CONFESSION 385
During the meal the conversation was gay. As soon as
the last dish was removed the party returned to the other
room. ‘Then the queen called upon the young men to tell
their story. Charlie began, and related up to the time
when he had aided in the rescue of his father from the
hands of his escort. Harry told the story of their military
experiences, and then Charlie related his narrow escape at
Warsaw, his adventure with the brigands, and the fight with
the wolves.
“That is the most exciting of all,†the queen said. “TI
think that even you, general, would rather have gone through
the battle of Narva than have spent that night among the
wolves.â€
“That would I, indeed, madam, and I doubt if I should
have got as well through it as Captain Carstairs did. Iam
sure, madam, you will agree with me that these young gen-
tlemen ought to be fighting under our flag rather than that
of Sweden. There is no blame to them, for they were most
unjustly driven from the country; but I hope that by Mon-
day at this time I shall have the pleasure of presenting a
document for your majesty’s signature, stating that in the
opinion of the council a very grave miscarriage of justice
has taken place, and that the gentlemen whose estates were
four years ago confiscated are proved to be innocent of the
crime of which they were accused, and are true and faithful
subjects of your majesty, and that the proceedings against
them are hereby quashed, and their estates restored to them.
I had the honour of relating to you this afternoon the man-
ner in which these gentlemen have succeeded in bringing
the truth to light.â€
Shortly afterwards the party broke up, the queen speaking
most graciously to each of the young men. On Monday
morning they received a summons to appear before the
council at two o'clock in the afternoon, and to produce one
Robert Nicholson, whose evidence was required in a matter
386 A JACOBITE EXILE
of moment. They hired a carriage and took the highway-
man with them to St. James’s, and were conducted to the
council chamber, where they found Lord Godolphin, the
Marquis of Normanby, Mr. Harley, and the Duke of
Marlborough, together with two judges, before whom the
depositions in the case of Sir Marmaduke Carstairs and his
friends had been laid.
Lord Normanby, as privy-seal, took the chair, and briefly
said that: Having heard there had been a grievous miscar-
riage of justice, he had summoned them to hear important
evidence which was produced by Captain Carstairs and
Jervoise, officers in the ‘service of the king of Sweden.
“What have you to say, Captain Carstairs?â€
“T have, sir, only to testify that this man who stands
beside me is Robert Nicholson, who was in my father’s
employment for two years, and was, I believe, the principal
witness against him. Captain Jervoise can also testify to
his identity. I now produce the confession, voluntarily
made by this man, and signed in the presence of witnesses.â€
He handed in the confession, which was read aloud by a
clerk standing at the lower end of the table. A murmur of
indignation arose from the council as he concluded.
“You have acted the part of a base villain,†Lord Nor-
manby said to Nicholson. “Hanging would be too good
for such a caitiff. What induced you to make this confes-
sion?â€
“T have long repented my conduct,†the man said. “I
was forced into acting as I did by John Dormay, who might
have had me hung for highway robbery. I would long ago
have told the truth had I known where to find the gentlemen
I have injured; and meeting them by chance the other day
I resolved upon making a clean breast of it, and to take
what punishment your lordships may think proper, hoping,
however, for your clemency on account of the fact that I
was driven to act in the way I did.â€
A CONFESSION 3387
One of the judges, who had the former depositions before
him, asked him several questions as to the manner in which
he had put the papers into Sir Marmaduke’s cabinet. He
replied that he found the key in a vase on the mantel, and
after trying several locks with it, found that it fitted the
cabinet.
“His statement agrees, my lords,†the judge said, “with
that made by Sir Marmaduke Carstairs in his examinations.
He then said that he could not account for the papers being
in his cabinet, for it was never unlocked, and that he kept
the key in a vase on the mantel where none would be likely
to look for it.â€
In a short time all present were requested to withdraw,
but in less than five minutes they were again called in.
“Gentlemen,†Lord Normanby said to the young officers,
“J have pleasure in informing you that the council are of
opinion that the innocence of your fathers and friends of
the foul offence of which they were charged is clearly
proven, and that they have decided that the sentence passed
against them in their absence shall be quashed. ‘They
will also recommend to her majesty that the sentence
of confiscation against them all shall be reversed. As
to you, sir, seeing that you have, however tardily, endeav-
oured to undo the evil you have caused, we are disposed to
deal leniently, and, at the request of the Duke of Marlbor-
ough, we have agreed, if you are ready to leave the country
and enlist at once as a soldier in the army of Flanders, and
there to expiate your fault by fighting in the service of
your country, we will not recommend that any proceedings
shall be taken against you. But if at any time you return
hither, save as a soldier with a report of good conduct, this
affair will be revived, and you will receive the full punish-
ment you deserve. For the present you will be lodged in
prison, as you will be needed to give evidence when the
matter of John Dormay comes up for hearing.â€
338 A JACOBITE EXILE
Nicholson was at once removed in custody. The two
young officers retired, an usher bringing them a whispered
message from Marlborough that they had better not wait to
see him as the council might sit for some time longer, but
that if they would call at his house at five o’clock, after
his official reception, he would see them.
“This is more than we could have hoped for,†Harry said
as they left St. James’s. “A fortnight ago, although I had
no intention of giving up the search, I began to think that
our chances of ever setting eyes on that rascal were of the
slightest; and now everything has come right. The man
has been found, he has been made to confess the whole
matter, the case has been heard by the council, our fathers
are free to return to England, and their estates are restored
to them; at least, the council recommends the queen, and
we know the queen is ready to sign. So that it is as good
as done.â€
“Tt seems too good to be true.â€
“Tt does, indeed, Charlie. They will be delighted
across the water. I don’t think my father counted at all
upon our finding Nicholson, or of our getting him to con-
fess; but I think he had hoped that the duke would interest
himself to get an order that no further proceedings should
be taken in the matter of the alleged plot. ‘That would
have permitted them to return to England. He spoke to
me several times of his knowledge of the duke when he was
a young man; but Churchill he said, was a time-server,
and has certainly changed his politics several times; and
if a man is fickle in politics he may be so in his friendships.
It was a great many years since they had met, and Marl-
borough might not have been inclined to acknowledge one
charged with so serious a crime; but, as he said to me be-
fore I started, matters have changed since the death of
William. Marlborough stands far higher with Anne than
he did with William. His leanings have certainly been
A CONFESSION 339
all along Jacobite, and now that he and the Tories are in
power and the Whigs are out of favour, Marlborough could
if he chose do very much for us. It is no longer a crime
to be a Jacobite, and indeed they say that the Tories are
intending to upset the act of succession and bring in a
fresh one making James Stuart the successor to Anne.
“Still, even if we had succeeded so far by Marlborough’s
influence that our fathers could have returned to England
without fear of being tried for their lives, I do not think
that either of them would have come so long as the charge
of having been concerned in an assassination plot was hang-
ing over them. Now that they are cleared, and can come
back with honour, it will be different altogether. It will
be glorious news for them. Of course we shall start as
soon as we get the official communication that the estates
are restored. We shall only have to go back to them, for,
as you know, yours is the only estate that has been granted
to anyone else. The others were put up for sale, but no
one would bid for them, as the title-deeds would have been
worth nothing if King James came over. So they have
only been let to farmers, and we can walk straight in again
without dispossessing anyone.â€
“T don’t know what to do about John Dormay,†Charlie
said. “here is no doubt that from what the judge said
they will prosecute him.â€
So they ought to,†Harry broke in. “He has striven
by false swearing to bring innocent men to the scaffold.
Why, it is worse than murder.â€
“TI quite agree with you, Harry, and if I were in your
place I would say just as strongly as you do that he ought
to be hung; but you see I am differently situated. The
man isakinsman of ours by marriage. My cousin Celia
has been always most kind to me, and is my nearest rela-
tive after my father. She has been like an aunt, and in-
deed did all she could to supply the place of a mother to
340 A JACOBITE EXILE
me, and I am sure my little sweetheart Ciceley has been like
asister. This must have been a most terrible trial to them.
It was a bad day for cousin Celia when she married that
scoundre], and I am sure that he has made her life a most
unhappy one. Still, for their sake, I would not see his
villainy punished as it deserves, nor indeed for our own,
since the man is to a certain extent our kinsman. Besides,
Harry, as you must remember well enough, Ciceley and I
in boy and girl fashion used to say we should be some day
husband and wife, and I have never since seen anyone
whom I would so soon marry as my bonny little cousin;
and if Ciceley is of the same mind, maybe some day or
other she may come to Lynnwood as its mistress, but that
could hardly be if her father were hung for attempting to
swear away the life of mine.â€
“No, indeed, Charlie. I know how fond you were of
your cousin.â€
“Indeed, Harry, there was a talk between my father and
cousin Celia, a few months before the troubles came, of a
formal betrothal between us, and had it not been for the
coolness between our fathers it would have taken place.â€
“Ves, I remember now your telling me about it, Charlie.
Well, what is to be done? for I agree with you that if pos-
sible John Dormay must escape from the punishment he
deserves. But how is it to be done?â€
“Well, Harry, a week or two will make no difference to
our fathers. ‘They will have no expectation of hearing
from us for a long time to come. I should say it were best
that I should go down and warn him, and I shall be glad
if you will go with me.â€
“Of course I will go,†Harry said. “Indeed, it were
best that the warning came from me. The man is a villain
and a reckless one, and in his passion when he hears that
his rascality is known, the prize for which he schemed
snatched from him, and his very life in danger, might even
A CONFESSION b41
seek to vent his rage and spite upon you. Now it is clear,
Charlie, that you could not very well kill a man and after-
wards marry his daughter. The thing would be scarce
seemly. But the fellow is no kinsman of mine. He has
grievously injured us, and I could kill him without the
smallest compunction, and thereby rid the world of a
scoundrel and you of a prospective father-in-law of the
most objectionable kind.â€
Charlie laughed. “No, Harry; we will have no killing.
We will go down and see him together. We will let him
know that the orders are probably already on the road for
his arrest, and that he had best lose not an hour, but at
once cross the water. I should not think that he would
wish to encumber himself with women, for I never thought
he showed the least affection to either his wife or daughter.
At any rate we will see that he does not take them with
him. I will tell him that if he goes, and goes alone, I
will do my best to hush up the matter, and that so long as
he remains abroad the tale of his villainy shall never be
told, but that, if he returns, the confession of Nicholson
shall be published throughout the country, even if no pros-
ecution is brought against him.â€
. When they called upon the duke he shook them warmly
by the hand.
“This parchment is the royal assent to the decision of
the council that the estates of those inculpated in the
alleged plot for the assassination of the late king should be
forthwith restored to them, it having been clearly proved
that they have been falsely accused of the said crime, and
that her majesty is satisfied that these gentlemen are her
true and loyal subjects. I think I may say,†the duke con-
tinued with a smile, “that no affair of state has ever been
so promptly conducted and carried through.â€
“We feel how deeply indebted we are for our good fort-
une to your kindness, your grace,†Charlie said. “We
3842 A JACOBITE EXILE
know that but for you months might have elapsed, even
years, before we could have obtained such a result, even
after we had the confession of Nicholson in our hands.â€
“Tam glad in every way to have been able to bring this
about,†the duke said; ‘‘in the first place, because I have
been able to right a villainous piece of injustice; in the
second, because those injured were loyal gentlemen, with
no fault save their steadfast adherence to the cause of the
Stuarts; and lastly, because one of these gentlemen was my
own good friend, Mat Jervoise, of whose company I have
so many pleasant recollections. IT hope that as soon as you
have informed your fathers that their names are cleared and
their property restored, you will think of what I said, and
will decide to quit the service of Sweden and enter that of
your queen.
“ An officer fighting for a foreign monarch is after all but
a soldier of fortune, however valiantly he fights. He is
fighting for a cause that is not his own, and though he may
win rewards and honours, he has not the satisfaction that
all must feel who have risked their lives, not for gold, but
in the service of their country. But I do not want any
answer from you on that head now, it is a matter for you to
decide upon after due thought; I only say that I shall go
out early in the spring to take command of the army, and
that if you present yourselves to me before I leave, I shall
be glad to appoint you on my personal staff, with the same
rank you now hold. You can now leave the country with-
out any farther trouble. As to the affair of the man Dormay,
a messenger has been sent off this afternoon with an order
to the magistrates at Lancaster to arrest him on the charge
of suborning false evidence, by which the lives of some of
her majesty’s subjects were endangered, and of forging
letters whereby such evil designs might be furthered. I do
not suppose I shall see you again before you sail, for
to-morrow we go down to our country place, and may
A CONFESSION 343
remain there some weeks. I may say that it was the desire
to get your affair finished before we left town that conduced
somewhat to the speed with which it has been carried
through.â€
After again thanking the duke most warmly for his kind-
ness, and saying that they would lay his offer before their
‘fathers, and that their own inclinations were altogether in
favour of accepting it, the young men took their leave.
“Tt is unfortunate about Dormay.â€
“Most unfortunate,†Harry said.
“T think if we start to-morrow morning, Harry, we shall
be in time. ‘There is no reason why the messenger should
travel at any extraordinary speed, and as he may be detained
at Lancaster, and some delay may arise before officers are
sent up to Lynnwood to make the arrest, we may be in
time. We must take a note of the date, it is one we shall
remember all our lives. It is the 25th of November, and
we will keep it up as a day of festivity and rejoicing as long
as we live.â€
“That will we,†Harry agreed. “It shall be the occa-
sion of an annual gathering of those who got into trouble
from those suppers at Sir Marmaduke’s. 1 fancy the others
are all in France, but their friends will surely be able to let
them know as soon as they hear the good news. I think
we shall have a stormy ride to-morrow, the sky looks very
wild and threatening.â€
“Tt does, indeed; and the wind has got wp very much in
the last hour.†:
“Ves, we are going to have a storm, beyond all doubt.â€
The wind got up hourly, and when before going to bed
they went to pass an hour at a tavern, they had difficulty in
making their way against it. Several times in the night
they were awoke by the gusts, which shook the whole house,
and they heard the crashing of falling chimney-pots above
the din of the gale. They had arranged to start as soon as
344 A JACOBITE EXILE
it was light, and had the evening before been to a posting-
inn and engaged a carriage with four horses for the journey
down to Lancashire.
“There is no starting to-day, gentlemen,†the landlord
said, as they went down to breakfast by candle-light. “TI
have looked out, and the street is strewn with chimney-pots
and tiles. Never do I remember such a gale, and hour by
hour it seems to get worse. Why, it is dangerous to go
across the street.â€
“Well, we must try,†Charlie said, “whatever the weather;
it is a matter of almost life and death.â€
“Well, gentlemen, you must please yourselves, but I am
mistaken if any horse-keeper will let his animals out on
such a day as this.â€
As soon as they had eaten their breakfasts they wrapped
themselves up in their cloaks, pressed their hats over their
heads, and sallied out. It was not until they were in the
Streets that they realized how great was the force of the
gale. Not only were the streets strewn with tiles and frag-
ments of chimney-pots, but there was light enough for them
to see that many of the upper windows of the houses had
been blown in by the force of the wind. ‘Tiles flew about
like leaves in autumn, and occasionally gutters and sheets
of lead, stripped from the roofs, flew along with prodigious
swiftness.
“This is as bad as a pitched battle, Charlie. I would as
lief be struck by a cannon-ball as by one of those strips of
lead.â€
“Well, we must risk it, Harry; we must make the attempt
anyhow.â€
It was with the greatest difficulty that they made their
way along. Although powerful young fellows, they were
frequently obliged to cling to the railings to prevent them-
selves from being swept away by the gusts, and they had
more than one narrow escape from falling chimneys. Al-
A CONFESSION 345
though the distance they had to traverse was not more than
a quarter of a mile, it took them half an hour to accomplish
it. The post-master looked at them in surprise as they
entered his office flushed and disordered.
“Why, gentlemen, you are not thinking of going on such
a day as this? it would be a sheer impossibility. Why, the
carriage would be blown over, and if it wasn’t, no horses
would face this wind.â€
“We would be willing to pay anything you may like to
ask,’’ Charlie said.
“It ain’t a question of money, sir. If you were to buy
the four horses and the carriage you would be no nearer,
for no post-boy would be mad enough to ride them; and
even supposing you got one stage, which you never would
do, you would have to buy horses again, for no one would
be fool enough to send his animals out. You could not do
it, sir. Why, I hear there are half a dozen houses within
a dozen yards of this that have been altogether unroofed,
and it is getting worse instead of better; if it goes on like
this, I doubt if there will be a steeple standing in London
to-morrow. Listen to that!â€
There was a tremendous crash, and running out into the
street, they saw a mass of beams and tiles lying in the
roadway—a house two doors away had been completely
unroofed. They felt that in such a storm it was really
impossible to proceed, and accordingly returned to their
lodgings, performing the distance in a fraction of the time
it had before taken them. For some hours the gale con-
tinued to increase in fury. Not a soul was to be seen in
the streets. Occasional heavy crashes told of the damage
that was being wrought, and at times the house shook so
that it seemed as if it would fall.
Never was such a storm known in England. ‘lhe damage
done was enormous. ‘The shores were strewn with wrecks;
twelve ships of the royal navy, with fifteen hundred men,
346 A JACOBITE EXILE
were lost, and an enormous number of merchant vessels.
Many steeples, houses, and buildings of all kinds were
overthrown, and the damage in London alone was estimated
at a million pounds. ‘here were few who went to bed that
night; many thought that the whole city would be destroyed.
Towards morning, however, the fury of the gale somewhat
abated, and by nightfall the danger had passed.
The next morning the two friends started, and posted
down to Lancashire. ‘The journey was a long one. In
many places the road was completely blocked by fallen
trees, and sometimes by the ruins of houses and barns. In
the former case long detours had often to be made through
villainous roads, where the wheels sank almost to their
axles, and in spite of the most liberal bribes to post-boys
and post-masters, the journey occupied four days longer
than the usual time. At last they reached the lodge-gate
of Lynnwood. A man came out from the cottage. He
was the same who had been there in Sir Marmaduke’s time.
Charlie jumped out of the post-chaise.
“Why, Norman, don’t you know me?â€
The man looked hard at him. “No, sir, I can’t say as
I do.â€
“What, not Charlie Carstairs?â€
“Bless me, it is the young master!†the man said. “To
think of my not knowing you. But you have changed
wonderful. Why, sir, I have been thinking of you often
and often, and most of all the last three days, but I never
thought of you like this.â€
“Why the last three days, Norman?â€
“Haven't you heard the news, sir?â€
“No, I have heard nothing. Captain Jervoise and I—
my old friend, you know, Norman—have posted all the
way from London, and should have been here six days ago
if it had not been for the storm.â€
“Well, sir, there is bad news; at least I don’t know
AGAIN,
>
ILOMI
COMES
CITARLIE
A CONFESSION O47
whether you will consider it bad. Most of the folk about
here looks at it the other way. But the man in there shot
hisself three days ago. A magistrate with some men from
Lancaster came over here. They say it was to arrest him,
but I don’t know the rights of the case. Anyhow, it is said
they read some paper over to him, and then he opened a
drawer at the table where he was sitting and pulled out
a pistol and shot hisself before anyone could stop him.
There have been bad goings here of late, Mr. Charles, very
bad, especially for the last year. He was not friends with
his son, they say, but the news of his death drove him to
drink worse than before, and besides, there have been
dicing and all sorts of goings on, and I doubt not but that
the ladies have had a terrible time of it. There were several
men staying in the house, but they all took themselves off
as soon as it was over, and there are only the ladies there
now. They will be glad enough to see you, I will be
bound.â€
Charlie was shocked; but at the same time he could not
but feel that it was the best thing that could happen, and
Harry freely expressed himself to that effect. “We won't
take the carriage up to the house,†Charlie said, after a
long pause. “Take the valises out and bring them up to
the house presently, Norman.â€
He paid the postillion who had brought them from Lan-
caster, and stood quiet until the carriage had driven off.
“T hope Sir Marmaduke is well, sir. We have missed
him sorely here.â€
“He was quite well when I saw him ten weeks ago. I
hope he will be here before long. I am happy to say that
his innocence of the charge brought against him has been
proved, and his estates and those of Mr. Jervoise and the
other gentlemen have been restored by the queen.â€
“That is good news, indeed sir,†the man exclaimed.
“The best I have heard for many a long year. Everyone
about here will go wild with joy.â€
348 A JACOBITE EXILE
“Then don’t mention it at present, Norman. Any re.
joicings would be unseemly while John Dormay is lying
dead there.â€
“Shall I go up with you, Charlie, or will you go alone?â€
Harry asked. “Of course there are some horses here,
and you could lend me one to drive over to our own place.â€
“You shall do that presently, Harry, and tell them the
news. But come in now. You know my cousin and
Ciceley, it will be all the better that you should go in with
me.â€
His cousin received Charlie with a quiet pleasure. She
was greatly changed since he had seen her last, and her
face showed that she had suffered greatly. Ciceley had
grown into a young woman, and met him with delight.
Both were pleased to see Hairy.
“We were talking of you but now, Charlie,†Mrs. Dor-
may said. ‘“Ciceley and I agreed that we would remove at
once to our old place, and that this should be kept up for
you should you at any time be able to return. Now that
Queen Anne is on the throne and the Tories are in power
we hoped that you, at least, would ere long be permitted
to return. How is your dear father?â€
“He is well, cousin, and will I trust be here ere long..
Our innocence of the charge has been proved, the proceed-
ings against us quashed, and the Act of Confiscation against
my father, Mr. Jervoise, and the others reversed.â€
“Thank God for that,†Mrs. Dormay said earnestly, and
Ciceley gave an exclamation of pleasure. ‘That accounts
then for what has happened here. I do not want to talk
about it, Charlie. You may imagine how Ciceley and I
have suffered. But he was my husband, spare him for my
sake.â€â€™
“T will never allude to the subject again, cousin,â€â€™ Char-
lie said. “But I must tell you that Harry and I have
posted down from London in hopes of being in time to
A CONFESSION 349
warn him and enable him to escape. I need not say we
did so because he was your husband and Ciceley’s father.â€
Harry then turned the subject by a remark as to the
effects of the storm, then Ciceley asked questions as to their
life abroad, and there was so much to tell and to listen to
that even Mrs. Dormay’s face brightened. Harry willingly
allowed himself to be persuaded to remain for the night,
and to ride over to his place in the morning.
The funeral took place two days later. Charlie went as
sole mourner. ‘‘He was my kinsman,†he said to Harry,
“and though I can pretend no sorrow at his death, my
attendance at the funeral will do something towards stop-
ping talk, and will make it easier for my cousin.â€
Vhe next day Mrs. Dormay and Ciceley returned to Rock-
ley, whose tenant had fortunately left a few weeks before.
Charlie and Harry both went over with them and stayed
for three or four days, and they were glad to see that Mrs.
Dormay seemed to be shaking off the weight of her trouble,
and was looking more like her old self. They then rode
to Lancaster, and returned to London by coach. They
crossed to Gottenburg by the first vessel that was sailing,
and Sir Marmaduke was delighted to hear the success of
their mission, and that he was at liberty to return at once
as master of Lynnwood.
“Tuck favoured you somewhat, Charlie, in throwing
that vagabond in your way, but for all else we have to thank
you both for the manner in which you have carried the
affair out and captured your fox. As for John Dormay,
‘tis the best thing that could have happened. I have often
thought it over while you have been away, and have said to
myself that the best settlement of the business would be
that you, Harry, when you obtained proofs, should go
down, confront him publicly, and ‘charge him with his
treachery, force him to draw, and then run him through
the body. Charlie would of course have been the proper
350 A JACOBITE EXILE
person in my absence so to settle the matter, but he could
not well have killed my cousin’s husband, and it would have
added to the scandal. However, the way it has turned out
is bettter altogether. It will be only a nine days’ wonder.
The man has been cut by all the gentry, and when it is
known that he shot himself to escape arrest, many will say
that it was a fit ending, and will trouble themselves no
more concerning him. You are coming back with me I
hope, Charlie. I have seen but little of you for the last
four years, and if you are, as you say, going with the Duke
of Marlborough to the war in the spring, I don’t want to
lose sight of you again till then. You can surely resign
your commission here without going back to the army,
especially as you have leave of absence until the end of
March.â€
Charlie hesitated.
“T think so too,†Harry said. “I know that the colonel
told the king the whole story when he asked for leave for
me and obtained that paper. He told my father that the
king was greatly interested, and said: ‘I hope the young
feilows will succeed, though I suppose if they do, I shall
lose two promising young officers.’ So he will not be sur-
prised when he hears that we have resigned. As for me, I
shall of course go on at once. My father will, I am sure,
be delighted to return home. The hardships have told upon
him a good deal, and he has said several times of late how
much he wished he could see his way to retiring. I think,
too, he will gladly consent to my entering our own service
instead of that of Sweden. He would not have done so, I
am sure, had William been still on the throne. Now it is
altogether different.â€
“Well, Harry, if you do see the king, as it is possible
you may do, or if you do not, you might speak to the col-
onel, and ask him in my name to express to Charles my
regret at leaving his service, in which I have been so well
A CONFESSION 861
treated, and say how much I feel the kindly interest that
his majesty has been pleased to take in me. If there had
been any chance of the war coming to an end shortly, I
should have remained to see it out; but now that the Polish
business may be considered finished it will be continued
with Russia, and may go on for years, for the czar is just as
obstinate and determined as Charles himself.â€
Accordingly the next morning Charlie sent in the formal
resignation of his commission to the war minister at Stock-
holm, and Harry left by ship for Revel. Sir Marmaduke
placed his business affairs in the hands of a Scotch merchant
at Gottenburg, with instructions to call in the money he
had lent on mortgage, and two days later took passage with
Charlie for Hull, whence they posted across the country to
Lancaster, and then drove to Lynnwood.
As soon as the news spread that Sir Marmaduke had
returned the church bells rang a joyous peal, bonfires were
lighted, the tenants flocked in to greet him, and the gentry
for miles round rode over to welcome and congratulate
him,
The next morning he and Charlie rode over to Rockley.
“Oh, Marmaduke,†cried Celia, “I am happy indeed to
know that you are back again. I have never known a day’s
happiness since you went.â€
“Well, don’t let us think any more about it, Celia,†Sir
Marmaduke said, as he kissed her tenderly. ‘Let us look
on it all as an ugly dream. It has not been without its
advantages, as far as we are concerned. It has taken me
out of myself and broadened my view of things. I have not
had at all an unpleasant time of it in Sweden, and shall
enjoy my home all the more now that I have been away
from it for a while. As to Charlie, it has made a man of
him. He has gained a great deal of credit, and had oppor-
tunities of showing that he is made of good stuff; and now
he enters upon life with every advantage, and has a start,
352 A JACOBITE EXILE
indeed, such as very few young fellows can have. He
enters our army as a captain under the eye of Marlborough
himself, with a reputation gained under that of the greatest
soldier in Europe. So we have no reason to regret the past,
cousin, and on that score you have no cause for grief. As
to the future, I trust that it will be bright for both of us,
and I think,†he added meaningly, “our former plans for
our children are likely to be.some day realized.â€
Four years later, indeed, the union that both parents had
at heart took place during one of the pauses of the fierce
struggle between the British forces under Marlborough, and
the French. At Blenheim, Ramillies, and Oudenarde, and
in several long and toilsome sieges, Charlie had distin-
guished himself greatly, and was regarded by Marlborough
as one of the most energetic and trustworthy of his officers.
He had been twice severely wounded, and had gained the
rank of colonel. Harry Jervoise—who had had a leg shot
away below the knee by a cannon-ball at Ramillies, and
had then left the army with the rank of major—was, on the
same day as his friend, married to the daughter of one of
the gentlemen who had been driven into exile with his
father.
In the spring Charlie again joined the army, and com-
manded a brigade in the desperate struggle on the hill of
Malplaquet, one of the hardest fought battles in the history
of war. Peace was made shortly afterwards, and at the
reduction of the army that followed he went on half-pay,
and settled down for life at Lynnwood, where Tony Peters
and his wife had, at the death of the former occupant of
the lodge, been established.
When Harry Jervoise returned to the Swedish head-
quarters with the news that his father was cleared, he was the
bearer of a very handsome present from Charlie to his faith-
ful servant Stanislas, who had on their return from Poland
been at once employed by Count Piper on other service.
A CONFESSION 358
When, years afterwards, the young Pretender marched
south with the Highland clans, neither Charlie nor Harry
were among the gentlemen who joined him. He had their
good wishes, but having served in the British army they
felt that they could not join the movement in arms against
the British crown; and indeed the strong Jacobite feel-
ings of their youth had been greatly softened down by
their contact with the world, and they had learned to
doubt much whether the restoration of the Stuarts would
tend in any way to the benefit or prosperity of Britain.
They felt all the more obliged to stand aloof from the
struggle, inasmuch as both had sons in the army that had
fought valiantly against the French at Dettingen and Fonte-
noy. The families always remained united in the closest
friendship, and more than one marriage took place between
the children of Charlie Carstairs and Harry Jervoise.
THE END
Norwoot Bress :
J. 8. Cushing & Co. — Berwick & Smith,
Boston, Mass., U.S.A.
GerAD SEE NanvES
POPULAR STORIES FOR BOYS.
PUBLISHED BY CHARLES SCRIBNER’S SONS,
743-745 BROADWAY, NEW YORK.
——
PRESS NOTICES.
“Mr. Henty is one of the best of story-| ‘‘ Mr. Henty’s books for boys are always
tellers for young people.� — Spectator. admirable.†— Bériningham Post.
“ Mr. Henty’s books never fail to inter-| ‘* The brightest of all the living writers
est. Among writers of stories of adventure | whose office it is to enchant the boys.†—
he stands in the very first rank.†— Acad-| Chrrstian Leader.
eniy. “One of our most successful writers of
“The boy’s own author.†— Punch. | historical tales.?? — Scotsman.
NEW VOLUMES FOR 18938.
St. Bartholomew’s Eve.
Wars. By G. A. Henry. With 12 full-page Illustrations by H. J.
Draver, and a Map. Crown 8vo, handsomely bound, olivine edges,
$1.50. (Copyrighted.)
A story of a lad of English birth but Huguenot parentage, who visits relatives in
France at the time when the feeling between the Catholics and Huguenots was bitterest,
and the country was disturbed by religious strife and dissension. His relatives being
leaders in the Huguenot party, the hero devotes himself heart and soul to the Protestant
cause, following it faithfully through the varied and exciting scenes that preceded and led
up to the terrible massacre of St. Bartholomew’s day. No boy could resist the fascina-
tion of this strong, vivid narrative. It is intense and absorbing, while presenting a true
picture of the times, full of life and color.
Through the Sikh War. A Tale of the Conquest of
The Punjaub. By G. A. Henry. With 12 full-page Illustrations by
Hau Hurst, and a Map. Crown 8vyo, handsomely bound, olivine
edges, $1.50. (Copyrighted.)
Percy Groves, a plucky, high-spirited boy, the son of an English officer, loses his
parents at an early age, and joins his uncle residing on his estate in India, situated in the
very centre of the troubles that developed later into the Sikh war. ‘T’he hero and his
uncle become involved in the dangers and intrigues that surround them, and take active
part in the war, passing through many thrilling experiences and adventures during the
two notable campaigns that resulted in the conquest of the Punjaub. It is one of Mr.
Henty’s most interesting and powerful stories.
: d Shien ee ines : r.. K
A Jacobite Exile. Being the Adventures of a Y oung
Englishman in the service of Charles XII. of Sweden. By G. AL
Henry. With 8 full-page Ilustrations by Pac Harpy, and a Map.
Crown 8vo, handsomely bound, olivine edges, $1.50. (Copyrighted. )
The events of the present story take place during the reign of William of Orange.
The father of the hero is a Jacobite gentleman who to avoid arrest is compelled to flee to
Sweden. Here the hero, Charlie Cz stairs, and a young companion, engaze in the service
of Charles XII., taking part in the wars between Sweden and Poland. The hero, acting
as a scout, falls into the hands of Polish bandits. After numerous iting adventures
and hair-breadth escapes, he finally secures his releas and returns to Sweden. ‘Then he
serves for atime under Marlborough in France, and distingu self nally. A
final return to England, where his father is pardoned, supplies a satis actory close to a
story remarkable for its thrilling adventures, its varied scenery, and its interesting
historical pictures.
I
tw
G. A. HENTY’S STORIES FOR BOYS.
PREVIOUS VOLUMES.
Condemned as a Nihilist: A Story of Escape from
Siberia. By G. A. Henry. With § full-page Aieeeiaee by WALTER
Pacer. Crown 8vo, beautifully bound, olivine edges, $1.50. (Copyrighted.)
Godfrey Bullen, the young hero, suspected of nihilism, is sent with convicts to Sibe-
ria; and his final escape from prison life, after numerous exciting adventures, affords
material for a narrative absorbing and thrilling, The pictures of Siberian prison- “life give
the book a peculiar interest.
In Greek Waters: A Story of the Greek War of Inde-
pendence. By G. A. Henry. With 12 full-page illustrations by W. 5.
STACEY, anda Map. Crown $vo, beautifully bound, olivine edges, $1.50.
(Copyrighted. )
The scenes of this story are laid in and near Greece during the Greek war for national
independence. Horace Beveridge and his father, enthusiastic sympathizers with the
Grecks, take an active part in their struggle against ‘Turkish rule. ‘Vhey own a well-
armed ooner in which they cruise for nearly two years, sharing in numerous fights
and rescues on shore and at sea.
Beric the Briton: A Story of the Roman Invasion.
By G. A. Henty. With 12 full-page Illustrations by W. PARKINSON,
Crown $vo, beautifully bound, olivine edges, $1.50. (Copyrighted.)
The story of a young Briton during the reign of Nero. He takes a prominent part
in the war against the Romans; is finally made a prisoner, and taken to Rome, where he
becomes a gladi ator, ‘The story is full of vivid pictures of sav age britain and cultured
Roman life, of thrilling scenes in the arena, and in the city during t that interesting period,
including a description of the burning of Rome,
Redskin and Cowboy. A Tale of the Western Plains.
By G. A. Henry. With 12 full-page Illustrations by ALFRED PEARSE
Crown 8vo, handsomely bound, olivine edges, $1.50. (Copyrighted.)
The central interest of this story is found in the many adventures of Hugh Tunstall, a
Cumberland lad, who finds it necessary to flee from his uncle’s house. He makes his
¢ Ww York, and from thence goes to the wildest districts of Texas, where he
cowboy on a cattle ranche, “His experiences present in picturesque form the
exciting, adventurous life of a cowboy, while the perils of a frontier settle-
ment are vividly set forth. Subsequently, the hero crosses through the Indian ‘Territory
into Mexico, where the interest of the story is sustained in a fight. with brigands.
The Dash for Khartoum. A Tale of the Nile Expedi-
tion. By G. A. Henry. With 10 full-page Illustrations by JoHN SCHGN-
BERG and J. NASI, and 4 Plans. Crown 8yo, handsomely bound, olivine
edges, $1.50. (Copyrighted. )
In the record of recent British history there is no more captivating page for boys
than the story of the Nile campaign, and the attempt to rescue General Gordon. It is
this memorable campaign which Mr. Henty has chosen as the central theme of his
romance. This is a book which will hold the boy spell-bound who loves daring deeds,
and danger, and the clash of deadly fight.
Held Fast for England.
Gibraltar. By G. A. Henty. With 8 full-page Illustrations by GORDON
Browne. Crown 8vo, handsomely bound, olivine edges, $1.50.
(Copyrighted. )
This story deals with the siege of Gibraltar in 1779-83, by the united forces of France
and Spain. ‘The hero of the tale, an English lad resident in Gibraltar, takes a brave and
worthy part in the long defence, and it is through his varied experiences that we learn
with w i at bravery, resourcefulness, and tenacity the Rock was held for England.
G. A. HENTY’S STORIES FOR BOYS. 3
By England’s Aid: or, The Freeing of the Nether--
lands (1585-1604). By G. A. Henry. With ro full-page Illustrations.
by ALFRED PEARSE, and 4 Maps. Crown 8vo, beautifully bound, olivine
edges, $1.50.
Mr. Henty here gives us the story of two English lads, who go to Holland in the
service of Sir Francis Vere. After many adventures by sea and land, one of the lads
finds himself on board a Spanish ship at the time of the defeat of the Armada, and
escapes from Spain only to fall into the hands of the Corsairs. He is successful, how-
» in getting back to Spain under the protection of a Ithy Spanish merchant, and
regains his native country after the capture of Cadiz, which fnally broke the power of
Spain in Eurape.
With Lee in Virginia. A Story of the American
Civil War. By G. A. Henry. With 10 full-page Illustrations by
Gorpdon Browne, and 6 Maps. Crown 8vo, beautifully bound, olivine
edges, $1.50.
The story of a young Virginian planter, who, after bravely proving his sympathy
with the slaves of brutal masters, serves under Lee and Jackson through the most
exciting events of the struggle. He has many es s, but his courage and readiness
and the devotion of a black servant and of a runaway slave whom he had assisted, bring
him safely through all difficulties.
By Right of Conquest: or, with Cortez in Mexico.
By G. A. Henry. With 10 full-page Illustrations by W STAC
and 2 Maps. Crown 8vo, beautifully bound, olivine edges, §
The adventures of an English youth, Roger Hawkshaw, the sole survivor of the good
ship Swan, which had sailed froma Devon port to challenge the mercantile supremacy
of the Spaniards in the New World. He is beset by many perils amongst the natives,
who are disposed at one time to worship and at another to sacrifice him, but is saved by
his own judgement and strength, and by the devotion of an Aztec princess.
Bonnie Prince Charlie. A Tale of Fontenoy and
Culloden. By G. A. TLenry. With 12 full-page Hlustrations by Gorpon
BROWNE. Crown 8vo, handsomely bound, olivine edges, $1.50.
“Ronald, the hero, is very like the hero of ‘Quentin Durward.’ The lad’s journey
across l’rance with his faithful attendant Malcolm, and his hairbreadth escapes from the
machinations of his father's enemies, make up as good a narrative of the kind as we have
ever read,†— Spectator.
By Pike and Dyke. A Tale of the Rise of the
Dutch Republic. By G. A. Henry. With 10 full-page Ilustrations
by MAyNARD Brown, and 4 Maps. Crown 8vo, handsomely bound,
olivine edges, $1.50.
A story covering the period when the Netherlands revolted against the attempts of
the Spaniards to force upon them the Catholic religion. Mr. Henty has added a special
attractiveness for boys in tracing through the historic conflict the adventures of an
English boy in the household of the ablest man of his age — William the Silent.
Captain Bayley’s Heir. A Tale of the Gold Ficlds
of California. By G. A. Henry. With 12 full-page Illustrations by
Hf. M. Pacer. Crown 8vo, handsomely bound, olivine edges, $1.50.
A frank, manly lad and his cousin, who is of the plausible scheming type, are rivals
in the heirship of a considerable property. The former falls into a trap laid by the latter,
and while under a false accusation of theft foolishly leaves England for America. He
goes to the Californian gold diggings, and acquires a all fortune, and is at length.
proved innocent of the charge which drove him from home.
a G. A. HENTY’S STORIES LOR BOYS.
The Lion of St. Mark. A Tale of Venice in the
Fourteenth Century. By G, A. Henry. With 1o full-page Illustrations
by GorpoN BRowNE. Crown 8vo, handsomely bound, olivine edges,
$1.50.
Everybody should read ‘The Lion of St. Mark.†Mr. Henty has never produced
any story more delightful, more wholesome, or more vivacious. From first to last it
will be read with keen enjoyment.†— Saturday Review.
The Lion of the North. A Tale of Gustavus Adolphus
and the Wars of Religion. By G. A. Henry. With 12 full-page
Illustrations by JouN ScHONBERG. Crown 8vo, handsomely bound,
olivine edges, $1.50.
‘“As we might expect from Mr. Henty the tale is a clever and instructive piece of
history, and as boys may be trusted to read it conscientiously, they can hardly fail to be
profited as well as pleased.†— The Times.
For the Temple. A Tale of the Fall of Jerusalem.
by G. A. Henry. With ro full-page Ilhustrations by S. J. SoLomon,
and a colored Map. Crown 8vo, handsomely bound, olivine edges,
$1.50.
“Mr. Henty’s graphic prose pictures of the hopeless Jewish resistance to Roman
sway add another leaf to his record of the famous wars of the world.†— Graphic.
With Clive in India: or, The Beginnings of an
Empire. By G. A. Henry. With 12 full-page Illustrations by GorDoN
Browne, in black and tint. Crown 8vo, handsomely bound, olivine
edges, $1.50.
“He has taken a period of Indian History of the most vital importance, and he has
embroidered on the historical facts a story which of itself is deeply interesting. Young
people assuredly will be delighted with the volume.†— Scotsman.
Through the Fray. A Story of the Luddite Riots.
By G. A. Henry. With 12 full-page Illustrations by H. M. PAGET, in
black and tint. Crown 8vo, cloth elegant, olivine edges, $1.50.
The story is laid in Yorkshire at the commencement of the present century, when the
high price of food induced by the war and the introduction of machinery drove the
working-classes to desperation, and caused them to band themselves in that wide-spread
organization known as the Luddite Society.
True to the Old Flag. A Tale of the American War
of Independence. By G. A. Henry. With 12 full-page Illustrations
by Gorpon Browne. Crown 8vo, handsomely bound, olivine edges,
B1.50.
“Tt does justice to the pluck and determination of the British soldiers during the
unfortunate struggle against American emancipation. ‘The son of an American loyalist,
who remains true to our flag, falls among the hostile redskins in that very Huron
country which has been endeared to us by the exploits of Hawk-eye and Chingachgook.â€
— The Times.
G. A. HENTY’S STORIES FOR BOYS, 5
The Young Carthaginian. A Story of the Times of
Hannibal. By G. A. Henry. With 12 full-page Illustrations by C. J.
STANILAND, R.I. Crown 8vo, handsomely bound, olivine edges, $1.50.
Boys reading the history of the Punic Wars have seldom a keen appreciation of the
merits of the contest. To let them know more about this momentous struggle, Mr.
Henty has written this story, which not only gives in graphic style a brilliant description
of a most interesting period of history, but is a tale of exciting adventure sure to interest
the reader.
With Wolfe in Canada: or, The Winning of a Con-
tinent. By G. A. Henry. With r2 full-page Illustrations by Gorpon
Browne. Crown 8vo, handsomely bound, olivine edges, SI.50.
“It is not only a lesson in history as instructively as it is graphically told, but also a
deeply interesting and often thrilling tale of adventure and peril by flood and field.†—
Lilustrated London News.
In Freedom’s Cause. A Story of Wallace and Bruce.
By G. A. Henry. With 12 full-page Illustrations by Gornon Brownz,
in black and tint. Crown 8vo, handsomely bound, olivine edges, Sr.50.
“Mr. Henty has broken new ground as an historical novelist. His tale is full of
stirring action, and will commend itself to boys.†— 4 thenwiiit.
Under Drake’s Flag. A Tale of the Spanish Main.
By G. A, Henry. With 8 full-page Pictures by Gorpon Brownr, in
black and tint. Crown 8vo, handsomely bound, olivine edges, $1.50.
A story of the days when England and Spain struggled for the supremacy of the sea.
The heroes sail as lads with Drake in the expedition in which the Pacific Ocean was first
seen by an Englishman from a tree-top on the Isthmus of Panama, and in his great
voyage of circumnavigation.
One of the 28th. A Tale of Waterloo. By G. A.
Henty. With 8 full-page Illustrations by W. H. OVEREND, and 2
Maps. Crown 8vo, handsomely bound, olivine edges, $1.50.
“One of the 28th’ contains one of the best descriptions of the various battles which
raged round Waterloo, which it has ever been our fate to read.†— Daily Telegraph,
The Cat of Bubastes. A Story of Ancient Egypt.
By G. A. HENty. With 8 full-page Illustrations by J. R. WecveLin.
Crown 8vo, handsomely bound, olivine edges, $1.50.
“The story, from the critical moment of the killing of the sacred cat to the perilous
exodus into Asia with which it closes, is very skilfully constructed and full of exciting
adventures, It is admirably illustrated.†— Saturday Review.
In the Reign of Terror. The Adventures of a West-
minster Boy. By G. A. Henry. With § full-page Illustrations by
J. SCHONBERG. Crown 8vo, handsomely bound, olivine edges, $1.50.
“The interest of this story of the ‘ Reign of Terror’ lies in the way in which the diffi-
culties and perils Harry has to encounter bring out the heroic and steadfast qualities of a
eached, but his un-
brave nature. Again and again the last extremity seems to have been
failing courage triumphs overall. It is an admirable boy's book.†— Brruafighass Post.
6 G. A. HENTY’S STORIES FOR BOYS.
St. George for England. A Tale of Cressy and
Poitiers. By G. A. HENty. With 8 full-page Illustrations by Gorpon
Browne, in black and tint. Crown 8vo, handsomely bound, $1.50.
“Mr. Henty has developed for himself a type of historical novel for boys which bid
fair to supplement on their behalf, the historical labors of Sir Walter Scott in the land
of fiction.†— Standard.
Maori and Settler. A Story of the New Zealand War.
By G. A. Henry. With 8 full-page Illustrations by ALFRED PEARSE.
Crown 8vo, handsomely bound, olivine edges, $1.50.
The Renshaws emigrate to New Zealand during the period of the war with the
natives. During the eventful voyage out, and in the subsequent adventures among the
Maoris, there are many breathless moments in which the odds seem hopelessly against
the party, but they succeed in establishing themselves happily in one of the pleasantest
of the New Zealand valleys.
A Final Reckoning. A Tale of Bush Life in Aus-
tralia. By G. A. Ilenry. With 8 full-page Llustrations by W. B.
WOLLEN. Crown 8vo, handsomely bound, olivine edges, $1.50.
The hero, a young English lad, after rather a stormy boyhood, emigrates to Australia,
and gets employment as an officer in the mounted police. A few years of active work on
the frontier, where he has many a brush with both natives and bush-rangers, gain him
promotion to a captaincy, and he eventually settles down to the peaceful life of a
squatter,
The Bravest of the Brave: or, With Peterborough in
Spain. By G. A. Henty. With 8 full-page Illustrations by H. M.
Pacer. Crown 8vo, handsomely bound, olivine edges, $1.50.
There are few great leaders whose lives have so completely falien into oblivion as
that of the Earl of Peterborough. This is largely due to the fact that it was over-
shadowed by the glory of Marlborough. His career as General extended over little more
than a year, and yet, in that time, he showed a genius for warfare which has never been
surpassed,
For Name and Fame: or, Through Afchan Passes. By
G, A. Henry. With 8 full-page Illustrations by Gorpox Browne.
Crown 8yvo, handsomely bound, olivine edges, $SL.50.
“Flere we have not only a rousing story, replete with all the varied forms of excite-
ment of a campaign, but an instructive history of a recent war, and, what is still more
useful, an account of a territory and its inhabitants which must for a long time possess a
supreme interest for Englishmen, as being the key to our Indian Empire.†~ Glasgow
fleraid.
Orange and Green: A Tale of the Boyne and Limerick.
By G. A. Henty. With 8 full-page Tllustrations by GorpoN BROWNE.
Crown 8yvo, handsomely bound, olivine edges, $1.50.
“An extremely spirited story, based on the struggle in Treland, rendered memorable
by the defence of "Derry and the siege of Limerick.†— Saturday Reulew.
G. 4. HENTY’S STORIES FOR BOYS, 7
The Dragon and the Raven: or, The Days of King
Alfred. By G. A. Henry. With 8 full-page Illustrations by C. J.
STANILAND, RI. Crown 8vo, handsomely bound, olivine edges, $1.50.
“Treated in a manner most attractive to the boyish reader.†— Athenwunt,
Facing Death: or, The Hero of the Vaughan Pit. A
Tale of the Coal Mines. By G. A. Henry, With 8 full-page Ilustra-
tions by Gorpon Browne. Crown Svo, handsomely bound, olivine
edges, SI. 50.
“The tale is well written and well illustrated, and there is much reality in the
characters.†— 4 thence.
By Sheer Pluck: A Tale of the Ashanti War. By G.
A. Henry. With 8 full-page Illustrations by Gorpon Browne. Crown
$vo, handsomely bound, olivine edges, 51.50.
The author has woven, in a taie of thrilling interest, all the details of the Ashanti
campaign, of which he was himself a witness. His hero, after many exciting adventures
in the interior, finds himself at Coomassie just before the outbreak of the war, is detained
a prisoner by the king, is sent down with the army which invaded the British Protecto-
rate, escapes, and accompanies the English expedition on their march to Coomassie.
A Chapter of Adventures: or, Through the Bombard-
ment of Alexandria. By G. A. Henry. With 6 full-page Illustrations
by W. TH]. Overenb. Crown 8vo, handsomely bound, $1.25.
A coast fishing lad, by an act of heroism, secures the interest of a ship-owner, who
places him as an apprentice on board one of his ships. In company with two of his
fellow-apprentices he is left behind, at Alexandria, in the hands of the revolted Egyptian
troops, and is present through the bombardment and the scenes of riot and bloodshed
which accompanied it. They ultimately effect their escape, and in the subsequent terri-
ble voyage their ship is wrecked, and only the hero and a friend are saved,
Sturdy and Strong: or, How George Andrews made
His Way. By G. A. Henry. With 4 full-page Illustrations. Crown
8vo, handsomely bound, $1.00.
“The history of a hero of everyday life, whose love of truth, clothing of modesty, and
innate pluck, carry him, naturally, from poverty to affluence. George Andrews is an
example of character with nothing to cavil at, and stands as a good instance of chivalry
in domestic life.†— The Empire.
Tales of Daring and Danger. By G. A. Henry,
With 2 full-page Illustrations. Crown 8vo, handsomely bound, 75 cents.
“* White-faced Dick’ is a sketch worthy of Bret Harte at his best. Just the sort of
tale to read aloud by the fireside on a winter’s night.†—~ Practical Teacher.
Yarns on the Beach. By G. A. Henry. With 2
full-page Illustrations. Crown Svo, handsomely bound, 75 cents.
© Vhis little book should find special favor among boys. ‘The yarns are spun by old
sailors, and are admirably calculated to foster a manly spirit,†— Zcho.
POPULAR BOOKS FOR YOUNG PEOPLE.
INCLUDING NEW WORKS
BY
G. MANVILLE FENN, S. BARING-GOULD, HARRY COLLINGWOOD,
F. FRANKFORT MOORE, ROSE MULHOLLAND, SARAH DOUDNEY, ALICE
CORKRAN, GORDON STABLES, and other Favorite Authors,
IMPORTED BY
CHARLES SCRIBNER’S SONS,
743-745 BROADWAY, NEW YORK.
A NEW VOLUME.
Three Bright Girls: A Story of Chance and Mischance.
By ANNIE E. ARMSTRONG. With 6 page Illustrations by W. PARKIN-
son. Crown 8vo, handsomely bound, $1.25.
By a sudden turn of fortune’s wheel the three heroines of this story are brought down
from a household of lavish comfort to meet the incessant cares and worries of those who
have to eke out a very limited income. And the charm of the story lies in the practical
helpfulness of spirit developed in the girls by their changed circumstances; while the
author finds a pleasant ending to all their happy makeshifts.
Grettir the Outlaw: A Story of Iceland. By S. Bar-
ING-GOULD, author of “ John Herring,†‘ Mchalah,†etc. With 10 full-
page Illustrations by M. ZeNo Diemer, and a Colored Map. Crown
8vo, handsomely bound, olivine edges, $1.50.
“Is the boys’ book of its year. That is, of course, as much as to say that it will do
for men grown as well cs juniors. It is told in simple, straightforward English, as all
stories should be, and it has a freshness, a freedom, a sense of sun and wind and the open
air which make it irresistible.� — Scots Observer.
Two Thousand Years Ago: or, The Adventures of a
Roman Boy. By Prof. A. J. CimurcH. With 12 full-page Ilustrations
by ADRIEN Marig. Crown 8vo, handsomely bound, olivine edges,
$1.50.
“ Adventures well worth the telling. The book is extremely entertaining as well as
useful: there is a wonderful freshness in the Roman scenes and characters.†— Tzmes.
Dick o’ the Fens: A Romance of the Great East
Swamp. By G. MANVILLE FENN. With 12 full-page Illustrations by
Frank Dapp. Crown 8vo, handsomely bound, olivine edges, $1.50.
“We should say that in ‘Dick 0’ the Fens’ Mr. Manville Fenn has very nearly
attained perfection. Life in the Fen country in the old ante-drainage days is admirably
reproduced. ... Altogether we have not of late come across a historical fiction which
deserves to be so heartily and unreservedly praised as regards plot, incidents, and spirit â€
— Spectator.
POPULAR BOOKS FOR YOUNG PEOPLE. 9
Brownsmith’s Boy. By Grorce MAnvitte FENN.
With 12 full-page Illustrations by GoRDON BROWNE, in black and tint.
Crown 8vo, handsomely bound, olivine edges, $1.00.
“«* Brownsmith’s Boy must rank among the few undeniably good boys’ books. He
will be a very dull boy indeed who lays it down without wishing that it had gone on for
at least 100 pages more.†— North British Mai.
Quicksilver: or, A Boy With No Skid to His Wheel.
By Grorce MANVILLE FENN. With ro full-page Illustrations by
Frank Dapp. Crown 8yvo, handsomely bound, olivine edges, $1.50.
“Mr. Fenn possesses the true secret of